GE Multilin UR L90 Line Current Differential System Instruction Manual
Below you will find brief information for Line Current Differential System UR L90. This system is designed for the protection of power lines and transformers. It is highly accurate and reliable, providing advanced features such as distance protection, fault location, and synchronisation.
advertisement
g
Title Page
GE Industrial Systems
L90 Line Current Differential
System
UR Series Instruction Manual
L90 revision: 5.7x
Manual P/N: 1601-0081-U2 (GEK-113527A)
Copyright © 2009 GE Multilin
GE Multilin
215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario
Canada L6E 1B3
Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098
Internet: http://www.GEmultilin.com
*1601-0081-U2*
E83849
LISTED
IND.CONT. EQ.
52TL
831776A2.CDR
RE
GISTERED
G
IISO9001:2000
E MULTILI
N
GE Multilin's Quality Management
System is registered to
ISO9001:2000
QMI # 005094
UL # A3775
g
Addendum
GE Industrial Systems
ADDENDUM
This addendum contains information that relates to the L90 Line Current Differential System, version 5.7x. This addendum lists a number of information items that appear in the instruction manual GEK-113527A (revision U2) but are not included in the current L90 operations.
The following functions and items are not yet available with the current version of the L90 relay:
• Signal sources SRC 5 and SRC 6.
Version 4.0x and higher releases of the L90 relay includes new hardware (CPU and CT/VT modules).
• The new CPU modules are specified with the following order codes: 9E, 9G, 9H, 9J, 9K, 9L, 9M, 9N, 9P, 9R, and 9S.
• The new CT/VT modules are specified with the following order codes: 8F, 8H 8L, 8N.
The following table maps the relationship between the old CPU and CT/VT modules to the newer versions:
MODULE
CPU
CT/VT
--
--
8A
8C
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
OLD
9A
9C
9D
8F
8H
8L
8N
9N
9P
9R
9S
9J
9K
9L
9M
NEW
9E
9G
9H
DESCRIPTION
RS485 and RS485 (Modbus RTU, DNP)
RS485 and 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP)
RS485 and redundant 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP)
RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX
RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX
RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX
RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX
RS485 and 10/100Base-T
RS485 and single mode ST 100Base-FX
RS485 and single mode ST redundant 100Base-FX
RS485 and six-port managed Ethernet switch
Standard 4CT/4VT
Standard 8CT
Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
The new CT/VT modules can only be used with the new CPUs (9E, 9G, 9H, 9J, 9K, 9L, 9M, 9N, 9P, 9R, and 9S), and the old CT/VT modules can only be used with the old CPU modules (9A, 9C, 9D). To prevent any hardware mismatches, the new CPU and CT/VT modules have blue labels and a warning sticker stating “Attn.: Ensure CPU and
DSP module label colors are the same!”. In the event that there is a mismatch between the CPU and CT/VT module, the relay will not function and a
DSP ERROR
or
HARDWARE MISMATCH
error will be displayed.
All other input/output modules are compatible with the new hardware.
With respect to the firmware, firmware versions 4.0x and higher are only compatible with the new CPU and CT/VT modules. Previous versions of the firmware (3.4x and earlier) are only compatible with the older CPU and CT/VT modules.
Table of Contents
1.
GETTING STARTED
TABLE OF CONTENTS
HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE ......................................................................... 1-3
SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE.......................................................................... 1-4
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
CONFIGURING THE L90 FOR SOFTWARE ACCESS..................................... 1-6
USING THE QUICK CONNECT FEATURE....................................................... 1-9
CONNECTING TO THE L90 RELAY ............................................................... 1-15
FLEXLOGIC™ CUSTOMIZATION................................................................... 1-18
2.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS ............................................................... 2-11
DIRECT TRANSFER TRIPPING ..................................................................... 2-13
PROTECTION AND CONTROL FUNCTIONS ................................................ 2-14
METERING AND MONITORING FUNCTIONS ............................................... 2-14
USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS ........................................................... 2-21
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS ............................................................... 2-27
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System v
3.
HARDWARE
4.
HUMAN INTERFACES
5.
vi
SETTINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION......................................................3-6
CONTACT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS................................................................3-14
TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ........................................................3-22
CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS.....................................................................3-23
3.3 PILOT CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS
FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS ......................................................3-29
FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS .....................................................................3-29
TWO-CHANNEL TWO-CLOCK RS422 INTERFACE.......................................3-35
RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE .....................................................................3-35
G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE ......................................................................3-36
3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES
MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE HARDWARE..............................3-41
MANAGED SWITCH LED INDICATORS .........................................................3-42
CONFIGURING THE MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE .................3-42
UPLOADING L90 SWITCH MODULE FIRMWARE..........................................3-44
ETHERNET SWITCH SELF-TEST ERRORS...................................................3-47
4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE
ENERVISTA UR SETUP OVERVIEW ................................................................4-1
ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW..........................................................4-3
4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES
SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATIONS ................................4-8
SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY.....................................................................4-10
CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS .......................................................................4-17
INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS ......................................................................5-4
INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES..................................................................5-5
L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
GE Multilin
TABLE OF CONTENTS
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS ..................................................................... 5-43
USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF-TESTS ........................................................ 5-46
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS ........................................................................... 5-47
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS ................................................... 5-49
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS ....................................................................... 5-55
REMOTE RESOURCES CONFIGURATION ................................................... 5-58
PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT.................................................................... 5-83
INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC™ ............................................................... 5-99
FLEXLOGIC™ EVALUATION........................................................................ 5-110
FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION EDITOR ............................................................. 5-115
LINE DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENTS ................................................................ 5-122
WATTMETRIC GROUND FAULT .................................................................. 5-177
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT ............................................................. 5-182
L90 Line Current Differential System vii
6.
ACTUAL VALUES
viii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS ...............................................5-269
IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS ......................................................................5-273
IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS .....................................................................5-274
5.9 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
FORCE CONTACT INPUTS...........................................................................5-282
FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS.......................................................................5-283
PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT TEST VALUES .........................................5-284
ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU .........................................................................6-1
REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS ...................................................6-4
METERING CONVENTIONS ...........................................................................6-10
IEC 61580 GOOSE ANALOG VALUES ...........................................................6-20
WATTMETRIC GROUND FAULT.....................................................................6-20
PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT ....................................................................6-20
TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ........................................................6-21
PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT RECORDS .................................................6-23
L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
7.
COMMANDS AND
TARGETS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT ONE-SHOT.................................................. 7-3
8.
SECURITY
PASSWORD SECURITY MENU ....................................................................... 8-2
DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS ....................................................... 8-4
SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATIONS ............................. 8-10
SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY .................................................................... 8-12
8.3 ENERVISTA SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
ENABLING THE SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ................................. 8-15
MODIFYING USER PRIVILEGES ................................................................... 8-16
9.
THEORY OF OPERATION
REMOVAL OF DECAYING OFFSET................................................................. 9-2
GROUND DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENT............................................................... 9-4
FREQUENCY TRACKING AND PHASE LOCKING .......................................... 9-6
HARDWARE AND COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS ............................. 9-11
ONLINE ESTIMATE OF MEASUREMENT ERRORS ..................................... 9-12
CT SATURATION DETECTION ...................................................................... 9-13
CHARGING CURRENT COMPENSATION ..................................................... 9-13
DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENT CHARACTERISTICS........................................... 9-14
RELAY SYNCHRONIZATION.......................................................................... 9-15
9.2 OPERATING CONDITION CHARACTERISTICS
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System ix
10. APPLICATION OF
SETTINGS
11. COMMISSIONING
A. FLEXANALOG AND
FLEXINTEGER
PARAMETERS
x
TABLE OF CONTENTS
MULTI-ENDED FAULT LOCATOR...................................................................9-25
SINGLE-ENDED FAULT LOCATOR ................................................................9-31
10.2 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL (87L) SETTINGS
CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL PICKUP ...............................................................10-3
CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 1 .......................................................................10-3
CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 2 .......................................................................10-3
CURRENT DIFF BREAK POINT ......................................................................10-3
DISTRIBUTED BUS PROTECTION .................................................................10-9
10.3 CHANNEL ASYMMETRY COMPENSATION USING GPS
COMPENSATION METHOD 1 .......................................................................10-10
COMPENSATION METHOD 2 .......................................................................10-11
COMPENSATION METHOD 3 .......................................................................10-11
10.4 DISTANCE BACKUP/SUPERVISION
DISTANCE SETTINGS ON SERIES COMPENSATED LINES ......................10-17
GROUND DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT ..................................................10-18
10.7 LINES WITH TAPPED TRANSFORMERS
TRANSFORMER LOAD CURRENTS ............................................................10-19
EXTERNAL GROUND FAULTS .....................................................................10-20
INSTANTANEOUS ELEMENT ERROR DURING L90 SYNCHRONIZATION ...10-
CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION TESTS .............................................................11-2
LOCAL-REMOTE RELAY TESTS ....................................................................11-4
L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
B. MODBUS
COMMUNICATIONS
C. IEC 61850
COMMUNICATIONS
GE Multilin
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES ...................................................................B-3
READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 03/04H) ...........B-3
EXECUTE OPERATION (FUNCTION CODE 05H) ...........................................B-4
STORE SINGLE SETTING (FUNCTION CODE 06H) .......................................B-4
STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 10H) ................................B-5
OBTAINING RELAY FILES VIA MODBUS ........................................................B-6
MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION ...............................................................B-7
COMMUNICATION PROFILES .........................................................................C-1
GGIO1: DIGITAL STATUS VALUES .................................................................C-2
GGIO2: DIGITAL CONTROL VALUES ..............................................................C-2
GGIO3: DIGITAL STATUS AND ANALOG VALUES FROM RECEIVED GOOSE
GGIO4: GENERIC ANALOG MEASURED VALUES .........................................C-2
MMXU: ANALOG MEASURED VALUES...........................................................C-3
PROTECTION AND OTHER LOGICAL NODES ...............................................C-3
C.3 SERVER FEATURES AND CONFIGURATION
BUFFERED/UNBUFFERED REPORTING ........................................................C-5
TIMESTAMPS AND SCANNING .......................................................................C-5
LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES ..................................................................C-6
COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE UTILITIES .....................................................C-6
C.4 GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT SERVICES: GSSE AND GOOSE
ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS FOR GSSE/GOOSE...........................................C-9
GSSE ID AND GOOSE ID SETTINGS ............................................................C-10
C.5 IEC 61850 IMPLEMENTATION VIA ENERVISTA UR SETUP
CONFIGURING IEC 61850 SETTINGS...........................................................C-12
CREATING AN ICD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP ..............................C-17
IMPORTING AN SCD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP ...........................C-20
ACSI BASIC CONFORMANCE STATEMENT.................................................C-22
ACSI MODELS CONFORMANCE STATEMENT ............................................C-22
ACSI SERVICES CONFORMANCE STATEMENT .........................................C-23
L90 Line Current Differential System xi
D. IEC 60870-5-104
COMMUNICATIONS
E. DNP COMMUNICATIONS
F. MISCELLANEOUS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT................................................................... D-1
BINARY AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT...................................................... E-9
CHANGES TO THE L90 MANUAL .................................................................... F-2
STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS ......................................................................... F-6
xii L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES
1 GETTING STARTED 1.1IMPORTANT PROCEDURES
Please read this chapter to help guide you through the initial setup of your new relay.
1.1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS
WARNING CAUTION
Before attempting to install or use the relay, it is imperative that all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS in this manual are reviewed to help prevent personal injury, equipment damage, and/or downtime.
1.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST
1.
Open the relay packaging and inspect the unit for physical damage.
2.
View the rear nameplate and verify that the correct model has been ordered.
1
L90
Technical Support:
Tel: (905) 294-6222
Fax: (905) 201-2098
Line Differential Relay
GE Multilin
http://www.GEmultilin.com
RATINGS:
Control Power:
Contact Inputs:
Contact Outputs:
88-300V DC @ 35W / 77-265V AC @ 35VA
300V DC Max 10mA
Standard Pilot Duty / 250V AC 7.5A
360V A Resistive / 125V DC Break
4A @ L/R = 40mS / 300W
®
®
Made in
Canada
Model:
Mods:
Wiring Diagram:
Inst. Manual:
Serial Number:
Firmware:
Mfg. Date:
L90G00HCHF8AH6AM6BP8BX7A
000
831782A3
GEK-113276
MAZB98000029
D
2005/01/05
- M A A B 9 7 0 0 0 0 9 9 -
831795A1.CDR
Figure 1–1: REAR NAMEPLATE (EXAMPLE)
3.
Ensure that the following items are included:
• GE EnerVista CD (includes the EnerVista UR Setup software and manuals in PDF format).
For product information, instruction manual updates, and the latest software updates, please visit the GE Multilin website at http://www.GEmultilin.com
.
If there is any noticeable physical damage, or any of the contents listed are missing, please contact GE
Multilin immediately.
NOTE
GE MULTILIN CONTACT INFORMATION AND CALL CENTER FOR PRODUCT SUPPORT:
GE Multilin
215 Anderson Avenue
Markham, Ontario
Canada L6E 1B3
TELEPHONE: (905) 294-6222,
FAX: (905) 201-2098
1-800-547-8629 (North America only)
E-MAIL: [email protected]
HOME PAGE: http://www.GEmultilin.com
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 1-1
1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1 GETTING STARTED
1.2UR OVERVIEW 1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR
1
Historically, substation protection, control, and metering functions were performed with electromechanical equipment. This first generation of equipment was gradually replaced by analog electronic equipment, most of which emulated the singlefunction approach of their electromechanical precursors. Both of these technologies required expensive cabling and auxiliary equipment to produce functioning systems.
Recently, digital electronic equipment has begun to provide protection, control, and metering functions. Initially, this equipment was either single function or had very limited multi-function capability, and did not significantly reduce the cabling and auxiliary equipment required. However, recent digital relays have become quite multi-functional, reducing cabling and auxiliaries significantly. These devices also transfer data to central control facilities and Human Machine Interfaces using electronic communications. The functions performed by these products have become so broad that many users now prefer the term IED (Intelligent Electronic Device).
It is obvious to station designers that the amount of cabling and auxiliary equipment installed in stations can be even further reduced, to 20% to 70% of the levels common in 1990, to achieve large cost reductions. This requires placing even more functions within the IEDs.
Users of power equipment are also interested in reducing cost by improving power quality and personnel productivity, and as always, in increasing system reliability and efficiency. These objectives are realized through software which is used to perform functions at both the station and supervisory levels. The use of these systems is growing rapidly.
High speed communications are required to meet the data transfer rates required by modern automatic control and monitoring systems. In the near future, very high speed communications will be required to perform protection signaling with a performance target response time for a command signal between two IEDs, from transmission to reception, of less than 3 milliseconds. This has been established by the IEC 61850 standard.
IEDs with the capabilities outlined above will also provide significantly more power system data than is presently available, enhance operations and maintenance, and permit the use of adaptive system configuration for protection and control systems. This new generation of equipment must also be easily incorporated into automation systems, at both the station and enterprise levels. The GE Multilin Universal Relay (UR) has been developed to meet these goals.
1-2 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED 1.2 UR OVERVIEW
1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE a) UR BASIC DESIGN
The UR is a digital-based device containing a central processing unit (CPU) that handles multiple types of input and output signals. The UR can communicate over a local area network (LAN) with an operator interface, a programming device, or another UR device.
Input Elements
Contact Inputs
Virtual Inputs
Analog Inputs
CT Inputs
VT Inputs
Remote Inputs
Direct Inputs
Input
Status
Table
CPU Module
Protective Elements
Logic Gates
Pickup
Dropout
Operate
Output
Status
Table
Output Elements
Contact Outputs
Virtual Outputs
Analog Outputs
Remote Outputs
-DNA
-USER
Direct Outputs
1
LAN
Programming
Device
Operator
Interface
827822A2.CDR
Figure 1–2: UR CONCEPT BLOCK DIAGRAM
The CPU module contains firmware that provides protection elements in the form of logic algorithms, as well as programmable logic gates, timers, and latches for control features.
Input elements accept a variety of analog or digital signals from the field. The UR isolates and converts these signals into logic signals used by the relay.
Output elements convert and isolate the logic signals generated by the relay into digital or analog signals that can be used to control field devices.
b) UR SIGNAL TYPES
The contact inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with connections to hard-wired contacts. Both ‘wet’ and ‘dry’ contacts are supported.
The virtual inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with UR-series internal logic signals. Virtual inputs include signals generated by the local user interface. The virtual outputs are outputs of FlexLogic™ equations used to customize the device. Virtual outputs can also serve as virtual inputs to FlexLogic™ equations.
The analog inputs and outputs are signals that are associated with transducers, such as Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs).
The CT and VT inputs refer to analog current transformer and voltage transformer signals used to monitor AC power lines.
The UR-series relays support 1 A and 5 A CTs.
The remote inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point state information between remote UR-series devices. The remote outputs interface to the remote inputs of other UR-series devices. Remote outputs are FlexLogic™ operands inserted into IEC 61850 GSSE and GOOSE messages.
The direct inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point states between a number of UR-series IEDs over a dedicated fiber (single or multimode), RS422, or G.703 interface. No switching equipment is required as the IEDs are connected directly in a ring or redundant (dual) ring configuration. This feature is optimized for speed and intended for pilotaided schemes, distributed logic applications, or the extension of the input/output capabilities of a single relay chassis.
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 1-3
1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1 GETTING STARTED
1 c) UR SCAN OPERATION
The UR-series devices operate in a cyclic scan fashion. The device reads the inputs into an input status table, solves the logic program (FlexLogic™ equation), and then sets each output to the appropriate state in an output status table. Any resulting task execution is priority interrupt-driven.
Read Inputs
Solve Logic
Protection elements serviced by sub-scan
Protective Elements
PKP
DPO
OP
Set Outputs
827823A1.CDR
Figure 1–3: UR-SERIES SCAN OPERATION
1.2.3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE
The firmware (software embedded in the relay) is designed in functional modules which can be installed in any relay as required. This is achieved with object-oriented design and programming (OOD/OOP) techniques.
Object-oriented techniques involve the use of objects and classes. An object is defined as “a logical entity that contains both data and code that manipulates that data”. A class is the generalized form of similar objects. By using this concept, one can create a protection class with the protection elements as objects of the class, such as time overcurrent, instantaneous overcurrent, current differential, undervoltage, overvoltage, underfrequency, and distance. These objects represent completely self-contained software modules. The same object-class concept can be used for metering, input/output control, hmi, communications, or any functional entity in the system.
Employing OOD/OOP in the software architecture of the L90 achieves the same features as the hardware architecture: modularity, scalability, and flexibility. The application software for any UR-series device (for example, feeder protection, transformer protection, distance protection) is constructed by combining objects from the various functionality classes. This results in a common look and feel across the entire family of UR-series platform-based applications.
1.2.4 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS
As described above, the architecture of the UR-series relays differ from previous devices. To achieve a general understanding of this device, some sections of Chapter 5 are quite helpful. The most important functions of the relay are contained in
“elements”. A description of the UR-series elements can be found in the Introduction to elements section in chapter 5.
Examples of simple elements, and some of the organization of this manual, can be found in the Control elements section of chapter 5. An explanation of the use of inputs from CTs and VTs is in the Introduction to AC sources section in chapter 5. A description of how digital signals are used and routed within the relay is contained in the Introduction to FlexLogic™ section in chapter 5.
1-4 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED 1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
1.3ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1.3.1 PC REQUIREMENTS
The faceplate keypad and display or the EnerVista UR Setup software interface can be used to communicate with the relay.
The EnerVista UR Setup software interface is the preferred method to edit settings and view actual values because the PC monitor can display more information in a simple comprehensible format.
The following minimum requirements must be met for the EnerVista UR Setup software to properly operate on a PC.
• Pentium class or higher processor (Pentium II 300 MHz or higher recommended)
• Windows 95, 98, 98SE, ME, NT 4.0 (Service Pack 4 or higher), 2000, XP
• Internet Explorer 4.0 or higher
• 128 MB of RAM (256 MB recommended)
• 200 MB of available space on system drive and 200 MB of available space on installation drive
• Video capable of displaying 800 x 600 or higher in high-color mode (16-bit color)
• RS232 and/or Ethernet port for communications to the relay
The following qualified modems have been tested to be compliant with the L90 and the EnerVista UR Setup software.
• US Robotics external 56K FaxModem 5686
• US Robotics external Sportster 56K X2
• PCTEL 2304WT V.92 MDC internal modem
1.3.2 INSTALLATION
1
After ensuring the minimum requirements for using EnerVista UR Setup are met (see previous section), use the following procedure to install the EnerVista UR Setup from the enclosed GE EnerVista CD.
1.
Insert the GE EnerVista CD into your CD-ROM drive.
2.
Click the Install Now button and follow the installation instructions to install the no-charge EnerVista software.
3.
When installation is complete, start the EnerVista Launchpad application.
4.
Click the IED Setup section of the Launch Pad window.
5.
In the EnerVista Launch Pad window, click the Add Product button and select the “L90 Line Current Differential System” from the Install Software window as shown below. Select the “Web” option to ensure the most recent software
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 1-5
1
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1 GETTING STARTED
release, or select “CD” if you do not have a web connection, then click the Add Now button to list software items for the L90.
6.
EnerVista Launchpad will obtain the software from the Web or CD and automatically start the installation program.
7.
Select the complete path, including the new directory name, where the EnerVista UR Setup will be installed.
8.
Click on Next to begin the installation. The files will be installed in the directory indicated and the installation program will automatically create icons and add EnerVista UR Setup to the Windows start menu.
9.
Click Finish to end the installation. The UR-series device will be added to the list of installed IEDs in the EnerVista
Launchpad window, as shown below.
1.3.3 CONFIGURING THE L90 FOR SOFTWARE ACCESS a) OVERVIEW
The user can connect remotely to the L90 through the rear RS485 port or the rear Ethernet port with a PC running the
EnerVista UR Setup software. The L90 can also be accessed locally with a laptop computer through the front panel RS232 port or the rear Ethernet port using the Quick Connect feature.
1-6 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED 1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
• To configure the L90 for remote access via the rear RS485 port(s), refer to the Configuring Serial Communications section.
• To configure the L90 for remote access via the rear Ethernet port, refer to the Configuring Ethernet Communications section. An Ethernet module must be specified at the time of ordering.
• To configure the L90 for local access with a laptop through either the front RS232 port or rear Ethernet port, refer to the
Using the Quick Connect Feature section. An Ethernet module must be specified at the time of ordering for Ethernet communications.
b) CONFIGURING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
Before starting, verify that the serial cable is properly connected to the RS485 terminals on the back of the device. The faceplate RS232 port is intended for local use and is not described in this section; see the Using the Quick Connect Feature section for details on configuring the RS232 port.
A GE Multilin F485 converter (or compatible RS232-to-RS485 converter) is will be required. Refer to the F485 instruction manual for additional details.
1.
Verify that the latest version of the EnerVista UR Setup software is installed (available from the GE EnerVista CD or online from http://www.GEmultilin.com
). See the Software Installation section for installation details.
2.
Select the “UR” device from the EnerVista Launchpad to start EnerVista UR Setup.
3.
Click the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add Site button to define a new site.
4.
Enter the desired site name in the “Site Name” field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along with the display order of devices defined for the site. In this example, we will use “Location 1” as the site name. Click the OK button when complete.
5.
The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the EnerVista UR Setup window. Click the Device Setup button then select the new site to re-open the Device Setup window.
6.
Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
7.
Enter the desired name in the “Device Name” field and a description (optional) of the site.
8.
Select “Serial” from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be entered for proper serial communications.
1
GE Multilin
Figure 1–4: CONFIGURING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
L90 Line Current Differential System 1-7
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1 GETTING STARTED
1
9.
Enter the relay slave address, COM port, baud rate, and parity settings from the
SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COM-
MUNICATIONS
ÖØ
SERIAL PORTS
menu in their respective fields.
10. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the L90 device and upload the order code. If an communications error occurs, ensure that the EnerVista UR Setup serial communications values entered in the previous step correspond to the relay setting values.
11. Click “OK” when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or
Online window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista UR Setup window.
The Site Device has now been configured for RS232 communications. Proceed to the Connecting to the L90 section to begin communications.
c) CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS
Before starting, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of the relay. To setup the relay for Ethernet communications, it will be necessary to define a Site, then add the relay as a Device at that site.
1.
Verify that the latest version of the EnerVista UR Setup software is installed (available from the GE EnerVista CD or online from http://www.GEmultilin.com
). See the Software Installation section for installation details.
2.
Select the “UR” device from the EnerVista Launchpad to start EnerVista UR Setup.
3.
Click the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window, then click the Add Site button to define a new site.
4.
Enter the desired site name in the “Site Name” field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along with the display order of devices defined for the site. In this example, we will use “Location 2” as the site name. Click the OK button when complete.
5.
The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the EnerVista UR Setup window. Click the Device Setup button then select the new site to re-open the Device Setup window.
6.
Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
7.
Enter the desired name in the “Device Name” field and a description (optional) of the site.
8.
Select “Ethernet” from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be entered for proper Ethernet functionality.
1-8
Figure 1–5: CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS
L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED 1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
9.
Enter the relay IP address specified in the
SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
NETWORK
Ö
IP
ADDRESS
) in the “IP Address” field.
10. Enter the relay slave address and Modbus port address values from the respective settings in the
SETTINGS
Ö
PROD-
UCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
MODBUS PROTOCOL
menu.
11. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the L90 device and upload the order code. If an communications error occurs, ensure that the three EnerVista UR Setup values entered in the previous steps correspond to the relay setting values.
12. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or
Online window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista UR Setup window.
The Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to the Connecting to the L90 section to begin communications.
1.3.4 USING THE QUICK CONNECT FEATURE a) USING QUICK CONNECT VIA THE FRONT PANEL RS232 PORT
Before starting, verify that the serial cable is properly connected from the laptop computer to the front panel RS232 port with a straight-through 9-pin to 9-pin RS232 cable.
1.
Verify that the latest version of the EnerVista UR Setup software is installed (available from the GE EnerVista CD or online from http://www.GEmultilin.com
). See the Software Installation section for installation details.
2.
Select the “UR” device from the EnerVista Launchpad to start EnerVista UR Setup.
3.
Click the Quick Connect button to open the Quick Connect dialog box.
1
4.
Select the Serial interface and the correct COM Port, then click Connect.
5.
The EnerVista UR Setup software will create a site named “Quick Connect” with a corresponding device also named
“Quick Connect” and display them on the upper-left corner of the screen. Expand the sections to view data directly from the L90 device.
Each time the EnerVista UR Setup software is initialized, click the Quick Connect button to establish direct communications to the L90. This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the L90 model number.
b) USING QUICK CONNECT VIA THE REAR ETHERNET PORTS
To use the Quick Connect feature to access the L90 from a laptop through Ethernet, first assign an IP address to the relay from the front panel keyboard.
1.
Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS menu is displayed.
2.
Navigate to the
SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
NETWORK
Ö
IP ADDRESS
setting.
3.
Enter an IP address of “1.1.1.1” and select the ENTER key to save the value.
4.
In the same menu, select the
SUBNET IP MASK
setting.
5.
Enter a subnet IP address of “255.0.0.0” and press the ENTER key to save the value.
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 1-9
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1 GETTING STARTED
1
Next, use an Ethernet cross-over cable to connect the laptop to the rear Ethernet port. The pinout for an Ethernet crossover cable is shown below.
1
2
3
4 5 6
7
8
6
7
4
5
2
3
8
END 1
Pin Wire color
1 White/orange
Orange
White/green
Blue
White/blue
Green
White/brown
Brown
Diagram
6
7
4
5
2
3
8
END 2
Pin Wire color
1 White/green
Green
White/orange
Blue
White/blue
Orange
White/brown
Brown
Diagram
842799A1.CDR
Figure 1–6: ETHERNET CROSS-OVER CABLE PIN LAYOUT
Now, assign the laptop computer an IP address compatible with the relay’s IP address.
1.
From the Windows desktop, right-click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network connections window.
2.
Right-click the Local Area Connection icon and select Properties.
1-10 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED 1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
3.
Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) item from the list provided and click the Properties button.
1
4.
Click on the “Use the following IP address” box.
5.
Enter an IP address with the first three numbers the same as the IP address of the L90 relay and the last number different (in this example, 1.1.1.2).
6.
Enter a subnet mask equal to the one set in the L90 (in this example, 255.0.0.0).
7.
Click OK to save the values.
Before continuing, it will be necessary to test the Ethernet connection.
1.
Open a Windows console window by selecting Start > Run from the Windows Start menu and typing “cmd”.
2.
Type the following command:
C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1
3.
If the connection is successful, the system will return four replies as follows:
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 1.1.1.1: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=255
Reply from 1.1.1.1: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=255
Reply from 1.1.1.1: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=255
Reply from 1.1.1.1: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=255
Ping statistics for 1.1.1.1:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),
Approximate round trip time in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0 ms
4.
Note that the values for time
and
TTL
will vary depending on local network configuration.
If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the
C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1
command:
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 1-11
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1 GETTING STARTED
1
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Ping statistics for 1.1.1.1:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),
Approximate round trip time in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0 ms
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Verify the physical connection between the L90 and the laptop computer, and double-check the programmed IP address in the
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
NETWORK
Ö
IP ADDRESS
setting, then repeat step 2 in the above procedure.
If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the
C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1
command:
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Hardware error.
Hardware error.
Hardware error.
Hardware error.
Ping statistics for 1.1.1.1:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),
Approximate round trip time in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0 ms
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Verify the physical connection between the L90 and the laptop computer, and double-check the programmed IP address in the
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
NETWORK
Ö
IP ADDRESS
setting, then repeat step 2 in the above procedure.
If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1
command:
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Destination host unreachable.
Destination host unreachable.
Destination host unreachable.
Destination host unreachable.
Ping statistics for 1.1.1.1:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),
Approximate round trip time in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0 ms
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Verify the IP address is programmed in the local PC by entering the ipconfig command in the command window.
C:\WINNT>ipconfig
Windows 2000 IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter <F4FE223E-5EB6-4BFB-9E34-1BD7BE7F59FF>:
Connection-specific DNS suffix. . :
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 0.0.0.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . :
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS suffix . :
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 1.1.1.2
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.0.0.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . :
C:\WINNT>
It may be necessary to restart the laptop for the change in IP address to take effect (Windows 98 or NT).
1-12 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED 1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
Before using the Quick Connect feature through the Ethernet port, it is necessary to disable any configured proxy settings in Internet Explorer.
1.
Start the Internet Explorer software.
2.
Select the Tools > Internet Options menu item and click on Connections tab.
3.
Click on the LAN Settings button to open the following window.
1
4.
Ensure that the “Use a proxy server for your LAN” box is not checked.
If this computer is used to connect to the Internet, re-enable any proxy server settings after the laptop has been disconnected from the L90 relay.
1.
Verify that the latest version of the EnerVista UR Setup software is installed (available from the GE enerVista CD or online from http://www.GEmultilin.com
). See the Software Installation section for installation details.
2.
Start the Internet Explorer software.
3.
Select the “UR” device from the EnerVista Launchpad to start EnerVista UR Setup.
4.
Click the Quick Connect button to open the Quick Connect dialog box.
5.
Select the Ethernet interface and enter the IP address assigned to the L90, then click Connect.
6.
The EnerVista UR Setup software will create a site named “Quick Connect” with a corresponding device also named
“Quick Connect” and display them on the upper-left corner of the screen. Expand the sections to view data directly from the L90 device.
Each time the EnerVista UR Setup software is initialized, click the Quick Connect button to establish direct communications to the L90. This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the L90 model number.
When direct communications with the L90 via Ethernet is complete, make the following changes:
1.
From the Windows desktop, right-click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network connections window.
2.
Right-click the Local Area Connection icon and select the Properties item.
3.
Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) item from the list provided and click the Properties button.
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 1-13
1
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
4.
Set the computer to “Obtain a relay address automatically” as shown below.
1 GETTING STARTED
If this computer is used to connect to the Internet, re-enable any proxy server settings after the laptop has been disconnected from the L90 relay.
AUTOMATIC DISCOVERY OF ETHERNET DEVICES
The EnerVista UR Setup software can automatically discover and communicate to all UR-series IEDs located on an Ethernet network.
Using the Quick Connect feature, a single click of the mouse will trigger the software to automatically detect any UR-series relays located on the network. The EnerVista UR Setup software will then proceed to configure all settings and order code options in the Device Setup menu, for the purpose of communicating to multiple relays. This feature allows the user to identify and interrogate, in seconds, all UR-series devices in a particular location.
1-14 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED 1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
1.3.5 CONNECTING TO THE L90 RELAY
1.
Open the Display Properties window through the Site List tree as shown below:
1
Quick action hot links
Expand the site list by double-clicking or selecting the +/– box.
Communications status indicators:
Green = OK
Red = No communications
UR icon = report is open
842743A3.CDR
2.
The Display Properties window will open with a status indicator on the lower left of the EnerVista UR Setup window.
3.
If the status indicator is red, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of the relay and that the relay has been properly setup for communications (steps A and B earlier).
If a relay icon appears in place of the status indicator, than a report (such as an oscillography or event record) is open.
Close the report to re-display the green status indicator.
4.
The Display Properties settings can now be edited, printed, or changed according to user specifications.
Refer to chapter 4 in this manual and the EnerVista UR Setup Help File for more information about the using the EnerVista UR Setup software interface.
NOTE
QUICK ACTION HOT LINKS
The EnerVista UR Setup software has several new quick action buttons that provide users with instant access to several functions that are often performed when using L90 relays. From the online window, users can select which relay to interrogate from a pull-down window, then click on the button for the action they wish to perform. The following quick action functions are available:
• View the L90 event record.
• View the last recorded oscillography record.
• View the status of all L90 inputs and outputs.
• View all of the L90 metering values.
• View the L90 protection summary.
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 1-15
1.4 UR HARDWARE 1 GETTING STARTED
1.4UR HARDWARE 1.4.1 MOUNTING AND WIRING
1
Please refer to Chapter 3: Hardware for detailed mounting and wiring instructions. Review all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS carefully.
1.4.2 COMMUNICATIONS
The EnerVista UR Setup software communicates to the relay via the faceplate RS232 port or the rear panel RS485 / Ethernet ports. To communicate via the faceplate RS232 port, a standard straight-through serial cable is used. The DB-9 male end is connected to the relay and the DB-9 or DB-25 female end is connected to the PC COM1 or COM2 port as described in the CPU communications ports section of chapter 3.
Figure 1–7: RELAY COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS
To communicate through the L90 rear RS485 port from a PC RS232 port, the GE Multilin RS232/RS485 converter box is required. This device (catalog number F485) connects to the computer using a “straight-through” serial cable. A shielded twisted-pair (20, 22, or 24 AWG) connects the F485 converter to the L90 rear communications port. The converter terminals
(+, –, GND) are connected to the L90 communication module (+, –, COM) terminals. Refer to the CPU communications
ports section in chapter 3 for option details. The line should be terminated with an R-C network (that is, 120
Ω, 1 nF) as described in the chapter 3.
1.4.3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY
All messages are displayed on a 2
× 20 backlit liquid crystal display (LCD) to make them visible under poor lighting conditions. Messages are descriptive and should not require the aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will default to user-defined messages. Any high priority event driven message will automatically override the default message and appear on the display.
1-16 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED 1.5 USING THE RELAY
1.5USING THE RELAY 1.5.1 FACEPLATE KEYPAD
Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: actual values, settings, commands, and targets.
The MENU key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups.
The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys scroll increment or decrement numerical setting values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit mode. Alternatively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad.
The decimal key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The HELP key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The ENTER key stores altered setting values.
1.5.2 MENU NAVIGATION
1
Press the MENU key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily followed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the MENU key advances through the following main heading pages:
• Actual values.
• Settings.
• Commands.
• Targets.
• User displays (when enabled).
1.5.3 MENU HIERARCHY
The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double scroll bar characters (
), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters (). The header display pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE
UP and DOWN keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing the MESSAGE RIGHT key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually pressing the MESSAGE LEFT key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
HIGHEST LEVEL
SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)
PASSWORD
SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
1.5.4 RELAY ACTIVATION
The relay is defaulted to the “Not Programmed” state when it leaves the factory. This safeguards against the installation of a relay whose settings have not been entered. When powered up successfully, the Trouble LED will be on and the In Service LED off. The relay in the “Not Programmed” state will block signaling of any output relay. These conditions will remain until the relay is explicitly put in the “Programmed” state.
Select the menu message
SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
INSTALLATION
Ö
RELAY SETTINGS
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 1-17
1.5 USING THE RELAY 1 GETTING STARTED
1
To put the relay in the “Programmed” state, press either of the VALUE keys once and then press ENTER. The faceplate
Trouble LED will turn off and the In Service LED will turn on. The settings for the relay can be programmed manually (refer to Chapter 5) via the faceplate keypad or remotely (refer to the EnerVista UR Setup help file) via the EnerVista UR Setup software interface.
1.5.5 RELAY PASSWORDS
It is recommended that passwords be set up for each security level and assigned to specific personnel. There are two user password security access levels, COMMAND and SETTING:
1. COMMAND
The COMMAND access level restricts the user from making any settings changes, but allows the user to perform the following operations:
• operate breakers via faceplate keypad
• change state of virtual inputs
• clear event records
• clear oscillography records
• operate user-programmable pushbuttons
2. SETTING
The SETTING access level allows the user to make any changes to any of the setting values.
Refer to the Changing Settings section in Chapter 4 for complete instructions on setting up security level passwords.
NOTE
1.5.6 FLEXLOGIC™ CUSTOMIZATION
FlexLogic™ equation editing is required for setting up user-defined logic for customizing the relay operations. See the Flex-
Logic™ section in Chapter 5 for additional details.
1-18 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED 1.5 USING THE RELAY
1.5.7 COMMISSIONING
Commissioning tests are included in the Commissioning chapter of this manual.
The L90 requires a minimum amount of maintenance when it is commissioned into service. Since the L90 is a microprocessor-based relay, its characteristics do not change over time. As such, no further functional tests are required.
Furthermore, the L90 performs a number of continual self-tests and takes the necessary action in case of any major errors
(see the Relay Self-tests section in chapter 7 for details). However, it is recommended that L90 maintenance be scheduled with other system maintenance. This maintenance may involve the in-service, out-of-service, or unscheduled maintenance.
In-service maintenance:
1.
Visual verification of the analog values integrity such as voltage and current (in comparison to other devices on the corresponding system).
2.
Visual verification of active alarms, relay display messages, and LED indications.
3.
LED test.
4.
Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, dust, or loose wires.
5.
Event recorder file download with further events analysis.
Out-of-service maintenance:
1.
Check wiring connections for firmness.
2.
Analog values (currents, voltages, RTDs, analog inputs) injection test and metering accuracy verification. Calibrated test equipment is required.
3.
Protection elements setting verification (analog values injection or visual verification of setting file entries against relay settings schedule).
4.
Contact inputs and outputs verification. This test can be conducted by direct change of state forcing or as part of the system functional testing.
5.
Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, or dust.
6.
Event recorder file download with further events analysis.
7.
LED Test and pushbutton continuity check.
Unscheduled maintenance such as during a disturbance causing system interruption:
1.
View the event recorder and oscillography or fault report for correct operation of inputs, outputs, and elements.
If it is concluded that the relay or one of its modules is of concern, contact GE Multilin for prompt service.
1
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 1-19
1
1.5 USING THE RELAY 1 GETTING STARTED
1-20 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1INTRODUCTION
2.1.1 OVERVIEW
The L90 Line Current Differential System is a digital current differential relay system with an integral communications channel interface.
The L90 is intended to provide complete protection for transmission lines of any voltage level. Both three phase and single phase tripping schemes are available. Models of the L90 are available for application on both two and three terminal lines.
The L90 uses per phase differential at 64 kbps transmitting two phaselets per cycle. The current differential scheme is based on innovative patented techniques developed by GE. The L90 algorithms are based on the Fourier transform– phaselet approach and an adaptive statistical restraint. The restraint is similar to a traditional percentage differential scheme, but is adaptive based on relay measurements. When used with a 64 kbps channel, the innovative phaselets approach yields an operating time of 1.0 to 1.5 cycles (typical). The adaptive statistical restraint approach provides both more sensitive and more accurate fault sensing. This allows the L90 to detect relatively higher impedance single line to ground faults that existing systems may not. The basic current differential element operates on current input only. Long lines with significant capacitance can benefit from charging current compensation if terminal voltage measurements are applied to the relay. The voltage input is also used for some protection and monitoring features such as directional elements, fault locator, metering, and distance backup.
The L90 is designed to operate over different communications links with various degrees of noise encountered in power systems and communications environments. Since correct operation of the relay is completely dependent on data received from the remote end, special attention must be paid to information validation. The L90 incorporates a high degree of security by using a 32-bit CRC (cyclic redundancy code) inter-relay communications packet.
In addition to current differential protection, the relay provides multiple backup protection for phase and ground faults. For overcurrent protection, the time overcurrent curves may be selected from a selection of standard curve shapes or a custom
FlexCurve™ for optimum co-ordination. Additionally, three zones of phase and ground distance protection with power swing blocking, out-of-step tripping, line pickup, load encroachment, and permissive overreaching transfer trip (POTT) features are included.
The L90 incorporates charging current compensation for applications on very long transmission lines without loss of sensitivity. The line capacitive current is removed from the terminal phasors.
For breaker-and-a-half or ring applications, the L90 design provides secure operation during external faults with possible
CT saturation.
Voltage, current, and power metering is built into the relay as a standard feature. Current parameters are available as total waveform RMS magnitude, or as fundamental frequency only RMS magnitude and angle (phasor).
2
Table 2–1: DEVICE NUMBERS AND FUNCTIONS
DEVICE
NUMBER
21G
21P
25
27P
27X
32N
50BF
50DD
FUNCTION
Ground distance
Phase distance
Synchrocheck
Phase undervoltage
Auxiliary undervoltage
Wattmetric zero-sequence directional
Breaker failure
Adaptive fault detector
(sensitive current disturbance detector)
50G
50N
50P
50_2
51G
51N
Ground instantaneous overcurrent
Neutral instantaneous overcurrent
Phase instantaneous overcurrent
Negative-sequence instantaneous overcurrent
Ground time overcurrent
Neutral time overcurrent
59X
67N
67P
67_2
68
78
79
87L
87LG
DEVICE
NUMBER
51P
51_2
52
59N
59P
FUNCTION
Phase time overcurrent
Negative-sequence time overcurrent
AC circuit breaker
Neutral overvoltage
Phase overvoltage
Auxiliary overvoltage
Neutral directional overcurrent
Phase directional overcurrent
Negative-sequence directional overcurrent
Power swing blocking
Out-of-step tripping
Automatic recloser
Segregated line current differential
Ground differential
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 2-1
2.1 INTRODUCTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
52
2
Monitoring
50DD
50P
(2)
79
50_2
(2)
51P
(2)
Close
51_2
(2)
50BF
(2)
Trip
87L 87LG
67P
(2)
68
78
21P
21G
50N
(2)
51N
(2)
67N/Q
32N
(2)
Data from/to remote end
(via dedicated communications)
Transducer inputs
FlexElement
TM
Metering
59P
50G
(2)
51G
(2)
59X 27X
27P
(2)
59N
25
(2)
L90
Line Differential Protection System
Figure 2–1: SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
Table 2–2: OTHER DEVICE FUNCTIONS
FUNCTION
Breaker Arcing Current (I
2 t)
Breaker Control
Contact Inputs (up to 96)
Contact Outputs (up to 64)
Control Pushbuttons
CT Failure Detector
Data Logger
Digital Counters (8)
Digital Elements (48)
Direct Inputs (8 per L90 comms channel)
Disconnect Switches
DNP 3.0 or IEC 60870-5-104 protocol
Event Recorder
Fault Locator and Fault Reporting
FUNCTION
FlexElements™ (8)
FlexLogic™ Equations
IEC 61850 Communications (optional)
L90 Channel Tests
Line Pickup
Load Encroachment
Metering: Current, Voltage, Power,
Energy, Frequency, Demand,
Power Factor, 87L current, local and remote phasors
Modbus Communications
Modbus User Map
Non-Volatile Latches
Non-Volatile Selector Switch
Open Pole Detector
FUNCTION
Oscillography
Pilot Scheme (POTT)
Setting Groups (6)
Stub Bus
Synchrophasors
Time Synchronization over SNTP
Transducer Inputs/Outputs
User Definable Displays
User Programmable LEDs
User Programmable Pushbuttons
User Programmable Self-Tests
Virtual Inputs (64)
Virtual Outputs (96)
VT Fuse Failure
831706AU.CDR
2-2 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION
2.1.2 FEATURES
LINE CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL
• Phase segregated, high-speed digital current differential system.
• Overhead and underground AC transmission lines, series compensated lines.
• Two-terminal and three-terminal line applications.
• Zero-sequence removal for application on lines with tapped transformers connected in a grounded wye on the line side.
• GE phaselets approach based on the Discrete Fourier Transform with 64 samples per cycle and transmitting two timestamped phaselets per cycle.
• Adaptive restraint approach improving sensitivity and accuracy of fault sensing.
• Increased security for trip decision using disturbance detector and trip output logic.
• Continuous clock synchronization via the distributed synchronization technique.
• Increased transient stability through DC decaying offset removal.
• Accommodates up to five times CT ratio differences.
• Peer-to-peer (master-master) architecture changing to master-slave via DTT (if channel fails) at 64 kbps.
• Charging current compensation.
• Interfaces direct fiber, multiplexed RS422 and G.703 connections with relay ID check.
• Per-phase line differential protection direct transfer trip plus eight user-assigned pilot signals via the communications channel.
• Secure 32-bit CRC protection against communications errors.
• Channel asymmetry (up to 10 ms) compensation using GPS satellite-controlled clock.
BACKUP PROTECTION:
• DTT provision for pilot schemes.
• Three zones of distance protection with POTT scheme, power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping, line pickup, and load encroachment.
• Two-element time overcurrent and two-element instantaneous overcurrent directional phase overcurrent protection.
• Two-element time overcurrent and two-element instantaneous overcurrent directional zero-sequence protection.
• Two-element time overcurrent and two-element instantaneous overcurrent negative-sequence overcurrent protection.
• Undervoltage and overvoltage protection.
ADDITIONAL PROTECTION:
• Breaker failure protection.
• Stub bus protection.
• VT and CT supervision.
• GE Multilin sources approach allowing grouping of different CTs and VTs from multiple input channels.
• Open pole detection.
• Breaker trip coil supervision and seal-in of trip command.
• FlexLogic™ allowing creation of user-defined distributed protection and control logic.
CONTROL:
• One and two breaker configuration for breaker-and-a-half and ring bus schemes, pushbutton control from the relay.
• Auto-reclosing and synchrochecking.
• Breaker arcing current.
2
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 2-3
2.1 INTRODUCTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2
MONITORING:
• Oscillography of current, voltage, FlexLogic™ operands, and digital signals (1
× 128 cycles to 31 × 8 cycles configurable).
• Events recorder: 1024 events.
• Fault locator.
METERING:
• Actual 87L remote phasors, differential current, channel delay, and channel asymmetry at all line terminals of line current differential protection.
• Line current, voltage, real power, reactive power, apparent power, power factor, and frequency.
COMMUNICATIONS:
• Front panel RS232 port: 19.2 kbps.
• One or two rear RS485 ports: up to 115 kbps.
• 10Base-F Ethernet port supporting the IEC 61850 protocol.
2.1.3 ORDERING a) OVERVIEW
The L90 is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount or reduced-size (¾) vertical unit and consists of the following modules: power supply, CPU, CT/VT, digital input and output, transducer input and output, and inter-relay communications.
Each of these modules can be supplied in a number of configurations specified at the time of ordering. The information required to completely specify the relay is provided in the following tables (see chapter 3 for full details of relay modules).
Order codes are subject to change without notice. Refer to the GE Multilin ordering page at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin/order.htm
for the latest details concerning L90 ordering options.
NOTE
The order code structure is dependent on the mounting option (horizontal or vertical) and the type of CT/VT modules (regular CT/VT modules or the HardFiber modules). The order code options are described in the following sub-sections.
2-4 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION b) ORDER CODES WITH TRADITIONAL CTS AND VTS
The order codes for the horizontal mount units with traditional CTs and VTs are shown below.
Table 2–3: L90 ORDER CODES (HORIZONTAL UNITS)
BASE UNIT
CPU
SOFTWARE
(IEC 61850 options not available with type E CPUs)
MOUNT/COATING
CT/VT MODULES
L90
L90
FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY
*
|
E
G
H
M
N
P
J
K
L
R
S
POWER SUPPLY
(redundant supply must be same type as main supply)
DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS
TRANSDUCER
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
(select a maximum of 3 per unit)
|
8F
8H
8L
8N
XX
4A
4B
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
|
5C
5D
5E
5F
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
|
|
XX
|
|
|
4A
4B
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
|
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
5C
5D
5E
5F
|
|
XX
|
|
|
4A
4B
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
|
5C
5D
5E
5F
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
|
8F
8H
8L
8N
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
H
H
L
|
|
|
L
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* - F
|
|
C
D
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
Q
U
L
B
K
M
N
T
V
R
A
P
G
S
|
|
H
A
|
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
|
00
02
03
05
06
07
08
09
- H - L - N - S
INTER-RELAY
COMMUNICATIONS
(select a maximum of 1 per unit)
|
|
XX
|
|
|
4A
4B
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
|
5C
5D
5E
5F
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
- U
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
72
73
74
75
76
2E
2F
2G
2H
|
|
5C
5D
5E
5F
2A
2B
7L
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7S
7T
7V
7W
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
|
|
XX
|
|
|
4A
4B
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
|
W/X
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
72
73
74
75
76
2E
2F
2G
2H
2S
2T
|
2A
2B
|
|
|
7L
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7S
7T
7V
7W
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
RL
|
|
|
|
|
RH
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
|
Full Size Horizontal Mount
Base Unit
RS485 and RS485
RS485 and multi-mode ST 10Base-F
RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 10Base-F
RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX
RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX
RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX
RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX
RS485 and 10/100Base-T
RS485 and single mode ST 100Base-FX
RS485 and single mode ST redundant 100Base-FX
RS485 and six-port managed Ethernet switch
No software options
Breaker-and-a-Half software
IEC 61850
Breaker-and-a-Half software and IEC 61850
One phasor measurement unit (PMU)
IEC 61850 and one phasor measurement unit (PMU)
Breaker-and-a-Half and phasor measurement unit (PMU)
Breaker-and-a-Half, IEC 61850, and phasor measurement unit (PMU)
Horizontal (19” rack)
Horizontal (19” rack) with harsh environmental coating
English display
French display
Russian display
Chinese display
English display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
French display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
Russian display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
Chinese display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with English display
Enhanced front panel with French display
Enhanced front panel with Russian display
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
125 / 250 V AC/DC with redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply
24 to 48 V (DC only) with redundant 24 to 48 V DC power supply
Standard 4CT/4VT
Standard 8CT
Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics (required for PMU option)
Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics (required for PMU option)
No Module
4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
16 digital inputs with Auto-Burnishing
14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
8 Form-C outputs
16 digital inputs
4 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
8 Fast Form-C outputs
4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 digital inputs
4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 digital inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 digital inputs
2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 digital inputs
4 dcmA inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5A module is allowed)
8 RTD inputs
4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5D module is allowed)
4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA inputs
8 dcmA inputs
C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
Bi-phase, single channel
Bi-phase, dual channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
Six-port managed Ethernet switch with high voltage supply (110 to 250 V DC / 100 to 240 V AC)
Six-port managed Ethernet switch with low voltage supply (48 V DC)
1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels, 2 Clock Inputs
RS422, 2 Channels
2
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 2-5
2.1 INTRODUCTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
The order codes for the reduced size vertical mount units with traditional CTs and VTs are shown below.
2
Table 2–4: L90 ORDER CODES (REDUCED SIZE VERTICAL UNITS)
BASE UNIT
CPU
SOFTWARE
(IEC 61850 options not available with type E CPUs)
MOUNT/COATING
FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY
POWER SUPPLY
CT/VT MODULES
L90
L90
DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS
*
|
E
G
H
M
N
P
R
J
K
L
TRANSDUCER
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
(select a maximum of 3 per unit)
INTER-RELAY
COMMUNICATIONS
(select a maximum of 1 per unit)
|
V
B
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
06
07
08
09
|
|
00
02
03
05
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8F
8H
8L
8N
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
C
D
R
A |
K |
M |
Q
U
|
|
|
|
|
L
N
T
V |
H
L
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* - F
|
- H - L - N
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
|
XX
4A
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
|
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
- R
7I
7J
7K
7L
7M
7N
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
7G
7H
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7V
7W
72
73
74
75
76
77
2A
2B
2E
2F
2G
2H
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
|
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
8F
8H
8L
8N
XX
4A
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
|
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
|
XX
4A
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
|
|
|
|
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
Reduced Size Vertical Mount
Base Unit
RS485 and RS485
RS485 and multi-mode ST 10Base-F
RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 10Base-F
RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX
RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX
RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX
RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX
RS485 and 10/100Base-T
RS485 and single mode ST 100Base-FX
RS485 and single mode ST redundant 100Base-FX
No software options
Breaker-and-a-half software
IEC 61850
Breaker-and-a-half software and IEC 61850
Phasor measurement unit (PMU)
IEC 61850 and phasor measurement unit (PMU)
Breaker-and-a-half and phasor measurement unit (PMU)
Breaker-and-a-half, IEC 61850, and phasor measurement unit (PMU)
Vertical (3/4 rack)
Vertical (3/4 rack) with harsh environmental coating
English display
French display
Russian display
Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display
Enhanced front panel with French display
Enhanced front panel with Russian display
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply
Standard 4CT/4VT
Standard 8CT
Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics (required for PMU option)
Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics (required for PMU option)
No Module
4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
16 digital inputs with Auto-Burnishing
14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
8 Form-C outputs
16 digital inputs
4 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
8 Fast Form-C outputs
4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 digital inputs
4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 digital inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 digital inputs
2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 digital inputs
4 dcmA inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5A module is allowed)
8 RTD inputs
4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5D module is allowed)
4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA inputs
8 dcmA inputs
C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
Bi-phase, single channel
Bi-phase, dual channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels, 2 Clock Inputs
RS422, 2 Channels
2-6 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION c) ORDER CODES WITH PROCESS BUS MODULES
The order codes for the horizontal mount units with the process bus module are shown below.
Table 2–5: L90 ORDER CODES (HORIZONTAL UNITS WITH PROCESS BUS)
BASE UNIT
CPU
SOFTWARE
(IEC 61850 options not available with type E CPUs)
MOUNT/COATING
L90
L90
FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY
PROCESS BUS MODULE
DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS
*
|
E
G
H
M
N
P
J
K
L
R
POWER SUPPLY
(redundant supply must be same type as main supply)
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
6S
6T
6U
6V
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
81
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
|
H
H
L
|
|
|
L
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* - F
|
K
M
Q
G
S
B
U
L
N
T
V
R
A
P
|
C
D
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
H
A
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00
03
06
|
|
|
**
|
07
- H - L - N - S - U W/X
INTER-RELAY
COMMUNICATIONS
(select a maximum of 1 per unit)
6S
6T
6U
6V
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
|
7E
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7L
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
2G
2H
72
73
74
75
|
2A
2B
|
|
|
2E
2F
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7V
7W
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
|
7E
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7L
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
2G
2H
72
73
74
75
|
2A
2B
|
|
|
2E
2F
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7V
7W
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
RL
|
XX
|
RH
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
|
Full Size Horizontal Mount
Base Unit
RS485 and RS485
RS485 and multi-mode ST 10Base-F
RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 10Base-F
RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX
RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX
RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX
RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX
RS485 and 10/100Base-T
RS485 and single mode ST 100Base-FX
RS485 and single mode ST redundant 100Base-FX
No software options
IEC 61850
One phasor measurement unit (PMU)
IEC 61850 and one phasor measurement unit (PMU)
Horizontal (19” rack)
Horizontal (19” rack) with harsh environmental coating
English display
French display
Russian display
Chinese display
English display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
French display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
Russian display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
Chinese display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with English display
Enhanced front panel with French display
Enhanced front panel with Russian display
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
125 / 250 V AC/DC with redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply
24 to 48 V (DC only) with redundant 24 to 48 V DC power supply
Eight-port digital process bus module
No Module
4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
16 digital inputs with Auto-Burnishing
14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
8 Form-C outputs
16 digital inputs
4 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
8 Fast Form-C outputs
4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 digital inputs
4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 digital inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 digital inputs
2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 digital inputs
C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
Bi-phase, single channel
Bi-phase, dual channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels, 2 Clock Inputs
RS422, 2 Channels
2
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 2-7
2.1 INTRODUCTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
The order codes for the reduced size vertical mount units with the process bus module are shown below.
2
Table 2–6: L90 ORDER CODES (REDUCED SIZE VERTICAL UNITS WITH PROCESS BUS)
BASE UNIT
CPU
SOFTWARE
(IEC 61850 options not available with type E CPUs)
MOUNT/COATING
FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY
POWER SUPPLY
L90
L90
PROCESS BUS MODULE
DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS
*
|
E
G
H
M
N
P
R
J
K
L
INTER-RELAY
COMMUNICATIONS
(select a maximum of 1 per unit)
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
V
B
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
|
|
|
00
03
06
07
|
|
XX
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
C
D
R |
A |
K |
|
|
|
|
|
M |
Q |
U |
L
N
|
|
T |
V |
H
L
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* - F
|
- H
|
2A
2B
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
7H
7I
7J
7K
7L
7M
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
7G
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7V
7W
73
74
75
76
77
7A
2E
2F
2G
2H
72
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
|
|
XX
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
81
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- L - N - R
Reduced Size Vertical Mount
Base Unit
RS485 and RS485
RS485 and multi-mode ST 10Base-F
RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 10Base-F
RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX
RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX
RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX
RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX
RS485 and 10/100Base-T
RS485 and single mode ST 100Base-FX
RS485 and single mode ST redundant 100Base-FX
No software options
IEC 61850
Phasor measurement unit (PMU)
IEC 61850 and phasor measurement unit (PMU)
Vertical (3/4 rack)
Vertical (3/4 rack) with harsh environmental coating
English display
French display
Russian display
Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display
Enhanced front panel with French display
Enhanced front panel with Russian display
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply
Eight-port digital process bus module
No Module
4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
16 digital inputs with Auto-Burnishing
14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
8 Form-C outputs
16 digital inputs
4 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
8 Fast Form-C outputs
4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 digital inputs
4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 digital inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 digital inputs
2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 digital inputs
C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
Bi-phase, single channel
Bi-phase, dual channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels, 2 Clock Inputs
RS422, 2 Channels
2.1.4 REPLACEMENT MODULES
Replacement modules can be ordered separately as shown below. When ordering a replacement CPU module or faceplate, please provide the serial number of your existing unit.
Not all replacement modules may be applicable to the L90 relay. Only the modules specified in the order codes are available as replacement modules.
NOTE
Replacement module codes are subject to change without notice. Refer to the GE Multilin ordering page at http:// www.GEindustrial.com/multilin/order.htm
for the latest details concerning L90 ordering options.
NOTE
2-8 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
The replacement module order codes for the horizontal mount units are shown below.
Table 2–7: ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES, HORIZONTAL UNITS
-
POWER SUPPLY
(redundant supply only available in horizontal units; must be same type as main supply)
CPU
FACEPLATE/DISPLAY
DIGITAL INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
CT/VT
MODULES
(NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE C30)
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
TRANSDUCER
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UR
|
|
|
|
7K
7L
7M
7N
7P
7E
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
2S
2T
72
73
74
75
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7V
7W
2B
2E
2F
2G
2H
8J
8L
8M
8N
8R
2A
6T
6U
6V
8F
8G
8H
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
3T
3V
4A
4B
4C
4D
3S
3B
3K
3M
3Q
3U
3L
3N
3C
3D
3R
3A
3P
3G
9L
9M
9N
9P
9R
9S
9E
9G
9H
9J
9K
**
1H
1L
RH
RH
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
*
| 125 / 250 V AC/DC
24 to 48 V (DC only) redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC redundant 24 to 48 V (DC only)
RS485 and RS485 (Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and Redundant 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and 10/100Base-T (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and single mode ST 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and single mode ST redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and six-port managed Ethernet switch
Horizontal faceplate with keypad and English display
Horizontal faceplate with keypad and French display
Horizontal faceplate with keypad and Russian display
Horizontal faceplate with keypad and Chinese display
Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and English display
Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and French display
Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and Russian display
Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display
Enhanced front panel with French display
Enhanced front panel with Russian display
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
16 digital inputs with Auto-Burnishing
14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
8 Form-C outputs
16 digital inputs
4 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
8 Fast Form-C outputs
4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 digital inputs
4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 digital inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 digital inputs
2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 digital inputs
Standard 4CT/4VT
Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT
Standard 8CT
Sensitive Ground 8CT
Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
Bi-phase, single channel
Bi-phase, dual channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
Six-port managed Ethernet switch with high voltage power supply (110 to 250 V DC / 100 to 240 V AC)
Six-port managed Ethernet switch with low voltage power supply (48 V DC)
1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels, 2 Clock Inputs
RS422, 2 Channels
4 dcmA inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5A module is allowed)
8 RTD inputs
4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5D module is allowed)
4 dcmA inputs, 4 RTD inputs
8 dcmA inputs
2.1 INTRODUCTION
2
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 2-9
2.1 INTRODUCTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
The replacement module order codes for the reduced-size vertical mount units are shown below.
2
Table 2–8: ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES, VERTICAL UNITS
-
POWER SUPPLY
CPU
FACEPLATE/DISPLAY
DIGITAL
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CT/VT
MODULES
(NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE C30)
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
TRANSDUCER
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UR
|
|
|
|
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7V
7W
7H
7I
7J
7K
7L
7M
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
7G
74
75
76
77
7A
2E
2F
2G
2H
72
73
8L
8M
8N
8R
2A
2B
6V
8F
8G
8H
8J
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
3N
3T
3V
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
3K
3K
3M
3Q
3U
3L
9N
9P
9R
3F
3D
3R
9H
9J
9K
9L
9M
**
1H
1L
9E
9G
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
*
| 125 / 250 V AC/DC
24 to 48 V (DC only)
RS485 and RS485 (Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and Redundant 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and 10/100Base-T (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and single mode ST 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and single mode ST redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
Vertical faceplate with keypad and English display
Vertical faceplate with keypad and French display
Vertical faceplate with keypad and Russian display
Vertical faceplate with keypad and Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display
Enhanced front panel with French display
Enhanced front panel with Russian display
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
16 digital inputs with Auto-Burnishing
14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
8 Form-C outputs
16 digital inputs
4 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
8 Fast Form-C outputs
4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 digital inputs
4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 digital inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 digital inputs
2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 digital inputs
Standard 4CT/4VT
Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT
Standard 8CT
Sensitive Ground 8CT
Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
Bi-phase, single channel
Bi-phase, dual channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels, 2 Clock Inputs
RS422, 2 Channels
4 dcmA inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5A module is allowed)
8 RTD inputs
4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5D module is allowed)
4 dcmA inputs, 4 RTD inputs
8 dcmA inputs
2-10 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2 PILOT CHANNEL RELAYING
2.2PILOT CHANNEL RELAYING 2.2.1 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
Dedicated inter-relay communications may operate over 64 kbps digital channels or dedicated fiber optic channels. Available interfaces include:
• RS422 at 64 kbps
• G.703 at 64 kbps
• Dedicated fiber optics at 64 kbps. The fiber optic options include:
– 820 nm multi-mode fiber with an LED transmitter.
– 1300 nm multi-mode fiber with an LED transmitter.
– 1300 nm single-mode fiber with an ELED transmitter.
– 1300 nm single-mode fiber with a laser transmitter.
– 1550 nm single-mode fiber with a laser transmitter.
– IEEE C37.94 820 nm multi-mode fiber with an LED transmitter.
All fiber optic options use an ST connector. L90 models are available for use on two or three terminal lines. A two terminal line application requires one bidirectional channel. However, in two terminal line applications, it is also possible to use an
L90 relay with two bidirectional channels. The second bidirectional channel will provide a redundant backup channel with automatic switchover if the first channel fails.
The L90 current differential relay is designed to function in a peer-to-peer or master-to-master architecture. In the peer-topeer architecture, all relays in the system are identical and perform identical functions in the current differential scheme. In order for every relay on the line to be a peer, each relay must be able to communicate with all of the other relays. If there is a failure in communications among the relays, the relays will revert to a master-to-peer architecture on a three-terminal system, with the master as the relay that has current phasors from all terminals. Using two different operational modes increases the dependability of the current differential scheme on a three-terminal system by reducing reliance on communications.
The main difference between a master and a slave L90 is that only a master relay performs the actual current differential calculation, and only a master relay communicates with the relays at all other terminals of the protected line.
At least one master L90 relay must have live communications to all other terminals in the current differential scheme; the other L90 relays on that line may operate as slave relays. All master relays in the scheme will be equal, and each will perform all functions. Each L90 relay in the scheme will determine if it is a master by comparing the number of terminals on the line to the number of active communication channels.
The slave terminals only communicate with the master; there is no slave-to-slave communications path. As a result, a slave
L90 relay cannot calculate the differential current. When a master L90 relay issues a local trip signal, it also sends a direct transfer trip (DTT) signal to all of the other L90 relays on the protected line.
If a slave L90 relay issues a trip from one of its backup functions, it can send a transfer trip signal to its master and other slave relays if such option is designated. Because a slave cannot communicate with all the relays in the differential scheme, the master will then “broadcast” the direct transfer trip (DTT) signal to all other terminals.
The slave L90 Relay performs the following functions:
• Samples currents and voltages.
• Removes DC offset from the current via the mimic algorithm.
• Creates phaselets.
• Calculates sum of squares data.
• Transmits current data to all master L90 relays.
• Performs all local relaying functions.
• Receives current differential DTT and Direct Input signals from all other L90 relays.
• Transmits direct output signals to all communicating relays.
• Sends synchronization information of local clock to all other L90 clocks.
2
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 2-11
2.2 PILOT CHANNEL RELAYING
2
The master L90 relay performs the following functions:
• Performs all functions of a slave L90.
• Receives current phasor information from all relays.
• Performs the current differential algorithm.
• Sends a current differential DTT signal to all L90 relays on the protected line.
In the peer-to-peer mode, all L90 relays act as masters.
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
IED-1
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Optional redundant channel
Typical two-terminal application
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
IED-2
IED-1
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx Rx Tx Rx
CHn
IED-3
CHn
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
IED-2
Typical three-terminal application
Figure 2–2: COMMUNICATIONS PATHS
831009A5.CDR
2.2.2 CHANNEL MONITOR
The L90 has logic to detect that the communications channel is deteriorating or has failed completely. This can provide an alarm indication and disable the current differential protection. Note that a failure of the communications from the master to a slave does not prevent the master from performing the current differential algorithm; failure of the communications from a slave to the master will prevent the master from performing the correct current differential logic. Channel propagation delay is being continuously measured and adjusted according to changes in the communications path. Every relay on the protection system can assigned an unique ID to prevent advertent loopbacks at multiplexed channels.
2-12 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2 PILOT CHANNEL RELAYING
2.2.3 LOOPBACK TEST
This option allows the user to test the relay at one terminal of the line by looping the transmitter output to the receiver input; at the same time, the signal sent to the remote will not change. A local loopback feature is included in the relay to simplify single ended testing.
2.2.4 DIRECT TRANSFER TRIPPING
The L90 includes provision for sending and receiving a single-pole direct transfer trip (DTT) signal from current differential protection between the L90 relays at the line terminals using the pilot communications channel. The user may also initiate an additional eight pilot signals with an L90 communications channel to create trip, block, or signaling logic. A FlexLogic™ operand, an external contact closure, or a signal over the LAN communication channels can be assigned for that logic.
2
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 2-13
2.3 FUNCTIONALITY 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.3FUNCTIONALITY
2.3.1 PROTECTION AND CONTROL FUNCTIONS
2
• Current differential protection: The current differential algorithms used in the L90 Line Current Differential System are based on the Fourier transform phaselet approach and an adaptive statistical restraint. The L90 uses per-phase differential at 64 kbps with two phaselets per cycle. A detailed description of the current differential algorithms is found in chapter 8. The current differential protection can be set in a percentage differential scheme with a single or dual slope.
• Backup protection: In addition to the primary current differential protection, the L90 Line Current Differential System incorporates backup functions that operate on the local relay current only, such as directional phase overcurrent, directional neutral overcurrent, negative-sequence overcurrent, undervoltage, overvoltage, and distance protection.
• Multiple setting groups: The relay can store six groups of settings. They may be selected by user command, a configurable contact input or a FlexLogic™ equation to allow the relay to respond to changing conditions.
• User-programmable logic: In addition to the built-in protection logic, the relay may be programmed by the user via
FlexLogic™ equations.
• Configurable inputs and outputs: All of the contact converter inputs (digital inputs) to the relay may be assigned by the user to directly block a protection element, operate an output relay or serve as an input to FlexLogic™ equations.
All of the outputs, except for the self test critical alarm contacts, may also be assigned by the user.
2.3.2 METERING AND MONITORING FUNCTIONS
• Metering: The relay measures all input currents and calculates both phasors and symmetrical components. When AC potential is applied to the relay via the optional voltage inputs, metering data includes phase and neutral current, phase voltage, three phase and per phase W, VA, and var, and power factor. Frequency is measured on either current or voltage inputs. They may be called onto the local display or accessed via a computer. All terminal current phasors and differential currents are also displayed at all relays, allowing the user opportunity to analyze correct polarization of currents at all terminals.
• Event records: The relay has a sequence of events recorder which combines the recording of snapshot data and oscillography data. Events consist of a broad range of change of state occurrences, including input contact changes, measuring-element pickup and operation, FlexLogic™ equation changes, and self-test status. The relay stores up to
1024 events with the date and time stamped to the nearest microsecond. This provides the information needed to determine a sequence of events, which can reduce troubleshooting time and simplify report generation after system events.
• Oscillography: The relay stores oscillography data at a sampling rate of 64 times per cycle. The relay can store a maximum of 64 records. Each oscillography file includes a sampled data report consisting of:
– Instantaneous sample of the selected currents and voltages (if AC potential is used),
– The status of each selected contact input.
– The status of each selected contact output.
– The status of each selected measuring function.
– The status of various selected logic signals, including virtual inputs and outputs.
The captured oscillography data files can be accessed via the remote communications ports on the relay.
• CT failure and current unbalance alarm: The relay has current unbalance alarm logic. The unbalance alarm may be supervised by a zero-sequence voltage detector. The user may block the relay from tripping when the current unbalance alarm operates.
• Trip circuit monitor: On those outputs designed for trip duty, a trip voltage monitor will continuously measure the DC voltage across output contacts to determine if the associated trip circuit is intact. If the voltage dips below the minimum voltage or the breaker fails to open or close after a trip command, an alarm can be activated.
• Self-test: The most comprehensive self testing of the relay is performed during a power-up. Because the system is not performing any protection activities at power-up, tests that would be disruptive to protection processing may be performed. The processors in the CPU and all CT/VT modules participate in startup self-testing. Self-testing checks approximately 85 to 90% of the hardware, and CRC/check-sum verification of all PROMs is performed. The proces-
2-14 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.3 FUNCTIONALITY
sors communicate their results to each other so that if any failures are detected, they can be reported to the user. Each processor must successfully complete its self tests before the relay begins protection activities.
During both startup and normal operation, the CPU polls all plug-in modules and checks that every one answers the poll. The CPU compares the module types that identify themselves to the relay order code stored in memory and declares an alarm if a module is either non-responding or the wrong type for the specific slot. When running under normal power system conditions, the relay processors will have idle time. During this time, each processor performs background self-tests that are not disruptive to the foreground processing.
2.3.3 OTHER FUNCTIONS a) ALARMS
The relay contains a dedicated alarm relay, the critical failure alarm, housed in the power supply module. This output relay is not user programmable. This relay has form-C contacts and is energized under normal operating conditions. The critical failure alarm will become de-energized if the relay self test algorithms detect a failure that would prevent the relay from properly protecting the transmission line.
b) LOCAL USER INTERFACE
The local user interface (on the faceplate) consists of a 2
× 20 liquid crystal display (LCD) and keypad. The keypad and display may be used to view data from the relay, to change settings in the relay, or to perform control actions. Also, the faceplate provides LED indications of status and events.
c) TIME SYNCHRONIZATION
The relay includes a clock which can run freely from the internal oscillator or be synchronized from an external IRIG-B signal. With the external signal, all relays wired to the same synchronizing signal will be synchronized to within 0.1 millisecond.
d) FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
2
I
Sample Raw
Value
V
Sample Raw
Value
Sample
Hold
Master
Clock
Remote Relay dV dt
Offset
Removal
Compute
Phaselets
Disturbance
Detector
67P&N
50P,N&G
Charging Current
Comp.
Offset
Removal
Compute
Phaselets
UR Platform
Phasors
Computations
51P,N&G
27P
Filter
Compute
Phaselets
PFLL Status
Phase and Frequency
Locked Loop (PFLL)
Frequency
Deviation
Phase
Deviation
Communications
Interface
PHASELETS TO REMOTE
PHASELETS FROM REMOTE
Direct Transfer Trip
Figure 2–3: L90 BLOCK DIAGRAM
59P
21P&G
87L
Algorithm
Trip Output
Configurable
Logic
831732A3.CDR
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 2-15
2
2.3 FUNCTIONALITY 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Peer Peer
Clock
Sampling
Control
Sample
Currents and
Voltages
Raw
Sample
Remove Decaying
Offset and
Charging Current
Time Stamp
Communication
Time
Stamps
Ping-pong
Algorithm
Clock
Control
Phase
Deviation
Phase Deviation
Estimate
Phase Angle
Uncertainties
Estimate Phase
Angle Correction from GPS signal
Frequency
Deviation
Compute
Frequency
Deviation
Compute Positive
Sequence
Currents
Channel
Control
Phaselets
Compute
Phaselets
Phasors
Phaselets
Align Phaselets
Compute Phasors and
Variance Parameters
Phaselets
Fault
Detector
Disturbance
Detector
Trip Output
Logic
Figure 2–4: MAIN SOFTWARE MODULES
831749A1.CDR
2-16 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.4 SPECIFICATIONS
2.4SPECIFICATIONS
2.4.1 PROTECTION ELEMENTS
NOTE
The operating times below include the activation time of a trip rated form-A output contact unless otherwise indicated. FlexLogic™ operands of a given element are 4 ms faster. This should be taken into account when using
FlexLogic™ to interconnect with other protection or control elements of the relay, building FlexLogic™ equations, or interfacing with other IEDs or power system devices via communications or different output contacts.
PHASE DISTANCE
Characteristic: mho (memory polarized or offset) or quad (memory polarized or non-directional), selectable individually per zone
3 Number of zones:
Directionality: forward, reverse, or non-directional
Reach (secondary
Ω):
0.02 to 500.00
Ω in steps of 0.01
Reach accuracy: ±5% including the effect of CVT transients up to an SIR of 30
Distance:
Characteristic angle: 30 to 90° in steps of 1
Comparator limit angle: 30 to 90° in steps of 1
Directional supervision:
Characteristic angle: 30 to 90° in steps of 1
Limit angle: 30 to 90° in steps of 1
Right blinder (Quad only):
Reach: 0.02 to 500
Ω in steps of 0.01
Characteristic angle: 60 to 90° in steps of 1
Left Blinder (Quad only):
Reach: 0.02 to 500
Ω in steps of 0.01
Characteristic angle: 60 to 90° in steps of 1
Time delay:
Timing accuracy:
0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
±3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater
Current supervision:
Level:
Pickup:
Dropout:
Memory duration:
VT location:
CT location: line-to-line current
0.050 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
97 to 98%
5 to 25 cycles in steps of 1 all delta-wye and wye-delta transformers all delta-wye and wye-delta transformers
Voltage supervision pickup (series compensation applications):
0 to 5.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Operation time:
Reset time:
1 to 1.5 cycles (typical)
1 power cycle (typical)
GROUND DISTANCE
Characteristic: Mho (memory polarized or offset) or
Quad (memory polarized or non-directional)
Reactance polarization: negative-sequence or zero-sequence current
Non-homogeneity angle: –40 to 40° in steps of 1
Number of zones: 3
Directionality: forward, reverse, or non-directional
Reach (secondary
Ω):
0.02 to 500.00
Ω in steps of 0.01
Reach accuracy: ±5% including the effect of CVT transients up to an SIR of 30
Distance characteristic angle: 30 to 90° in steps of 1
Distance comparator limit angle: 30 to 90° in steps of 1
Directional supervision:
Characteristic angle: 30 to 90° in steps of 1
Limit angle: 30 to 90° in steps of 1
Zero-sequence compensation
Z0/Z1 magnitude:
Z0/Z1 angle:
0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01
–90 to 90° in steps of 1
Zero-sequence mutual compensation
Z0M/Z1 magnitude: 0.00 to 7.00 in steps of 0.01
Z0M/Z1 angle: –90 to 90° in steps of 1
Right blinder (Quad only):
Reach: 0.02 to 500
Ω in steps of 0.01
Characteristic angle: 60 to 90° in steps of 1
Left blinder (Quad only):
Reach: 0.02 to 500
Ω in steps of 0.01
Characteristic angle: 60 to 90° in steps of 1
Time delay:
Timing accuracy:
0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
±3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater
Current supervision:
Level:
Pickup:
Dropout:
Memory duration: neutral current (3I_0)
0.050 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
97 to 98%
5 to 25 cycles in steps of 1
Voltage supervision pickup (series compensation applications):
0 to 5.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Operation time:
Reset time:
1 to 1.5 cycles (typical)
1 power cycle (typical)
LINE PICKUP
Phase instantaneous overcurrent: 0.000 to 30.000 pu
Undervoltage pickup:
Overvoltage delay:
0.000 to 3.000 pu
0.000 to 65.535 s
2
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 2-17
2.4 SPECIFICATIONS 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2
LINE CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL (87L)
Application: 2 or 3 terminal line, series compensated line, tapped line, with charging current compensation
Pickup current level: 0.20 to 4.00 pu in steps of 0.01
CT Tap (CT mismatch factor): 0.20 to 5.00 in steps of 0.01
Slope # 1:
Slope # 2:
1 to 50%
1 to 70%
Breakpoint between slopes: 0.0 to 20.0 pu in steps of 0.1
Zero-sequence current differential (87LG):
87LG pickup level:
87LG slope:
0.05 to 1.00 pu in steps of 0.01
1 to 50%
87LG pickup delay:
DTT:
0.00 to 5.00 s in steps of 0.01
Direct Transfer Trip (1 and 3 pole) to remote L90
1.0 to 1.5 power cycles duration Operating Time:
Asymmetrical channel delay compensation using GPS: asymmetry up to 10 ms
LINE CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL TRIP LOGIC
87L trip: Adds security for trip decision; creates 1 and 3 pole trip logic
DTT:
DD:
Stub bus protection:
Open pole detector:
Engaged Direct Transfer Trip (1 and 3 pole) from remote L90
Sensitive Disturbance Detector to detect fault occurrence
Security for ring bus and 1½ breaker configurations
Security for sequential and evolving faults
PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND TOC
Current: Phasor or RMS
Pickup level:
Dropout level:
Level accuracy: for 0.1 to 2.0
× CT:
0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
97% to 98% of pickup for > 2.0
× CT:
Curve shapes:
Curve multiplier:
Reset type:
Timing accuracy:
±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated
(whichever is greater)
±1.5% of reading > 2.0
× CT rating
IEEE Moderately/Very/Extremely
Inverse; IEC (and BS) A/B/C and Short
Inverse; GE IAC Inverse, Short/Very/
Extremely Inverse; I
2 t; FlexCurves™
(programmable); Definite Time (0.01 s base curve)
Time Dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of
0.01
Instantaneous/Timed (per IEEE)
Operate at > 1.03
× actual pickup
±3.5% of operate time or ±½ cycle
(whichever is greater)
PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND IOC
Pickup level: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Dropout level: 97 to 98% of pickup
Level accuracy:
0.1 to 2.0
× CT rating: ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated
(whichever is greater)
> 2.0
× CT rating
±1.5% of reading
Overreach:
Pickup delay:
Reset delay:
Operate time:
Timing accuracy:
<2%
0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
<16 ms at 3
× pickup at 60 Hz
(Phase/Ground IOC)
<20 ms at 3
× pickup at 60 Hz
(Neutral IOC)
Operate at 1.5
× pickup
±3% or ±4 ms (whichever is greater)
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC
Current: Phasor
Pickup level:
Dropout level:
Level accuracy:
Curve shapes:
0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
97% to 98% of pickup
±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated
(whichever is greater) from 0.1 to 2.0 x CT rating
±1.5% of reading > 2.0 x CT rating
IEEE Moderately/Very/Extremely
Inverse; IEC (and BS) A/B/C and Short
Inverse; GE IAC Inverse, Short/Very/
Extremely Inverse; I
2 t; FlexCurves™
(programmable); Definite Time (0.01 s base curve)
Curve multiplier (Time dial): 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
Reset type:
Timing accuracy:
Instantaneous/Timed (per IEEE) and Linear
Operate at > 1.03
× actual pickup
±3.5% of operate time or ±½ cycle
(whichever is greater)
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE IOC
Current: Phasor
Pickup level:
Dropout level:
Level accuracy:
Overreach:
Pickup delay:
Reset delay:
Operate time:
Timing accuracy:
0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
97 to 98% of pickup
0.1 to 2.0
× CT rating: ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated (whichever is greater);
> 2.0 × CT rating: ±1.5% of reading
< 2%
0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
< 20 ms at 3
× pickup at 60 Hz
Operate at 1.5
× pickup
±3% or ±4 ms (whichever is greater)
2-18 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT
Relay connection: 90
°
(quadrature)
Quadrature voltage: ABC phase seq.: phase A (V
BC
), phase
B (V
CA
), phase C (V
AB
); ACB phase seq.: phase A (V
CB
), phase B (V
AC
), phase C (V
BA
)
Polarizing voltage threshold: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Current sensitivity threshold: 0.05 pu
Characteristic angle: 0 to 359
°
in steps of 1
Angle accuracy: ±2°
Operation time (FlexLogic™ operands):
Tripping (reverse load, forward fault):
<
12 ms, typically
Blocking (forward load, reverse fault):
<
8 ms, typically
NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT
Directionality: Co-existing forward and reverse
Polarizing:
Polarizing voltage:
Polarizing current:
Operating current:
Level sensing:
Restraint, K:
Characteristic angle:
Limit angle:
Angle accuracy:
Offset impedance:
Pickup level:
Dropout level:
Operation time:
Voltage, Current, Dual
V_0 or VX
IG
I_0
3
× (|I_0| – K × |I_1|), IG
0.000 to 0.500 in steps of 0.001
–90 to 90° in steps of 1
40 to 90° in steps of 1, independent for forward and reverse
±2°
0.00 to 250.00
Ω in steps of 0.01
0.002 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.01
97 to 98%
< 16 ms at 3
× pickup at 60 Hz
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OC
Directionality: Co-existing forward and reverse
Polarizing:
Polarizing voltage:
Operating current:
Level sensing:
Voltage
V_2
I_2
Restraint, K:
Characteristic angle:
Limit angle:
Angle accuracy:
Offset impedance:
Pickup level:
Dropout level:
Operation time:
Zero-sequence:|I_0| – K
× |I_1|
Negative-sequence:|I_2| – K
× |I_1|
0.000 to 0.500 in steps of 0.001
0 to 90° in steps of 1
40 to 90° in steps of 1, independent for forward and reverse
±2°
0.00 to 250.00
Ω in steps of 0.01
0.015 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.01
97 to 98%
< 16 ms at 3
× pickup at 60 Hz
2.4 SPECIFICATIONS
WATTMETRIC ZERO-SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL
Measured power: zero-sequence
Number of elements:
Characteristic angle:
2
0 to 360° in steps of 1
Minimum power: 0.001 to 1.200 pu in steps of 0.001
Pickup level accuracy: ±1% or ±0.0025 pu, whichever is greater
Hysteresis:
Pickup delay:
3% or 0.001 pu, whichever is greater definite time (0 to 600.00 s in steps of
0.01), inverse time, or FlexCurve
Inverse time multiplier: 0.01 to 2.00 s in steps of 0.01
Time accuracy: ±3% or ±20 ms, whichever is greater
Operate time: <30 ms at 60 Hz
PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE
Voltage: Phasor only
Pickup level:
Dropout level:
Level accuracy:
Curve shapes:
Curve multiplier:
Timing accuracy:
0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
102 to 103% of pickup
±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
GE IAV Inverse;
Definite Time (0.1s base curve)
Time dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of
0.01
Operate at < 0.90
× pickup
±3.5% of operate time or ±4 ms (whichever is greater)
AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE
Pickup level: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Dropout level:
Level accuracy:
Curve shapes:
Curve multiplier:
Timing accuracy:
102 to 103% of pickup
±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
GE IAV Inverse, Definite Time
Time Dial = 0 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
±3% of operate time or ±4 ms
(whichever is greater)
PHASE OVERVOLTAGE
Voltage: Phasor only
Pickup level:
Dropout level:
Level accuracy:
Pickup delay:
Operate time:
Timing accuracy:
0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
97 to 98% of pickup
±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 s
< 30 ms at 1.10 × pickup at 60 Hz
±3% or ±4 ms (whichever is greater)
NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE
Pickup level: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Dropout level:
Level accuracy:
Pickup delay:
Reset delay:
Timing accuracy:
Operate time:
97 to 98% of pickup
±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 (definite time) or user-defined curve
0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
±3% or ±20 ms (whichever is greater)
< 30 ms at 1.10 × pickup at 60 Hz
2
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 2-19
2.4 SPECIFICATIONS 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2
AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE
Pickup level: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Dropout level:
Level accuracy:
Pickup delay:
Reset delay:
Timing accuracy:
Operate time:
97 to 98% of pickup
±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
±3% of operate time or ±4 ms
(whichever is greater)
< 30 ms at 1.10 × pickup at 60 Hz
BREAKER FAILURE
Mode: 1-pole, 3-pole
Current supervision:
Current supv. pickup: phase, neutral current
0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Current supv. dropout: 97 to 98% of pickup
Current supv. accuracy:
0.1 to 2.0
× CT rating: ±0.75% of reading or ±2% of rated
(whichever is greater) above 2
× CT rating:
±2.5% of reading
BREAKER ARCING CURRENT
Principle: accumulates breaker duty (I
2 t) and measures fault duration
Initiation: programmable per phase from any Flex-
Logic™ operand
Compensation for auxiliary relays: 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Alarm threshold: 0 to 50000 kA2-cycle in steps of 1
Fault duration accuracy: 0.25 of a power cycle
Availability: 1 per CT bank with a minimum of 2
BREAKER FLASHOVER
Operating quantity: phase current, voltage and voltage difference
Pickup level voltage: 0 to 1.500 pu in steps of 0.001
Dropout level voltage: 97 to 98% of pickup
Pickup level current: 0 to 1.500 pu in steps of 0.001
Dropout level current: 97 to 98% of pickup
Level accuracy: ±0.5% or ±0.1% of rated, whichever is greater
Pickup delay:
Time accuracy:
Operate time:
0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
±3% or ±42 ms, whichever is greater
<42 ms at 1.10
× pickup at 60 Hz
SYNCHROCHECK
Max voltage difference: 0 to 400000 V in steps of 1
Max angle difference: 0 to 100
°
in steps of 1
Max freq. difference: 0.00 to 2.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
Hysteresis for max. freq. diff.: 0.00 to 0.10 Hz in steps of 0.01
Dead source function: None, LV1 & DV2, DV1 & LV2, DV1 or
DV2, DV1 xor DV2, DV1 & DV2
(L = Live, D = Dead)
AUTORECLOSURE
Two breakers applications
Single- and three-pole tripping schemes
Up to 4 reclose attempts before lockout
Selectable reclosing mode and breaker sequence
PILOT-AIDED SCHEMES
Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip (POTT)
TRIP OUTPUT
Collects trip and reclose input requests and issues outputs to control tripping and reclosing.
Communications timer delay: 0 to 65535 s in steps of 0.001
Evolving fault timer: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Timing accuracy: ±3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater
POWER SWING DETECT
Functions: Power swing block, Out-of-step trip
Characteristic: Mho or Quad
Measured impedance: Positive-sequence
Blocking / tripping modes: 2-step or 3-step
Tripping mode: Early or Delayed
Current supervision:
Pickup level: 0.050 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Dropout level: 97 to 98% of pickup
Fwd / reverse reach (sec.
Ω): 0.10 to 500.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
Left and right blinders (sec.
Ω): 0.10 to 500.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
Impedance accuracy: ±5%
Fwd / reverse angle impedances: 40 to 90° in steps of 1
Angle accuracy: ±2°
Characteristic limit angles: 40 to 140° in steps of 1
Timers:
Timing accuracy:
0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
±3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
Responds to: Positive-sequence quantities
Minimum voltage:
Reach (sec.
Ω):
Impedance accuracy:
Angle:
Angle accuracy:
Pickup delay:
Reset delay:
Time accuracy:
Operate time:
0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
0.02 to 250.00
Ω in steps of 0.01
±5%
5 to 50° in steps of 1
±2°
0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
±3% or ±4 ms, whichever is greater
< 30 ms at 60 Hz
OPEN POLE DETECTOR
Functionality: Detects an open pole condition, monitoring breaker auxiliary contacts, the current in each phase and optional voltages on the line
Current pickup level: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Line capacitive reactances (X
C1
, X
C0 steps of 0.1
): 300.0 to 9999.9 sec.
Ω in
Remote current pickup level: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Current dropout level: pickup + 3%, not less than 0.05 pu
TRIP BUS (TRIP WITHOUT FLEXLOGIC™)
Number of elements: 6
Number of inputs:
Operate time:
Time accuracy:
16
<2 ms at 60 Hz
±3% or 10 ms, whichever is greater
2-20 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.4 SPECIFICATIONS
FLEXLOGIC™
Programming language: Reverse Polish Notation with graphical visualization (keypad programmable)
Lines of code:
Internal variables:
512
64
Supported operations: NOT, XOR, OR (2 to 16 inputs), AND (2 to 16 inputs), NOR (2 to 16 inputs),
NAND (2 to 16 inputs), latch (reset-dominant), edge detectors, timers
Inputs: any logical variable, contact, or virtual input
Number of timers:
Pickup delay:
Dropout delay:
32
0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1
0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1
FLEXCURVES™
Number:
Reset points:
Operate points:
Time delay:
FLEX STATES
Number:
4 (A through D)
40 (0 through 1 of pickup)
80 (1 through 20 of pickup)
0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
Programmability: up to 256 logical variables grouped under 16 Modbus addresses any logical variable, contact, or virtual input
FLEXELEMENTS™
Number of elements:
Operating signal:
8 any analog actual value, or two values in differential mode
Operating signal mode: signed or absolute value
Operating mode: level, delta
Comparator direction: over, under
Pickup Level: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Hysteresis:
Delta dt:
0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1
20 ms to 60 days
Pickup & dropout delay: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
Type: set-dominant or reset-dominant
Number:
Output:
Execution sequence:
16 (individually programmed) stored in non-volatile memory as input prior to protection, control, and
FlexLogic™
2.4.2 USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs
Number: 48 plus trip and alarm
Programmability:
Reset mode: from any logical variable, contact, or virtual input self-reset or latched
LED TEST
Initiation:
Number of tests:
Duration of full test:
Test sequence 1:
Test sequence 2:
Test sequence 3: from any digital input or user-programmable condition
3, interruptible at any time approximately 3 minutes all LEDs on all LEDs off, one LED at a time on for 1 s all LEDs on, one LED at a time off for 1 s
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
Number of displays:
Lines of display:
16
2
× 20 alphanumeric characters
Parameters: up to 5, any Modbus register addresses
Invoking and scrolling: keypad, or any user-programmable condition, including pushbuttons
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
Number of pushbuttons: 7
Operation: drive FlexLogic™ operands
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (OPTIONAL)
Number of pushbuttons: 12 (standard faceplate);
16 (enhanced faceplate)
Mode:
Display message:
Drop-out timer:
Autoreset timer:
Hold timer: self-reset, latched
2 lines of 20 characters each
0.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.05
0.2 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1
0.0 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1
SELECTOR SWITCH
Number of elements: 2
Upper position limit:
Selecting mode:
Time-out timer:
Control inputs:
Power-up mode:
1 to 7 in steps of 1 time-out or acknowledge
3.0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1
step-up and 3-bit restore from non-volatile memory or synchronize to a 3-bit control input or synch/ restore mode
DIGITAL ELEMENTS
Number of elements: 48
Operating signal:
Pickup delay:
Dropout delay:
Timing accuracy: any FlexLogic™ operand
0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001
0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001
±3% or ±4 ms, whichever is greater
2
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 2-21
2.4 SPECIFICATIONS 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2
OSCILLOGRAPHY
Maximum records:
Sampling rate:
Triggers:
Data:
Data storage:
DATA LOGGER
Number of channels:
Parameters:
Sampling rate:
Trigger:
Mode:
Storage capacity:
64
64 samples per power cycle any element pickup, dropout, or operate; digital input change of state; digital output change of state; FlexLogic™ equation
AC input channels; element state; digital input state; digital output state in non-volatile memory
EVENT RECORDER
Capacity:
Time-tag:
Triggers:
Data storage:
1024 events to 1 microsecond any element pickup, dropout, or operate; digital input change of state; digital output change of state; self-test events in non-volatile memory
1 to 16 any available analog actual value
15 to 3600000 ms in steps of 1 any FlexLogic™ operand continuous or triggered
(NN is dependent on memory)
1-second rate:
01 channel for NN days
16 channels for NN days
↓
60-minute rate:
01 channel for NN days
16 channels for NN days
RMS CURRENT: PHASE, NEUTRAL, AND GROUND
Accuracy at
0.1 to 2.0
× CT rating: ±0.25% of reading or ±0.1% of rated
> 2.0 × CT rating:
(whichever is greater)
±1.0% of reading
RMS VOLTAGE
Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
REAL POWER (WATTS)
Accuracy: ±1.0% of reading at
–0.8
< PF ≤ –1.0 and 0.8 < PF ≤ 1.0
REACTIVE POWER (VARS)
Accuracy: ±1.0% of reading at –0.2
≤ PF ≤ 0.2
2.4.3 MONITORING
FAULT LOCATOR
Method:
Voltage source: multi-ended or single-ended during channel failure wye-connected VTs, delta-connected
VTs and neutral voltage, delta-connected
VTs and zero-sequence current (approximation)
Maximum accuracy if: fault resistance is zero or fault currents from all line terminals are in phase
Relay accuracy:
Worst-case accuracy:
±1.5% (V > 10 V, I > 0.1 pu)
VT
%error
+
CT
%error
+
Z
Line%error
METHOD
+
%error
+ user data user data user data
0.5% (multi-ended method), see chapter
8 (single-ended method)
RELAY ACCURACY
%error
+ (1.5%)
PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT
Output format: per IEEE C37.118 standard
Number of channels:
TVE (total vector error) <1%
Triggering: frequency, voltage, current, power, rate of change of frequency, user-defined
Reporting rate:
14 synchrophasors, 8 analogs, 16 digitals
Number of clients:
1, 2, 5, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 50, or 60 times per second
One over TCP/IP port, two over UDP/IP ports
AC ranges: As indicated in appropriate specifications sections
Network reporting format: 16-bit integer or 32-bit IEEE floating point numbers
Network reporting style: rectangular (real and imaginary) or polar
(magnitude and angle) coordinates
Post-filtering:
Calibration: none, 3-point, 5-point, 7-point
±5°
2.4.4 METERING
APPARENT POWER (VA)
Accuracy: ±1.0% of reading
WATT-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)
Accuracy:
Range:
±2.0% of reading
±0 to 1
× 10 6
MWh
Parameters: three-phase only
Update rate: 50 ms
VAR-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)
Accuracy:
Range:
±2.0% of reading
±0 to 1
× 10
6
Mvarh
Parameters:
Update rate: three-phase only
50 ms
2-22 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.4 SPECIFICATIONS
FREQUENCY
Accuracy at
V = 0.8 to 1.2 pu:
I = 0.1 to 0.25 pu:
I > 0.25 pu:
±0.001 Hz (when voltage signal is used for frequency measurement)
±0.05 Hz
±0.001 Hz (when current signal is used for frequency measurement)
DEMAND
Measurements:
Accuracy:
Phases A, B, and C present and maximum measured currents
3-Phase Power (P, Q, and S) present and maximum measured currents
±2.0%
AC CURRENT
CT rated primary:
CT rated secondary:
Nominal frequency:
Relay burden:
Current withstand:
1 to 50000 A
1 A or 5 A by connection
20 to 65 Hz
< 0.2 VA at rated secondary
Conversion range:
Standard CT: 0.02 to 46
× CT rating RMS symmetrical
Sensitive Ground CT module:
0.002 to 4.6
× CT rating RMS symmetrical
20 ms at 250 times rated
1 sec. at 100 times rated continuous at 3 times rated
Short circuit rating: 150000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 250
V maximum (primary current to external
CT)
AC VOLTAGE
VT rated secondary:
VT ratio:
Nominal frequency:
Relay burden:
Conversion range:
Voltage withstand:
50.0 to 240.0 V
1.00 to 24000.00
20 to 65 Hz; the nominal system frequency should be chosen as 50 Hz or
60 Hz only.
< 0.25 VA at 120 V
1 to 275 V continuous at 260 V to neutral
1 min./hr at 420 V to neutral
CONTACT INPUTS
Dry contacts:
Wet contacts:
1000
Ω maximum
300 V DC maximum
Selectable thresholds: 17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V
Tolerance: ±10%
Contacts per common return: 4
Recognition time:
Debounce time:
< 1 ms
0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5
Continuous current draw:3 mA (when energized)
2.4.5 INPUTS
2
CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING
Dry contacts: 1000
Ω maximum
Wet contacts: 300 V DC maximum
Selectable thresholds: 17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V
Tolerance: ±10%
Contacts per common return: 2
Recognition time:
Debounce time:
< 1 ms
0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5
Continuous current draw:3 mA (when energized)
Auto-burnish impulse current: 50 to 70 mA
Duration of auto-burnish impulse: 25 to 50 ms
DCMA INPUTS
Current input (mA DC): 0 to –1, 0 to +1, –1 to +1, 0 to 5, 0 to 10,
Input impedance:
0 to 20, 4 to 20 (programmable)
379
Ω ±10%
Conversion range:
Accuracy:
Type:
–1 to + 20 mA DC
±0.2% of full scale
Passive
RTD INPUTS
Types (3-wire):
Sensing current:
Range:
Accuracy:
Isolation:
100
Ω Platinum, 100 & 120 Ω Nickel, 10
Ω Copper
5 mA
–50 to +250°C
±2°C
36 V pk-pk
IRIG-B INPUT
Amplitude modulation: 1 to 10 V pk-pk
DC shift:
Input impedance:
Isolation:
TTL
22 k
Ω
2 kV
REMOTE INPUTS (IEC 61850 GSSE/GOOSE)
Number of input points: 32, configured from 64 incoming bit pairs
Number of remote devices: 16
Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
Number of remote DPS inputs: 5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 2-23
2.4 SPECIFICATIONS
2
LOW RANGE
Nominal DC voltage:
Minimum DC voltage:
24 to 48 V
20 V
Maximum DC voltage: 60 V
Voltage loss hold-up: 20 ms duration at nominal
NOTE: Low range is DC only.
HIGH RANGE
Nominal DC voltage:
Minimum DC voltage:
125 to 250 V
88 V
Maximum DC voltage: 300 V
Nominal AC voltage:
Minimum AC voltage:
100 to 240 V at 50/60 Hz
88 V at 25 to 100 Hz
Maximum AC voltage: 265 V at 25 to 100 Hz
Voltage loss hold-up: 200 ms duration at nominal
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.4.6 POWER SUPPLY
ALL RANGES
Volt withstand:
Power consumption:
2
× Highest Nominal Voltage for 10 ms typical = 15 to 20 W/VA maximum = 50 W/VA contact factory for exact order code consumption
INTERNAL FUSE
RATINGS
Low range power supply: 8 A / 250 V
High range power supply: 4 A / 250 V
INTERRUPTING CAPACITY
AC:
DC:
100 000 A RMS symmetrical
10 000 A
FORM-A RELAY
Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90
Carry continuous: 6 A
Break (DC inductive, L/R = 40 ms):
VOLTAGE CURRENT
24 V
48 V
125 V
250 V
1 A
0.5 A
0.3 A
0.2 A
Operate time:
Contact material:
< 4 ms silver alloy
LATCHING RELAY
Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90
Carry continuous: 6 A
Break at L/R of 40 ms: 0.25 A DC max.
Operate time:
Contact material:
< 4 ms silver alloy
Control:
Control mode: separate operate and reset inputs operate-dominant or reset-dominant
FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR
Applicable voltage: approx. 15 to 250 V DC
Trickle current: approx. 1 to 2.5 mA
FORM-A CURRENT MONITOR
Threshold current: approx. 80 to 100 mA
2.4.7 OUTPUTS
FORM-C AND CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY
Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90
Carry continuous: 8 A
Break (DC inductive, L/R = 40 ms):
VOLTAGE CURRENT
24 V
48 V
125 V
250 V
1 A
0.5 A
0.3 A
0.2 A
Operate time:
Contact material:
< 8 ms silver alloy
FAST FORM-C RELAY
Make and carry: 0.1 A max. (resistive load)
Minimum load impedance:
INPUT
VOLTAGE
250 V DC
120 V DC
48 V DC
24 V DC
IMPEDANCE
2 W RESISTOR
20 K
Ω
5 K
Ω
2 K
Ω
2 K
Ω
1 W RESISTOR
50 K
2 K
2 K
2 K
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Note: values for 24 V and 48 V are the same due to a required 95% voltage drop across the load impedance.
Operate time: < 0.6 ms
Internal Limiting Resistor: 100
Ω, 2 W
2-24 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
SOLID-STATE OUTPUT RELAY
Operate and release time: <100
μs
Maximum voltage: 265 V DC
Maximum continuous current: 5 A at 45°C; 4 A at 65°C
Make and carry: for 0.2 s: for 0.03 s
Breaking capacity:
30 A as per ANSI C37.90
300 A
UL508 Utility application
(autoreclose scheme)
Industrial application
Operations/ interval
5000 ops /
1 s-On, 9 s-Off
5 ops /
0.2 s-On,
0.2 s-Off within 1 minute
10000 ops /
0.2 s-On,
30 s-Off
Break capability
(0 to 250 V
DC)
1000 ops /
0.5 s-On, 0.5 s-Off
3.2 A
L/R = 10 ms
1.6 A
L/R = 20 ms
0.8 A
L/R = 40 ms
10 A
L/R = 40 ms
10 A
L/R = 40 ms
IRIG-B OUTPUT
Amplitude:
Maximum load:
Time delay:
Isolation:
10 V peak-peak RS485 level
100 ohms
1 ms for AM input
40
μs for DC-shift input
2 kV
CONTROL POWER EXTERNAL OUTPUT
(FOR DRY CONTACT INPUT)
Capacity: 100 mA DC at 48 V DC
Isolation: ±300 Vpk
REMOTE OUTPUTS (IEC 61850 GSSE/GOOSE)
Standard output points: 32
User output points: 32
2.4 SPECIFICATIONS
DCMA OUTPUTS
Range: –1 to 1 mA, 0 to 1 mA, 4 to 20 mA
Max. load resistance: 12 k
Ω for –1 to 1 mA range
12 k
Ω for 0 to 1 mA range
600
Ω for 4 to 20 mA range
Accuracy: ±0.75% of full-scale for 0 to 1 mA range
±0.5% of full-scale for –1 to 1 mA range
±0.75% of full-scale for 0 to 20 mA range
99% Settling time to a step change: 100 ms
Isolation: 1.5 kV
Driving signal: any FlexAnalog quantity
Upper and lower limit for the driving signal: –90 to 90 pu in steps of
0.001
ETHERNET SWITCH (HIGH VOLTAGE, TYPE 2S)
Nominal DC voltage: 110 to 240 V DC
Minimum DC voltage: 88 V DC
Maximum DC voltage: 300 V DC
Input Current:
Nominal AC voltage:
0.9 A DC maximum
100 to 240 V AC, 0.26 to 0.16 A/26 to 39
VA at 50/60 Hz
Minimum AC voltage: 85 V AC, 0.31 A/22 VA at 50/60 Hz
Maximum AC voltage: 265 V AC, 0.16 A/42 VA at 50/60 Hz
Internal fuse: 3 A / 350 V AC, Ceramic, Axial SLO
BLO;
Manufacturer: Conquer; Part number:
SCD-A 003
ETHERNET SWITCH (LOW VOLTAGE, TYPE 2T)
Nominal voltage: 48 V DC, 0.31 A/15 W
Minimum voltage:
Maximum voltage:
Internal fuse:
30 V DC, 0.43 A/16 W
60 V DC
5 A / 350 V AC, Ceramic, Axial SLO
BLO;
Manufacturer: Conquer; Part number:
SCD-A 005
2
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 2-25
2.4 SPECIFICATIONS
2
RS232
Front port:
RS485
1 or 2 rear ports:
19.2 kbps, Modbus
®
RTU
Typical distance:
Isolation:
ETHERNET (FIBER)
Up to 115 kbps, Modbus
®
RTU, isolated together at 36 Vpk
1200 m
2 kV
PARAMETER
Wavelength
Connector
Transmit power
Receiver sensitivity
Power budget
Maximum input power
Typical distance
Duplex
Redundancy
10MB MULTI-
MODE
820 nm
ST
–20 dBm
–30 dBm
10 dB
–7.6 dBm
FIBER TYPE
100MB MULTI-
MODE
100MB SINGLE-
MODE
1310 nm
ST
–20 dBm
–30 dBm
10 dB
–14 dBm
1310 nm
SC
–15 dBm
–30 dBm
15 dB
–7 dBm
1.65 km full/half yes
2 km full/half yes
15 km full/half yes
The UR-2S and UR-2T only support 100 Mb multimode
ETHERNET (10/100 MB TWISTED PAIR)
Modes: 10 MB, 10/100 MB (auto-detect)
Connector: RJ45
SNTP clock synchronization error: <10 ms (typical)
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.4.8 COMMUNICATIONS
ETHERNET SWITCH FIBER OPTIC PORTS
Maximum fiber segment length calculation:
The maximum fiber segment length between two adjacent switches or between a switch and a device is calculated as follows. First, calculate the optical power budget (OPB) of each device using the manufacturer’s data sheets.
OPB
=
P
T MIN
)
–
P
R MIN
) where OPB = optical power budget, P
T
= transmitter output power, and P
R
= receiver sensitivity.
The worst case optical power budget (OPB
WORST
) is then calculated by taking the lower of the two calculated power budgets, subtracting 1 dB for LED aging, and then subtracting the total insertion loss. The total insertion loss is calculated by multiplying the number of connectors in each single fiber path by 0.5 dB. For example, with a single fiber cable between the two devices, there will be a minimum of two connections in either transmit or receive fiber paths for a total insertion loss of 1db for either direction:
Total insertion loss = number of connectors
×
0.5 dB
= 2
×
0.5 dB = 1.0 dB
The worst-case optical power budget between two type 2T or 2S modules using a single fiber cable is:
OPB
WORST
=
OPB
–
1 dB (LED aging)
– total insertion loss
10dB
–
1dB
–
1dB
=
8dB
To calculate the maximum fiber length, divide the worst-case optical power budget by the cable attenuation per unit distance specified in the manufacturer data sheets. For example, typical attenuation for 62.5/125
μm glass fiber optic cable is approximately 2.8 dB per km. In our example, this would result in the following maximum fiber length:
Maximum fiber length
=
OPB (in dB)
------------------------------------------------------cable loss (in dB/km)
=
2.8 dB/km
=
2.8km
The customer must use the attenuation specified within the manufacturer data sheets for accurate calculation of the maximum fiber length.
ETHERNET SWITCH 10/100BASE-T PORTS
Connector type: RJ45
MAXIMUM 10 MBPS ETHERNET SEGMENT LENGTHS
Unshielded twisted pair: 100 m (328 ft.)
Shielded twisted pair: 150 m (492 ft.)
MAXIMUM STANDARD FAST ETHERNET SEGMENT LENGTHS
10Base-T (CAT 3, 4, 5 UTP): 100 m (328 ft.)
100Base-TX (CAT 5 UTP):100 m (328 ft.)
Shielded twisted pair: 150 m (492 ft.)
2-26 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.4 SPECIFICATIONS
2.4.9 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
SHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR INTERFACE OPTIONS
INTERFACE TYPE
RS422
G.703
TYPICAL DISTANCE
1200 m
100 m
NOTE
RS422 distance is based on transmitter power and does not take into consideration the clock source provided by the user.
LINK POWER BUDGET
EMITTER,
FIBER TYPE
820 nm LED,
Multimode
1300 nm LED,
Multimode
1300 nm ELED,
Singlemode
1300 nm Laser,
Singlemode
1550 nm Laser,
Singlemode
TRANSMIT
POWER
–20 dBm
RECEIVED
SENSITIVITY
–30 dBm
–21 dBm
–23 dBm
–1 dBm
+5 dBm
–30 dBm
–32 dBm
–30 dBm
–30 dBm
POWER
BUDGET
10 dB
9 dB
9 dB
29 dB
35 dB
NOTE
NOTE
These power budgets are calculated from the manufacturer’s worst-case transmitter power and worst case receiver sensitivity.
The power budgets for the 1300nm ELED are calculated from the manufacturer's transmitter power and receiver sensitivity at ambient temperature. At extreme temperatures these values will deviate based on component tolerance. On average, the output power will decrease as the temperature is increased by a factor 1dB / 5°C.
MAXIMUM OPTICAL INPUT POWER
EMITTER, FIBER TYPE
820 nm LED, Multimode
1300 nm LED, Multimode
1300 nm ELED, Singlemode
1300 nm Laser, Singlemode
1550 nm Laser, Singlemode
MAX. OPTICAL
INPUT POWER
–7.6 dBm
–11 dBm
–14 dBm
–14 dBm
–14 dBm
TYPICAL LINK DISTANCE
EMITTER TYPE CABLE
TYPE
820 nm LED, multimode
62.5/125
μm
1300 nm LED, multimode
62.5/125
μm
1300 nm ELED, single mode
9/125
μm
1300 nm Laser, single mode
9/125
μm
1550 nm Laser, single-mode
9/125
μm
CONNECTOR
TYPE
ST
TYPICAL
DISTANCE
1.65 km
ST
ST
ST
ST
3.8 km
11.4 km
64 km
105 km
NOTE
Typical distances listed are based on the following assumptions for system loss. As actual losses will vary from one installation to another, the distance covered by your system may vary.
CONNECTOR LOSSES (TOTAL OF BOTH ENDS)
ST connector 2 dB
FIBER LOSSES
820 nm multimode
1300 nm multimode
3 dB/km
1 dB/km
1300 nm singlemode 0.35 dB/km
1550 nm singlemode 0.25 dB/km
Splice losses: One splice every 2 km, at 0.05 dB loss per splice.
SYSTEM MARGIN
3 dB additional loss added to calculations to compensate for all other losses.
Compensated difference in transmitting and receiving (channel asymmetry) channel delays using GPS satellite clock: 10 ms
AMBIENT TEMPERATURES
Storage temperature: –40 to 85°C
Operating temperature: –40 to 60°C; the LCD contrast may be impaired at temperatures less than –
20°C
HUMIDITY
Humidity: operating up to 95% (non-condensing) at
55°C (as per IEC60068-2-30 variant 1,
6days).
2.4.10 ENVIRONMENTAL
OTHER
Altitude:
Pollution degree:
Overvoltage category: II
2000 m (maximum)
II
Ingress protection: IP40 front, IP20 back
2
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 2-27
2.4 SPECIFICATIONS 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.4.11 TYPE TESTS
2
TYPE TESTS
TEST
Dielectric voltage withstand
Impulse voltage withstand
Damped oscillatory
Electrostatic discharge
RF immunity
Fast transient disturbance
Surge immunity
Conducted RF immunity
Power frequency immunity
Voltage interruption and ripple DC
Radiated and conducted emissions
Sinusoidal vibration
Shock and bump
Seismic
Power magnetic immunity
Pulse magnetic immunity
Damped magnetic immunity
Voltage dip and interruption
Damped oscillatory
REFERENCE STANDARD
EN60255-5
EN60255-5
IEC61000-4-18 / IEC60255-22-1
EN61000-4-2 / IEC60255-22-2
EN61000-4-3 / IEC60255-22-3
EN61000-4-4 / IEC60255-22-4
EN61000-4-5 / IEC60255-22-5
EN61000-4-6 / IEC60255-22-6
EN61000-4-7 / IEC60255-22-7
IEC60255-11
CISPR11 / CISPR22 / IEC60255-25
IEC60255-21-1
IEC60255-21-2
IEC60255-21-3
IEC61000-4-8
IEC61000-4-9
IEC61000-4-10
IEC61000-4-11
IEC61000-4-12
Conducted RF immunity, 0 to 150 kHz IEC61000-4-16
Voltage ripple IEC61000-4-17
Ingress protection IEC60529
Cold
Hot
Humidity
IEC60068-2-1
IEC60068-2-2
IEC60068-2-30
Damped oscillatory
RF immunity
Safety
Safety
Safety
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
IEEE/ANSIC37.90.2
UL508
UL C22.2-14
UL1053
TEST LEVEL
2.3 kV
5 kV
2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM
Level 3
Level 3
Class A and B
Level 3 and 4
Level 3
Class A and B
12% ripple, 200 ms interrupts
Class A
Class 1
Class 1
Class 1
Level 5
Level 4
Level 4
0, 40, 70, 80% dips; 250 / 300 cycle interrupts
2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM
Level 4
15% ripple
IP40 front, IP10 back
–40°C for 16 hours
85°C for 16 hours
6 day, variant 1
2.5 kV, 1 MHz
20 V/m, 80 MHz to 1 GHz e83849 NKCR e83849 NKCR7 e83849 NKCR
2.4.12 PRODUCTION TESTS
THERMAL
Products go through an environmental test based upon an
Accepted Quality Level (AQL) sampling process.
2-28 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.4 SPECIFICATIONS
2.4.13 APPROVALS
APPROVALS
COMPLIANCE
CE compliance
North America
MOUNTING
---
---
---
APPLICABLE
COUNCIL DIRECTIVE
Low voltage directive
EMC directive
ACCORDING TO
EN60255-5
EN60255-26 / EN50263
EN61000-6-5
UL508
UL1053
C22.2 No. 14
Attach mounting brackets using 20 inch-pounds (±2 inch-pounds) of torque.
2.4.14 MAINTENANCE
CLEANING
Normally, cleaning is not required; but for situations where dust has accumulated on the faceplate display, a dry cloth can be used.
NOTE
Units that are stored in a de-energized state should be powered up once per year, for one hour continuously, to avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors.
2
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 2-29
2
2.4 SPECIFICATIONS 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2-30 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTION
3 HARDWARE 3.1DESCRIPTION
3.1.1 PANEL CUTOUT a) HORIZONTAL UNITS
The L90 Line Current Differential System is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit with a removable faceplate.
The faceplate can be specified as either standard or enhanced at the time of ordering. The enhanced faceplate contains additional user-programmable pushbuttons and LED indicators.
The modular design allows the relay to be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified service person. The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules, and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear depth. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate, which must be removed when attempting to access the keypad or RS232 communications port.
The case dimensions are shown below, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When planning the location of your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent equipment.
The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port. The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four screws supplied with the relay.
3
11.016”
[279,81 mm]
9.687”
[246,05 mm]
6.995”
[177,67 mm]
17.56”
[446,02 mm]
19.040”
[483,62 mm]
Figure 3–1: L90 HORIZONTAL DIMENSIONS (ENHANCED PANEL)
7.460”
[189,48 mm]
6.960”
[176,78 mm]
842807A1.CDR
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 3-1
3
3.1 DESCRIPTION
18.370”
[466,60 mm]
CUT-OUT
0.280”
[7,11 mm]
Typ. x 4
4.000”
[101,60 mm]
17.750”
[450,85 mm]
842808A1.CDR
Figure 3–2: L90 HORIZONTAL MOUNTING (ENHANCED PANEL)
3 HARDWARE
Figure 3–3: L90 HORIZONTAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS (STANDARD PANEL) b) VERTICAL UNITS
The L90 Line Current Differential System is available as a reduced size (¾) vertical mount unit, with a removable faceplate.
The faceplate can be specified as either standard or enhanced at the time of ordering. The enhanced faceplate contains additional user-programmable pushbuttons and LED indicators.
The modular design allows the relay to be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified service person. The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules, and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear depth. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate, which must be removed when attempting to access the keypad or RS232 communications port.
The case dimensions are shown below, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When planning the location of your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent equipment.
3-2 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTION
The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port. The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four screws supplied with the relay.
7.482”
1.329”
11.015”
13.560”
3
15.000” 14.025”
4.000”
9.780”
Figure 3–4: L90 VERTICAL DIMENSIONS (ENHANCED PANEL)
843809A1.CDR
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 3-3
3
3.1 DESCRIPTION
e
UR SERIES
3 HARDWARE
Figure 3–5: L90 VERTICAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS (STANDARD PANEL)
For details on side mounting L90 devices with the enhanced front panel, refer to the following documents available online from the GE Multilin website.
• GEK-113180: UR-series UR-V side-mounting front panel assembly instructions.
• GEK-113181: Connecting the side-mounted UR-V enhanced front panel to a vertical UR-series device.
• GEK-113182: Connecting the side-mounted UR-V enhanced front panel to a vertically-mounted horizontal UR-series device.
For details on side mounting L90 devices with the standard front panel, refer to the figures below.
3-4 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTION
3
GE Multilin
Figure 3–6: L90 VERTICAL SIDE MOUNTING INSTALLATION (STANDARD PANEL)
L90 Line Current Differential System 3-5
3.1 DESCRIPTION 3 HARDWARE
3
Figure 3–7: L90 VERTICAL SIDE MOUNTING REAR DIMENSIONS (STANDARD PANEL)
3.1.2 MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION
WARNING
Module withdrawal and insertion may only be performed when control power has been removed from the unit. Inserting an incorrect module type into a slot may result in personal injury, damage to the unit or connected equipment, or undesired operation!
WARNING
Proper electrostatic discharge protection (for example, a static strap) must be used when coming in contact with modules while the relay is energized!
The relay, being modular in design, allows for the withdrawal and insertion of modules. Modules must only be replaced with like modules in their original factory configured slots.
The enhanced faceplate can be opened to the left, once the thumb screw has been removed, as shown below. This allows for easy accessibility of the modules for withdrawal. The new wide-angle hinge assembly in the enhanced front panel opens completely and allows easy access to all modules in the L90.
3-6 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTION
842812A1.CDR
Figure 3–8: UR MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION (ENHANCED FACEPLATE)
The standard faceplate can be opened to the left, once the sliding latch on the right side has been pushed up, as shown below. This allows for easy accessibility of the modules for withdrawal.
3
Figure 3–9: UR MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION (STANDARD FACEPLATE)
To properly remove a module, the ejector/inserter clips, located at the top and bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay. Record the original location of the module to ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot. Modules with current input provide automatic shorting of external CT circuits.
To properly insert a module, ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/ inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously.
When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
All CPU modules except the 9E are equipped with 10/100Base-T or 100Base-F Ethernet connectors. These connectors must be individually disconnected from the module before it can be removed from the chassis.
NOTE
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 3-7
3.1 DESCRIPTION 3 HARDWARE
NOTE
The 4.0x release of the L90 relay includes new hardware modules.The new CPU modules are specified with codes
9E and higher. The new CT/VT modules are specified with the codes 8F and higher.
The new CT/VT modules can only be used with new CPUs; similarly, old CT/VT modules can only be used with old
CPUs. To prevent hardware mismatches, the new modules have blue labels and a warning sticker stating “Attn.:
Ensure CPU and DSP module label colors are the same!”. In the event that there is a mismatch between the
CPU and CT/VT module, the relay will not function and a
DSP ERROR
or
HARDWARE MISMATCH
error will be displayed.
All other input and output modules are compatible with the new hardware. Firmware versions 4.0x and higher are only compatible with the new hardware modules. Previous versions of the firmware (3.4x and earlier) are only compatible with the older hardware modules.
3.1.3 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT
3
X W V
Tx1
Rx1
Tx1
Tx2
Rx2
Tx2
U c
L90
Line Differential Relay
GE Multilin
T
Technical Support:
Tel: (905) 294-6222
Fax: (905) 201-2098
S R
http://www.GEIndustrial.com/Multilin
P N b a c b a
RATINGS:
Control Power:
Contact Inputs:
Contact Outputs:
88-300V DC @ 35W / 77-265V AC @ 35VA
300V DC Max 10mA
Standard Pilot Duty / 250V AC 7.5A
360V A Resistive / 125V DC Break
4A @ L/R = 40mS / 300W
Model:
Mods:
Wiring Diagram:
Inst. Manual:
Serial Number:
Firmware:
Mfg. Date:
L90D00HCHF8AH6AM6BP8BX7A
000
ZZZZZZ
D
D
1998/01/05
c
M b
®
®
a
L K c
J b a
H
- M A A B 9 7 0 0 0 0 9 9 -
G F c b a
2
3
1 b a
1
2
4
3
4
D
Tx1
Rx1
CH1
Tx
Rx
CH2
Tx2
IN
OUT
Rx2
B
4
5
6
7
8
2
3
1 b a
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
8
Optional
Ethernet switch
Optional direct input/output module
Optional contact input/ output module
Optional contact input/output module
Optional
CT/VT or contact input/output module
Optional contact input/output module
CT/VT module
Figure 3–10: REAR TERMINAL VIEW
Do not touch any rear terminals while the relay is energized!
CPU module
(Ethernet not available when ordered with
Ethernet switch)
Power supply module
831781A4.CDR
WARNING
The relay follows a convention with respect to terminal number assignments which are three characters long assigned in order by module slot position, row number, and column letter. Two-slot wide modules take their slot designation from the first slot position (nearest to CPU module) which is indicated by an arrow marker on the terminal block. See the following figure for an example of rear terminal assignments.
3-8 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTION
Figure 3–11: EXAMPLE OF MODULES IN F AND H SLOTS
3
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 3-9
3
3.2 WIRING
3.2WIRING
3-10
3 HARDWARE
3.2.1 TYPICAL WIRING
A B C
TYPICAL CONFIGURATION
THE AC SIGNAL PATH IS CONFIGURABLE
(5 Amp)
52
TRIPPING DIRECTION
N
OPTIONAL
This diagram is based on the following order code:
L90-E00-HCL-F8F-H6G-L6D-N6K-S6C-U6H-W7A
This diagram provides an example of how the device is wired, not specifically how to wire the device. Please refer to the Instruction Manual for additional details on wiring based on various configurations.
Ground at
Remote
Device
TO
REMOTE
L90
DC
AC or DC
Shielded twisted pairs
Co-axial *
Co-axial * - For IRIG-B Input only use one terminal as input
Co-axial
Co-axial
No. 10AWG minimum
MODULES MUST BE
GROUNDED IF
TERMINAL IS
PROVIDED
H7a
H7c
H8a
H8c
H7b
H5a
H5c
H6a
H6c
H5b
H8b
U7a
U7c
U8a
U8c
U7b
U8b
L7a
L7c
L8a
L8c
L7b
L8b
L5a
L5c
L6a
L6c
L5b
L3a
L3c
L4a
L4c
L3b
L1a
L1c
L2a
L2c
L1b
Tx2 Rx2
B1b
B1a
B2b
B3a
B3b
B5b
B6b
B6a
B8a
B8b
HI
LO
Tx1 Rx1
CONTACT INPUT L1a
CONTACT INPUT L1c
CONTACT INPUT L2a
CONTACT INPUT L2c
COMMON L1b
CONTACT INPUT L3a
CONTACT INPUT L3c
CONTACT INPUT L4a
CONTACT INPUT L4c
COMMON L3b
CONTACT INPUT L5a
CONTACT INPUT L5c
CONTACT INPUT L6a
CONTACT INPUT L6c
COMMON L5b
CONTACT INPUT L7a
CONTACT INPUT L7c
CONTACT INPUT L8a
CONTACT INPUT L8c
COMMON L7b
SURGE
FIBER
CHANNEL 1
FIBER
CHANNEL 2
CRITICAL
FAILURE
48 V DC
OUTPUT
CONTROL
POWER
SURGE
FILTER
D1b
D2b
D3b
D1a
D2a
D3a
D4b
D4a com com
BNC
BNC
CURRENT INPUTS
8F
DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT INPUT H5a
CONTACT INPUT H5c
CONTACT INPUT H6a
CONTACT INPUT H6c
COMMON H5b
CONTACT INPUT H7a
CONTACT INPUT H7c
CONTACT INPUT H8a
CONTACT INPUT H8c
COMMON H7b
SURGE
CONTACT INPUT U7a
CONTACT INPUT U7c
CONTACT INPUT U8a
CONTACT INPUT U8c
COMMON U7b
DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS
SURGE
GE Consumer & Industrial
Multilin
L90
LINE DIFFERENTIAL RELAY
6G
VOLTAGE INPUTS
H1
V
H2
V
H3
V
H4
V
6H
U1
V
I
I
U2
V
I
U3
V
I
U4
V
U5
V
U6
V
I
I
I
I
I
I
RS485
COM 1
RS485
COM 2
IRIG-B
Input
IRIG-B
Output
DB-9
RS-232
(front)
CONTACTS SHOWN
WITH NO
CONTROL POWER
GROUND BUS
X
7
W
COM
V U
6
Inputs/ outputs
*
T S
6
Inputs/ outputs
*
R P
MODULE ARRANGEMENT
N
6
Inputs/ outputs
*
M L
6
Inputs/ outputs
*
K J
6
H
Inputs/ outputs
G
8
F
CT/VT
(Rear view)
* Optional
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
N8
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
Figure 3–12: TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM
D
9
CPU
B
1
Power supply
S6a
S6b
S6c
S7a
S7b
S7c
S8a
S8b
S8c
S4b
S4c
S5a
S5b
S5c
S1a
S1b
S1c
S2a
S2b
S2c
S3a
S3b
S3c
S4a
N4b
N4c
N5a
N5b
N5c
N6a
N6b
N6c
N7a
N7b
N7c
N8a
N8b
N8c
N2c
N3a
N3b
N3c
N4a
N1a
N1b
N1c
N2a
N2b
U3a
U3b
U3c
U4a
U4b
U4c
U1a
U1b
U1c
U2a
U2b
U2c
U5a
U5b
U5c
U6a
U6b
U6c
H2c
H3a
H3b
H3c
H4a
H4b
H4c
H1a
H1b
H1c
H2a
H2b
TC
2
TC
1
TXD
RXD
SGND
UR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9 PIN
CONNECTOR
COMPUTER
1 8
2
3
4
3
2
20
RXD
TXD
5
6
7
8
4
5
7
6
9 22
SGND
25 PIN
CONNECTOR
831782A5.CDR
PERSONAL
COMPUTER
L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 3.2 WIRING
3.2.2 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH
The dielectric strength of the UR-series module hardware is shown in the following table:
Table 3–1: DIELECTRIC STRENGTH OF UR-SERIES MODULE HARDWARE
MODULE
TYPE
4
5
2
3
6
1
1
1
7
8
9
MODULE FUNCTION
Power supply
Power supply
Power supply
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Analog inputs/outputs
Digital inputs/outputs
G.703
RS422
CT/VT
CPU
TERMINALS
FROM
High (+); Low (+); (–)
48 V DC (+) and (–)
Relay terminals
N/A
N/A
N/A
All except 8b
All
All except 2b, 3a, 7b, 8a
All except 6a, 7b, 8a
All
All
TO
Chassis
Chassis
Chassis
N/A
N/A
N/A
Chassis
Chassis
Chassis
Chassis
Chassis
Chassis
DIELECTRIC STRENGTH
(AC)
2000 V AC for 1 minute
2000 V AC for 1 minute
2000 V AC for 1 minute
N/A
N/A
N/A
< 50 V DC
2000 V AC for 1 minute
2000 V AC for 1 minute
< 50 V DC
2000 V AC for 1 minute
2000 V AC for 1 minute
Filter networks and transient protection clamps are used in the hardware to prevent damage caused by high peak voltage transients, radio frequency interference (RFI), and electromagnetic interference (EMI). These protective components can
be damaged by application of the ANSI/IEEE C37.90 specified test voltage for a period longer than the specified one minute.
3.2.3 CONTROL POWER
3
CAUTION
CONTROL POWER SUPPLIED TO THE RELAY MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE MATCHING POWER SUPPLY
RANGE OF THE RELAY. IF THE VOLTAGE IS APPLIED TO THE WRONG TERMINALS, DAMAGE MAY
OCCUR!
NOTE
The L90 relay, like almost all electronic relays, contains electrolytic capacitors. These capacitors are well known to be subject to deterioration over time if voltage is not applied periodically. Deterioration can be avoided by powering the relays up once a year.
The power supply module can be ordered for two possible voltage ranges, with or without a redundant power option. Each range has a dedicated input connection for proper operation. The ranges are as shown below (see the Technical specifica-
tions section of chapter 2 for additional details):
• Low (LO) range: 24 to 48 V (DC only) nominal.
• High (HI) range: 125 to 250 V nominal.
The power supply module provides power to the relay and supplies power for dry contact input connections.
The power supply module provides 48 V DC power for dry contact input connections and a critical failure relay (see the
Typical wiring diagram earlier). The critical failure relay is a form-C device that will be energized once control power is applied and the relay has successfully booted up with no critical self-test failures. If on-going self-test diagnostic checks detect a critical failure (see the Self-test errors section in chapter 7) or control power is lost, the relay will de-energize.
For high reliability systems, the L90 has a redundant option in which two L90 power supplies are placed in parallel on the bus. If one of the power supplies become faulted, the second power supply will assume the full load of the relay without any interruptions. Each power supply has a green LED on the front of the module to indicate it is functional. The critical fail relay of the module will also indicate a faulted power supply.
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 3-11
3
3.2 WIRING
An LED on the front of the control power module shows the status of the power supply:
LED INDICATION
CONTINUOUS ON
ON / OFF CYCLING
OFF
POWER SUPPLY
OK
Failure
Failure
AC or DC
NOTE:
14 gauge stranded wire with suitable disconnect devices is recommended.
Heavy copper conductor or braided wire
AC or DC
3 HARDWARE
Switchgear ground bus
B8b B8a B6a B6b B5b
FILTER SURGE
–
+
LOW
CONTROL
POWER
+
HIGH
UR-series protection system
+
—
OPTIONAL
ETHERNET SWITCH
827759AA.CDR
Figure 3–13: CONTROL POWER CONNECTION
3.2.4 CT/VT MODULES
A CT/VT module may have voltage inputs on channels 1 through 4 inclusive, or channels 5 through 8 inclusive. Channels 1 and 5 are intended for connection to phase A, and are labeled as such in the relay. Likewise, channels 2 and 6 are intended for connection to phase B, and channels 3 and 7 are intended for connection to phase C.
Channels 4 and 8 are intended for connection to a single-phase source. For voltage inputs, these channel are labelled as auxiliary voltage (VX). For current inputs, these channels are intended for connection to a CT between system neutral and ground, and are labelled as ground current (IG).
CAUTION
Verify that the connection made to the relay nominal current of 1 A or 5 A matches the secondary rating of the connected CTs. Unmatched CTs may result in equipment damage or inadequate protection.
CT/VT modules may be ordered with a standard ground current input that is the same as the phase current input. Each AC current input has an isolating transformer and an automatic shorting mechanism that shorts the input when the module is withdrawn from the chassis. There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs. Current transformers with 1 to
50000 A primaries and 1 A or 5 A secondaries may be used.
The above modules are available with enhanced diagnostics. These modules can automatically detect CT/VT hardware failure and take the relay out of service.
CT connections for both ABC and ACB phase rotations are identical as shown in the Typical wiring diagram.
The exact placement of a zero-sequence core balance CT to detect ground fault current is shown below. Twisted-pair cabling on the zero-sequence CT is recommended.
3-12 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
UNSHIELDED CABLE
Source
A B C N
Ground connection to neutral must be on the source side
G
Ground outside CT
3.2 WIRING
SHIELDED CABLE
A
Source
B C
Stress cone shields
LOAD
LOAD
Figure 3–14: ZERO-SEQUENCE CORE BALANCE CT INSTALLATION
996630A5
The phase voltage channels are used for most metering and protection purposes. The auxiliary voltage channel is used as input for the synchrocheck and volts-per-hertz features.
Substitute the tilde “~” symbol with the slot position of the module in the following figure.
NOTE
To ground; must be on load side
3
Current inputs
8F, 8G, 8L, and 8M modules (4 CTs and 4 VTs)
Voltage inputs
Current inputs
8H, 8J, 8N, and 8R modules (8 CTs)
Figure 3–15: CT/VT MODULE WIRING
842766A3.CDR
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 3-13
3.2 WIRING 3 HARDWARE
3.2.5 PROCESS BUS MODULES
3
The L90 can be ordered with a process bus interface module. This module is designed to interface with the GE Multilin
HardFiber system, allowing bi-directional IEC 61850 fiber optic communications with up to eight HardFiber merging units, known as Bricks. The HardFiber system has been designed to integrate seamlessly with the existing UR-series applications, including protection functions, FlexLogic™, metering, and communications.
The IEC 61850 process bus system offers the following benefits.
• Drastically reduces labor associated with design, installation, and testing of protection and control applications using the L90 by reducing the number of individual copper terminations.
• Integrates seamlessly with existing L90 applications, since the IEC 61850 process bus interface module replaces the traditional CT/VT modules.
• Communicates using open standard IEC 61850 messaging.
For additional details on the HardFiber system, refer to GE publication GEK-113500: HardFiber System Instruction Manual.
3.2.6 CONTACT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
Every contact input/output module has 24 terminal connections. They are arranged as three terminals per row, with eight rows in total. A given row of three terminals may be used for the outputs of one relay. For example, for form-C relay outputs, the terminals connect to the normally open (NO), normally closed (NC), and common contacts of the relay. For a form-A output, there are options of using current or voltage detection for feature supervision, depending on the module ordered.
The terminal configuration for contact inputs is different for the two applications.
The contact inputs are grouped with a common return. The L90 has two versions of grouping: four inputs per common return and two inputs per common return. When a contact input/output module is ordered, four inputs per common is used.
The four inputs per common allows for high-density inputs in combination with outputs, with a compromise of four inputs sharing one common. If the inputs must be isolated per row, then two inputs per common return should be selected (4D module).
The tables and diagrams on the following pages illustrate the module types (6A, etc.) and contact arrangements that may be ordered for the relay. Since an entire row is used for a single contact output, the name is assigned using the module slot position and row number. However, since there are two contact inputs per row, these names are assigned by module slot position, row number, and column position.
Some form-A / solid-state relay outputs include circuits to monitor the DC voltage across the output contact when it is open, and the DC current through the output contact when it is closed. Each of the monitors contains a level detector whose output is set to logic “On = 1” when the current in the circuit is above the threshold setting. The voltage monitor is set to “On =
1” when the current is above about 1 to 2.5 mA, and the current monitor is set to “On = 1” when the current exceeds about
80 to 100 mA. The voltage monitor is intended to check the health of the overall trip circuit, and the current monitor can be used to seal-in the output contact until an external contact has interrupted current flow.
Block diagrams are shown below for form-A and solid-state relay outputs with optional voltage monitor, optional current monitor, and with no monitoring. The actual values shown for contact output 1 are the same for all contact outputs.
3-14 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 3.2 WIRING a) Voltage with optional
current monitoring
~#a
I
V
~#b
~#c
If Idc 1mA, otherwise
Cont Op 1
Cont Op 1
= “VOn”
= “VOff”
Load
+
Voltage monitoring only
V
b) Current with optional
voltage monitoring
~#a
I ~#b
~#c
If Idc 80mA,
Cont Op 1
otherwise
Cont Op 1
= “IOn”
= “IOff”
Load
+
Current monitoring only
V
I
~#a
~#b
If Idc 80mA,
Cont Op 1
Cont Op 1
= “IOn”
“IOff”
If Idc 1mA, otherwise
Cont Op 1
= “VOn”
Cont Op 1
= “VOff”
Load
V
~#c
Both voltage and current monitoring
+
I
~#a
~#b
If Idc 80mA,
Cont Op 1
otherwise
Cont Op 1
= “IOn”
= “IOff”
If Idc 1mA, otherwise
Cont Op 1
Cont Op 1
= “VOn”
= “VOff”
Load
~#c
Both voltage and current monitoring
(external jumper a-b is required)
+
~#a
~#b
~#c
Load
+
c) No monitoring
827862A3.CDR
Figure 3–16: FORM-A AND SOLID-STATE CONTACT OUTPUTS WITH VOLTAGE AND CURRENT MONITORING
The operation of voltage and current monitors is reflected with the corresponding FlexLogic™ operands (
CONT OP # VON
,
CONT OP # VOFF
, and
CONT OP # ION
) which can be used in protection, control, and alarm logic. The typical application of the voltage monitor is breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring; a typical application of the current monitor is seal-in of the control command.
Refer to the Digital elements section of chapter 5 for an example of how form-A and solid-state relay contacts can be applied for breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring.
WARNING
Relay contacts must be considered unsafe to touch when the unit is energized! If the relay contacts need to be used for low voltage accessible applications, it is the customer’s responsibility to ensure proper insulation levels!
NOTE
USE OF FORM-A AND SOLID-STATE RELAY OUTPUTS IN HIGH IMPEDANCE CIRCUITS
For form-A and solid-state relay output contacts internally equipped with a voltage measuring cIrcuit across the contact, the circuit has an impedance that can cause a problem when used in conjunction with external high input impedance monitoring equipment such as modern relay test set trigger circuits. These monitoring circuits may continue to read the form-A contact as being closed after it has closed and subsequently opened, when measured as an impedance.
The solution to this problem is to use the voltage measuring trigger input of the relay test set, and connect the form-
A contact through a voltage-dropping resistor to a DC voltage source. If the 48 V DC output of the power supply is used as a source, a 500
Ω, 10 W resistor is appropriate. In this configuration, the voltage across either the form-A contact or the resistor can be used to monitor the state of the output.
Wherever a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute with the slot position of the module; wherever a number sign “#” appears, substitute the contact number
NOTE
NOTE
When current monitoring is used to seal-in the form-A and solid-state relay contact outputs, the Flex-
Logic™ operand driving the contact output should be given a reset delay of 10 ms to prevent damage of the output contact (in situations when the element initiating the contact output is bouncing, at values in the region of the pickup value).
3
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 3-15
3.2 WIRING 3 HARDWARE
3
Table 3–2: CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE ASSIGNMENTS
~6A MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT OR
INPUT
~1
~2
~3
~4
~5a, ~5c
~6a, ~6c
~7a, ~7c
~8a, ~8c
Form-A
Form-A
Form-C
Form-C
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
~6B MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT OR
INPUT
~1
~2
~3
~4
~5
~6
~7a, ~7c
~8a, ~8c
Form-A
Form-A
Form-C
Form-C
Form-C
Form-C
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
~6C MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~1
~2
Form-C
Form-C
~3
~4
~5
~6
~7
~8
Form-C
Form-C
Form-C
Form-C
Form-C
Form-C
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
~1
~6E MODULE
OUTPUT OR
INPUT
Form-C
~2
~3
~4
~5a, ~5c
Form-C
Form-C
Form-C
2 Inputs
~6a, ~6c
~7a, ~7c
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
~6F MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~1 Fast Form-C
~2
~3
~4
~5
Fast Form-C
Fast Form-C
Fast Form-C
Fast Form-C
~6
~7
~8
Fast Form-C
Fast Form-C
Fast Form-C
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
~1
~6G MODULE
OUTPUT OR
INPUT
Form-A
~2
~3
~4
~5a, ~5c
Form-A
Form-A
Form-A
2 Inputs
~6a, ~6c
~7a, ~7c
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
~6D MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~1a, ~1c
~2a, ~2c
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
~3a, ~3c
~4a, ~4c
~5a, ~5c
~6a, ~6c
~7a, ~7c
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
~1
~6H MODULE
OUTPUT OR
INPUT
Form-A
~2
~3
~4
~5
Form-A
Form-A
Form-A
Form-A
~6
~7a, ~7c
~8a, ~8c
Form-A
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
~6K MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~1
~2
~3
~4
Form-C
Form-C
Form-C
Form-C
~5
~6
~7
~8
Fast Form-C
Fast Form-C
Fast Form-C
Fast Form-C
~6L MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT OR
INPUT
~1
~2
~3
~4
Form-A
Form-A
Form-C
Form-C
~5a, ~5c
~6a, ~6c
~7a, ~7c
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
~6M MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT OR
INPUT
~1
~2
~3
~4
Form-A
Form-A
Form-C
Form-C
~5
~6
~7a, ~7c
~8a, ~8c
Form-C
Form-C
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
~6N MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT OR
INPUT
~1
~2
~3
~4
Form-A
Form-A
Form-A
Form-A
~5a, ~5c
~6a, ~6c
~7a, ~7c
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
~1
~6P MODULE
OUTPUT OR
INPUT
Form-A
~2
~3
~4
~5
~6
~7a, ~7c
~8a, ~8c
Form-A
Form-A
Form-A
Form-A
Form-A
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
~1
~6R MODULE
OUTPUT OR
INPUT
Form-A
~2
~3
~4
~5a, ~5c
~6a, ~6c
~7a, ~7c
~8a, ~8c
Form-A
Form-C
Form-C
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
~1
~6S MODULE
OUTPUT OR
INPUT
Form-A
~2
~3
~4
~5
~6
~7a, ~7c
~8a, ~8c
Form-A
Form-C
Form-C
Form-C
Form-C
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
~1
~6T MODULE
OUTPUT OR
INPUT
Form-A
~2
~3
~4
~5a, ~5c
~6a, ~6c
~7a, ~7c
~8a, ~8c
Form-A
Form-A
Form-A
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
3-16 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
~6U MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT OR
INPUT
~1
~2
~3
~4
Form-A
Form-A
Form-A
Form-A
~5
~6
~7a, ~7c
~8a, ~8c
Form-A
Form-A
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
~6V MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT OR
INPUT
~1
~2
~3
~4
Form-A
Form-A
Form-C
2 Outputs
~5a, ~5c
~6a, ~6c
~7a, ~7c
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
~67 MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~1
~2
~3
~4
Form-A
Form-A
Form-A
Form-A
~5
~6
~7
~8
Form-A
Form-A
Form-A
Form-A
~4B MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~1
~2
~3
~4
~5
Not Used
Solid-State
Not Used
Solid-State
Not Used
~6
~7
~8
Solid-State
Not Used
Solid-State
~4C MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~1
~2
~3
~4
~5
Not Used
Solid-State
Not Used
Solid-State
Not Used
~6
~7
~8
Solid-State
Not Used
Solid-State
~4D MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~1a, ~1c
~2a, ~2c
~3a, ~3c
~4a, ~4c
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
~6a, ~6c
~7a, ~7c
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
3.2 WIRING
~4A MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~1
~2
~3
~4
Not Used
Solid-State
Not Used
Solid-State
~5
~6
~7
~8
Not Used
Solid-State
Not Used
Solid-State
~4L MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~1
~2
~3
~4
~5
2 Outputs
2 Outputs
2 Outputs
2 Outputs
2 Outputs
~6
~7
~8
2 Outputs
2 Outputs
Not Used
3
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 3-17
3
3.2 WIRING 3 HARDWARE
842762A2.CDR
3-18
Figure 3–17: CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE WIRING (1 of 2)
L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 3.2 WIRING
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~
4b
~ 4c
~ 5a
~ 5b
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6b
~ 6c
~
7a
~ 7b
~ 7c
~
8a
~ 8b
~ 8c
~ 1
~ 2
~
3
~
4
~ 5
~ 6
~ 7
~ 8
~
7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~
8c
~ 7b
~ 5a
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6c
~ 5b
~ 8b SURGE
DIGITAL I/O 6L
~ 1
~ 2
~
3
~
4
V
I
V
I
~ 1a
~
~
1b
1c
~ 2a
~
~
2b
2c
~
~
~ 3a
3b
3c
~
~
~ 4a
4b
4c
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
~ 8b SURGE
DIGITAL I/O 6M
~ 1
~ 2
~
3
~
4
~ 5
~ 6
V
I
V
I
~ 1a
~
~
1b
1c
~ 2a
~
~
2b
2c
~
~
~ 3a
3b
3c
~
~
~ 4a
4b
4c
~
~
5a
5b
~ 5c
~
~
6a
6b
~ 6c
~ 5a
~ 5c
~
6a
~ 6c
~ 5b
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
~ 8b
~
5a
~ 5c
~ 6a
~
6c
~ 5b
~ 7a
~ 7c
~
8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
~ 8b
SURGE
DIGITAL I/O 6N
~ 1
~ 2
~ 3
~
4
~ 1
~ 2
V
I
V
I
V
I
V
I
~ 1a
~ 1b
~
~
1c
2a
~
~
2b
2c
~ 3a
~
~
3b
3c
~ 4a
~
~
4b
4c
~ 7a
~ 7c
~
8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
~ 8b
~ 7a
~
7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~
7b
~ 8b
SURGE
DIGITAL I/O 6P
~ 1
~ 2
~ 3
~
4
~
5
~ 6
V
I
V
I
V
I
V
I
V
I
V
I
~ 5a
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6c
~
5b
~
7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~
8c
~ 7b
~ 8b
SURGE
DIGITAL I/O
6R
~ 3
~ 4
~
~
1a
1b
~
~
~ 1c
2a
2b
~
~
~ 2c
3a
3b
~
~
3c
4a
~ 4b
~
4c
SURGE
DIGITAL I/O
6S
~
1
~
2
~ 3
~ 4
SURGE
DIGITAL I/O 6T
~ 1
~ 2
~
3
~
4
~ 1a
~
~
1b
1c
~ 2a
~
~
2b
2c
~
~
~ 3a
3b
3c
~
~
4a
4b
~ 4c
~
7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~
8c
~ 7b
~ 8b SURGE
DIGITAL I/O
6U
~ 5
~ 6
~ 1
~ 2
~ 3
~ 4
~ 5
~ 6
~
1a
~ 1b
~
~
1c
2a
~ 2b
~
~
2c
3a
~ 3b
~
~
3c
4a
~
~
4b
4c
~ 5a
~
~
5b
5c
~ 6a
~
~
6b
6c
842763A2.CDR
Figure 3–18: CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE WIRING (2 of 2)
CAUTION
CORRECT POLARITY MUST BE OBSERVED FOR ALL CONTACT INPUT AND SOLID STATE OUTPUT CON-
NECTIONS FOR PROPER FUNCTIONALITY.
~
~
3a
3b
~
~
~ 3c
4a
4b
~
~
~ 4c
5a
5b
~
~
~ 1a
1b
1c
~
~
2a
2b
~ 2c
~
~
~ 5c
6a
6b
~ 6c
~ 3a
~
~
3b
3c
~ 4a
~
~
4b
4c
~ 1a
~
~
1b
1c
~ 2a
~
~
2b
2c
~
~
5a
5b
~ 5c
~
~
6a
6b
~ 6c
3
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 3-19
3
3.2 WIRING 3 HARDWARE
CONTACT INPUTS:
A dry contact has one side connected to terminal B3b. This is the positive 48 V DC voltage rail supplied by the power supply module. The other side of the dry contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. Each contact input group has its own common (negative) terminal which must be connected to the DC negative terminal (B3a) of the power supply module. When a dry contact closes, a current of 1 to 3 mA will flow through the associated circuit.
A wet contact has one side connected to the positive terminal of an external DC power supply. The other side of this contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. If a wet contact is used, then the negative side of the external source must be connected to the relay common (negative) terminal of each contact group. The maximum external source voltage for this arrangement is 300 V DC.
The voltage threshold at which each group of four contact inputs will detect a closed contact input is programmable as
17 V DC for 24 V sources, 33 V DC for 48 V sources, 84 V DC for 110 to 125 V sources, and 166 V DC for 250 V sources.
(Dry)
DIGITAL I/O 6B
~ 7a
~ 7c
~
~
8a
8c
+
+
+
+
~
~
CONTACT IN 8a
~ 7b
-
~ 8b SURGE
24-250V
(Wet)
~
~
~
~
DIGITAL I/O 6B
~ 7a
7c
8a
8c
+
+
+
+
~
~
CONTACT IN 8a
7b
-
~ 8b SURGE
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
1b
1a
2b
3a -
3b +
5b HI+
6b LO+
6a
8a
-
8b
CRITICAL
FAILURE
48 VDC
OUTPUT
CONTROL
POWER
SURGE
FILTER
827741A4.CDR
Figure 3–19: DRY AND WET CONTACT INPUT CONNECTIONS
Wherever a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute with the slot position of the module.
NOTE
Contact outputs may be ordered as form-a or form-C. The form-A contacts may be connected for external circuit supervision. These contacts are provided with voltage and current monitoring circuits used to detect the loss of DC voltage in the circuit, and the presence of DC current flowing through the contacts when the form-A contact closes. If enabled, the current monitoring can be used as a seal-in signal to ensure that the form-A contact does not attempt to break the energized inductive coil circuit and weld the output contacts.
There is no provision in the relay to detect a DC ground fault on 48 V DC control power external output. We recommend using an external DC supply.
NOTE
3-20 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 3.2 WIRING
USE OF CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING:
The contact inputs sense a change of the state of the external device contact based on the measured current. When external devices are located in a harsh industrial environment (either outdoor or indoor), their contacts can be exposed to various types of contamination. Normally, there is a thin film of insulating sulfidation, oxidation, or contaminates on the surface of the contacts, sometimes making it difficult or impossible to detect a change of the state. This film must be removed to establish circuit continuity – an impulse of higher than normal current can accomplish this.
The contact inputs with auto-burnish create a high current impulse when the threshold is reached to burn off this oxidation layer as a maintenance to the contacts. Afterwards the contact input current is reduced to a steady-state current. The impulse will have a 5 second delay after a contact input changes state.
current
50 to 70 mA
3
3 mA time
25 to 50 ms 842749A1.CDR
Figure 3–20: CURRENT THROUGH CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING
Regular contact inputs limit current to less than 3 mA to reduce station battery burden. In contrast, contact inputs with autoburnishing allow currents up to 50 to 70 mA at the first instance when the change of state was sensed. Then, within 25 to
50 ms, this current is slowly reduced to 3 mA as indicated above. The 50 to 70 mA peak current burns any film on the contacts, allowing for proper sensing of state changes. If the external device contact is bouncing, the auto-burnishing starts when external device contact bouncing is over.
Another important difference between the auto-burnishing input module and the regular input modules is that only two contact inputs have common ground, as opposed to four contact inputs sharing one common ground (refer to the Contact Input
and Output Module Wiring diagrams). This is beneficial when connecting contact inputs to separate voltage sources. Consequently, the threshold voltage setting is also defined per group of two contact inputs.
The auto-burnish feature can be disabled or enabled using the DIP switches found on each daughter card. There is a DIP switch for each contact, for a total of 16 inputs.
CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = OFF
CONTACT INPUT 2 AUTO-BURNISH = OFF
CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = ON
CONTACT INPUT 2 AUTO-BURNISH = OFF
CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH
CONTACT INPUT 2 AUTO-BURNISH
= OFF
= ON
CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = ON
CONTACT INPUT 2 AUTO-BURNISH = ON
NOTE
842751A1.CDR
Figure 3–21: AUTO-BURNISH DIP SWITCHES
The auto-burnish circuitry has an internal fuse for safety purposes. During regular maintenance, the auto-burnish functionality can be checked using an oscilloscope.
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 3-21
3.2 WIRING 3 HARDWARE
3.2.7 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
3
Transducer input modules can receive input signals from external dcmA output transducers (dcmA In) or resistance temperature detectors (RTD). Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from these external transducers and convert these signals into a digital format for use as required.
Transducer output modules provide DC current outputs in several standard dcmA ranges. Software is provided to configure virtually any analog quantity used in the relay to drive the analog outputs.
Every transducer input/output module has a total of 24 terminal connections. These connections are arranged as three terminals per row with a total of eight rows. A given row may be used for either inputs or outputs, with terminals in column "a" having positive polarity and terminals in column "c" having negative polarity. Since an entire row is used for a single input/ output channel, the name of the channel is assigned using the module slot position and row number.
Each module also requires that a connection from an external ground bus be made to terminal 8b. The current outputs require a twisted-pair shielded cable, where the shield is grounded at one end only. The figure below illustrates the transducer module types (5A, 5C, 5D, 5E, and 5F) and channel arrangements that may be ordered for the relay.
Wherever a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute with the slot position of the module.
NOTE
3-22
Figure 3–22: TRANSDUCER INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE WIRING
L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 3.2 WIRING
3.2.8 RS232 FACEPLATE PORT
A 9-pin RS232C serial port is located on the L90 faceplate for programming with a personal computer. All that is required to use this interface is a personal computer running the EnerVista UR Setup software provided with the relay. Cabling for the
RS232 port is shown in the following figure for both 9-pin and 25-pin connectors.
The baud rate for this port is fixed at 19200 bps.
NOTE
3
Figure 3–23: RS232 FACEPLATE PORT CONNECTION
3.2.9 CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS a) OPTIONS
In addition to the faceplate RS232 port, the L90 provides two additional communication ports or a managed six-port Ethernet switch, depending on the installed CPU module.
The CPU modules do not require a surge ground connection.
NOTE
Table 3–3: CPU MODULE COMMUNICATIONS
9N
9P
9R
9S
9J
9K
9L
9M
CPU TYPE
9E
9G
9H
COM1
RS485
10Base-F and 10Base-T
Redundant 10Base-F
100Base-FX
Redundant 100Base-FX
100Base-FX
Redundant 100Base-FX
10/100Base-T
100Base-FX
Redundant 100Base-FX
Ethernet switch module with two 10/100Base-T and four 100Base-FX ports
COM2
RS485
RS485
RS485
RS485
RS485
RS485
RS485
RS485
RS485
RS485
RS485
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 3-23
3.2 WIRING 3 HARDWARE
3
Ground at remote device
Ground at remote device
Ground at remote device
Ground at remote device
Ground at remote device
Shielded twisted-pairs
Co-axial cable
Co-axial cable
D1b
D2b
D3b
D1a
D2a
D3a
D4b
D4a
+
—
COMMON
+
—
COMMON
+
—
BNC
BNC
RS485
COM1
RS485
COM2
IRIG-B input
IRIG-B output
Ground at remote device
SM fiber optic cable
Co-axial cable
Co-axial cable
D1a
D2a
D3a
D4b
D4a
100Base-FL
NORMAL COM1
+
—
COMMON
+
— IRIG-B input
BNC
RS485
COM2
BNC
IRIG-B output
MM fiber optic cable
Shielded twisted-pairs
Tx1
Rx1
10Base-FL
D1a
D2a
D3a
D4b
D4a
10Base-T
+
—
COMMON
+
—
BNC
NORMAL
RS485
COM2
IRIG-B input
BNC
IRIG-B output
Ground at remote device
SM fiber optic cable
Shielded twisted-pairs
Co-axial cable
Co-axial cable
100Base-FL
NORMAL
D1a
D2a
D3a
D4b
D4a
100Base-F
+
—
COMMON
+
—
ALTERNATE
RS485
COM2
IRIG-B input
BNC
BNC
IRIG-B output
Co-axial cable
Co-axial cable
MM fiber optic cable
Shielded twisted-pairs
Tx1
Rx1
10Base-FL
Tx2
Rx2
10Base-F
NORMAL
ALTERNATE
D1a
D2a
D3a
D4b
D4a
10Base-T
+
—
COMMON
+
—
IRIG-B input
BNC
RS485
COM2
BNC
IRIG-B output
Ground at remote device
Shielded twisted-pairs
Co-axial cable
Co-axial cable
Co-axial cable
Co-axial cable
SM fiber optic cable
Shielded twisted-pairs
MM fiber optic cable
Tx1
Rx1
100Base-FL
NORMAL COM1
D1a
D2a
D3a
D4b
D4a
+
—
COMMON
+
— IRIG-B input
BNC
RS485
COM2
BNC
IRIG-B output
Ground at remote device
Co-axial cable
Co-axial cable
Co-axial cable
Co-axial cable
SM fiber optic cable
MM fiber optic cable
Shielded twisted-pairs
Co-axial cable
Co-axial cable
Tx1
Rx1
100Base-FL
Tx2
Rx2
D1a
D2a
D3a
D4b
D4a
100Base-F
+
—
COMMON
+
—
NORMAL
ALTERNATE
IRIG-B input
BNC
RS485
COM2
BNC
IRIG-B output
MM fiber optic cable
MM fiber optic cable
MM fiber optic cable
MM fiber optic cable
100Base-T cable
100Base-T cable
110 to 250 V DC
100 to 240 V AC
+
–
Tx1
Rx1
100Base-FX
Tx2
Rx2
100Base-FX
Tx1
Rx1
100Base-FX
Tx1
Rx1
100Base-FX
10/100Base-T
Fiber ports
Copper ports
W1a
W2b
W1a
10/100Base-T
+
—
GROUND
Power supply
Ground at remote device
Shielded twisted-pairs
Co-axial cable
Co-axial cable
Figure 3–24: CPU MODULE COMMUNICATIONS WIRING
D1a
D2a
D3a
D4b
D4a
10/100Base-T
+
—
COMMON
+
—
NORMAL COM1
IRIG-B input
BNC
RS485
COM2
BNC
IRIG-B output
Tx1
Rx1
100Base-FL
D1a
D2a
D3a
D4b
D4a
10/100Base-T
+
—
COMMON
+
—
NORMAL
IRIG-B input
BNC
RS485
COM2
BNC
IRIG-B output
Tx1
Rx1
100Base-FL
Tx2
Rx2
100Base-F
NORMAL
ALTERNATE
D1a
D2a
D3a
D4b
D4a
10/100Base-T
+
—
COMMON
+
— IRIG-B input
BNC
RS485
COM2
BNC
IRIG-B output
842765A5.CDR
3-24 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 3.2 WIRING b) RS485 PORTS
RS485 data transmission and reception are accomplished over a single twisted pair with transmit and receive data alternating over the same two wires. Through the use of these ports, continuous monitoring and control from a remote computer,
SCADA system or PLC is possible.
To minimize errors from noise, the use of shielded twisted pair wire is recommended. Correct polarity must also be observed. For instance, the relays must be connected with all RS485 “+” terminals connected together, and all RS485 “–” terminals connected together. The COM terminal should be connected to the common wire inside the shield, when provided. To avoid loop currents, the shield should be grounded at one point only. Each relay should also be daisy chained to the next one in the link. A maximum of 32 relays can be connected in this manner without exceeding driver capability. For larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. It is also possible to use commercially available repeaters to increase the number of relays on a single channel to more than 32. Star or stub connections should be avoided entirely.
Lightning strikes and ground surge currents can cause large momentary voltage differences between remote ends of the communication link. For this reason, surge protection devices are internally provided at both communication ports. An isolated power supply with an optocoupled data interface also acts to reduce noise coupling. To ensure maximum reliability, all equipment should have similar transient protection devices installed.
Both ends of the RS485 circuit should also be terminated with an impedance as shown below.
3
Figure 3–25: RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 3-25
3.2 WIRING 3 HARDWARE
3 c) 10BASE-FL AND 100BASE-FX FIBER OPTIC PORTS
ENSURE THE DUST COVERS ARE INSTALLED WHEN THE FIBER IS NOT IN USE. DIRTY OR SCRATCHED
CONNECTORS CAN LEAD TO HIGH LOSSES ON A FIBER LINK.
CAUTION
OBSERVING ANY FIBER TRANSMITTER OUTPUT MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE EYE.
CAUTION
The fiber optic communication ports allow for fast and efficient communications between relays at 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps.
Optical fiber may be connected to the relay supporting a wavelength of 820 nm in multi-mode or 1310 nm in multi-mode and single-mode. The 10 Mbps rate is available for CPU modules 9G and 9H; 100Mbps is available for modules 9H, 9J, 9K,
9L, 9M, 9N, 9P, and 9R. The 9H, 9K, 9M, and 9R modules have a second pair of identical optical fiber transmitter and receiver for redundancy.
The optical fiber sizes supported include 50/125 µm, 62.5/125 µm and 100/140 µm for 10 Mbps. The fiber optic port is designed such that the response times will not vary for any core that is 100 µm or less in diameter, 62.5 µm for 100 Mbps.
For optical power budgeting, splices are required every 1 km for the transmitter/receiver pair. When splicing optical fibers, the diameter and numerical aperture of each fiber must be the same. In order to engage or disengage the ST type connector, only a quarter turn of the coupling is required.
3.2.10 IRIG-B
IRIG-B is a standard time code format that allows stamping of events to be synchronized among connected devices within
1 millisecond. The IRIG time code formats are serial, width-modulated codes which can be either DC level shifted or amplitude modulated (AM). Third party equipment is available for generating the IRIG-B signal; this equipment may use a GPS satellite system to obtain the time reference so that devices at different geographic locations can also be synchronized.
GPS CONNECTION
OPTIONAL
IRIG-B
TIME CODE
GENERATOR
(DC SHIFT OR
AMPLITUDE MODULATED
SIGNAL CAN BE USED)
+
-
GPS SATELLITE SYSTEM
RG58/59 COAXIAL CABLE
TO OTHER DEVICES
(DC-SHIFT ONLY)
Figure 3–26: IRIG-B CONNECTION
RELAY
4B IRIG-B(+)
4A IRIG-B(-)
BNC (IN)
BNC (OUT)
RECEIVER
REPEATER
827756A5.CDR
3-26 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 3.2 WIRING
The IRIG-B repeater provides an amplified DC-shift IRIG-B signal to other equipment. By using one IRIG-B serial connection, several UR-series relays can be synchronized. The IRIG-B repeater has a bypass function to maintain the time signal even when a relay in the series is powered down.
Figure 3–27: IRIG-B REPEATER
Using an amplitude modulated receiver will cause errors up to 1 ms in event time-stamping.
NOTE
NOTE
Using an amplitude modulated receiver will also cause errors of up to 1 ms in metered synchrophasor values.
Using the IRIG-B repeater function in conjunction with synchrophasors is not recommended, as the repeater adds a 40
μs delay to the IRIG-B signal. This results in a 1° error for each consecutive device in the string as reported in synchrophasors.
3
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 3-27
3.3 PILOT CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS 3 HARDWARE
3.3PILOT CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS 3.3.1 DESCRIPTION
3
A special inter-relay communications module is available for the L90. This module is plugged into slot “W” in horizontally mounted units and slot “R” in vertically mounted units. Inter-relay channel communications is not the same as 10/100Base-
F interface communications (available as an option with the CPU module). Channel communication is used for sharing data among relays.
The inter-relay communications modules are available with several interfaces as shown in the table below.
Table 3–4: CHANNEL COMMUNICATION OPTIONS
7I
7J
7K
7L
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
7G
7H
7R
7S
7T
7V
7W
74
75
76
77
2S
2T
72
73
MODULE
2A
2B
2E
2F
2G
2H
SPECIFICATION
C37.94SM, 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
C37.94SM, 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
Bi-phase, 1 channel
Bi-phase, 2 channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels
Managed Ethernet switch with high voltage power supply
Managed Ethernet switch with low voltage power supply
1550 nm, single-mode, laser, 1 channel
1550 nm, single-mode, laser, 2 channels
Channel 1 - RS422; channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, laser
Channel 1 - G.703; channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, laser
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels
820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel
1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 channel
1300 nm, single-mode, laser, 1 channel
Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 820 nm, multi-mode
Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 1300 nm, multi-mode
Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels
1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 channels
1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 channels
Channel 1: RS422, channel: 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
Channel 1: RS422, channel 2: 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
Channel 1: RS422, channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
Channel 1: RS422, channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, laser
Channel 1: G.703, channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, laser
G.703, 1 channel
G.703, 2 channels
RS422, 1 channel
RS422, 2 channels, 2 clock inputs
RS422, 2 channels
All of the fiber modules use ST type connectors. For two-terminal applications, each L90 relay requires at least one communications channel.
3-28 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 3.3 PILOT CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS
NOTE
The current differential function must be “Enabled” for the communications module to properly operate.
Refer to
SETTINGS
ÖØ
GROUPED ELEMENTS
Ö
LINE DIFFERENTIAL
Ö
CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL
menu.
The fiber optic modules (7A to 7W) are designed for back-to-back connections of UR-series relays only. For connections to higher-order systems, use the 72 to 77 modules or the 2A and 2B modules.
NOTE
OBSERVING ANY FIBER TRANSMITTER OUTPUT MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE EYE.
CAUTION
3.3.2 FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS
The following figure shows the configuration for the 7A, 7B, 7C, 7H, 7I, and 7J fiber-only modules.
Module: 7A / 7B / 7C
Connection Location: Slot X
7H / 7I / 7J
Slot X
3
RX1
TX1
RX1
TX1
RX2
TX2
1 Channel 2 Channels
831719A2.CDR
Figure 3–28: LED AND ELED FIBER MODULES
3.3.3 FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS
The following figure shows the configuration for the 72, 73, 7D, and 7K fiber-laser module.
Module:
Connection Location:
72/ 7D
Slot X
TX1
73/ 7K
Slot X
TX1
RX1 RX1
TX2
RX2
1 Channel 2 Channels
831720A3.CDR
Figure 3–29: LASER FIBER MODULES
WARNING
When using a laser Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed the maximum optical input power to the receiver.
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 3-29
3.3 PILOT CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS 3 HARDWARE
3.3.4 G.703 INTERFACE a) DESCRIPTION
The following figure shows the 64K ITU G.703 co-directional interface configuration.
The G.703 module is fixed at 64 kbps. The
SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
DIRECT I/O
ÖØ
DIRECT I/O DATA RATE setting is not applicable to this module.
NOTE
AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external connections, with the shield grounded only at one end. Connecting the shield to pin X1a or X6a grounds the shield since these pins are internally connected to ground. Thus, if pin X1a or X6a is used, do not ground at the other end. This interface module is protected by surge suppression devices.
3
G.703
channel 1
Surge
G.703
channel 2
Surge
Shield
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
Shield
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1a
1b
2a
2b
3a
3b
7b
8a
8b
6a
6b
7a
842773A2.CDR
Figure 3–30: G.703 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION
The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two G.703 interfaces. For the actual physical arrangement of these pins, see the Rear terminal assignments section earlier in this chapter. All pin interconnections are to be maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
NOTE
G.703
CHANNEL 1
SURGE
G.703
CHANNEL 2
Shld.
Tx -
Rx -
Tx +
Rx +
Shld.
Tx -
Rx -
Tx +
Rx +
X
X
X
X
X
X
1a
1b
2a
2b
3a
3b
X
X
X
X
6a
6b
7a
7b
X 8a
X
8b
X 1a
X 1b
X 2a
X 2b
X 3a
X 3b
X 6a
X 6b
X 7a
X 7b
X 8a
X
8b
Shld.
Tx -
Rx -
Tx +
Rx +
Shld.
Tx -
Rx -
Tx +
Rx +
G.703
CHANNEL 1
SURGE
G.703
CHANNEL 2
SURGE SURGE
831727A3.CDR
Figure 3–31: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO G.703 INTERFACES
Pin nomenclature may differ from one manufacturer to another. Therefore, it is not uncommon to see pinouts numbered TxA, TxB, RxA and RxB. In such cases, it can be assumed that “A” is equivalent to “+” and
“B” is equivalent to “–”.
b) G.703 SELECTION SWITCH PROCEDURES
1.
Remove the G.703 module (7R or 7S). The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control
power must be removed from the relay. The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot.
2.
Remove the module cover screw.
3.
Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards.
4.
Set the timing selection switches (channel 1, channel 2) to the desired timing modes.
5.
Replace the top cover and the cover screw.
3-30 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 3.3 PILOT CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS
6.
Re-insert the G.703 module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position.
The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
3
Figure 3–32: G.703 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING
Table 3–5: G.703 TIMING SELECTIONS
SWITCHES
S1
S5 and S6
FUNCTION
OFF
→ octet timing disabled
ON
→ octet timing 8 kHz
S5 = OFF and S6 = OFF
→ loop timing mode
S5 = ON and S6 = OFF
→ internal timing mode
S5 = OFF and S6 = ON
→ minimum remote loopback mode
S5 = ON and S6 = ON
→ dual loopback mode
c) G.703 OCTET TIMING
If octet timing is enabled (on), this 8 kHz signal will be asserted during the violation of bit 8 (LSB) necessary for connecting to higher order systems. When L90s are connected back to back, octet timing should be disabled (off).
d) G.703 TIMING MODES
There are two timing modes for the G.703 module: internal timing mode and loop timing mode (default).
• Internal Timing Mode: The system clock is generated internally. Therefore, the G.703 timing selection should be in the internal timing mode for back-to-back (UR-to-UR) connections. For back-to-back connections, set for octet timing
(S1 = OFF) and timing mode to internal timing (S5 = ON and S6 = OFF).
• Loop Timing Mode: The system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the G.703 timing selection should be in loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems. For connection to a higher order system (URto-multiplexer, factory defaults), set to octet timing (S1 = ON) and set timing mode to loop timing (S5 = OFF and S6 =
OFF).
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 3-31
3.3 PILOT CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS
The switch settings for the internal and loop timing modes are shown below:
3 HARDWARE
3
842752A1.CDR
e) G.703 TEST MODES
In minimum remote loopback mode, the multiplexer is enabled to return the data from the external interface without any processing to assist in diagnosing G.703 line-side problems irrespective of clock rate. Data enters from the G.703 inputs, passes through the data stabilization latch which also restores the proper signal polarity, passes through the multiplexer and then returns to the transmitter. The differential received data is processed and passed to the G.703 transmitter module after which point the data is discarded. The G.703 receiver module is fully functional and continues to process data and passes it to the differential Manchester transmitter module. Since timing is returned as it is received, the timing source is expected to be from the G.703 line side of the interface.
DMR G7X
DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver
DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter
G7X = G.703 Transmitter
G7R = G.703 Receiver
DMX G7R
842774A1.CDR
Figure 3–33: G.703 MINIMUM REMOTE LOOPBACK MODE
In dual loopback mode, the multiplexers are active and the functions of the circuit are divided into two with each receiver/ transmitter pair linked together to deconstruct and then reconstruct their respective signals. Differential Manchester data enters the Differential Manchester receiver module and then is returned to the differential Manchester transmitter module.
Likewise, G.703 data enters the G.703 receiver module and is passed through to the G.703 transmitter module to be returned as G.703 data. Because of the complete split in the communications path and because, in each case, the clocks are extracted and reconstructed with the outgoing data, in this mode there must be two independent sources of timing. One source lies on the G.703 line side of the interface while the other lies on the differential Manchester side of the interface.
DMR G7X
DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver
DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter
G7X = G.703 Transmitter
G7R = G.703 Receiver
DMX G7R
Figure 3–34: G.703 DUAL LOOPBACK MODE
842775A1.CDR
3-32 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 3.3 PILOT CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS
3.3.5 RS422 INTERFACE a) DESCRIPTION
There are three RS422 inter-relay communications modules available: single-channel RS422 (module 7T), dual-channel
RS422 (module 7W), and dual-channel dual-clock RS422 (module 7V). The modules can be configured to run at 64 or
128 kbps. AWG 24 twisted shielded pair cable is recommended for external connections. These modules are protected by optically-isolated surge suppression devices.
The two-channel two-clock RS422 interface (module 7V) is intended for use with two independent channel banks with two independent clocks. It is intended for situations where a single clock for both channels is not acceptable.
NOTE
The shield pins (6a and 7b) are internally connected to the ground pin (8a). Proper shield termination is as follows:
• Site 1: Terminate shield to pins 6a or 7b or both.
• Site 2: Terminate shield to COM pin 2b.
The clock terminating impedance should match the impedance of the line.
Single-channel RS422 module
~
~
~
~
~
3b
3a
2a
4b
6a
~
~
~
7a
8b
~
2b
8a
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
Shield
COM
RS422
Clock
Surge
~ indicates the slot position
Dual-channel RS422 module
~
~
~
3b
3a
2a
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
4b
6a
5b
5a
4a
6b
7b
7a
8b
2b
8a
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
Shield
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
Shield
COM
RS422 channel 1
RS422 channel 2
Clock
Surge
842776A3.CDR
Figure 3–35: RS422 INTERFACE CONNECTIONS
The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two single-channel RS422 interfaces installed in slot W.
All pin interconnections are to be maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
3
RS422
CHANNEL 1
CLOCK
SURGE
Shld.
+
–
COM
Tx–
Rx–
Tx–
Rx+
W
W
3b
3a
W
W
W
W
2a
4b
6a
7a
W
W
W
8b
2b
8a
+
W
W
3b
3a
W
W
W
W
2a
4b
6a
7a
W
W
W
8b
2b
8a
Tx–
Rx–
Tx+
Rx+
Shld.
+
–
COM
RS422
CHANNEL 1
CLOCK
SURGE
64 kHz
831809A1.CDR
Figure 3–36: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO RS422 INTERFACES b) TWO-CHANNEL APPLICATION VIA MULTIPLEXERS
The RS422 interface may be used for single channel or two channel applications over SONET/SDH or multiplexed systems. When used in single-channel applications, the RS422 interface links to higher order systems in a typical fashion observing transmit (Tx), receive (Rx), and send timing (ST) connections. However, when used in two-channel applications, certain criteria must be followed since there is one clock input for the two RS422 channels. The system will function correctly if the following connections are observed and your data module has a terminal timing feature. Terminal timing is a common feature to most synchronous data units that allows the module to accept timing from an external source. Using the terminal timing feature, two channel applications can be achieved if these connections are followed: The send timing outputs from the multiplexer (data module 1), will connect to the clock inputs of the UR–RS422 interface in the usual fashion.
In addition, the send timing outputs of data module 1 will also be paralleled to the terminal timing inputs of data module 2.
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 3-33
3.3 PILOT CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS 3 HARDWARE
By using this configuration, the timing for both data modules and both UR–RS422 channels will be derived from a single clock source. As a result, data sampling for both of the UR–RS422 channels will be synchronized via the send timing leads on data module 1 as shown below. If the terminal timing feature is not available or this type of connection is not desired, the
G.703 interface is a viable option that does not impose timing restrictions.
3
RS422
CHANNEL 1
CLOCK
RS422
CHANNEL 2
SURGE
Tx1(+)
Tx1(-)
Rx1(+)
Rx1(-)
Shld.
+
–
Tx2(+)
Tx2(-)
Rx2(+)
Rx2(-)
Shld.
com
W 2a
W 3b
W 4b
W 3a
W 6a
W 7a
W 8b
W 4a
W 5b
W 6b
W 5a
W 7b
W 2b
W 8a
Data module 1
Signal name
SD(A) - Send data
SD(B) - Send data
RD(A) - Received data
RD(B) - Received data
RS(A) - Request to send (RTS)
RS(B) - Request to send (RTS)
RT(A) - Receive timing
RT(B) - Receive timing
CS(A) - Clear To send
CS(B) - Clear To send
Local loopback
Remote loopback
Signal ground
ST(A) - Send timing
ST(B) - Send timing
Data module 2
Signal name
TT(A) - Terminal timing
TT(B) - Terminal timing
SD(A) - Send data
SD(B) - Send data
RD(A) - Received data
RD(B) - Received data
RS(A) - Request to send (RTS)
RS(B) - Request to send (RTS)
CS(A) - Clear To send
CS(B) - Clear To send
Local loopback
Remote loopback
Signal ground
ST(A) - Send timing
ST(B) - Send timing
831022A3.CDR
Figure 3–37: TIMING CONFIGURATION FOR RS422 TWO-CHANNEL, 3-TERMINAL APPLICATION
Data module 1 provides timing to the L90 RS422 interface via the ST(A) and ST(B) outputs. Data module 1 also provides timing to data module 2 TT(A) and TT(B) inputs via the ST(A) and AT(B) outputs. The data module pin numbers have been omitted in the figure above since they may vary depending on the manufacturer.
c) TRANSMIT TIMING
The RS422 interface accepts one clock input for transmit timing. It is important that the rising edge of the 64 kHz transmit timing clock of the multiplexer interface is sampling the data in the center of the transmit data window. Therefore, it is important to confirm clock and data transitions to ensure proper system operation. For example, the following figure shows the positive edge of the Tx clock in the center of the Tx data bit.
Tx Clock
Tx Data
3-34
Figure 3–38: CLOCK AND DATA TRANSITIONS
L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 3.3 PILOT CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS d) RECEIVE TIMING
The RS422 interface utilizes NRZI-MARK modulation code and; therefore, does not rely on an Rx clock to recapture data.
NRZI-MARK is an edge-type, invertible, self-clocking code.
To recover the Rx clock from the data-stream, an integrated DPLL (digital phase lock loop) circuit is utilized. The DPLL is driven by an internal clock, which is 16-times over-sampled, and uses this clock along with the data-stream to generate a data clock that can be used as the SCC (serial communication controller) receive clock.
3.3.6 TWO-CHANNEL TWO-CLOCK RS422 INTERFACE
The two-channel two-clock RS422 interface (module 7V) is intended for use with the synchrophasor feature. The module connections are illustrated below.
RS422 channel 2
Channel 1 clock
Common
Surge
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Tx –
Rx –
Tx –
Rx –
COM
Rx +
Shield
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
Shield
~8b
~1b
~1a
~2b
~8a
842802A2.CDR
~3b
~3a
~2a
~4b
~6a
~5b
~5a
~4a
~6b
~7b
~7a
Figure 3–39: TWO-CHANNEL TWO-CLOCK RS422 INTERFACE CONNECTIONS
3.3.7 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE
3
The following figure shows the combined RS422 plus Fiber interface configuration at 64K baud. The 7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, and 74 modules are used in two-terminal with a redundant channel or three-terminal configurations where channel 1 is employed via the RS422 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and channel 2 via direct fiber.
AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external RS422 connections and the shield should be grounded only at one end. For the direct fiber channel, power budget issues should be addressed properly.
WARNING
When using a LASER Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed maximum optical input power to the receiver.
~
~
1a
1b
~
~
~
~
2b
2a
~
3a
3b
4b
~ 6a
COM
Tx1 +
Rx1 –
Tx1 –
Rx1 +
Shield
Clock
(channel 1)
RS422 channel 1
~
Tx2 Rx2
8a
Fiber channel 2
Surge
842777A1.CDR
Figure 3–40: RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION
Connections shown above are for multiplexers configured as DCE (data communications equipment) units.
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 3-35
3.3 PILOT CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS 3 HARDWARE
3.3.8 G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE
3
The figure below shows the combined G.703 plus fiber interface configuration at 64 kbps. The 7E, 7F, 7G, 7Q, and 75 modules are used in configurations where channel 1 is employed via the G.703 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and channel 2 via direct fiber. AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external G.703 connections connecting the shield to pin 1a at one end only. For the direct fiber channel, power budget issues should be addressed properly. See previous sections for additional details on the G.703 and fiber interfaces.
WARNING
When using a laser Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed the maximum optical input power to the receiver.
~ 1a
~
~
1b
2a
~
~
~ 2b
3a
3b
Tx2
Shield
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
Rx2
G.703
channel 1
Surge
Fiber channel 2
842778A1.CDR
Figure 3–41: G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION
3.3.9 IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE
The UR-series IEEE C37.94 communication modules (modules types 2G, 2H, 76, and 77) are designed to interface with
IEEE C37.94 compliant digital multiplexers or an IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converter for use with direct input and output applications for firmware revisions 3.30 and higher. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a point-to-point optical link for synchronous data between a multiplexer and a teleprotection device. This data is typically 64 kbps, but the standard provides for speeds up to 64n kbps, where n = 1, 2,…, 12. The UR-series C37.94 communication modules are either
64 kbps (with n fixed at 1) for 128 kbps (with n fixed at 2). The frame is a valid International Telecommunications Union
(ITU-T) recommended G.704 pattern from the standpoint of framing and data rate. The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a resultant bit rate of 2048 kbps.
The specifications for the module are as follows:.
• IEEE standard: C37.94 for 1
× 128 kbps optical fiber interface (for 2G and 2H modules) or C37.94 for 2 × 64 kbps optical fiber interface (for 76 and 77 modules).
• Fiber optic cable type: 50 mm or 62.5 mm core diameter optical fiber.
• Fiber optic mode: multi-mode.
• Fiber optic cable length: up to 2 km.
• Fiber optic connector: type ST.
• Wavelength: 830 ±40 nm.
• Connection: as per all fiber optic connections, a Tx to Rx connection is required.
The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that supports the IEEE C37.94 standard as shown below.
3-36 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 3.3 PILOT CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS
The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected to the electrical interface (G.703, RS422, or X.21) of a non-compliant digital multiplexer via an optical-to-electrical interface converter that supports the IEEE C37.94 standard, as shown below.
The UR-series C37.94 communication module has six (6) switches that are used to set the clock configuration. The functions of these control switches is shown below.
3
842753A1.CDR
For the internal timing mode, the system clock is generated internally. therefore, the timing switch selection should be internal timing for relay 1 and loop timed for relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured.
For the looped timing mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the timing selection should be in loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems.
The IEEE C37.94 communications module cover removal procedure is as follows:
1.
Remove the IEEE C37.94 module (type 2G, 2H, 76, or 77 module):
The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay.
The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot.
2.
Remove the module cover screw.
3.
Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards.
4.
Set the timing selection switches (channel 1, channel 2) to the desired timing modes (see description above).
5.
Replace the top cover and the cover screw.
6.
Re-insert the IEEE C37.94 module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 3-37
3
3.3 PILOT CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS
Figure 3–42: IEEE C37.94 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING
3 HARDWARE
3-38 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 3.3 PILOT CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS
3.3.10 C37.94SM INTERFACE
The UR-series C37.94SM communication modules (2A and 2B) are designed to interface with modified IEEE C37.94 compliant digital multiplexers or IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converters that have been converted from 820 nm multi-mode fiber optics to 1300 nm ELED single-mode fiber optics. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a point-to-point optical link for synchronous data between a multiplexer and a teleprotection device. This data is typically 64 kbps, but the standard provides for speeds up to 64n kbps, where n = 1, 2,…, 12. The UR-series C37.94SM communication module is 64 kbps only with n fixed at 1. The frame is a valid International Telecommunications Union (ITU-T) recommended G.704 pattern from the standpoint of framing and data rate. The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a resultant bit rate of 2048 kbps.
The specifications for the module are as follows:
• Emulated IEEE standard: emulates C37.94 for 1
× 64 kbps optical fiber interface (modules set to n = 1 or 64 kbps).
• Fiber optic cable type: 9/125
μm core diameter optical fiber.
• Fiber optic mode: single-mode, ELED compatible with HP HFBR-1315T transmitter and HP HFBR-2316T receiver.
• Fiber optic cable length: up to 10 km.
• Fiber optic connector: type ST.
• Wavelength: 1300 ±40 nm.
• Connection: as per all fiber optic connections, a Tx to Rx connection is required.
The UR-series C37.94SM communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that supports C37.94SM as shown below.
3
It can also can be connected directly to any other UR-series relay with a C37.94SM module as shown below.
The UR-series C37.94SM communication module has six (6) switches that are used to set the clock configuration. The functions of these control switches is shown below.
842753A1.CDR
For the internal timing mode, the system clock is generated internally. Therefore, the timing switch selection should be internal timing for relay 1 and loop timed for relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured.
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 3-39
3.3 PILOT CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS 3 HARDWARE
3
For the looped timing mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the timing selection should be in loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems.
The C37.94SM communications module cover removal procedure is as follows:
1.
Remove the C37.94SM module (modules 2A or 2B):
The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay.
The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot.
2.
Remove the module cover screw.
3.
Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards.
4.
Set the timing selection switches (channel 1, channel 2) to the desired timing modes (see description above).
5.
Replace the top cover and the cover screw.
6.
Re-insert the C37.94SM module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
3-40
Figure 3–43: C37.94SM TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING
L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES
3.4MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES 3.4.1 OVERVIEW
The type 2S and 2T embedded managed switch modules are supported by UR-series relays containing type 9S CPU modules with revisions 5.5x and higher. The modules communicate to the L90 through an internal Ethernet port (referred to as the UR port or port 7) and provide an additional six external Ethernet ports: two 10/100Base-T ports and four multimode ST
100Base-FX ports.
NOTE
The Ethernet switch module should be powered up before or at the same time as the L90. Otherwise, the switch module will not be detected on power up and the
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH: ORDERCODE XXX
self-test warning will be issued.
3.4.2 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE HARDWARE
The type 2S and 2T managed Ethernet switch modules provide two 10/100Base-T and four multimode ST 100Base-FX external Ethernet ports accessible through the rear of the module. In addition, a serial console port is accessible from the front of the module (requires the front panel faceplate to be open).
The pin assignment for the console port signals is shown in the following table.
3
Table 3–6: CONSOLE PORT PIN ASSIGNMENT
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6 to 9
SIGNAL
CD
RXD
TXD
N/A
GND
N/A
DESCRIPTION
Carrier detect (not used)
Receive data (input)
Transmit data (output)
Not used
Signal ground
Not used
GE Multilin
Two 10/100Base-T ports
Four 100Base-FX multimode ports with ST connectors
RS232 console port
Independent power supply. Options:
2S: high-voltage
2T: low-voltage
FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW
842867A2.CDR
Figure 3–44: MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCHES HARDWARE
L90 Line Current Differential System 3-41
3
3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES 3 HARDWARE
3.4.3 MANAGED SWITCH LED INDICATORS
The 10/100Base-T and 100Base-FX ports have LED indicators to indicate the port status.
The 10/100Base-T ports have three LEDs to indicate connection speed, duplex mode, and link activity. The 100Base-FX ports have one LED to indicate linkup and activity.
Connection speed indicator (OFF = 10 Mbps; ON = 100 Mbps)
Link indicator (ON = link active; FLASHING = activity)
Duplex mode indicator (OFF = half-duplex; ON = full-duplex)
Link indicator (ON = link active; FLASHING = activity)
Figure 3–45: ETHERNET SWITCH LED INDICATORS
842868A2.CDR
3.4.4 CONFIGURING THE MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE
A suitable IP/gateway and subnet mask must be assigned to both the switch and the UR relay for correct operation. The
Switch has been shipped with a default IP address of 192.168.1.2 and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0. Consult your network administrator to determine if the default IP address, subnet mask or default gateway needs to be modified.
Do not connect to network while configuring the switch module.
CAUTION a) CONFIGURING THE SWITCH MODULE IP SETTINGS
In our example configuration of both the Switch’s IP address and subnet mask must be changed to 3.94.247.229 and
255.255.252.0 respectively. The IP address, subnet mask and default gateway can be configured using either EnerVista
UR Setup software, the Switch’s Secure Web Management (SWM), or through the console port using CLI.
1.
Select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch > Configure IP menu item to open the
Ethernet switch configuration window.
3-42 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES
2.
Enter “3.94.247.229” in the IP Address field and “255.255.252.0” in the Subnet Mask field, then click OK.
The software will send the new settings to the L90 and prompt as follows when complete.
3.
Cycle power to the L90 and switch module to activate the new settings.
b) SAVING THE ETHERNET SWITCH SETTINGS TO A SETTINGS FILE
The L90 allows the settings information for the Ethernet switch module to be saved locally as a settings file. This file contains the advanced configuration details for the switch not contained within the standard L90 settings file.
This feature allows the switch module settings to be saved locally before performing firmware upgrades. Saving settings files is also highly recommended before making any change to the module configuration or creating new setting files.
The following procedure describes how to save local settings files for the Ethernet switch module.
1.
Select the desired device from site tree in the online window.
2.
Select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch > Ethernet Switch Settings File >
Retreive Settings File item from the device settings tree.
The system will request the name and destination path for the settings file.
3
3.
Enter an appropriate folder and file name and click Save.
All settings files will be saved as text files and the corresponding file extension automatically assigned.
c) UPLOADING ETHERNET SWITCH SETTINGS FILES TO THE MODULE
The following procedure describes how to upload local settings files to the Ethernet switch module. It is highly recommended that the current settings are saved to a settings file before uploading a new settings file.
It is highly recommended to place the switch offline while transferring setting files to the switch. When transferring settings files from one switch to another, the user must reconfigure the IP address.
NOTE
1.
Select the desired device from site tree in the online window.
2.
Select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch > Ethernet Switch Settings File >
Transfer Settings File item from the device settings tree.
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 3-43
3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES
The system will request the name and destination path for the settings file.
3 HARDWARE
3
3.
Navigate to the folder containing the Ethernet switch settings file, select the file, then click Open.
The settings file will be transferred to the Ethernet switch and the settings uploaded to the device.
3.4.5 UPLOADING L90 SWITCH MODULE FIRMWARE a) DESCRIPTION
This section describes the process for upgrading firmware on a UR-2S or UR-2T switch module.
There are several ways of updating firmware on a switch module:
• Using the EnerVista UR Setup software.
• Serially using the L90 switch module console port.
• Using FTP or TFTP through the L90 switch module console port.
It is highly recommended to use the EnerVista UR Setup software to upgrade firmware on a L90 switch module.
Firmware upgrades using the serial port, TFTP, and FTP are described in detail in the switch module manual.
NOTE b) SELECTING THE PROPER SWITCH FIRMWARE VERSION
The latest switch module firmware is available as a download from the GE Multilin web site. Use the following procedure to determine the version of firmware currently installed on your switch
1.
Log into the switch using the EnerVista web interface.
The default switch login ID is “manager” and the default password is “manager”.
NOTE
3-44 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES
The firmware version installed on the switch will appear on the lower left corner of the screen.
Version: 2.1 beta
842869A1.CDR
2.
Using the EnerVista UR Setup program, select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch
> Firmware Upload menu item.
The following popup screen will appear warning that the settings will be lost when the firmware is upgraded.
It is highly recommended that you save the switch settings before upgrading the firmware.
NOTE
3.
After saving the settings file, proceed with the firmware upload by selecting Yes to the above warning.
Another window will open, asking you to point to the location of the firmware file to be uploaded.
3
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 3-45
3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES
4.
Select the firmware file to be loaded on to the Switch, and select the Open option.
3 HARDWARE
3
The following window will pop up, indicating that the firmware file transfer is in progress.
If the firmware load was successful, the following window will appear:
Note
The switch will automatically reboot after a successful firmware file transfer.
NOTE
5.
Once the firmware has been successfully uploaded to the switch module, load the settings file using the procedure described earlier.
3-46 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES
3.4.6 ETHERNET SWITCH SELF-TEST ERRORS
The following table provides details about Ethernet module self-test errors.
Be sure to enable the
ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL
setting in the
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF-TESTS
menu and the relevant
PORT 1 EVENTS
through
PORT 6 EVENTS
settings under the
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
ETH-
ERNET SWITCH
menu.
Table 3–7: ETHERNET SWITCH SELF-TEST ERRORS
ACTIVATION SETTING (SET
AS ENABLED)
ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL
EVENT NAME
ETHERNET MODULE
OFFLINE
EVENT CAUSE
No response has been received from the Ethernet module after five successive polling attempts.
PORT 1 EVENTS to PORT 6
EVENTS
No setting required; the L90 will read the state of a general purpose input/output port on the main CPU upon power-up and create the error if there is a conflict between the input/ output state and the order code.
ETHERNET PORT 1
OFFLINE to ETHERNET
PORT 6 OFFLINE
EQUIPMENT
MISMATCH: Card XXX
Missing
An active Ethernet port has returned a FAILED status.
The L90 has not detected the presence of the Ethernet switch via the bus board.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
• Loss of switch power.
• IP/gateway/subnet.
• Incompatibility between the CPU and the switch module.
• UR port (port 7) configured incorrectly or blocked
• Switch IP address assigned to another device in the same network.
• Ethernet connection broken.
• An inactive port’s events have been enabled.
The L90 failed to see the switch module on power-up, because switch won’t power up or is still powering up. To clear the fault, cycle power to the L90.
3
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 3-47
3
3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES 3 HARDWARE
3-48 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The EnerVista UR Setup software provides a graphical user interface (GUI) as one of two human interfaces to a UR device.
The alternate human interface is implemented via the device’s faceplate keypad and display (refer to the Faceplate inter-
face section in this chapter).
The EnerVista UR Setup software provides a single facility to configure, monitor, maintain, and trouble-shoot the operation of relay functions, connected over local or wide area communication networks. It can be used while disconnected (off-line) or connected (on-line) to a UR device. In off-line mode, settings files can be created for eventual downloading to the device.
In on-line mode, you can communicate with the device in real-time.
The EnerVista UR Setup software, provided with every L90 relay, can be run from any computer supporting Microsoft Windows
®
95, 98, NT, 2000, ME, and XP. This chapter provides a summary of the basic EnerVista UR Setup software interface features. The EnerVista UR Setup Help File provides details for getting started and using the EnerVista UR Setup software interface.
4.1.2 CREATING A SITE LIST
To start using the EnerVista UR Setup software, a site definition and device definition must first be created. See the EnerVista UR Setup Help File or refer to the Connecting EnerVista UR Setup with the L90 section in Chapter 1 for details.
4.1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP OVERVIEW a) ENGAGING A DEVICE
The EnerVista UR Setup software may be used in on-line mode (relay connected) to directly communicate with the L90 relay. Communicating relays are organized and grouped by communication interfaces and into sites. Sites may contain any number of relays selected from the UR-series of relays.
b) USING SETTINGS FILES
The EnerVista UR Setup software interface supports three ways of handling changes to relay settings:
• In off-line mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later download to communicating relays.
• While connected to a communicating relay to directly modify any relay settings via relay data view windows, and then save the settings to the relay.
• You can create/edit settings files and then write them to the relay while the interface is connected to the relay.
Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file contains data pertaining to the following types of relay settings:
• Device definition
• Product setup
• System setup
• FlexLogic™
• Grouped elements
• Control elements
• Inputs/outputs
• Testing
Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes.
The following communications settings are not transferred to the L90 with settings files.
Modbus Slave Address
Modbus IP Port Number
RS485 COM1 Baud Rate
RS485 COM1 Parity
COM1 Minimum Response Time
4
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 4-1
4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4
RS485 COM2 Baud Rate
RS485 COM2 Parity
COM2 Minimum Response Time
COM2 Selection
RRTD Slave Address
RRTD Baud Rate
IP Address
IP Subnet Mask
Gateway IP Address
Ethernet Sub Module Serial Number
Network Address NSAP
IEC61850 Config GOOSE ConfRev
c) CREATING AND EDITING FLEXLOGIC™
You can create or edit a FlexLogic™ equation in order to customize the relay. You can subsequently view the automatically generated logic diagram.
d) VIEWING ACTUAL VALUES
You can view real-time relay data such as input/output status and measured parameters.
e) VIEWING TRIGGERED EVENTS
While the interface is in either on-line or off-line mode, you can view and analyze data generated by triggered specified parameters, via one of the following:
• Event Recorder facility: The event recorder captures contextual data associated with the last 1024 events, listed in chronological order from most recent to oldest.
• Oscillography facility: The oscillography waveform traces and digital states are used to provide a visual display of power system and relay operation data captured during specific triggered events.
f) FILE SUPPORT
• Execution: Any EnerVista UR Setup file which is double clicked or opened will launch the application, or provide focus to the already opened application. If the file was a settings file (has a URS extension) which had been removed from the Settings List tree menu, it will be added back to the Settings List tree menu.
• Drag and Drop: The Site List and Settings List control bar windows are each mutually a drag source and a drop target for device-order-code-compatible files or individual menu items. Also, the Settings List control bar window and any
Windows Explorer directory folder are each mutually a file drag source and drop target.
New files which are dropped into the Settings List window are added to the tree which is automatically sorted alphabetically with respect to settings file names. Files or individual menu items which are dropped in the selected device menu in the Site List window will automatically be sent to the on-line communicating device.
g) FIRMWARE UPGRADES
The firmware of a L90 device can be upgraded, locally or remotely, via the EnerVista UR Setup software. The corresponding instructions are provided by the EnerVista UR Setup Help file under the topic “Upgrading Firmware”.
NOTE
Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules, features, settings, and corresponding data items (i.e. default values, minimum/maximum values, data type, and item size) may change slightly from version to version of firmware. The addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified.
The
EEPROM DATA ERROR
message displayed after upgrading/downgrading the firmware is a resettable, self-test message intended to inform users that the Modbus addresses have changed with the upgraded firmware. This message does not signal any problems when appearing after firmware upgrades.
4-2 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
3
10
4
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE
4.1.4 ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW
The EnerVista UR Setup software main window supports the following primary display components:
1.
Title bar which shows the pathname of the active data view.
2.
Main window menu bar.
3.
Main window tool bar.
4.
Site list control bar window.
5.
Settings list control bar window.
6.
Device data view windows, with common tool bar.
7.
Settings file data view windows, with common tool bar.
8.
Workspace area with data view tabs.
9.
Status bar.
10. Quick action hot links.
2 1
6 7
4
5
9
8
Figure 4–1: ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW
842786A2.CDR
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 4-3
4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES 4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.2EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES 4.2.1 SETTINGS TEMPLATES
Setting file templates simplify the configuration and commissioning of multiple relays that protect similar assets. An example of this is a substation that has ten similar feeders protected by ten UR-series F60 relays.
In these situations, typically 90% or greater of the settings are identical between all devices. The templates feature allows engineers to configure and test these common settings, then lock them so they are not available to users. For example, these locked down settings can be hidden from view for field engineers, allowing them to quickly identify and concentrate on the specific settings.
The remaining settings (typically 10% or less) can be specified as editable and be made available to field engineers installing the devices. These will be settings such as protection element pickup values and CT and VT ratios.
The settings template mode allows the user to define which settings will be visible in EnerVista UR Setup. Settings templates can be applied to both settings files (settings file templates) and online devices (online settings templates). The functionality is identical for both purposes.
The settings template feature requires that both the EnerVista UR Setup software and the L90 firmware are at versions 5.40 or higher.
NOTE
4 a) ENABLING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE
The settings file template feature is disabled by default. The following procedure describes how to enable the settings template for UR-series settings files.
1.
Select a settings file from the offline window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2.
Right-click on the selected device or settings file and select the Template Mode > Create Template option.
The settings file template is now enabled and the file tree displayed in light blue. The settings file is now in template editing mode.
Alternatively, the settings template can also be applied to online settings. The following procedure describes this process.
1.
Select an installed device from the online window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2.
Right-click on the selected device and select the Template Mode > Create Template option.
The software will prompt for a template password. This password is required to use the template feature and must be at least four characters in length.
3.
Enter and re-enter the new password, then click OK to continue.
The online settings template is now enabled. The device is now in template editing mode.
b) EDITING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE
The settings template editing feature allows the user to specify which settings are available for viewing and modification in
EnerVista UR Setup. By default, all settings except the FlexLogic™ equation editor settings are locked.
1.
Select an installed device or a settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2.
Select the Template Mode > Edit Template option to place the device in template editing mode.
3.
Enter the template password then click OK.
4.
Open the relevant settings windows that contain settings to be specified as viewable.
4-4 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES
By default, all settings are specified as locked and displayed against a grey background. The icon on the upper right of the settings window will also indicate that EnerVista UR Setup is in EDIT mode. The following example shows the phase time overcurrent settings window in edit mode.
Figure 4–2: SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW, ALL SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS LOCKED
5.
Specify which settings to make viewable by clicking on them.
The setting available to view will be displayed against a yellow background as shown below.
4
Figure 4–3: SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW, TWO SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS EDITABLE
6.
Click on Save to save changes to the settings template.
7.
Proceed through the settings tree to specify all viewable settings.
c) ADDING PASSWORD PROTECTION TO A TEMPLATE
It is highly recommended that templates be saved with password protection to maximize security.
The following procedure describes how to add password protection to a settings file template.
1.
Select a settings file from the offline window on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2.
Selecting the Template Mode > Password Protect Template option.
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 4-5
4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES 4 HUMAN INTERFACES
The software will prompt for a template password. This password must be at least four characters in length.
3.
Enter and re-enter the new password, then click OK to continue.
The settings file template is now secured with password protection.
When templates are created for online settings, the password is added during the initial template creation step. It does not need to be added after the template is created.
NOTE
4 d) VIEWING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE
Once all necessary settings are specified for viewing, users are able to view the settings template on the online device or settings file. There are two ways to specify the settings view with the settings template feature:
• Display only those settings available for editing.
• Display all settings, with settings not available for editing greyed-out.
Use the following procedure to only display settings available for editing.
1.
Select an installed device or a settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2.
Apply the template by selecting the Template Mode > View In Template Mode option.
3.
Enter the template password then click OK to apply the template.
Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to view and edit the settings specified by the template. The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below.
4-6
Phase time overcurrent settings window without template applied.
Phase time overcurrent window with template applied via the
Template Mode > View In Template Mode
command.
The template specifies that only the settings be available.
Pickup and Curve
842858A1.CDR
Figure 4–4: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW IN TEMPLATE MODE COMMAND
L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES
Viewing the settings in template mode also modifies the settings tree, showing only the settings categories that contain editable settings. The effect of applying the template to a typical settings tree view is shown below.
Typical settings tree view without template applied.
Typical settings tree view with template applied via the
Template Mode > View In Template Mode
command.
842860A1.CDR
Figure 4–5: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW IN TEMPLATE MODE SETTINGS COMMAND
Use the following procedure to display settings available for editing and settings locked by the template.
1.
Select an installed device or a settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2.
Apply the template by selecting the Template Mode > View All Settings option.
3.
Enter the template password then click OK to apply the template.
Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to edit the settings specified by the template, but all settings will be shown. The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below.
4
Phase time overcurrent settings window without template applied.
Phase time overcurrent window with template applied via the
Template Mode > View All Settings
command.
The template specifies that only the Pickup and Curve settings be available.
842859A1.CDR
Figure 4–6: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW ALL SETTINGS COMMAND e) REMOVING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE
It may be necessary at some point to remove a settings template. Once a template is removed, it cannot be reapplied and it will be necessary to define a new settings template.
1.
Select an installed device or settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2.
Select the Template Mode > Remove Settings Template option.
3.
Enter the template password and click OK to continue.
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 4-7
4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES
4.
Verify one more time that you wish to remove the template by clicking Yes.
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
The EnerVista software will remove all template information and all settings will be available.
4.2.2 SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATIONS
4
The UR allows users to secure parts or all of a FlexLogic™ equation, preventing unauthorized viewing or modification of critical FlexLogic™ applications. This is accomplished using the settings template feature to lock individual entries within
FlexLogic™ equations.
Secured FlexLogic™ equations will remain secure when files are sent to and retrieved from any UR-series device.
a) LOCKING FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION ENTRIES
The following procedure describes how to lock individual entries of a FlexLogic™ equation.
1.
Right-click the settings file or online device and select the Template Mode > Create Template item to enable the settings template feature.
2.
Select the FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation Editor settings menu item.
By default, all FlexLogic™ entries are specified as viewable and displayed against a yellow background. The icon on the upper right of the window will also indicate that EnerVista UR Setup is in EDIT mode.
3.
Specify which entries to lock by clicking on them.
The locked entries will be displayed against a grey background as shown in the example below.
Figure 4–7: LOCKING FLEXLOGIC™ ENTRIES IN EDIT MODE
4.
Click on Save to save and apply changes to the settings template.
5.
Select the Template Mode > View In Template Mode option to view the template.
6.
Apply a password to the template then click OK to secure the FlexLogic™ equation.
4-8 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES
Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to view and edit the FlexLogic™ entries not locked by the template. The effect of applying the template to the FlexLogic™ entries in the above procedure is shown below.
Typical FlexLogic™ entries without template applied.
Typical the
FlexLogic™ entries locked with template via
Template Mode > View In Template Mode
command.
842861A1.CDR
Figure 4–8: LOCKING FLEXLOGIC ENTRIES THROUGH SETTING TEMPLATES
The FlexLogic™ entries are also shown as locked in the graphical view (as shown below) and on the front panel display.
4
Figure 4–9: SECURED FLEXLOGIC™ IN GRAPHICAL VIEW b) LOCKING FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATIONS TO A SERIAL NUMBER
A settings file and associated FlexLogic™ equations can also be locked to a specific UR serial number. Once the desired
FlexLogic™ entries in a settings file have been secured, use the following procedure to lock the settings file to a specific serial number.
1.
Select the settings file in the offline window.
2.
Right-click on the file and select the Edit Settings File Properties item.
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 4-9
4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES
The following window is displayed.
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4
Figure 4–10: TYPICAL SETTINGS FILE PROPERTIES WINDOW
3.
Enter the serial number of the L90 device to lock to the settings file in the Serial # Lock field.
The settings file and corresponding secure FlexLogic™ equations are now locked to the L90 device specified by the serial number.
4.2.3 SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY
A traceability feature for settings files allows the user to quickly determine if the settings in a L90 device have been changed since the time of installation from a settings file. When a settings file is transfered to a L90 device, the date, time, and serial number of the L90 are sent back to EnerVista UR Setup and added to the settings file on the local PC. This information can be compared with the L90 actual values at any later date to determine if security has been compromised.
The traceability information is only included in the settings file if a complete settings file is either transferred to the L90 device or obtained from the L90 device. Any partial settings transfers by way of drag and drop do not add the traceability information to the settings file.
1
SETTINGS FILE TRANSFERRED
TO UR-SERIES DEVICE
The serial number and last setting change date are stored in the UR-series device.
The serial number of the UR-series device and the file transfer date are added to the settings file when settings files are transferred to the device.
Compare transfer dates in the settings file and the
UR-series device to determine if security has been compromised.
2
SERIAL NUMBER AND TRANSFER DATE
SENT BACK TO ENERVISTA AND
ADDED TO SETTINGS FILE.
Figure 4–11: SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY MECHANISM
With respect to the above diagram, the traceability feature is used as follows.
4-10 L90 Line Current Differential System
842864A1.CDR
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES
1.
The transfer date of a setting file written to a L90 is logged in the relay and can be viewed via EnerVista UR Setup or the front panel display. Likewise, the transfer date of a setting file saved to a local PC is logged in EnerVista UR Setup.
2.
Comparing the dates stored in the relay and on the settings file at any time in the future will indicate if any changes have been made to the relay configuration since the settings file was saved.
a) SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION
The serial number and file transfer date are saved in the settings files when they sent to an L90 device.
The L90 serial number and file transfer date are included in the settings file device definition within the EnerVista UR Setup offline window as shown in the example below.
Traceability data in settings file device definition
4
842863A1.CDR
Figure 4–12: DEVICE DEFINITION SHOWING TRACEABILITY DATA
This information is also available in printed settings file reports as shown in the example below.
Traceability data in settings report
Figure 4–13: SETTINGS FILE REPORT SHOWING TRACEABILITY DATA
842862A1.CDR
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 4-11
4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES 4 HUMAN INTERFACES b) ONLINE DEVICE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION
The L90 serial number and file transfer date are available for an online device through the actual values. Select the Actual
Values > Product Info > Model Information menu item within the EnerVista UR Setup online window as shown in the example below.
Traceability data in online device actual values page
4
842865A1.CDR
Figure 4–14: TRACEABILITY DATA IN ACTUAL VALUES WINDOW
This infomormation if also available from the front panel display through the following actual values:
ACTUAL VALUES
ÖØ
PRODUCT INFO
Ö
MODEL INFORMATION
ÖØ
SERIAL NUMBER
ACTUAL VALUES
ÖØ
PRODUCT INFO
Ö
MODEL INFORMATION
ÖØ
LAST SETTING CHANGE c) ADDITIONAL TRACEABILITY RULES
The following additional rules apply for the traceability feature
• If the user changes any settings within the settings file in the offline window, then the traceability information is removed from the settings file.
• If the user creates a new settings file, then no traceability information is included in the settings file.
• If the user converts an existing settings file to another revision, then any existing traceability information is removed from the settings file.
• If the user duplicates an existing settings file, then any traceability information is transferred to the duplicate settings file.
4-12 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4.3FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4.3.1 FACEPLATE a) ENHANCED FACEPLATE
The front panel interface is one of two supported interfaces, the other interface being EnerVista UR Setup software. The front panel interface consists of LED panels, an RS232 port, keypad, LCD display, control pushbuttons, and optional userprogrammable pushbuttons.
The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules.
Five column LED indicator panel
Display
Keypad
Front panel
RS232 port
User-programmable pushbuttons 1 to 16
Figure 4–15: UR-SERIES ENHANCED FACEPLATE
842810A1.CDR
b) STANDARD FACEPLATE
The front panel interface is one of two supported interfaces, the other interface being EnerVista UR Setup software. The front panel interface consists of LED panels, an RS232 port, keypad, LCD display, control pushbuttons, and optional userprogrammable pushbuttons.
The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate which must be removed in order to access the keypad panel. The following figure shows the horizontal arrangement of the faceplate panels.
LED panel 1 LED panel 2 LED panel 3
4
Display
Front panel
RS232 port
GE Multilin
Small user-programmable
(control) pushbuttons 1 to 7
User-programmable pushbuttons 1 to 12
Keypad
827801A7.CDR
Figure 4–16: UR-SERIES STANDARD HORIZONTAL FACEPLATE PANELS
L90 Line Current Differential System 4-13
4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES
The following figure shows the vertical arrangement of the faceplate panels for relays ordered with the vertical option.
DISPLAY
MENU
HELP
ESCAPE
ENTER
MESSAGE
VALUE
1
0
7
4
8
5
2
.
3
+/-
9
6
KEYPAD
LED PANEL 3
4
LED PANEL 2
STATUS
IN SERVICE
TROUBLE
TEST MODE
TRIP
ALARM
PICKUP
EVENT CAUSE
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
FREQUENCY
OTHER
PHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
NEUTRAL/GROUND
RESET
USER 1
USER 2
USER 3
LED PANEL 1
Figure 4–17: UR-SERIES STANDARD VERTICAL FACEPLATE PANELS
4.3.2 LED INDICATORS a) ENHANCED FACEPLATE
The enhanced front panel display provides five columns of LED indicators. The first column contains 14 status and event cause LEDs, and the next four columns contain the 48 user-programmable LEDs.
The RESET key is used to reset any latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these latched conditions can also be reset via the
SETTINGS
ÖØ
INPUT/OUTPUTS
ÖØ
RESETTING
menu). The RS232 port is intended for connection to a portable PC.
The USER keys are used by the breaker control feature.
842811A1.CDR
Figure 4–18: TYPICAL LED INDICATOR PANEL FOR ENHANCED FACEPLATE
The status indicators in the first column are described below.
• IN SERVICE: This LED indicates that control power is applied, all monitored inputs, outputs, and internal systems are
OK, and that the device has been programmed.
4-14 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
• TROUBLE: This LED indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem.
• TEST MODE: This LED indicates that the relay is in test mode.
• TRIP: This LED indicates that the FlexLogic™ operand serving as a trip switch has operated. This indicator always latches; as such, a reset command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset.
• ALARM: This LED indicates that the FlexLogic™ operand serving as an alarm switch has operated. This indicator is never latched.
• PICKUP: This LED indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.
The event cause indicators in the first column are described below.
Events cause LEDs are turned on or off by protection elements that have their respective target setting selected as either
“Enabled” or “Latched”. If a protection element target setting is “Enabled”, then the corresponding event cause LEDs remain on as long as operate operand associated with the element remains asserted. If a protection element target setting is “Latched”, then the corresponding event cause LEDs turn on when the operate operand associated with the element is asserted and remain on until the RESET button on the front panel is pressed after the operand is reset.
All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn off or on the phase A, B or C LEDs. This includes phase instantaneous overcurrent, phase undervoltage, etc. This means that the phase A, B, and C operate operands for individual protection elements are ORed to turn on or off the phase A, B or C LEDs.
• VOLTAGE: This LED indicates voltage was involved.
• CURRENT: This LED indicates current was involved.
• FREQUENCY: This LED indicates frequency was involved.
• OTHER: This LED indicates a composite function was involved.
• PHASE A: This LED indicates phase A was involved.
• PHASE B: This LED indicates phase B was involved.
• PHASE C: This LED indicates phase C was involved.
• NEUTRAL/GROUND: This LED indicates that neutral or ground was involved.
The user-programmable LEDs consist of 48 amber LED indicators in four columns. The operation of these LEDs is userdefined. Support for applying a customized label beside every LED is provided. Default labels are shipped in the label package of every L90, together with custom templates. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels.
User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used to communicate with operators. Refer to the User-programmable LEDs section in chapter 5 for the settings used to program the operation of the LEDs on these panels.
b) STANDARD FACEPLATE
The standard faceplate consists of three panels with LED indicators, keys, and a communications port. The RESET key is used to reset any latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these latched conditions can also be reset via the
SETTINGS
ÖØ
INPUT/OUTPUTS
ÖØ
RESETTING
menu). The RS232 port is intended for connection to a portable PC.
The USER keys are used by the breaker control feature.
4
STATUS
IN SERVICE
TROUBLE
TEST MODE
TRIP
ALARM
PICKUP
EVENT CAUSE
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
FREQUENCY
OTHER
PHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
NEUTRAL/GROUND
Figure 4–19: LED PANEL 1
RESET
USER 1
USER 2
USER 3
842781A1.CDR
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 4-15
4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4
STATUS INDICATORS:
• IN SERVICE: Indicates that control power is applied; all monitored inputs/outputs and internal systems are OK; the relay has been programmed.
• TROUBLE: Indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem.
• TEST MODE: Indicates that the relay is in test mode.
• TRIP: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic™ operand serving as a Trip switch has operated. This indicator always latches; the reset command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset.
• ALARM: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic™ operand serving as an Alarm switch has operated. This indicator is never latched.
• PICKUP: Indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.
EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS:
Events cause LEDs are turned on or off by protection elements that have their respective target setting selected as either
“Enabled” or “Latched”. If a protection element target setting is “Enabled”, then the corresponding event cause LEDs remain on as long as operate operand associated with the element remains asserted. If a protection element target setting is “Latched”, then the corresponding event cause LEDs turn on when the operate operand associated with the element is asserted and remain on until the RESET button on the front panel is pressed after the operand is reset.
All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn off or on the phase A, B or C LEDs. This includes phase instantaneous overcurrent, phase undervoltage, etc. This means that the phase A, B, and C operate operands for individual protection elements are ORed to turn on or off the phase A, B or C LEDs.
• VOLTAGE: Indicates voltage was involved.
• CURRENT: Indicates current was involved.
• FREQUENCY: Indicates frequency was involved.
• OTHER: Indicates a composite function was involved.
• PHASE A: Indicates phase A was involved.
• PHASE B: Indicates phase B was involved.
• PHASE C: Indicates phase C was involved.
• NEUTRAL/GROUND: Indicates that neutral or ground was involved.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE INDICATORS:
The second and third provide 48 amber LED indicators whose operation is controlled by the user. Support for applying a customized label beside every LED is provided.
User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used to communicate with operators. Refer to the User-programmable LEDs section in chapter 5 for the settings used to program the operation of the LEDs on these panels.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
Figure 4–20: LED PANELS 2 AND 3 (INDEX TEMPLATE)
DEFAULT LABELS FOR LED PANEL 2:
The default labels are intended to represent:
4-16 L90 Line Current Differential System
842782A1.CDR
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
• GROUP 1...6: The illuminated GROUP is the active settings group.
• BREAKER 1(2) OPEN: The breaker is open.
• BREAKER 1(2) CLOSED: The breaker is closed.
• BREAKER 1(2) TROUBLE: A problem related to the breaker has been detected.
• SYNCHROCHECK NO1(2) IN-SYNCH: Voltages have satisfied the synchrocheck element.
• RECLOSE ENABLED: The recloser is operational.
• RECLOSE DISABLED: The recloser is not operational.
• RECLOSE IN PROGRESS: A reclose operation is in progress.
• RECLOSE LOCKED OUT: The recloser is not operational and requires a reset.
NOTE
Firmware revisions 2.9x and earlier support eight user setting groups; revisions 3.0x and higher support six setting groups. For convenience of users using earlier firmware revisions, the relay panel shows eight setting groups. Please note that the LEDs, despite their default labels, are fully user-programmable.
The relay is shipped with the default label for the LED panel 2. The LEDs, however, are not pre-programmed. To match the pre-printed label, the LED settings must be entered as shown in the User-programmable LEDs section of chapter 5. The
LEDs are fully user-programmable. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels for both panels as explained in the following section.
4
842784A1.CDR
Figure 4–21: LED PANEL 2 (DEFAULT LABELS)
4.3.3 CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS a) ENHANCED FACEPLATE
The following procedure requires the pre-requisites listed below.
• EnerVista UR Setup software is installed and operational.
• The L90 settings have been saved to a settings file.
• The L90 front panel label cutout sheet (GE Multilin part number 1006-0047) has been downloaded from http:// www.GEindustrial.com/multilin/support/ur and printed.
• Small-bladed knife.
This procedure describes how to create custom LED labels for the enhanced front panel display.
1.
Start the EnerVista UR Setup software.
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 4-17
4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES
2.
Select the Front Panel Report item at the bottom of the menu tree for the settings file. The front panel report window will be displayed.
4
Figure 4–22: FRONT PANEL REPORT WINDOW
3.
Enter the text to appear next to each LED and above each user-programmable pushbuttons in the fields provided.
4.
Feed the L90 front panel label cutout sheet into a printer and press the Print button in the front panel report window.
5.
When printing is complete, fold the sheet along the perforated lines and punch out the labels.
6.
Remove the L90 label insert tool from the package and bend the tabs as described in the following procedures. These tabs will be used for removal of the default and custom LED labels.
It is important that the tool be used EXACTLY as shown below, with the printed side containing the GE part number facing the user.
NOTE
The label package shipped with every L90 contains the three default labels shown below, the custom label template sheet, and the label removal tool.
If the default labels are suitable for your application, insert them in the appropriate slots and program the LEDs to match them. If you require custom labels, follow the procedures below to remove the original labels and insert the new ones.
The following procedure describes how to setup and use the label removal tool.
1.
Bend the tabs at the left end of the tool upwards as shown below.
4-18 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
2.
Bend the tab at the center of the tool tail as shown below.
4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
The following procedure describes how to remove the LED labels from the L90 enhanced front panel and insert the custom labels.
1.
Use the knife to lift the LED label and slide the label tool underneath. Make sure the bent tabs are pointing away from the relay.
4
2.
Slide the label tool under the LED label until the tabs snap out as shown below. This will attach the label tool to the LED label.
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 4-19
4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
3.
Remove the tool and attached LED label as shown below.
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4
4.
Slide the new LED label inside the pocket until the text is properly aligned with the LEDs, as shown below.
The following procedure describes how to remove the user-programmable pushbutton labels from the L90 enhanced front panel and insert the custom labels.
1.
Use the knife to lift the pushbutton label and slide the tail of the label tool underneath, as shown below. Make sure the bent tab is pointing away from the relay.
4-20 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
2.
Slide the label tool under the user-programmable pushbutton label until the tabs snap out as shown below. This will attach the label tool to the user-programmable pushbutton label.
3.
Remove the tool and attached user-programmable pushbutton label as shown below.
4
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 4-21
4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.
Slide the new user-programmable pushbutton label inside the pocket until the text is properly aligned with the buttons, as shown below.
4 b) STANDARD FACEPLATE
Custom labeling of an LED-only panel is facilitated through a Microsoft Word file available from the following URL: http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin/support/ur/
This file provides templates and instructions for creating appropriate labeling for the LED panel. The following procedures are contained in the downloadable file. The panel templates provide relative LED locations and located example text (x) edit boxes. The following procedure demonstrates how to install/uninstall the custom panel labeling.
1.
Remove the clear Lexan Front Cover (GE Multilin part number: 1501-0014).
Push in and gently lift up the cover.
842771A1.CDR
2.
Pop out the LED module and/or the blank module with a screwdriver as shown below. Be careful not to damage the plastic covers.
( LED MODULE ) ( BLANK MODULE )
F60 FEEDER MANAGEMENT RELAY
842722A1.CDR
3.
Place the left side of the customized module back to the front panel frame, then snap back the right side.
4.
Put the clear Lexan front cover back into place.
4-22 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
The following items are required to customize the L90 display module:
• Black and white or color printer (color preferred).
• Microsoft Word 97 or later software for editing the template.
• 1 each of: 8.5" x 11" white paper, exacto knife, ruler, custom display module (GE Multilin Part Number: 1516-0069), and a custom module cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1502-0015).
The following procedure describes how to customize the L90 display module:
1.
Open the LED panel customization template with Microsoft Word. Add text in places of the LED x text placeholders on the template(s). Delete unused place holders as required.
2.
When complete, save the Word file to your local PC for future use.
3.
Print the template(s) to a local printer.
4.
From the printout, cut-out the Background Template from the three windows, using the cropmarks as a guide.
5.
Put the Background Template on top of the custom display module (GE Multilin Part Number: 1513-0069) and snap the clear custom module cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1502-0015) over it and the templates.
4.3.4 DISPLAY
All messages are displayed on a 2
× 20 backlit liquid crystal display (LCD) to make them visible under poor lighting conditions. Messages are descriptive and should not require the aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will default to user-defined messages. Any high priority event driven message will automatically override the default message and appear on the display.
4.3.5 KEYPAD
4
Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: actual values, settings, commands, and targets.
The MENU key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups.
The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys scroll increment or decrement numerical setting values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit mode. Alternatively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad.
The decimal key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The HELP key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The ENTER key stores altered setting values.
4.3.6 BREAKER CONTROL a) INTRODUCTION
The L90 can interface with associated circuit breakers. In many cases the application monitors the state of the breaker, which can be presented on faceplate LEDs, along with a breaker trouble indication. Breaker operations can be manually initiated from faceplate keypad or automatically initiated from a FlexLogic™ operand. A setting is provided to assign names to each breaker; this user-assigned name is used for the display of related flash messages. These features are provided for two breakers; the user may use only those portions of the design relevant to a single breaker, which must be breaker 1.
For the following discussion it is assumed the
SETTINGS
ÖØ
SYSTEM SETUP
ÖØ
BREAKERS
Ö
BREAKER 1(2)
Ö
BREAKER
FUNCTION
setting is "Enabled" for each breaker.
b) CONTROL MODE SELECTION AND MONITORING
Installations may require that a breaker is operated in the three-pole only mode (3-pole), or in the one and three-pole (1pole) mode, selected by setting. If the mode is selected as three-pole, a single input tracks the breaker open or closed position. If the mode is selected as one-pole, all three breaker pole states must be input to the relay. These inputs must be in agreement to indicate the position of the breaker.
For the following discussion it is assumed the
SETTINGS
ÖØ
SYSTEM SETUP
ÖØ
BREAKERS
Ö
BREAKER 1(2)
ÖØ
BREAKER
1(2) PUSH BUTTON CONTROL
setting is “Enabled” for each breaker.
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 4-23
4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES c) FACEPLATE (USER KEY) CONTROL
After the 30 minute interval during which command functions are permitted after a correct command password, the user cannot open or close a breaker via the keypad. The following discussions begin from the not-permitted state.
d) CONTROL OF TWO BREAKERS
For the following example setup, the
(Name)
field represents the user-programmed variable name.
For this application (setup shown below), the relay is connected and programmed for both breaker 1 and breaker 2. The
USER 1 key performs the selection of which breaker is to be operated by the USER 2 and USER 3 keys. The USER 2 key is used to manually close the breaker and the USER 3 key is used to manually open the breaker.
4
ENTER COMMAND
PASSWORD
Press USER 1
To Select Breaker
BKR1-(Name) SELECTED
USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP
This message appears when the USER 1, USER 2, or USER 3 key is pressed and a
COMMAND PASSWORD
is required; i.e. if
COMMAND PASSWORD
is enabled and no commands have been issued within the last 30 minutes.
This message appears if the correct password is entered or if none is required. This message will be maintained for 30 seconds or until the USER 1 key is pressed again.
This message is displayed after the USER 1 key is pressed for the second time. Three possible actions can be performed from this state within 30 seconds as per items (1), (2) and (3) below:
(1)
USER 2 OFF/ON
To Close BKR1-(Name)
If the USER 2 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 2 key is pressed again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an output relay to close breaker 1.
(2)
USER 3 OFF/ON
To Open BKR1-(Name)
If the USER 3 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 3 key is pressed again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an output relay to open breaker 1.
(3)
BKR2-(Name) SELECTED
USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP
If the USER 1 key is pressed at this step, this message appears showing that a different breaker is selected. Three possible actions can be performed from this state as per (1),
(2) and (3). Repeatedly pressing the USER 1 key alternates between available breakers.
Pressing keys other than USER 1, 2 or 3 at any time aborts the breaker control function.
e) CONTROL OF ONE BREAKER
For this application the relay is connected and programmed for breaker 1 only. Operation for this application is identical to that described above for two breakers.
4.3.7 MENUS a) NAVIGATION
Press the MENU key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily followed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the MENU key advances through the following main heading pages:
• Actual values.
• Settings.
• Commands.
• Targets.
• User displays (when enabled).
4-24 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE b) HIERARCHY
The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double scroll bar characters (
), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters (). The header display pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE
UP and DOWN keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing the MESSAGE RIGHT key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually pressing the MESSAGE LEFT key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
HIGHEST LEVEL
SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)
PASSWORD
SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
c) EXAMPLE MENU NAVIGATION
ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
Ø
SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Ø
SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
Press the MENU key until the header for the first Actual Values page appears. This page contains system and relay status information. Repeatedly press the MESSAGE keys to display the other actual value headers.
Press the MENU key until the header for the first page of Settings appears. This page contains settings to configure the relay.
Press the MESSAGE DOWN key to move to the next Settings page. This page contains settings for System Setup. Repeatedly press the MESSAGE UP and DOWN keys to display the other setting headers and then back to the first Settings page header.
PASSWORD
SECURITY
Ø
Ø
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
Ø
PASSWORD
SECURITY
Ø
DISPLAY
PROPERTIES
Ø
FLASH MESSAGE
TIME: 1.0 s
Ø
DEFAULT MESSAGE
INTENSITY: 25%
From the Settings page one header (Product Setup), press the MESSAGE RIGHT key once to display the first sub-header (Password Security).
Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key once more and this will display the first setting for
Password Security. Pressing the MESSAGE DOWN key repeatedly will display the remaining setting messages for this sub-header.
Press the MESSAGE LEFT key once to move back to the first sub-header message.
Pressing the MESSAGE DOWN key will display the second setting sub-header associated with the Product Setup header.
Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key once more and this will display the first setting for
Display Properties.
To view the remaining settings associated with the Display Properties subheader, repeatedly press the MESSAGE DOWN key. The last message appears as shown.
4
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 4-25
4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.3.8 CHANGING SETTINGS a) ENTERING NUMERICAL DATA
Each numerical setting has its own minimum, maximum, and increment value associated with it. These parameters define what values are acceptable for a setting.
4
FLASH MESSAGE
Ø
MINIMUM: 0.5
MAXIMUM: 10.0
For example, select the
MESSAGE TIME
setting.
SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
DISPLAY PROPERTIES
Ö
FLASH
Press the HELP key to view the minimum and maximum values. Press the HELP key again to view the next context sensitive help message.
Two methods of editing and storing a numerical setting value are available.
• 0 to 9 and decimal point: The relay numeric keypad works the same as that of any electronic calculator. A number is entered one digit at a time. The leftmost digit is entered first and the rightmost digit is entered last. Pressing the MES-
SAGE LEFT key or pressing the ESCAPE key, returns the original value to the display.
• VALUE keys: The VALUE UP key increments the displayed value by the step value, up to the maximum value allowed.
While at the maximum value, pressing the VALUE UP key again will allow the setting selection to continue upward from the minimum value. The VALUE DOWN key decrements the displayed value by the step value, down to the minimum value. While at the minimum value, pressing the VALUE DOWN key again will allow the setting selection to continue downward from the maximum value.
FLASH MESSAGE
Ø
NEW SETTING
HAS BEEN STORED
As an example, set the flash message time setting to 2.5 seconds. Press the appropriate numeric keys in the sequence “2 . 5". The display message will change as the digits are being entered.
Until ENTER is pressed, editing changes are not registered by the relay. Therefore, press
ENTER to store the new value in memory. This flash message will momentarily appear as confirmation of the storing process. Numerical values which contain decimal places will be rounded-off if more decimal place digits are entered than specified by the step value.
b) ENTERING ENUMERATION DATA
Enumeration settings have data values which are part of a set, whose members are explicitly defined by a name. A set is comprised of two or more members.
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
For example, the selections available for
ACCESS LEVEL
are "Restricted", "Command",
"Setting", and "Factory Service".
Enumeration type values are changed using the VALUE keys. The VALUE UP key displays the next selection while the
VALUE DOWN key displays the previous selection.
ACCESS LEVEL:
Setting
Ø
NEW SETTING
HAS BEEN STORED
If the
ACCESS LEVEL
needs to be "Setting", press the VALUE keys until the proper selection is displayed. Press HELP at any time for the context sensitive help messages.
Changes are not registered by the relay until the ENTER key is pressed. Pressing
ENTER stores the new value in memory. This flash message momentarily appears as confirmation of the storing process.
c) ENTERING ALPHANUMERIC TEXT
Text settings have data values which are fixed in length, but user-defined in character. They may be comprised of upper case letters, lower case letters, numerals, and a selection of special characters.
4-26 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
There are several places where text messages may be programmed to allow the relay to be customized for specific applications. One example is the Message Scratchpad. Use the following procedure to enter alphanumeric text messages.
For example: to enter the text, “Breaker #1”.
1.
Press the decimal to enter text edit mode.
2.
Press the VALUE keys until the character 'B' appears; press the decimal key to advance the cursor to the next position.
3.
Repeat step 2 for the remaining characters: r,e,a,k,e,r, ,#,1.
4.
Press ENTER to store the text.
5.
If you have any problem, press HELP to view context sensitive help. Flash messages will sequentially appear for several seconds each. For the case of a text setting message, pressing HELP displays how to edit and store new values.
d) ACTIVATING THE RELAY
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
When the relay is powered up, the Trouble LED will be on, the In Service LED off, and this message displayed, indicating the relay is in the "Not Programmed" state and is safeguarding (output relays blocked) against the installation of a relay whose settings have not been entered. This message remains until the relay is explicitly put in the "Programmed" state.
To change the
RELAY SETTINGS
: "Not Programmed" mode to "Programmed", proceed as follows:
1.
Press the MENU key until the
SETTINGS
header flashes momentarily and the
PRODUCT SETUP
message appears on the display.
2.
Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the
PASSWORD SECURITY
message appears on the display.
3.
Press the MESSAGE DOWN key until the
INSTALLATION
message appears on the display.
4.
Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed message is displayed.
4
SETTINGS
Ø
SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
PASSWORD
SECURITY
DISPLAY
PROPERTIES
↓
INSTALLATION
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
5.
After the
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed message appears on the display, press the VALUE keys change the selection to "Programmed".
6.
Press the ENTER key.
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
RELAY SETTINGS:
Programmed
NEW SETTING
HAS BEEN STORED
7.
When the "NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED" message appears, the relay will be in "Programmed" state and the
In Service LED will turn on.
e) ENTERING INITIAL PASSWORDS
The L90 supports password entry from a local or remote connection.
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 4-27
4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4
Local access is defined as any access to settings or commands via the faceplate interface. This includes both keypad entry and the faceplate RS232 connection. Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear communications port. This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any changes to the local or remote passwords enables this functionality.
To enter the initial setting (or command) password, proceed as follows:
1.
Press the MENU key until the
SETTINGS
header flashes momentarily and the
PRODUCT SETUP
message appears on the display.
2.
Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the
ACCESS LEVEL
message appears on the display.
3.
Press the MESSAGE DOWN key until the
CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS
message appears on the display.
4.
Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the
CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD
or
CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD
message appears on the display.
PASSWORD
SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
CHANGE LOCAL
PASSWORDS
CHANGE COMMAND
PASSWORD: No
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
ENCRYPTED COMMAND
PASSWORD: ---------
ENCRYPTED SETTING
PASSWORD: ---------
5.
After the
CHANGE...PASSWORD
message appears on the display, press the VALUE UP or DOWN key to change the selection to “Yes”.
6.
Press the ENTER key and the display will prompt you to
ENTER NEW PASSWORD
.
7.
Type in a numerical password (up to 10 characters) and press the ENTER key.
8.
When the
VERIFY NEW PASSWORD
is displayed, re-type in the same password and press ENTER.
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: Yes
ENTER NEW
PASSWORD: ##########
VERIFY NEW
PASSWORD: ##########
NEW PASSWORD
HAS BEEN STORED
9.
When the
NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED
message appears, your new Setting (or Command) Password will be active.
f) CHANGING EXISTING PASSWORD
To change an existing password, follow the instructions in the previous section with the following exception. A message will prompt you to type in the existing password (for each security level) before a new password can be entered.
In the event that a password has been lost (forgotten), submit the corresponding encrypted password from the
PASSWORD
SECURITY
menu to the Factory for decoding.
g) INVALID PASSWORD ENTRY
In the event that an incorrect Command or Setting password has been entered via the faceplate interface three times within a three-minute time span, the
LOCAL ACCESS DENIED
FlexLogic™ operand will be set to “On” and the L90 will not allow
Settings or Command access via the faceplate interface for the next ten minutes. The
TOO MANY ATTEMPTS – BLOCKED
4-28 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
FOR 10 MIN!
flash message will appear upon activation of the ten minute timeout or any other time a user attempts any change to the defined tier during the ten minute timeout. The
LOCAL ACCESS DENIED
FlexLogic™ operand will be set to
“Off” after the expiration of the ten-minute timeout.
In the event that an incorrect Command or Setting password has been entered via the any external communications interface three times within a three-minute time span, the
REMOTE ACCESS DENIED
FlexLogic™ operand will be set to “On” and the L90 will not allow Settings or Command access via the any external communications interface for the next ten minutes.
The
REMOTE ACCESS DENIED
FlexLogic™ operand will be set to “Off” after the expiration of the ten-minute timeout.
4
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 4-29
4
4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4-30 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5 SETTINGS 5.1OVERVIEW
SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
GE Multilin
5.1 OVERVIEW
5.1.1 SETTINGS MAIN MENU
SECURITY
DISPLAY
PROPERTIES
CLEAR RELAY
RECORDS
COMMUNICATIONS
MODBUS USER MAP
REAL TIME
CLOCK
FAULT REPORTS
OSCILLOGRAPHY
DATA LOGGER
DEMAND
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LEDS
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
SELF TESTS
CONTROL
PUSHBUTTONS
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
PUSHBUTTONS
FLEX STATE
PARAMETERS
USER-DEFINABLE
DISPLAYS
INSTALLATION
AC INPUTS
POWER SYSTEM
SIGNAL SOURCES
L90 POWER SYSTEM
L90 Line Current Differential System
5-1
5
5
5.1 OVERVIEW
SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC
SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
5-2
BREAKERS
SWITCHES
FLEXCURVES
PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT
FLEXLOGIC
EQUATION EDITOR
FLEXLOGIC
TIMERS
FLEXELEMENTS
NON-VOLATILE
LATCHES
SETTING GROUP 1
SETTING GROUP 2
↓
SETTING GROUP 6
TRIP BUS
SETTING GROUPS
SELECTOR SWITCH
TRIP OUTPUT
SYNCHROCHECK
DIGITAL ELEMENTS
DIGITAL COUNTERS
MONITORING
ELEMENTS
PILOT SCHEMES
5 SETTINGS
L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
SETTINGS
INPUTS / OUTPUTS
SETTINGS
TRANSDUCER I/O
SETTINGS
TESTING
GE Multilin
AUTORECLOSE
CONTACT INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
CONTACT OUTPUTS
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
REMOTE DEVICES
REMOTE INPUTS
REMOTE DPS INPUTS
REMOTE OUTPUTS
DNA BIT PAIRS
REMOTE OUTPUTS
UserSt BIT PAIRS
DIRECT
RESETTING
IEC 61850
GOOSE ANALOGS
IEC 61850
GOOSE UINTEGERS
DCMA INPUTS
RTD INPUTS
DCMA OUTPUTS
TEST MODE
FUNCTION: Disabled
TEST MODE FORCING:
On
FORCE CONTACT
INPUTS
FORCE CONTACT
OUTPUTS
5.1 OVERVIEW
5
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-3
5.1 OVERVIEW 5 SETTINGS
CHANNEL TESTS
PMU
TEST VALUES
5.1.2 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS
5
In the design of UR relays, the term element is used to describe a feature that is based around a comparator. The comparator is provided with an input (or set of inputs) that is tested against a programmed setting (or group of settings) to determine if the input is within the defined range that will set the output to logic 1, also referred to as “setting the flag”. A single comparator may make multiple tests and provide multiple outputs; for example, the time overcurrent comparator sets a pickup flag when the current input is above the setting and sets an operate flag when the input current has been at a level above the pickup setting for the time specified by the time-current curve settings. All comparators use analog parameter actual values as the input.
The exception to the above rule are the digital elements, which use logic states as inputs.
NOTE
Elements are arranged into two classes, grouped and control. Each element classed as a grouped element is provided with six alternate sets of settings, in setting groups numbered 1 through 6. The performance of a grouped element is defined by the setting group that is active at a given time. The performance of a control element is independent of the selected active setting group.
The main characteristics of an element are shown on the element logic diagram. This includes the inputs, settings, fixed logic, and the output operands generated (abbreviations used on scheme logic diagrams are defined in Appendix F).
Some settings for current and voltage elements are specified in per-unit (pu) calculated quantities:
pu quantity = (actual quantity) / (base quantity)
For current elements, the ‘base quantity’ is the nominal secondary or primary current of the CT.
Where the current source is the sum of two CTs with different ratios, the ‘base quantity’ will be the common secondary or primary current to which the sum is scaled (that is, normalized to the larger of the two rated CT inputs). For example, if CT1
= 300 / 5 A and CT2 = 100 / 5 A, then in order to sum these, CT2 is scaled to the CT1 ratio. In this case, the base quantity will be 5 A secondary or 300 A primary.
For voltage elements the ‘base quantity’ is the nominal primary voltage of the protected system which corresponds (based on VT ratio and connection) to secondary VT voltage applied to the relay.
For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with 14400:120 V delta-connected VTs, the secondary nominal voltage (1 pu) would be:
13800
120
14400
×
=
115 V
For Wye-connected VTs, the secondary nominal voltage (1 pu) would be:
(EQ 5.1)
14400
×
3
= 66.4 V
(EQ 5.2)
Many settings are common to most elements and are discussed below:
• FUNCTION setting: This setting programs the element to be operational when selected as “Enabled”. The factory default is “Disabled”. Once programmed to “Enabled”, any element associated with the function becomes active and all options become available.
• NAME setting: This setting is used to uniquely identify the element.
• SOURCE setting: This setting is used to select the parameter or set of parameters to be monitored.
• PICKUP setting: For simple elements, this setting is used to program the level of the measured parameter above or below which the pickup state is established. In more complex elements, a set of settings may be provided to define the range of the measured parameters which will cause the element to pickup.
5-4 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.1 OVERVIEW
• PICKUP DELAY setting: This setting sets a time-delay-on-pickup, or on-delay, for the duration between the pickup and operate output states.
• RESET DELAY setting: This setting is used to set a time-delay-on-dropout, or off-delay, for the duration between the
Operate output state and the return to logic 0 after the input transits outside the defined pickup range.
• BLOCK setting: The default output operand state of all comparators is a logic 0 or “flag not set”. The comparator remains in this default state until a logic 1 is asserted at the RUN input, allowing the test to be performed. If the RUN input changes to logic 0 at any time, the comparator returns to the default state. The RUN input is used to supervise the comparator. The BLOCK input is used as one of the inputs to RUN control.
• TARGET setting: This setting is used to define the operation of an element target message. When set to Disabled, no target message or illumination of a faceplate LED indicator is issued upon operation of the element. When set to Self-
Reset, the target message and LED indication follow the Operate state of the element, and self-resets once the operate element condition clears. When set to Latched, the target message and LED indication will remain visible after the element output returns to logic 0 - until a RESET command is received by the relay.
• EVENTS setting: This setting is used to control whether the Pickup, Dropout or Operate states are recorded by the event recorder. When set to Disabled, element pickup, dropout or operate are not recorded as events. When set to
Enabled, events are created for:
(Element) PKP (pickup)
(Element) DPO (dropout)
(Element) OP (operate)
The DPO event is created when the measure and decide comparator output transits from the pickup state (logic 1) to the dropout state (logic 0). This could happen when the element is in the operate state if the reset delay time is not ‘0’.
5.1.3 INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES a) BACKGROUND
The L90 may be used on systems with breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configurations.
In these applications, each of the two three-phase sets of individual phase currents (one associated with each breaker) can be used as an input to a breaker failure element. The sum of both breaker phase currents and 3I_0 residual currents may be required for the circuit relaying and metering functions. Two separate synchrocheck elements can be programmed to check synchronization between two different buses VT and the line VT. These requirements can be satisfied with a single
L90, equipped with sufficient CT and VT input channels, by selecting proper parameter to measure. A mechanism is provided to specify the AC parameter (or group of parameters) used as the input to protection/control comparators and some metering elements. Selection of the measured parameter(s) is partially performed by the design of a measuring element or protection/control comparator by identifying the measured parameter type (fundamental frequency phasor, harmonic phasor, symmetrical component, total waveform RMS magnitude, phase-phase or phase-ground voltage, etc.). The user completes the process by selecting the instrument transformer input channels to use and some parameters calculated from these channels. The input parameters available include the summation of currents from multiple input channels. For the summed currents of phase, 3I_0, and ground current, current from CTs with different ratios are adjusted to a single ratio before summation. A mechanism called a “Source” configures the routing of CT and VT input channels to measurement sub-systems.
Sources, in the context of L90 series relays, refer to the logical grouping of current and voltage signals such that one source contains all the signals required to measure the load or fault in a particular power apparatus. A given source may contain all or some of the following signals: three-phase currents, single-phase ground current, three-phase voltages and an auxiliary voltages from a single-phase VT for checking for synchronism.
To illustrate the concept of Sources, as applied to current inputs only, consider the breaker-and-a-half scheme below. Some protection elements, like breaker failure, require individual CT current as an input. Other elements, like distance, require the sum of both current as an input. The line differential function requires the CT currents to be processed individually to cope with a possible CT saturation of one CT during an external fault on the upper bus. The current into protected line is the phasor sum (or difference) of the currents in CT1 and CT2, depending on the current distribution on the upper bus.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-5
5.1 OVERVIEW 5 SETTINGS
5
Figure 5–1: BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME
In conventional analog or electronic relays, the sum of the currents is obtained from an appropriate external connection of all CTs through which any portion of the current for the element being protected could flow. Auxiliary CTs are required to perform ratio matching if the ratios of the primary CTs to be summed are not identical. In the L90 relay, provisions have been included for all the current signals to be brought to the device where grouping, CT ratio correction, and summation are applied internally via configuration settings. Up to 4 currents can be brought into L90 relay; current summation and CT ratio matching is performed internally. A major advantage of internal summation is that individual currents are available to the protection device (for example, as additional information to apply a restraint current properly, or to allow the provision of additional features that operate on the individual currents, such as breaker failure). Given the flexibility of this approach, it becomes necessary to add configuration settings to the platform to allow the user to select which sets of CT inputs will be added to form the net current into the protected device. The internal grouping of current and voltage signals forms an internal source. This source can be assigned a specific name and becomes available to protection and metering elements in the relay. Individual names can be given to each source to identify them for later use. For example, in the scheme shown above, three different sources are be configured as inputs for separate elements:
• Source 1: CT1 current, for the breaker failure 1 element and first current source for the line differential element
• Source 2: CT2 current, for breaker failure 2 element and second current source for the line differential element
• Source 3: the sum of the CT1 and CT2 currents for the distance function
In addition, two separate synchrocheck elements can be programmed to check synchronization between line voltage and two different bus voltages (SRC3–SRC1 and SRC3–SRC2).
b) CT/VT MODULE CONFIGURATION
CT and VT input channels are contained in CT/VT modules. The type of input channel can be phase/neutral/other voltage, phase/ground current, or sensitive ground current. The CT/VT modules calculate total waveform RMS levels, fundamental frequency phasors, symmetrical components and harmonics for voltage or current, as allowed by the hardware in each channel. These modules may calculate other parameters as directed by the CPU module.
A CT/VT module contains up to eight input channels, numbered 1 through 8. The channel numbering corresponds to the module terminal numbering 1 through 8 and is arranged as follows: Channels 1, 2, 3 and 4 are always provided as a group, hereafter called a “bank,” and all four are either current or voltage, as are channels 5, 6, 7 and 8. Channels 1, 2, 3 and 5, 6,
7 are arranged as phase A, B and C respectively. Channels 4 and 8 are either another current or voltage.
5-6 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.1 OVERVIEW
Banks are ordered sequentially from the block of lower-numbered channels to the block of higher-numbered channels, and from the CT/VT module with the lowest slot position letter to the module with the highest slot position letter, as follows:
INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER -->
CT/VT MODULE 1
< bank 1 >
< bank 2 >
CT/VT MODULE 2
< bank 3 >
< bank 4 >
CT/VT MODULE 3
< bank 5 >
< bank 6 >
The UR platform allows for a maximum of three sets of three-phase voltages and six sets of three-phase currents. The result of these restrictions leads to the maximum number of CT/VT modules in a chassis to three. The maximum number of sources is six. A summary of CT/VT module configurations is shown below.
ITEM
CT/VT Module
CT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 ground channel)
VT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 auxiliary channel)
MAXIMUM NUMBER
2
8
4
c) CT/VT INPUT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION
Upon relay startup, configuration settings for every bank of current or voltage input channels in the relay are automatically generated from the order code. Within each bank, a channel identification label is automatically assigned to each bank of channels in a given product. The ‘bank’ naming convention is based on the physical location of the channels, required by the user to know how to connect the relay to external circuits. Bank identification consists of the letter designation of the slot in which the CT/VT module is mounted as the first character, followed by numbers indicating the channel, either 1 or 5.
For three-phase channel sets, the number of the lowest numbered channel identifies the set. For example, F1 represents the three-phase channel set of F1/F2/F3, where F is the slot letter and 1 is the first channel of the set of three channels.
Upon startup, the CPU configures the settings required to characterize the current and voltage inputs, and will display them in the appropriate section in the sequence of the banks (as described above) as follows for a maximum configuration: F1,
F5, L1, L5, S1, and S5.
The above section explains how the input channels are identified and configured to the specific application instrument transformers and the connections of these transformers. The specific parameters to be used by each measuring element and comparator, and some actual values are controlled by selecting a specific source. The source is a group of current and voltage input channels selected by the user to facilitate this selection. With this mechanism, a user does not have to make multiple selections of voltage and current for those elements that need both parameters, such as a distance element or a watt calculation. It also gathers associated parameters for display purposes.
The basic idea of arranging a source is to select a point on the power system where information is of interest. An application example of the grouping of parameters in a source is a transformer winding, on which a three phase voltage is measured, and the sum of the currents from CTs on each of two breakers is required to measure the winding current flow.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-7
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5
5.2PRODUCT SETUP a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
Ö
SECURITY
SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
CHANGE LOCAL
PASSWORDS
ACCESS
SUPERVISION
DUAL PERMISSION
SECURITY ACCESS
MESSAGE
PASSWORD ACCESS
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Restricted, Command, Setting,
Factory Service (for factory use only)
Range: Disabled, Enabled
5.2.1 SECURITY
Two levels of password security are provided via the
ACCESS LEVEL
setting: command and setting. The factory service level is not available and intended for factory use only.
The following operations are under command password supervision:
• Operating the breakers via faceplate keypad.
• Changing the state of virtual inputs.
• Clearing the event records.
• Clearing the oscillography records.
• Clearing fault reports.
• Changing the date and time.
• Clearing the breaker arcing current.
• Clearing energy records.
• Clearing the data logger.
• Clearing the user-programmable pushbutton states.
The following operations are under setting password supervision:
• Changing any setting.
• Test mode operation.
The command and setting passwords are defaulted to “0” when the relay is shipped from the factory. When a password is set to “0”, the password security feature is disabled.
The L90 supports password entry from a local or remote connection.
Local access is defined as any access to settings or commands via the faceplate interface. This includes both keypad entry and the through the faceplate RS232 port. Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear communications port. This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any changes to the local or remote passwords enables this functionality.
When entering a settings or command password via EnerVista or any serial interface, the user must enter the corresponding connection password. If the connection is to the back of the L90, the remote password must be used. If the connection is to the RS232 port of the faceplate, the local password must be used.
The
PASSWORD ACCESS EVENTS
settings allows recording of password access events in the event recorder.
The local setting and command sessions are initiated by the user through the front panel display and are disabled either by the user or by timeout (via the setting and command level access timeout settings). The remote setting and command sessions are initiated by the user through the EnerVista UR Setup software and are disabled either by the user or by timeout.
5-8 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The state of the session (local or remote, setting or command) determines the state of the following FlexLogic™ operands.
• ACCESS LOC SETG OFF: Asserted when local setting access is disabled.
• ACCESS LOC SETG ON: Asserted when local setting access is enabled.
• ACCESS LOC CMND OFF: Asserted when local command access is disabled.
• ACCESS LOC CMND ON: Asserted when local command access is enabled.
• ACCESS REM SETG OFF: Asserted when remote setting access is disabled.
• ACCESS REM SETG ON: Asserted when remote setting access is enabled.
• ACCESS REM CMND OFF: Asserted when remote command access is disabled.
• ACCESS REM CMND ON: Asserted when remote command access is enabled.
The appropriate events are also logged in the Event Recorder as well. The FlexLogic™ operands and events are updated every five seconds.
A command or setting write operation is required to update the state of all the remote and local security operands shown above.
NOTE b) LOCAL PASSWORDS
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
Ö
SECURITY
ÖØ
CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS
CHANGE LOCAL
PASSWORDS
CHANGE COMMAND
PASSWORD: No
Range: No, Yes
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
MESSAGE
ENCRYPTED COMMAND
PASSWORD: ----------
Range: 0 to 9999999999
Note: ---------- indicates no password
MESSAGE
ENCRYPTED SETTING
PASSWORD: ----------
Range: 0 to 9999999999
Note: ---------- indicates no password
Proper password codes are required to enable each access level. A password consists of 1 to 10 numerical characters.
When a
CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD
or
CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD
setting is programmed to “Yes” via the front panel interface, the following message sequence is invoked:
1.
ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ____________.
2.
VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ____________.
3.
NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED.
To gain write access to a “Restricted” setting, program the
ACCESS LEVEL
setting in the main security menu to “Setting” and then change the setting, or attempt to change the setting and follow the prompt to enter the programmed password. If the password is correctly entered, access will be allowed. Accessibility automatically reverts to the “Restricted” level according to the access level timeout setting values.
If an entered password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding
ENCRYPTED PASSWORD
.
If the setting and command passwords are identical, then this one password allows access to both commands and settings.
NOTE
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-9
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS c) REMOTE PASSWORDS
The remote password settings are only visible from a remote connection via the EnerVista UR Setup software. Select the
Settings > Product Setup > Password Security menu item to open the remote password settings window.
5
Figure 5–2: REMOTE PASSWORD SETTINGS WINDOW
Proper passwords are required to enable each command or setting level access. A command or setting password consists of 1 to 10 numerical characters and are initially programmed to “0”. The following procedure describes how the set the command or setting password.
1.
Enter the new password in the Enter New Password field.
2.
Re-enter the password in the Confirm New Password field.
3.
Click the Change button. This button will not be active until the new password matches the confirmation password.
4.
If the original password is not “0”, then enter the original password in the Enter Password field and click the Send
Password to Device button.
5.
The new password is accepted and a value is assigned to the
ENCRYPTED PASSWORD
item.
If a command or setting password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding Encrypted Password value.
d) ACCESS SUPERVISION
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
Ö
SECURITY
ÖØ
ACCESS SUPERVISION
ACCESS
SUPERVISION
ACCESS LEVEL
TIMEOUTS
Range: 2 to 5 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
INVALID ATTEMPTS
BEFORE LOCKOUT: 3
Range: 5 to 60 minutes in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PASSWORD LOCKOUT
DURATION: 5 min
The following access supervision settings are available.
5-10 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
• INVALID ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT: This setting specifies the number of times an incorrect password can be entered within a three-minute time span before lockout occurs. When lockout occurs, the
LOCAL ACCESS DENIED
and
REMOTE ACCESS DENIED
FlexLogic™ operands are set to “On”. These operands are returned to the “Off” state upon expiration of the lockout.
• PASSWORD LOCKOUT DURATION: This setting specifies the time that the L90 will lockout password access after the number of invalid password entries specified by the
INVALID ATTEMPS BEFORE LOCKOUT
setting has occurred.
The L90 provides a means to raise an alarm upon failed password entry. Should password verification fail while accessing a password-protected level of the relay (either settings or commands), the
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS
FlexLogic™ operand is asserted. The operand can be programmed to raise an alarm via contact outputs or communications. This feature can be used to protect against both unauthorized and accidental access attempts.
The
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS
operand is reset with the
COMMANDS
ÖØ
CLEAR RECORDS
ÖØ
RESET UNAUTHORIZED
ALARMS
command. Therefore, to apply this feature with security, the command level should be password-protected. The operand does not generate events or targets.
If events or targets are required, the
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS
operand can be assigned to a digital element programmed with event logs or targets enabled.
The access level timeout settings are shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
Ö
SECURITY
ÖØ
ACCESS SUPERVISION
Ö
ACCESS LEVEL TIMEOUTS
ACCESS LEVEL
TIMEOUTS
COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS
TIMEOUT: 5 min
Range: 5 to 480 minutes in steps of 1
Range: 5 to 480 minutes in steps of 1
MESSAGE
SETTING LEVEL ACCESS
TIMEOUT: 30 min
These settings allow the user to specify the length of inactivity required before returning to the restricted access level. Note that the access level will set as restricted if control power is cycled.
• COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access) required to return to restricted access from the command password level.
• SETTING LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access) required to return to restricted access from the command password level.
e) DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
Ö
SECURITY
ÖØ
DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS
DUAL PERMISSION
SECURITY ACCESS
LOCAL SETTING AUTH:
On
Range: selected FlexLogic™ operands (see below)
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
REMOTE SETTING AUTH:
On
Range: 5 to 480 minutes in steps of 1
MESSAGE
ACCESS AUTH
TIMEOUT: 30 min.
The dual permission security access feature provides a mechanism for customers to prevent unauthorized or unintended upload of settings to a relay through the local or remote interfaces interface.
The following settings are available through the local (front panel) interface only.
• LOCAL SETTING AUTH: This setting is used for local (front panel or RS232 interface) setting access supervision.
Valid values for the FlexLogic™ operands are either “On” (default) or any physical “Contact Input ~~ On” value.
If this setting is “On“, then local setting access functions as normal; that is, a local setting password is required. If this setting is any contact input on FlexLogic™ operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing the local setting password to gain setting access.
If setting access is not authorized for local operation (front panel or RS232 interface) and the user attempts to obtain setting access, then the
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS
message is displayed on the front panel.
• REMOTE SETTING AUTH: This setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interfaces) setting access supervision.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-11
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
If this setting is “On” (the default setting), then remote setting access functions as normal; that is, a remote password is required). If this setting is “Off”, then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is provided. If this setting is any other FlexLogic™ operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing the remote setting password to gain setting access.
• ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT: This setting represents the timeout delay for local setting access. This setting is applicable when the
LOCAL SETTING AUTH
setting is programmed to any operand except “On”. The state of the FlexLogic™ operand is continuously monitored for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, local access is permitted and the timer programmed with the
ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT
setting value is started. When this timer expires, local setting access is immediately denied. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic™ operand is detected, the timeout is restarted. The status of this timer is updated every 5 seconds.
The following settings are available through the remote (EnerVista UR Setup) interface only. Select the Settings > Product
Setup > Security menu item to display the security settings window.
5
The Remote Settings Authorization setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interfaces) setting access supervision.
If this setting is “On” (the default setting), then remote setting access functions as normal; that is, a remote password is required). If this setting is “Off”, then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is provided. If this setting is any other FlexLogic™ operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing the remote setting password to gain setting access.
The Access Authorization Timeout setting represents the timeout delay remote setting access. This setting is applicable when the Remote Settings Authorization setting is programmed to any operand except “On” or “Off”. The state of the
FlexLogic™ operand is continuously monitored for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, remote setting access is permitted and the timer programmed with the Access Authorization Timeout setting value is started. When this timer expires, remote setting access is immediately denied. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic™ operand is detected, the timeout is restarted. The status of this timer is updated every 5 seconds.
5.2.2 DISPLAY PROPERTIES
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
DISPLAY PROPERTIES
DISPLAY
PROPERTIES
LANGUAGE:
English
FLASH MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DEFAULT MESSAGE
TIMEOUT: 300 s
DEFAULT MESSAGE
INTENSITY: 25 %
SCREEN SAVER
FEATURE: Disabled
SCREEN SAVER WAIT
TIME: 30 min
CURRENT CUT-OFF
LEVEL: 0.020 pu
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF
LEVEL: 1.0 V
Range: English; English, French; English, Russian;
English, Chinese
(range dependent on order code)
Range: 0.5 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1
Range: 10 to 900 s in steps of 1
Range: 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%
Visible only if a VFD is installed
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Visible only if an LCD is installed
Range: 1 to 65535 min. in steps of 1
Visible only if an LCD is installed
Range: 0.002 to 0.020 pu in steps of 0.001
Range: 0.1 to 1.0 V secondary in steps of 0.1
5-12 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
Some relay messaging characteristics can be modified to suit different situations using the display properties settings.
• LANGUAGE: This setting selects the language used to display settings, actual values, and targets. The range is dependent on the order code of the relay.
• FLASH MESSAGE TIME: Flash messages are status, warning, error, or information messages displayed for several seconds in response to certain key presses during setting programming. These messages override any normal messages. The duration of a flash message on the display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates.
• DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT: If the keypad is inactive for a period of time, the relay automatically reverts to a default message. The inactivity time is modified via this setting to ensure messages remain on the screen long enough during programming or reading of actual values.
• DEFAULT MESSAGE INTENSITY: To extend phosphor life in the vacuum fluorescent display, the brightness can be attenuated during default message display. During keypad interrogation, the display always operates at full brightness.
• SCREEN SAVER FEATURE and SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME: These settings are only visible if the L90 has a liquid crystal display (LCD) and control its backlighting. When the
SCREEN SAVER FEATURE
is “Enabled”, the LCD backlighting is turned off after the
DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT
followed by the
SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME
, providing that no keys have been pressed and no target messages are active. When a keypress occurs or a target becomes active, the LCD backlighting is turned on.
• CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the current cut-off threshold. Very low currents (1 to 2% of the rated value) are very susceptible to noise. Some customers prefer very low currents to display as zero, while others prefer the current be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The L90 applies a cutoff value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured currents. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level, it is substituted with zero. This applies to phase and ground current phasors as well as true RMS values and symmetrical components. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by communications protocols. Note that the cut-off level for the sensitive ground input is 10 times lower that the
CURRENT
CUT-OFF LEVEL
setting value. Raw current samples available via oscillography are not subject to cut-off.
This setting does not affect the 87L metering cutoff, which is constantly at 0.02 pu.
• VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the voltage cut-off threshold. Very low secondary voltage measurements (at the fractional volt level) can be affected by noise. Some customers prefer these low voltages to be displayed as zero, while others prefer the voltage to be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The L90 applies a cut-off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured voltages. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level, it is substituted with zero. This operation applies to phase and auxiliary voltages, and symmetrical components. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by communications protocols. Raw samples of the voltages available via oscillography are not subject cut-off.
The
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL
and the
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL
are used to determine the metered power cut-off levels. The power cut-off level is calculated as shown below. For Delta connections:
3-phase power cut-off =
3
×
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL
× ×
VT primary
×
CT primary
VT secondary
For Wye connections:
3-phase power cut-off
=
3
×
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL
×
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL
×
VT primary
×
CT primary
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
VT secondary
×
CT primary per-phase power cut-off =
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL
×
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL
VT secondary
× where VT primary = VT secondary
× VT ratio and CT primary = CT secondary × CT ratio.
For example, given the following settings:
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL
: “0.02 pu”
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL
: “1.0 V”
PHASE CT PRIMARY
: “100 A”
PHASE VT SECONDARY
: “66.4 V”
PHASE VT RATIO
: “208.00 : 1"
PHASE VT CONNECTION
: “Delta”.
(EQ 5.3)
(EQ 5.4)
(EQ 5.5)
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-13
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5
We have:
CT primary = “100 A”, and
VT primary =
PHASE VT SECONDARY
x
PHASE VT RATIO
= 66.4 V x 208 = 13811.2 V
The power cut-off is therefore: power cut-off = (
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL
×
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL
× CT primary × VT primary)/VT secondary
= ( 3
× 0.02 pu × 1.0 V × 100 A × 13811.2 V) / 66.4 V
= 720.5 watts
Any calculated power value below this cut-off will not be displayed. As well, the three-phase energy data will not accumulate if the total power from all three phases does not exceed the power cut-off.
NOTE
Lower the
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL
and
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL
with care as the relay accepts lower signals as valid measurements. Unless dictated otherwise by a specific application, the default settings of “0.02
pu” for
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL
and “1.0 V” for
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL
are recommended.
5.2.3 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
CLEAR RELAY
RECORDS
CLEAR FAULT REPORTS:
Off
MESSAGE
CLEAR EVENT RECORDS:
Off
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY?
No
CLEAR DATA LOGGER:
Off
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
CLEAR ARC AMPS 1:
Off
CLEAR ARC AMPS 2:
Off
CLEAR DEMAND:
Off
CLEAR CHNL STATUS:
Off
CLEAR ENERGY:
Off
RESET UNAUTH ACCESS:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Selected records can be cleared from user-programmable conditions with FlexLogic™ operands. Assigning user-programmable pushbuttons to clear specific records are typical applications for these commands. Since the L90 responds to rising edges of the configured FlexLogic™ operands, they must be asserted for at least 50 ms to take effect.
Clearing records with user-programmable operands is not protected by the command password. However, user-programmable pushbuttons are protected by the command password. Thus, if they are used to clear records, the user-programmable pushbuttons can provide extra security if required.
For example, to assign User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 to clear demand records, the following settings should be applied.
1.
Assign the clear demand function to Pushbutton 1 by making the following change in the
SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
menu:
CLEAR DEMAND:
“
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
”
5-14 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
2.
Set the properties for User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the
SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT
SETUP
ÖØ
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
Ö
USER PUSHBUTTON 1
menu:
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION:
“Self-reset”
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME:
“0.20 s”
5.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
COMMUNICATIONS
SERIAL PORTS
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
NETWORK
MODBUS PROTOCOL
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DNP PROTOCOL
DNP / IEC104
POINT LISTS
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
WEB SERVER
HTTP PROTOCOL
TFTP PROTOCOL
IEC 60870-5-104
PROTOCOL
SNTP PROTOCOL
ETHERNET SWITCH
See below.
5 b) SERIAL PORTS
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
Ö
SERIAL PORTS
SERIAL PORTS
MESSAGE
RS485 COM1 BAUD
RATE: 19200
RS485 COM1 PARITY:
None
Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,
28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200. Only active if CPU Type E is ordered.
Range: None, Odd, Even
Only active if CPU Type E is ordered
MESSAGE
RS485 COM1 RESPONSE
MIN TIME: 0 ms
Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10
Only active if CPU Type E is ordered
MESSAGE
RS485 COM2 BAUD
RATE: 19200
Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,
28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200
Range: None, Odd, Even
MESSAGE
RS485 COM2 PARITY:
None
Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10
MESSAGE
RS485 COM2 RESPONSE
MIN TIME: 0 ms
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-15
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5
The L90 is equipped with up to three independent serial communication ports. The faceplate RS232 port is intended for local use and is fixed at 19200 baud and no parity. The rear COM1 port type is selected when ordering: either an Ethernet or RS485 port. The rear COM2 port is RS485. The RS485 ports have settings for baud rate and parity. It is important that these parameters agree with the settings used on the computer or other equipment that is connected to these ports. Any of these ports may be connected to a computer running EnerVista UR Setup. This software can download and upload setting files, view measured parameters, and upgrade the relay firmware. A maximum of 32 relays can be daisy-chained and connected to a DCS, PLC or PC using the RS485 ports.
NOTE
For each RS485 port, the minimum time before the port will transmit after receiving data from a host can be set. This feature allows operation with hosts which hold the RS485 transmitter active for some time after each transmission.
c) NETWORK
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
NETWORK
NETWORK
IP ADDRESS:
0.0.0.0
Range: Standard IP address format
Not shown if CPU Type E is ordered.
MESSAGE
SUBNET IP MASK:
0.0.0.0
Range: Standard IP address format
Not shown if CPU Type E is ordered.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GATEWAY IP ADDRESS:
0.0.0.0
OSI NETWORK
ADDRESS (NSAP)
Range: Standard IP address format
Not shown if CPU Type E is ordered.
Range: Select to enter the
OSI NETWORK ADDRESS
.
Not shown if CPU Type E is ordered.
MESSAGE
ETHERNET OPERATION
MODE: Full-Duplex
Range: Half-Duplex, Full-Duplex
Not shown if CPU Type E or N is ordered.
These messages appear only if the L90 is ordered with an Ethernet card.
The IP addresses are used with the DNP, Modbus/TCP, IEC 61580, IEC 60870-5-104, TFTP, and HTTP protocols. The
NSAP address is used with the IEC 61850 protocol over the OSI (CLNP/TP4) stack only. Each network protocol has a setting for the TCP/UDP port number. These settings are used only in advanced network configurations and should normally be left at their default values, but may be changed if required (for example, to allow access to multiple UR-series relays behind a router). By setting a different
TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER
for a given protocol on each UR-series relay, the router can map the relays to the same external IP address. The client software (EnerVista UR Setup, for example) must be configured to use the correct port number if these settings are used.
When the NSAP address, any TCP/UDP port number, or any user map setting (when used with DNP) is changed, it will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (off-on).
NOTE
WARNING
Do not set more than one protocol to the same
TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER
, as this will result in unreliable operation of those protocols.
d) MODBUS PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
MODBUS PROTOCOL
MODBUS PROTOCOL
MODBUS SLAVE
ADDRESS: 254
Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1
Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MODBUS TCP PORT
NUMBER: 502
The serial communication ports utilize the Modbus protocol, unless configured for DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 operation (see descriptions below). This allows the EnerVista UR Setup software to be used. The UR operates as a Modbus slave device only. When using Modbus protocol on the RS232 port, the L90 will respond regardless of the
MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS
programmed. For the RS485 ports each L90 must have a unique address from 1 to 254. Address 0 is the broadcast address which all Modbus slave devices listen to. Addresses do not have to be sequential, but no two devices can have the same address or conflicts resulting in errors will occur. Generally, each device added to the link should use the next higher address starting at 1. Refer to Appendix B for more information on the Modbus protocol.
5-16 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
Changes to the
MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER
setting will not take effect until the L90 is restarted.
NOTE e) DNP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
DNP PROTOCOL
DNP PROTOCOL
DNP CHANNELS
Range: see sub-menu below
Range: 0 to 65519 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DNP ADDRESS:
65519
DNP NETWORK
CLIENT ADDRESSES
Range: see sub-menu below
Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DNP TCP/UDP PORT
NUMBER: 20000
Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: 0 to 60 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE
TIMEOUT: 5 s
Range: 1 to 255 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE
MAX RETRIES: 10
Range: 0 to 65519 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE
DEST ADDRESS: 1
MESSAGE
DNP CURRENT SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
100000
MESSAGE
DNP VOLTAGE SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
100000
MESSAGE
DNP POWER SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
100000
MESSAGE
DNP ENERGY SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
100000
MESSAGE
DNP PF SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
100000
MESSAGE
DNP OTHER SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
100000
Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DNP CURRENT DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DNP VOLTAGE DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DNP POWER DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DNP ENERGY DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DNP PF DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DNP OTHER DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-17
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DNP TIME SYNC IIN
PERIOD: 1440 min
DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT
SIZE: 240
DNP OBJECT 1
DEFAULT VARIATION: 2
DNP OBJECT 2
DEFAULT VARIATION: 2
DNP OBJECT 20
DEFAULT VARIATION: 1
DNP OBJECT 21
DEFAULT VARIATION: 1
DNP OBJECT 22
DEFAULT VARIATION: 1
DNP OBJECT 23
DEFAULT VARIATION: 2
DNP OBJECT 30
DEFAULT VARIATION: 1
DNP OBJECT 32
DEFAULT VARIATION: 1
DNP NUMBER OF PAIRED
CONTROL POINTS: 0
DNP TCP CONNECTION
TIMEOUT: 120 s
Range: 1 to 10080 min. in steps of 1
Range: 30 to 2048 in steps of 1
Range: 1, 2
Range: 1, 2
Range: 1, 2, 5, 6
Range: 1, 2, 9, 10
Range: 1, 2, 5, 6
Range: 1, 2, 5, 6
Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7
Range: 0 to 32 in steps of 1
Range: 10 to 300 s in steps of 1
The L90 supports the Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) version 3.0. The L90 can be used as a DNP slave device connected to multiple DNP masters (usually an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the L90 maintains two sets of DNP data change buffers and connection information, two DNP masters can actively communicate with the L90 at one time.
NOTE
The IEC 60870-5-104 and DNP protocols cannot be simultaneously. When the
IEC 60870-5-104 FUNCTION
setting is set to “Enabled”, the DNP protocol will not be operational. When this setting is changed it will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (off-to-on).
The DNP Channels sub-menu is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
DNP PROTOCOL
Ö
DNP CHANNELS
DNP CHANNELS
MESSAGE
DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT:
NETWORK
DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT:
COM2 - RS485
Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485,
FRONT PANEL - RS232, NETWORK - TCP,
NETWORK - UDP
Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485,
FRONT PANEL - RS232, NETWORK - TCP,
NETWORK - UDP
The
DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT
and
DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT
settings select the communications port assigned to the DNP protocol for each channel. Once DNP is assigned to a serial port, the Modbus protocol is disabled on that port. Note that COM1 can be used only in non-Ethernet UR relays. When this setting is set to “Network - TCP”, the DNP protocol can be used over
TCP/IP on channels 1 or 2. When this value is set to “Network - UDP”, the DNP protocol can be used over UDP/IP on channel 1 only. Refer to Appendix E for additional information on the DNP protocol.
Changes to the
DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT
and
DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT
settings will take effect only after power has been cycled to the relay.
NOTE
The
DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESS
settings can force the L90 to respond to a maximum of five specific DNP masters. The settings in this sub-menu are shown below.
5-18 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
DNP PROTOCOL
Ö
DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES
DNP NETWORK
CLIENT ADDRESSES
CLIENT ADDRESS 1:
0.0.0.0
Range: standard IP address
Range: standard IP address
MESSAGE
CLIENT ADDRESS 2:
0.0.0.0
Range: standard IP address
MESSAGE
CLIENT ADDRESS 3:
0.0.0.0
Range: standard IP address
MESSAGE
CLIENT ADDRESS 4:
0.0.0.0
Range: standard IP address
MESSAGE
CLIENT ADDRESS 5:
0.0.0.0
The
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE FUNCTION
should be “Disabled” for RS485 applications since there is no collision avoidance mechanism. The
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE TIMEOUT
sets the time the L90 waits for a DNP master to confirm an unsolicited response. The
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE MAX RETRIES
setting determines the number of times the L90 retransmits an unsolicited response without receiving confirmation from the master; a value of “255” allows infinite re-tries. The
DNP UNSOL
RESPONSE DEST ADDRESS
is the DNP address to which all unsolicited responses are sent. The IP address to which unsolicited responses are sent is determined by the L90 from the current TCP connection or the most recent UDP message.
The DNP scale factor settings are numbers used to scale analog input point values. These settings group the L90 analog input data into the following types: current, voltage, power, energy, power factor, and other. Each setting represents the scale factor for all analog input points of that type. For example, if the
DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR
setting is set to “1000”, all DNP analog input points that are voltages will be returned with values 1000 times smaller (for example, a value of 72000
V on the L90 will be returned as 72). These settings are useful when analog input values must be adjusted to fit within certain ranges in DNP masters. Note that a scale factor of 0.1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10 (that is, the value will be 10 times larger).
The
DNP DEFAULT DEADBAND
settings determine when to trigger unsolicited responses containing analog input data. These settings group the L90 analog input data into the following types: current, voltage, power, energy, power factor, and other.
Each setting represents the default deadband value for all analog input points of that type. For example, to trigger unsolicited responses from the L90 when any current values change by 15 A, the
DNP CURRENT DEFAULT DEADBAND
setting should be set to “15”. Note that these settings are the deadband default values. DNP object 34 points can be used to change deadband values, from the default, for each individual DNP analog input point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the L90, the default deadbands will be in effect.
The
DNP TIME SYNC IIN PERIOD
setting determines how often the Need Time Internal Indication (IIN) bit is set by the L90.
Changing this time allows the DNP master to send time synchronization commands more or less often, as required.
The
DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT SIZE
setting determines the size, in bytes, at which message fragmentation occurs. Large fragment sizes allow for more efficient throughput; smaller fragment sizes cause more application layer confirmations to be necessary which can provide for more robust data transfer over noisy communication channels.
NOTE
When the DNP data points (analog inputs and/or binary inputs) are configured for Ethernet-enabled relays, check the “DNP Points Lists” L90 web page to view the points lists. This page can be viewed with a web browser by entering the L90 IP address to access the L90 “Main Menu”, then by selecting the “Device Information Menu” > “DNP Points Lists” menu item.
The
DNP OBJECT 1 DEFAULT VARIATION
to
DNP OBJECT 32 DEFAULT VARIATION
settings allow the user to select the DNP default variation number for object types 1, 2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and 32. The default variation refers to the variation response when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. Refer to the DNP implementation section in appendix E for additional details.
The DNP binary outputs typically map one-to-one to IED data points. That is, each DNP binary output controls a single physical or virtual control point in an IED. In the L90 relay, DNP binary outputs are mapped to virtual inputs. However, some legacy DNP implementations use a mapping of one DNP binary output to two physical or virtual control points to support the concept of trip/close (for circuit breakers) or raise/lower (for tap changers) using a single control point. That is, the DNP master can operate a single point for both trip and close, or raise and lower, operations. The L90 can be configured to sup-
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-19
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5
port paired control points, with each paired control point operating two virtual inputs. The
DNP NUMBER OF PAIRED CONTROL
POINTS
setting allows configuration of from 0 to 32 binary output paired controls. Points not configured as paired operate on a one-to-one basis.
The
DNP ADDRESS
setting is the DNP slave address. This number identifies the L90 on a DNP communications link. Each
DNP slave should be assigned a unique address.
The
DNP TCP CONNECTION TIMEOUT
setting specifies a time delay for the detection of dead network TCP connections. If there is no data traffic on a DNP TCP connection for greater than the time specified by this setting, the connection will be aborted by the L90. This frees up the connection to be re-used by a client.
Relay power must be re-cycled after changing the
DNP TCP CONNECTION TIMEOUT
setting for the changes to take effect.
NOTE f) DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 POINT LISTS
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS
DNP / IEC104
POINT LISTS
BINARY INPUT / MSP
POINTS
Range: see sub-menu below
MESSAGE
ANALOG INPUT / MME
POINTS
Range: see sub-menu below
The binary and analog inputs points for the DNP protocol, or the MSP and MME points for IEC 60870-5-104 protocol, can configured to a maximum of 256 points. The value for each point is user-programmable and can be configured by assigning
FlexLogic™ operands for binary inputs / MSP points or FlexAnalog parameters for analog inputs / MME points.
The menu for the binary input points (DNP) or MSP points (IEC 60870-5-104) is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS
Ö
BINARY INPUT / MSP POINTS
BINARY INPUT / MSP
POINTS
Point:
Off
0
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Point: 1
Off
↓
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Point: 255
Off
Up to 256 binary input points can be configured for the DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 protocols. The points are configured by assigning an appropriate FlexLogic™ operand. Refer to the Introduction to FlexLogic™ section in this chapter for the full range of assignable operands.
The menu for the analog input points (DNP) or MME points (IEC 60870-5-104) is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS
ÖØ
ANALOG INPUT / MME POINTS
ANALOG INPUT / MME
POINTS
Point:
Off
0
Range: any FlexAnalog parameter
Range: any FlexAnalog parameter
MESSAGE
Point: 1
Off
↓
Range: any FlexAnalog parameter
MESSAGE
Point: 255
Off
Up to 256 analog input points can be configured for the DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 protocols. The analog point list is configured by assigning an appropriate FlexAnalog parameter to each point. Refer to Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters for the full range of assignable parameters.
5-20 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
NOTE
The DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists always begin with point 0 and end at the first “Off” value. Since DNP /
IEC 60870-5-104 point lists must be in one continuous block, any points assigned after the first “Off” point are ignored.
Changes to the DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists will not take effect until the L90 is restarted.
NOTE g) IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
GSSE / GOOSE
CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
SERVER
CONFIGURATION
IEC 61850 LOGICAL
NODE NAME PREFIXES
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MMXU DEADBANDS
GGIO1 STATUS
CONFIGURATION
GGIO2 CONTROL
CONFIGURATION
GGIO4 ANALOG
CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GGIO5 UINTEGER
CONFIGURATION
REPORT CONTROL
CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
XCBR
CONFIGURATION
XSWI
CONFIGURATION
The L90 Line Current Differential System is provided with optional IEC 61850 communications capability.
This feature is specified as a software option at the time of ordering. Refer to the Ordering section of chapter 2 for additional details. The IEC 61850 protocol features are not available if CPU type E is ordered.
5
The L90 supports the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) protocol as specified by IEC 61850. MMS is supported over two protocol stacks: TCP/IP over ethernet and TP4/CLNP (OSI) over ethernet. The L90 operates as an IEC 61850 server. The Remote inputs and outputs section in this chapter describe the peer-to-peer GSSE/GOOSE message scheme.
The GSSE/GOOSE configuration main menu is divided into two areas: transmission and reception.
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
Ö
GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION
GSSE / GOOSE
CONFIGURATION
TRANSMISSION
MESSAGE
RECEPTION
The main transmission menu is shown below:
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-21
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
Ö
GSSE/GOOSE...
Ö
TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION
GENERAL
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GSSE
FIXED GOOSE
CONFIGURABLE
GOOSE
The general transmission settings are shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
IEC 61850...
Ö
GSSE/GOOSE...
Ö
TRANSMISSION
Ö
GENERAL
GENERAL
DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE
UPDATE TIME: 60 s
Range: 1 to 60 s in steps of 1
The
DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE UPDATE TIME
sets the time between GSSE or GOOSE messages when there are no remote output state changes to be sent. When remote output data changes, GSSE or GOOSE messages are sent immediately. This setting controls the steady-state heartbeat time interval.
The
DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE UPDATE TIME
setting is applicable to GSSE, fixed L90 GOOSE, and configurable GOOSE.
The GSSE settings are shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
IEC 61850...
Ö
GSSE/GOOSE...
Ö
TRANSMISSION
ÖØ
GSEE
GSSE
GSSE FUNCTION:
Enabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Range: 65-character ASCII string
MESSAGE
GSSE ID:
GSSEOut
Range: standard MAC address
MESSAGE
DESTINATION MAC:
000000000000
These settings are applicable to GSSE only. If the fixed GOOSE function is enabled, GSSE messages are not transmitted.
The
GSSE ID
setting represents the IEC 61850 GSSE application ID name string sent as part of each GSSE message. This string identifies the GSSE message to the receiving device. In L90 releases previous to 5.0x, this name string was represented by the
RELAY NAME
setting.
The fixed GOOSE settings are shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT...
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
IEC 61850...
Ö
GSSE/GOOSE...
Ö
TRANSMISSION
ÖØ
FIXED GOOSE
FIXED GOOSE
GOOSE FUNCTION:
Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Range: 65-character ASCII string
MESSAGE
GOOSE ID:
GOOSEOut
Range: standard MAC address
MESSAGE
DESTINATION MAC:
000000000000
Range: 0 to 7 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
GOOSE VLAN PRIORITY:
4
Range: 0 to 4095 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
GOOSE VLAN ID:
0
Range: 0 to 16383 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
GOOSE ETYPE APPID:
0
5-22 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
These settings are applicable to fixed (DNA/UserSt) GOOSE only.
The
GOOSE ID
setting represents the IEC 61850 GOOSE application ID (GoID) name string sent as part of each GOOSE message. This string identifies the GOOSE message to the receiving device. In revisions previous to 5.0x, this name string was represented by the
RELAY NAME
setting.
The
DESTINATION MAC
setting allows the destination Ethernet MAC address to be set. This address must be a multicast address; the least significant bit of the first byte must be set. In L90 releases previous to 5.0x, the destination Ethernet MAC address was determined automatically by taking the sending MAC address (that is, the unique, local MAC address of the
L90) and setting the multicast bit.
The
GOOSE VLAN PRIORITY
setting indicates the Ethernet priority of GOOSE messages. This allows GOOSE messages to have higher priority than other Ethernet data. The
GOOSE ETYPE APPID
setting allows the selection of a specific application
ID for each GOOSE sending device. This value can be left at its default if the feature is not required. Both the
GOOSE VLAN
PRIORITY
and
GOOSE ETYPE APPID
settings are required by IEC 61850.
The configurable GOOSE settings are shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS...
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
IEC 61850...
Ö
GSSE...
Ö
TRANSMISSION
ÖØ
CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1(8)
CONFIGURABLE
GOOSE 1
CONFIG GSE 1
FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Range: 65-character ASCII string
MESSAGE
CONFIG GSE 1 ID:
GOOSEOut_1
Range: standard MAC address
MESSAGE
CONFIG GSE 1 DST MAC:
010CDC010000
Range: 0 to 7 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
CONFIG GSE 1
VLAN PRIORITY: 4
Range: 0 to 4095 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
CONFIG GSE 1
VLAN ID: 0
Range: 0 to 16383 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
CONFIG GSE 1
ETYPE APPID: 0
Range: 0 to 4294967295 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
CONFIG GSE 1
CONFREV: 1
Range: Aggressive, Medium, Relaxed, Heartbeat
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
CONFIG GSE 1 RESTRANS
CURVE: Relaxed
CONFIG GSE 1
DATASET ITEMS
Range: 64 data items; each can be set to all valid MMS data item references for transmitted data
The configurable GOOSE settings allow the L90 to be configured to transmit a number of different datasets within IEC
61850 GOOSE messages. Up to eight different configurable datasets can be configured and transmitted. This is useful for intercommunication between L90 IEDs and devices from other manufacturers that support IEC 61850.
The configurable GOOSE feature allows for the configuration of the datasets to be transmitted or received from the L90.
The L90 supports the configuration of eight (8) transmission and reception datasets, allowing for the optimization of data transfer between devices.
Items programmed for dataset 1 and 2 will have changes in their status transmitted as soon as the change is detected.
Datasets 1 and 2 should be used for high-speed transmission of data that is required for applications such as transfer tripping, blocking, and breaker fail initiate. At least one digital status value needs to be configured in the required dataset to enable transmission of configured data. Configuring analog data only to dataset 1 or 2 will not activate transmission.
Items programmed for datasets 3 through 8 will have changes in their status transmitted at a maximum rate of every
100 ms. Datasets 3 through 8 will regularly analyze each data item configured within them every 100 ms to identify if any changes have been made. If any changes in the data items are detected, these changes will be transmitted through a
GOOSE message. If there are no changes detected during this 100 ms period, no GOOSE message will be sent.
For all datasets 1 through 8, the integrity GOOSE message will still continue to be sent at the pre-configured rate even if no changes in the data items are detected.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-23
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
The GOOSE functionality was enhanced to prevent the relay from flooding a communications network with GOOSE messages due to an oscillation being created that is triggering a message.
The L90 has the ability of detecting if a data item in one of the GOOSE datasets is erroneously oscillating. This can be caused by events such as errors in logic programming, inputs improperly being asserted and de-asserted, or failed station components. If erroneously oscillation is detected, the L90 will stop sending GOOSE messages from the dataset for a minimum period of one second. Should the oscillation persist after the one second time-out period, the L90 will continue to block transmission of the dataset. The L90 will assert the
MAINTENANCE ALERT: GGIO Ind XXX oscill
self-test error message on the front panel display, where
XXX
denotes the data item detected as oscillating.
For versions 5.70 and higher, the L90 supports four retransmission schemes: aggressive, medium, relaxed, and heartbeat.
The aggressive scheme is only supported in fast type 1A GOOSE messages (GOOSEOut 1 and GOOSEOut 2). For slow
GOOSE messages (GOOSEOut 3 to GOOSEOut 8) the aggressive scheme is the same as the medium scheme.
The details about each scheme are shown in the following table.
5
1
2
5
0
3
4
5
0
3
4
1
2
5
0
3
4
0
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
Table 5–1: GOOSE RETRANSMISSION SCHEMES
SCHEME
Aggressive
Medium
Relaxed
Heartbeat
SQ NUM
100 ms
200 ms
700 ms
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
0 ms
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
TIME FROM THE
EVENT
0 ms
4 ms
8 ms
16 ms
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
0 ms
16 ms
32 ms
64 ms
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
0 ms
100 ms
100 ms
500 ms
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
0 ms
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
TIME BETWEEN
MESSAGES
0 ms
4 ms
4 ms
8 ms
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
0 ms
16 ms
16 ms
32 ms
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
0 ms
T1
T1
T2
T0
T0
T1
T1
T2
T0
T0
Event
T0
Event
T1
T1
T2
T0
T0
Event
COMMENT TIME ALLOWED TO LIVE
IN MESSAGE
Event 2000 ms
T1
T1
T2
T0
2000 ms
2000 ms
Heartbeat * 4, 5
Heartbeat * 4, 5
Heartbeat * 4, 5
2000 ms
2000 ms
2000 ms
Heartbeat * 4, 5
Heartbeat * 4, 5
Heartbeat * 4, 5
2000 ms
2000 ms
2000 ms
Heartbeat * 4, 5
Heartbeat * 4, 5
Heartbeat * 4, 5
2000 ms
2000 ms
2000 ms
Heartbeat * 4, 5
Heartbeat * 4, 5
Heartbeat * 4, 5
The configurable GOOSE feature is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR-series
IEDs and devices from other manufacturers. Fixed GOOSE is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR-series IEDs.
IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be correct to achieve the successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the transmission and reception devices are an exact match in terms of data structure, and that the GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly. Manual configuration is possible, but third-party substation configuration software may be used to automate the process. The EnerVista UR Setup software can produce IEC 61850 ICD files and import IEC 61850 SCD files produced by a substation configurator (refer to the IEC 61850 IED configuration section later in this appendix).
The following example illustrates the configuration required to transfer IEC 61850 data items between two devices. The general steps required for transmission configuration are:
5-24 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
1.
Configure the transmission dataset.
2.
Configure the GOOSE service settings.
3.
Configure the data.
The general steps required for reception configuration are:
1.
Configure the reception dataset.
2.
Configure the GOOSE service settings.
3.
Configure the data.
This example shows how to configure the transmission and reception of three IEC 61850 data items: a single point status value, its associated quality flags, and a floating point analog value.
The following procedure illustrates the transmission configuration.
1.
Configure the transmission dataset by making the following changes in the
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATION
ÖØ
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
Ö
GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION
Ö
TRANSMISSION
ÖØ
CONFIGURABLE GOOSE
Ö
CONFIGURABLE
GOOSE 1
ÖØ
CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS
settings menu:
– Set
ITEM 1
to “GGIO1.ST.Ind1.q” to indicate quality flags for GGIO1 status indication 1.
– Set
ITEM 2
to “GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal” to indicate the status value for GGIO1 status indication 1.
The transmission dataset now contains a set of quality flags and a single point status Boolean value. The reception dataset on the receiving device must exactly match this structure.
2.
Configure the GOOSE service settings by making the following changes in the
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATION
ÖØ
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
Ö
GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION
Ö
TRANSMISSION
ÖØ
CONFIGURABLE GOOSE
Ö
CONFIGU-
RABLE GOOSE 1
settings menu:
– Set
CONFIG GSE 1 FUNCTION
to “Enabled”.
– Set
CONFIG GSE 1 ID
to an appropriate descriptive string (the default value is “GOOSEOut_1”).
– Set
CONFIG GSE 1 DST MAC
to a multicast address (for example, 01 00 00 12 34 56).
– Set the
CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN PRIORITY
; the default value of “4” is OK for this example.
– Set the
CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN ID
value; the default value is “0”, but some switches may require this value to be “1”.
– Set the
CONFIG GSE 1 ETYPE APPID
value. This setting represents the ETHERTYPE application ID and must match the configuration on the receiver (the default value is “0”).
– Set the
CONFIG GSE 1 CONFREV
value. This value changes automatically as described in IEC 61850 part 7-2. For this example it can be left at its default value.
3.
Configure the data by making the following changes in the
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATION
ÖØ
IEC 61850 PROTO-
COL
Ö
GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION
settings menu:
– Set
GGIO1 INDICATION 1
to a FlexLogic™ operand used to provide the status of GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal (for example, a contact input, virtual input, a protection element status, etc.).
The L90 must be rebooted (control power removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect.
The following procedure illustrates the reception configuration.
1.
Configure the reception dataset by making the following changes in the
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATION
ÖØ
IEC
61850 PROTOCOL
Ö
GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION
ÖØ
RECEPTION
ÖØ
CONFIGURABLE GOOSE
Ö
CONFIGURABLE GOOSE
1
ÖØ
CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS
settings menu:
– Set
ITEM 1
to “GGIO3.ST.Ind1.q” to indicate quality flags for GGIO3 status indication 1.
– Set
ITEM 2
to “GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal” to indicate the status value for GGIO3 status indication 1.
The reception dataset now contains a set of quality flags, a single point status Boolean value, and a floating point analog value. This matches the transmission dataset configuration above.
2.
Configure the GOOSE service settings by making the following changes in the
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
ÖØ
REMOTE DEVICES
ÖØ
REMOTE DEVICE 1
settings menu:
– Set
REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID
to match the GOOSE ID string for the transmitting device. Enter “GOOSEOut_1”.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-25
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5
– Set
REMOTE DEVICE 1 ETYPE APPID
to match the ETHERTYPE application ID from the transmitting device. This is
“0” in the example above.
– Set the
REMOTE DEVICE 1 DATASET
value. This value represents the dataset number in use. Since we are using configurable GOOSE 1 in this example, program this value as “GOOSEIn 1”.
3.
Configure the data by making the following changes in the
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
ÖØ
REMOTE INPUTS
ÖØ
REMOTE INPUT 1
settings menu:
– Set
REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE
to “GOOSEOut_1”.
– Set
REMOTE IN 1 ITEM
to “Dataset Item 2”. This assigns the value of the GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal single point status item to remote input 1.
Remote input 1 can now be used in FlexLogic™ equations or other settings. The L90 must be rebooted (control power removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect.
The value of remote input 1 (Boolean on or off) in the receiving device will be determined by the GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal value in the sending device. The above settings will be automatically populated by the EnerVista UR Setup software when a complete SCD file is created by third party substation configurator software.
For intercommunication between L90 IEDs, the fixed (DNA/UserSt) dataset can be used. The DNA/UserSt dataset contains the same DNA and UserSt bit pairs that are included in GSSE messages. All GOOSE messages transmitted by the L90
(DNA/UserSt dataset and configurable datasets) use the IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging services (for example, VLAN support).
Set the
CONFIG GSE 1 FUNCTION
function to “Disabled” when configuration changes are required. Once changes are entered, return the
CONFIG GSE 1 FUNCTION
to “Enabled” and restart the unit for changes to take effect.
NOTE
PATH:...TRANSMISSION
ÖØ
CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1(8)
ÖØ
CONIFIG GSE 1(64) DATA TIMES
Ö
ITEM 1(64)
CONFIG GSE 1
DATASET ITEMS
ITEM 1:
GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal
Range: all valid MMS data item references for transmitted data
To create a configurable GOOSE dataset that contains an IEC 61850 Single Point Status indication and its associated quality flags, the following dataset items can be selected: “GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal” and “GGIO1.ST.Ind1.q”. The L90 will then create a dataset containing these two data items. The status value for GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal is determined by the FlexLogic™ operand assigned to GGIO1 indication 1. Changes to this operand will result in the transmission of GOOSE messages containing the defined dataset.
The main reception menu is applicable to configurable GOOSE only and contains the configurable GOOSE dataset items for reception:
PATH:...RECEPTION
ÖØ
CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1(8)
ÖØ
CONIFIG GSE 1(64) DATA ITEMS
CONFIG GSE 1
DATASET ITEMS
ITEM 1:
GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal
Range: all valid MMS data item references for transmitted data
The configurable GOOSE settings allow the L90 to be configured to receive a number of different datasets within IEC
61850 GOOSE messages. Up to eight different configurable datasets can be configured for reception. This is useful for intercommunication between L90 IEDs and devices from other manufacturers that support IEC 61850.
For intercommunication between L90 IEDs, the fixed (DNA/UserSt) dataset can be used. The DNA/UserSt dataset contains the same DNA and UserSt bit pairs that are included in GSSE messages.
To set up a L90 to receive a configurable GOOSE dataset that contains two IEC 61850 single point status indications, the following dataset items can be selected (for example, for configurable GOOSE dataset 1): “GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal” and
“GGIO3.ST.Ind2.stVal”. The L90 will then create a dataset containing these two data items. The Boolean status values from these data items can be utilized as remote input FlexLogic™ operands. First, the
REMOTE DEVICE 1(16) DATASET
setting must be set to contain dataset “GOOSEIn 1” (that is, the first configurable dataset). Then
REMOTE IN 1(16) ITEM
settings must be set to “Dataset Item 1” and “Dataset Item 2”. These remote input FlexLogic™ operands will then change state in accordance with the status values of the data items in the configured dataset.
Floating point analog values originating from MMXU logical nodes may be included in GOOSE datasets. Deadband (noninstantaneous) values can be transmitted. Received values are used to populate the GGIO3.XM.AnIn1 and higher items.
Received values are also available as FlexAnalog parameters (GOOSE analog In1 and up).
5-26 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The main menu for the IEC 61850 server configuration is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
ÖØ
SERVER CONFIGURATION
SERVER
CONFIGURATION
IED NAME: IECDevice
Range: up to 32 alphanumeric characters
LD INST: LDInst
Range: up to 32 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
LOCATION: Location
Range: up to 80 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
IEC/MMS TCP PORT
NUMBER: 102
INCLUDE NON-IEC
DATA: Enabled
SERVER SCANNING:
Disabled
Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The
IED NAME
and
LD INST
settings represent the MMS domain name (IEC 61850 logical device) where all IEC/MMS logical nodes are located. Valid characters for these values are upper and lowercase letters, numbers, and the underscore (_) character, and the first character in the string must be a letter. This conforms to the IEC 61850 standard. The
LOCATION
is a variable string and can be composed of ASCII characters. This string appears within the PhyName of the LPHD node.
The
IEC/MMS TCP PORT NUMBER
setting allows the user to change the TCP port number for MMS connections. The
INCLUDE
NON-IEC DATA
setting determines whether or not the “UR” MMS domain will be available. This domain contains a large number of UR-series specific data items that are not available in the IEC 61850 logical nodes. This data does not follow the IEC
61850 naming conventions. For communications schemes that strictly follow the IEC 61850 standard, this setting should be
“Disabled”.
The
SERVER SCANNING
feature should be set to “Disabled” when IEC 61850 client/server functionality is not required. IEC
61850 has two modes of functionality: GOOSE/GSSE inter-device communication and client/server communication. If the
GOOSE/GSSE functionality is required without the IEC 61850 client server feature, then server scanning can be disabled to increase CPU resources. When server scanning is disabled, there will be not updated to the IEC 61850 logical node status values in the L90. Clients will still be able to connect to the server (L90 relay), but most data values will not be updated.
This setting does not affect GOOSE/GSSE operation.
Changes to the
IED NAME
setting,
LD INST
setting, and GOOSE dataset will not take effect until the L90 is restarted.
NOTE
The main menu for the IEC 61850 logical node name prefixes is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
IEC 61850...
ÖØ
IEC 61850 LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES
IEC 61850 LOGICAL
NODE NAME PREFIXES
PIOC LOGICAL NODE
NAME PREFIXES
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
PTOC LOGICAL NODE
NAME PREFIXES
↓
PTRC LOGICAL NODE
NAME PREFIXES
The IEC 61850 logical node name prefix settings are used to create name prefixes to uniquely identify each logical node.
For example, the logical node “PTOC1” may have the name prefix “abc”. The full logical node name will then be
“abcMMXU1”. Valid characters for the logical node name prefixes are upper and lowercase letters, numbers, and the underscore (_) character, and the first character in the prefix must be a letter. This conforms to the IEC 61850 standard.
Changes to the logical node prefixes will not take effect until the L90 is restarted.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-27
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5
The main menu for the IEC 61850 MMXU deadbands is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
ÖØ
MMXU DEADBANDS
MMXU DEADBANDS
MMXU1 DEADBANDS
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MMXU2 DEADBANDS
MMXU3 DEADBANDS
MMXU4 DEADBANDS
The MMXU deadband settings represent the deadband values used to determine when the update the MMXU “mag” and
“cVal” values from the associated “instmag” and “instcVal” values. The “mag” and “cVal” values are used for the IEC 61850 buffered and unbuffered reports. These settings correspond to the associated “db” data items in the CF functional constraint of the MMXU logical node, as per the IEC 61850 standard. According to IEC 61850-7-3, the db value “shall represent the percentage of difference between the maximum and minimum in units of 0.001%”. Thus, it is important to know the maximum value for each MMXU measured quantity, since this represents the 100.00% value for the deadband.
The minimum value for all quantities is 0; the maximum values are as follows:
• phase current: 46
× phase CT primary setting
• neutral current: 46
× ground CT primary setting
• voltage: 275
× VT ratio setting
• power (real, reactive, and apparent): 46
× phase CT primary setting × 275 × VT ratio setting
• frequency: 90 Hz
• power factor: 2
The GGIO1 status configuration points are shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
IEC 61850...
ÖØ
GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION
GGIO1 STATUS
CONFIGURATION
NUMBER OF STATUS
POINTS IN GGIO1: 8
Range: 8 to 128 in steps of 8
1
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
GGIO1 INDICATION
Off
2
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
GGIO1 INDICATION
Off
↓
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
GGIO1 INDICATION 128
Off
The
NUMBER OF STATUS POINTS IN GGIO1
setting specifies the number of “Ind” (single point status indications) that are instantiated in the GGIO1 logical node. Changes to the
NUMBER OF STATUS POINTS IN GGIO1
setting will not take effect until the L90 is restarted.
The GGIO2 control configuration points are shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
IEC 61850...
ÖØ
GGIO2 CONTROL...
Ö
GGIO2 CF SPSCO 1(64)
GGIO2 CF SPCSO 1
GGIO2 CF SPCSO 1
CTLMODEL: 1
Range: 0, 1, or 2
The GGIO2 control configuration settings are used to set the control model for each input. The available choices are “0”
(status only), “1” (direct control), and “2” (SBO with normal security). The GGIO2 control points are used to control the L90 virtual inputs.
5-28 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The GGIO4 analog configuration points are shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
IEC 61850...
ÖØ
GGIO4 ANALOG CONFIGURATION
GGIO4 ANALOG
CONFIGURATION
NUMBER OF ANALOG
POINTS IN GGIO4: 8
Range: 4 to 32 in steps of 4
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GGIO4 ANALOG 1
MEASURED VALUE
GGIO4 ANALOG 2
MEASURED VALUE
↓
GGIO4 ANALOG 32
MEASURED VALUE
The
NUMBER OF ANALOG POINTS
setting determines how many analog data points will exist in GGIO4. When this value is changed, the L90 must be rebooted in order to allow the GGIO4 logical node to be re-instantiated and contain the newly configured number of analog points.
The measured value settings for each of the 32 analog values are shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT...
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
IEC 61850...
ÖØ
GGIO4...
Ö
GGIO4 ANALOG 1(32) MEASURED VALUE
GGIO4 ANALOG 1
MEASURED VALUE
ANALOG IN 1 VALUE:
Off
Range: any FlexAnalog value
Range: 0.000 to 100.000 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
ANALOG IN 1 DB:
0.000
MESSAGE
ANALOG IN 1 MIN:
0.000
Range: –1000000000.000 to 1000000000.000 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
ANALOG IN 1 MAX:
0.000
Range: –1000000000.000 to 1000000000.000 in steps of 0.001
These settings are configured as follows.
• ANALOG IN 1 VALUE: This setting selects the FlexAnalog value to drive the instantaneous value of each GGIO4 analog status value (GGIO4.MX.AnIn1.instMag.f).
• ANALOG IN 1 DB: This setting specifies the deadband for each analog value. Refer to IEC 61850-7-1 and 61850-7-3 for details. The deadband is used to determine when to update the deadbanded magnitude from the instantaneous magnitude. The deadband is a percentage of the difference between the maximum and minimum values.
• ANALOG IN 1 MIN: This setting specifies the minimum value for each analog value. Refer to IEC 61850-7-1 and
61850-7-3 for details. This minimum value is used to determine the deadband. The deadband is used in the determination of the deadbanded magnitude from the instantaneous magnitude.
• ANALOG IN 1 MAX: This setting defines the maximum value for each analog value. Refer to IEC 61850-7-1 and
61850-7-3 for details. This maximum value is used to determine the deadband. The deadband is used in the determination of the deadbanded magnitude from the instantaneous magnitude.
NOTE
Note that the
ANALOG IN 1 MIN
and
ANALOG IN 1 MAX
settings are stored as IEEE 754 / IEC 60559 floating point numbers. Because of the large range of these settings, not all values can be stored. Some values may be rounded to the closest possible floating point number.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-29
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5
The GGIO5 integer configuration points are shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
IEC 61850...
ÖØ
GGIO5 ANALOG CONFIGURATION
GGIO5 UINTEGER
CONFIGURATION
GGIO5 UINT In 1:
Off
Range: Off, any FlexInteger parameter
Range: Off, any FlexInteger parameter
MESSAGE
GGIO5 UINT In 2:
Off
↓
Range: Off, any FlexInteger parameter
MESSAGE
GGIO5 UINT 1n 16:
Off
The GGIO5 logical node allows IEC 61850 client access to integer data values. This allows access to as many as 16 unsigned integer value points, associated timestamps, and quality flags. The method of configuration is similar to that of
GGIO1 (binary status values). The settings allow the selection of FlexInteger™ values for each GGIO5 integer value point.
It is intended that clients use GGIO5 to access generic integer values from the L90. Additional settings are provided to allow the selection of the number of integer values available in GGIO5 (1 to 16), and to assign FlexInteger™ values to the
GGIO5 integer inputs. The following setting is available for all GGIO5 configuration points.
• GGIO5 UINT IN 1 VALUE: This setting selects the FlexInteger™ value to drive each GGIO5 integer status value
(GGIO5.ST.UIntIn1). This setting is stored as an 32-bit unsigned integer value.
The report control configuration settings are shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
IEC 61850...
ÖØ
REPORT...
Ö
REPORT 1(6) CONFIGURATION
REPORT 1
CONFIGURATION
REPORT 1
RptID:
Range: up to 66 alphanumeric characters
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
REPORT 1
OptFlds: 0
Range: 0 to 4294967295 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
REPORT 1
BufTm: 0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
REPORT 1
TrgOps: 0
Range: 0 to 4294967295 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
REPORT 1
IntgPd: 0
Changes to the report configuration will not take effect until the L90 is restarted.
Please disconnect any IEC 61850 client connection to the L90 prior to making setting changes to the report configuration. Disconnecting the rear Ethernet connection from the L90 will disconnect the IEC 61850 client connection.
NOTE
5-30 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The breaker configuration settings are shown below. Changes to these values will not take effect until the UR is restarted:
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
ÖØ
XCBR CONFIGURATION
XCBR
CONFIGURATION
XCBR1 ST.LOC OPERAND
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
XCBR2 ST.LOC OPERAND
Off
↓
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
XCBR6 ST.LOC OPERAND
Off
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
CLEAR XCBR1 OpCnt:
No
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
CLEAR XCBR2 OpCnt:
No
↓
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
CLEAR XCBR6 OpCnt:
No
The
CLEAR XCBR1 OpCnt
setting represents the breaker operating counter. As breakers operate by opening and closing, the
XCBR operating counter status attribute (OpCnt) increments with every operation. Frequent breaker operation may result in very large OpCnt values over time. This setting allows the OpCnt to be reset to “0” for XCBR1.
The disconnect switch configuration settings are shown below. Changes to these values will not take effect until the UR is restarted:
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
ÖØ
XSWI CONFIGURATION
XSWI
CONFIGURATION
XSWI1 ST.LOC OPERAND
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
XSWI2 ST.LOC OPERAND
Off
↓
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
XSWI24 ST.LOC OPERAND
Off
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
CLEAR XSWI1 OpCnt:
No
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
CLEAR XSWI2 OpCnt:
No
↓
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
CLEAR XSWI24 OpCnt:
No
The
CLEAR XSWI1 OpCnt
setting represents the disconnect switch operating counter. As disconnect switches operate by opening and closing, the XSWI operating counter status attribute (OpCnt) increments with every operation. Frequent switch operation may result in very large OpCnt values over time. This setting allows the OpCnt to be reset to “0” for XSWI1.
NOTE
Since GSSE/GOOSE messages are multicast Ethernet by specification, they will not usually be forwarded by network routers. However, GOOSE messages may be fowarded by routers if the router has been configured for VLAN functionality.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-31
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5 h) WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL
WEB SERVER
HTTP PROTOCOL
HTTP TCP PORT
NUMBER: 80
Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
The L90 contains an embedded web server and is capable of transferring web pages to a web browser such as Microsoft
Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox. This feature is available only if the L90 has the ethernet option installed. The web pages are organized as a series of menus that can be accessed starting at the L90 “Main Menu”. Web pages are available showing DNP and IEC 60870-5-104 points lists, Modbus registers, event records, fault reports, etc. The web pages can be accessed by connecting the UR and a computer to an ethernet network. The main menu will be displayed in the web browser on the computer simply by entering the IP address of the L90 into the “Address” box on the web browser.
i) TFTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
TFTP PROTOCOL
TFTP PROTOCOL
TFTP MAIN UDP PORT
NUMBER: 69
Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TFTP DATA UDP PORT 1
NUMBER: 0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TFTP DATA UDP PORT 2
NUMBER: 0
The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) can be used to transfer files from the L90 over a network. The L90 operates as a
TFTP server. TFTP client software is available from various sources, including Microsoft Windows NT. The dir.txt file obtained from the L90 contains a list and description of all available files (event records, oscillography, etc.).
j) IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
IEC 60870-5-104
PROTOCOL
IEC 60870-5-104
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
IEC TCP PORT
NUMBER: 2404
IEC NETWORK
CLIENT ADDRESSES
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
IEC COMMON ADDRESS
OF ASDU: 0
Range: 1 to 65535 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
IEC CYCLIC DATA
PERIOD: 60 s
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
IEC CURRENT DEFAULT
THRESHOLD: 30000
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
IEC VOLTAGE DEFAULT
THRESHOLD: 30000
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
IEC POWER DEFAULT
THRESHOLD: 30000
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
IEC ENERGY DEFAULT
THRESHOLD: 30000
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
IEC OTHER DEFAULT
THRESHOLD: 30000
5-32 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The L90 supports the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. The L90 can be used as an IEC 60870-5-104 slave device connected to a maximum of two masters (usually either an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the L90 maintains two sets of IEC
60870-5-104 data change buffers, no more than two masters should actively communicate with the L90 at one time.
The
IEC ------- DEFAULT THRESHOLD
settings are used to determine when to trigger spontaneous responses containing
M_ME_NC_1 analog data. These settings group the L90 analog data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other.
Each setting represents the default threshold value for all M_ME_NC_1 analog points of that type. For example, to trigger spontaneous responses from the L90 when any current values change by 15 A, the
IEC CURRENT DEFAULT THRESHOLD
setting should be set to 15. Note that these settings are the default values of the deadbands. P_ME_NC_1 (parameter of measured value, short floating point value) points can be used to change threshold values, from the default, for each individual
M_ME_NC_1 analog point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the L90, the default thresholds will be in effect.
NOTE
The IEC 60870-5-104 and DNP protocols cannot be used simultaneously. When the
IEC 60870-5-104 FUNCTION setting is set to “Enabled”, the DNP protocol will not be operational. When this setting is changed it will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (off-to-on).
k) SNTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
SNTP PROTOCOL
SNTP PROTOCOL
SNTP FUNCTION:
Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Range: Standard IP address format
MESSAGE
SNTP SERVER IP ADDR:
0.0.0.0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
SNTP UDP PORT
NUMBER: 123
The L90 supports the Simple Network Time Protocol specified in RFC-2030. With SNTP, the L90 can obtain clock time over an Ethernet network. The L90 acts as an SNTP client to receive time values from an SNTP/NTP server, usually a dedicated product using a GPS receiver to provide an accurate time. Both unicast and broadcast SNTP are supported.
If SNTP functionality is enabled at the same time as IRIG-B, the IRIG-B signal provides the time value to the L90 clock for as long as a valid signal is present. If the IRIG-B signal is removed, the time obtained from the SNTP server is used. If either SNTP or IRIG-B is enabled, the L90 clock value cannot be changed using the front panel keypad.
To use SNTP in unicast mode,
SNTP SERVER IP ADDR
must be set to the SNTP/NTP server IP address. Once this address is set and
SNTP FUNCTION
is “Enabled”, the L90 attempts to obtain time values from the SNTP/NTP server. Since many time values are obtained and averaged, it generally takes three to four minutes until the L90 clock is closely synchronized with the SNTP/NTP server. It may take up to two minutes for the L90 to signal an SNTP self-test error if the server is offline.
To use SNTP in broadcast mode, set the
SNTP SERVER IP ADDR
setting to “0.0.0.0” and
SNTP FUNCTION
to “Enabled”. The
L90 then listens to SNTP messages sent to the “all ones” broadcast address for the subnet. The L90 waits up to eighteen minutes (>1024 seconds) without receiving an SNTP broadcast message before signaling an SNTP self-test error.
The UR-series relays do not support the multicast or anycast SNTP functionality.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-33
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5 l) ETHERNET SWITCH
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
COMMUNICATIONS
ÖØ
ETHERNET SWITCH
ETHERNET SWITCH
SWITCH IP ADDRESS:
127.0.0.1
Range: standard IP address format
Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
SWITCH MODBUS TCP
PORT NUMBER: 502
Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
PORT 1 EVENTS:
Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
PORT 2 EVENTS:
Disabled
↓
Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
PORT 6 EVENTS:
Disabled
These settings appear only if the L90 is ordered with an Ethernet switch module (type 2S or 2T).
The IP address and Modbus TCP port number for the Ethernet switch module are specified in this menu. These settings are used in advanced network configurations. Please consult the network administrator before making changes to these settings. The client software (EnerVista UR Setup, for example) is the preferred interface to configure these settings.
The
PORT 1 EVENTS
through
PORT 6 EVENTS
settings allow Ethernet switch module events to be logged in the event recorder.
5.2.5 MODBUS USER MAP
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
MODBUS USER MAP
MODBUS USER MAP
ADDRESS
VALUE:
1:
0
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
ADDRESS 2:
VALUE: 0
↓
ADDRESS 256:
VALUE: 0
0
0
0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
The Modbus user map provides read-only access for up to 256 registers. To obtain a memory map value, enter the desired address in the
ADDRESS
line (this value must be converted from hex to decimal format). The corresponding value is displayed in the
VALUE
line. A value of “0” in subsequent register
ADDRESS
lines automatically returns values for the previous
ADDRESS
lines incremented by “1”. An address value of “0” in the initial register means “none” and values of “0” will be displayed for all registers. Different
ADDRESS
values can be entered as required in any of the register positions.
5-34 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5.2.6 REAL TIME CLOCK
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
REAL TIME CLOCK
REAL TIME
CLOCK
IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE:
None
MESSAGE
REAL TIME CLOCK
EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
LOCAL TIME OFFSET
FROM UTC: 0.0 hrs
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
TIME: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DST START MONTH:
April
DST START DAY:
Sunday
DST START DAY
INSTANCE: First
DST START HOUR:
2:00
DST STOP MONTH:
April
DST STOP DAY:
Sunday
DST STOP DAY
INSTANCE: First
DST STOP HOUR:
2:00
Range: None, DC Shift, Amplitude Modulated
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Range: –24.0 to 24.0 hrs in steps of 0.5
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Range: January to December (all months)
Range: Sunday to Saturday (all days of the week)
Range: First, Second, Third, Fourth, Last
Range: 0:00 to 23:00
Range: January to December (all months)
Range: Sunday to Saturday (all days of the week)
Range: First, Second, Third, Fourth, Last
Range: 0:00 to 23:00
NOTE
If the L90 channel asymmetry function is enabled, the IRIG-B input must be connected to the GPS receiver and the proper receiver signal type assigned.
The date and time can be synchronized a known time base and to other relays using an IRIG-B signal. It has the same accuracy as an electronic watch, approximately ±1 minute per month. If an IRIG-B signal is connected to the relay, only the current year needs to be entered. See the
COMMANDS
ÖØ
SET DATE AND TIME
menu to manually set the relay clock.
The
REAL TIME CLOCK EVENTS
setting allows changes to the date and/or time to be captured in the event record.
The
LOCAL TIME OFFSET FROM UTC
setting is used to specify the local time zone offset from Universal Coordinated Time
(Greenwich Mean Time) in hours. This setting has two uses. When the L90 is time synchronized with IRIG-B, or has no permanent time synchronization, the offset is used to calculate UTC time for IEC 61850 features. When the L90 is time synchronized with SNTP, the offset is used to determine the local time for the L90 clock, since SNTP provides UTC time.
The daylight savings time (DST) settings can be used to allow the L90 clock can follow the DST rules of the local time zone.
Note that when IRIG-B time synchronization is active, the DST settings are ignored. The DST settings are used when the
L90 is synchronized with SNTP, or when neither SNTP nor IRIG-B is used.
Only timestamps in the event recorder and communications protocols are affected by the daylight savings time settings. The reported real-time clock value does not change.
NOTE
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-35
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5
5.2.7 FAULT REPORTS
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
FAULT REPORTS
Ö
FAULT REPORT 1
FAULT REPORT 1
FAULT REPORT 1
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
FAULT REPORT 1 TRIG:
Off
Range: 0.01 to 250.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
FAULT REPORT 1 Z1
MAG: 3.00
Ω
Range: 25 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
FAULT REPORT 1 Z1
ANGLE: 75°
Range: 0.01 to 650.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
FAULT REPORT 1 Z0
MAG: 9.00
Ω
Range: 25 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
FAULT REPORT 1 Z0
ANGLE: 75°
Range: km, miles
MESSAGE
FAULT REPORT 1 LINE
LENGTH UNITS: km
Range: 0.0 to 2000.0 in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
FAULT REP 1 LENGTH
(km ): 100.0
Range: 0.01 to 250.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
FAULT REP 1 REM1-TAP
Z1 MAG: 3.00
Ω
Range: 25 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
FAULT REP 1 REM1-TAP
Z1 ANG: 75°
Range: 0.0 to 2000.0 in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
FAULT REP 1 REM1-TAP
LENGTH (km ): 100.0
Range: 0.01 to 250.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
FAULT REP 1 REM2-TAP
Z1 MAG: 3.00
Ω
Range: 25 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
FAULT REP 1 REM2-TAP
Z1 ANG: 75°
Range: 0.0 to 2000.0 in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
FAULT REP 1 REM2-TAP
LENGTH (km ): 100.0
Range: None, I0, V0
MESSAGE
FAULT REPORT 1 VT
SUBSTITUTION: None
Range: 0.01 to 650.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
FAULT REP 1 SYSTEM
Z0 MAG: 2.00
Ω
Range: 25 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
FAULT REP 1 SYSTEM
Z0 ANGLE: 75°
The L90 incorporates a multi-ended fault locator method based on the synchronized voltage and current measurements at all ends of the transmission line. This makes it possible to compute the fault location without assumptions or approximations. This fault locator method is applicable on both two-terminal and three-terminal applications, with results computed independently at each terminal. For three-terminal line applications, the fault locator is reports the exact line segment at which the fault occurred and the distance to the fault from the terminal adjacent to the fault.
if charging current compensation is configured and enabled, the line charging current is removed at each terminal for improved accuracy.
5-36 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
During communication channel failures, the L90 uses the single-ended algorithm to calculate and report fault location.
When the single-ended algorithm is used for three-terminal line applications, the faulted segment of the line is not determined and reported.
The L90 relay supports one fault report and an associated fault locator. The signal source and trigger condition, as well as the characteristics of the line or feeder, are entered in this menu.
The fault report stores data, in non-volatile memory, pertinent to an event when triggered. The captured data contained in the FaultReport.txt file includes:
• Fault report number.
• Name of the relay, programmed by the user.
• Firmware revision of the relay.
• Date and time of trigger.
• Name of trigger (specific operand).
• Line or feeder ID via the name of a configured signal source.
• Active setting group at the time of trigger.
• Pre-fault current and voltage phasors (two cycles before either a 50DD disturbance associated with fault report source or the trigger operate). Once a disturbance is detected, pre-fault phasors hold for 3 seconds waiting for the fault report trigger. If trigger does not occur within this time, the values are cleared to prepare for the next disturbance.
• Fault current and voltage phasors (one cycle after the trigger).
• Elements operated at the time of triggering.
• Events: 9 before trigger and 7 after trigger (only available via the relay webpage).
• Fault duration times for each breaker (created by the breaker arcing current feature).
The captured data also includes the fault type and the distance to the fault location, as well as the reclose shot number
(when applicable) To include fault duration times in the fault report, the user must enable and configure breaker arcing current feature for each of the breakers. Fault duration is reported on a per-phase basis.
The relay allows locating faults, including ground faults, from delta-connected VTs. In this case, the missing zero-sequence voltage is substituted either by the externally provided neutral voltage (broken delta VT) connected to the auxiliary voltage channel of a VT bank, or by the zero-sequence voltage approximated as a voltage drop developed by the zero-sequence current, and user-provided zero-sequence equivalent impedance of the system behind the relay.
The trigger can be any FlexLogic™ operand, but in most applications it is expected to be the same operand, usually a virtual output, that is used to drive an output relay to trip a breaker. To prevent the overwriting of fault events, the disturbance detector should not be used to trigger a fault report. A
FAULT RPT TRIG
event is automatically created when the report is triggered.
If a number of protection elements are ORed to create a fault report trigger, the first operation of any element causing the
OR gate output to become high triggers a fault report. However, If other elements operate during the fault and the first operated element has not been reset (the OR gate output is still high), the fault report is not triggered again. Considering the reset time of protection elements, there is very little chance that fault report can be triggered twice in this manner. As the fault report must capture a usable amount of pre and post-fault data, it can not be triggered faster than every 20 ms.
Each fault report is stored as a file; the relay capacity is fifteen (15) files. An sixteenth (16th) trigger overwrites the oldest file.
The EnerVista UR Setup software is required to view all captured data. The relay faceplate display can be used to view the date and time of trigger, the fault type, the distance location of the fault, and the reclose shot number.
The
FAULT REPORT 1 SOURCE
setting selects the source for input currents and voltages and disturbance detection. For dualbreaker applications where the line current is supplied individually from two breaker CTs, the fault locator source should include the sum of currents from both CTs as well as the line voltage.
The
FAULT 1 REPORT TRIG
setting assigns the FlexLogic™ operand representing the protection element/elements requiring operational fault location calculations. The distance to fault calculations are initiated by this signal. The
FAULT REPORT 1 Z1
MAG
and
FAULT REPORT 1 Z0 MAG
impedances are entered in secondary ohms.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-37
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5
For a two-terminal line application, the
FAULT REPORT 1 Z1 MAG
,
FAULT REPORT 1 Z1 ANG
,
FAULT REPORT 1 Z0 MAG
,
FAULT
REPORT 1 Z0 ANG
and
FAULT REPORT 1 LENGTH
settings for the entire line must to be entered for fault location calculations.
For a three-terminal application, these settings are used to enter the line segment impedance and length from the local terminal to the tap point only.
The
FAULT REP 1 REM1-TAP Z1 MAG
and
FAULT REP 1 REM1-TAP Z1 ANG
settings are used for three-terminal applications to enter positive sequence section impedances (in secondary ohms) for the line segment from remote terminal 1 to the tap point. The length of the line section from remote terminal 1 to the tap point is entered in the
FAULT REP 1 REM1-TAP LENGTH
setting.
The
FAULT REP 1 REM2-TAP Z1 MAG
,
FAULT REP 1 REM2-TAP Z1 ANG
, and
FAULT REP 1 REM2-TAP LENGTH
settings are used as above, but for the line segment from remote terminal 2 to the tap point.
The
FAULT REPORT 1 VT SUBSTITUTION
setting shall be set to “None” if the relay is fed from wye-connected VTs. If delta-connected VTs are used, and the relay is supplied with the neutral (3V0) voltage, this setting shall be set to “V0”. The method is still exact, as the fault locator would combine the line-to-line voltage measurements with the neutral voltage measurement to re-create the line-to-ground voltages. See the
ACTUAL VALUES
ÖØ
RECORDS
Ö
FAULT REPORTS
menu for additional details. It required to configure the delta and neutral voltages under the source indicated as input for the fault report. Also, the relay will check if the auxiliary signal configured is marked as “Vn” by the user (under VT setup), and inhibit the fault location if the auxiliary signal is labeled differently.
If the broken-delta neutral voltage is not available to the relay, an approximation is possible by assuming the missing zerosequence voltage to be an inverted voltage drop produced by the zero-sequence current and the user-specified equivalent zero-sequence system impedance behind the relay: V0 = –Z0
× I0. In order to enable this mode of operation, the
FAULT
REPORT 1 VT SUBSTITUTION
setting shall be set to “I0”.
The
FAULT REP 1 SYSTEM Z0 MAG
and
FAULT REP 1 SYSTEM Z0 ANGLE
settings are used only when the
VT SUBSTITUTION
setting value is “I0”. The magnitude is to be entered in secondary ohms. This impedance is an average system equivalent behind the relay. It can be calculated as zero-sequence Thevenin impedance at the local bus with the protected line/feeder disconnected. The method is accurate only if this setting matches perfectly the actual system impedance during the fault. If the system exhibits too much variability, this approach is questionable and the fault location results for single-line-to-ground faults shall be trusted with accordingly. It should be kept in mind that grounding points in vicinity of the installation impact the system zero-sequence impedance (grounded loads, reactors, zig-zag transformers, shunt capacitor banks, etc.).
NOTE
For proper operation of the multi-ended fault locator, the nominal primary voltage is expected to appear identical at all line terminals as seen from the nominal secondary voltage, VT ratio, and VT connection settings of the first 87L source.
5.2.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
OSCILLOGRAPHY
OSCILLOGRAPHY
NUMBER OF RECORDS:
5
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
TRIGGER MODE:
Automatic Overwrite
TRIGGER POSITION:
50%
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
TRIGGER SOURCE:
Off
AC INPUT WAVEFORMS:
16 samples/cycle
DIGITAL CHANNELS
ANALOG CHANNELS
Range: 1 to 64 in steps of 1
Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected
Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: Off; 8, 16, 32, 64 samples/cycle
5-38 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
Oscillography records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as other relay data at the point of trigger.
Oscillography records are triggered by a programmable FlexLogic™ operand. Multiple oscillography records may be captured simultaneously.
The
NUMBER OF RECORDS
is selectable, but the number of cycles captured in a single record varies considerably based on other factors such as sample rate and the number of operational modules. There is a fixed amount of data storage for oscillography; the more data captured, the less the number of cycles captured per record. See the
ACTUAL VALUES
ÖØ
RECORDS
ÖØ
OSCILLOGRAPHY
menu to view the number of cycles captured per record. The following table provides sample configurations with corresponding cycles/record.
Table 5–2: OSCILLOGRAPHY CYCLES/RECORD EXAMPLE
RECORDS
8
8
8
8
1
1
8
8
32
CT/VTS
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
16
32
64
64
SAMPLE
RATE
8
16
16
16
16
DIGITALS
16
16
64
64
0
16
16
64
64
ANALOGS
4
4
16
16
0
0
0
16
16
CYCLES/
RECORD
1872.0
1685.0
276.0
219.5
93.5
93.5
57.6
32.3
9.5
A new record may automatically overwrite an older record if
TRIGGER MODE
is set to “Automatic Overwrite”.
Set the
TRIGGER POSITION
to a percentage of the total buffer size (for example, 10%, 50%, 75%, etc.). A trigger position of
25% consists of 25% pre- and 75% post-trigger data. The
TRIGGER SOURCE
is always captured in oscillography and may be any FlexLogic™ parameter (element state, contact input, virtual output, etc.). The relay sampling rate is 64 samples per cycle.
The
AC INPUT WAVEFORMS
setting determines the sampling rate at which AC input signals (that is, current and voltage) are stored. Reducing the sampling rate allows longer records to be stored. This setting has no effect on the internal sampling rate of the relay which is always 64 samples per cycle; that is, it has no effect on the fundamental calculations of the device.
When changes are made to the oscillography settings, all existing oscillography records will be CLEARED.
WARNING b) DIGITAL CHANNELS
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
OSCILLOGRAPHY
ÖØ
DIGITAL CHANNELS
DIGITAL CHANNELS
DIGITAL CHANNEL 1:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
DIGITAL CHANNEL 2:
Off
↓
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
DIGITAL CHANNEL 63:
Off
A
DIGITAL 1(63) CHANNEL
setting selects the FlexLogic™ operand state recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each oscillography trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to “Off” are ignored.
Upon startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-39
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5 c) ANALOG CHANNELS
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
OSCILLOGRAPHY
ÖØ
ANALOG CHANNELS
ANALOG CHANNELS
ANALOG CHANNEL 1:
Off
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter
See Appendix A for complete list.
MESSAGE
ANALOG CHANNEL 2:
Off
↓
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter
See Appendix A for complete list.
MESSAGE
ANALOG CHANNEL 16:
Off
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter
See Appendix A for complete list.
These settings select the metering actual value recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each oscillography trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to “Off” are ignored. The parameters available in a given relay are dependent on:
• The type of relay,
• The type and number of CT/VT hardware modules installed, and
• The type and number of analog input hardware modules installed.
Upon startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is presented in Appendix A: FlexAnalog parameters. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is used to expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display. It can be quite time-consuming to scan through the list of parameters via the relay keypad and display - entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding parameter to be displayed.
All eight CT/VT module channels are stored in the oscillography file. The CT/VT module channels are named as follows:
<slot_letter><terminal_number>—<I or V><phase A, B, or C, or 4th input>
The fourth current input in a bank is called IG, and the fourth voltage input in a bank is called VX. For example, F2-IB designates the IB signal on terminal 2 of the CT/VT module in slot F.
If there are no CT/VT modules and analog input modules, no analog traces will appear in the file; only the digital traces will appear.
5.2.9 DATA LOGGER
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
DATA LOGGER
DATA LOGGER
DATA LOGGER MODE:
Continuous
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DATA LOGGER TRIGGER:
Off
DATA LOGGER RATE:
60000 ms
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DATA LOGGER CHNL 1:
Off
DATA LOGGER CHNL 2:
Off
↓
DATA LOGGER CHNL 16:
Off
DATA LOGGER CONFIG:
0 CHNL x 0.0 DAYS
Range: Continuous, Trigger
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: 15 to 3600000 ms in steps of 1
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter. See Appendix A:
FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list.
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter. See Appendix A:
FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list.
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter. See Appendix A:
FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list.
Range: Not applicable - shows computed data only
5-40 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The data logger samples and records up to 16 analog parameters at a user-defined sampling rate. This recorded data may be downloaded to EnerVista UR Setup and displayed with parameters on the vertical axis and time on the horizontal axis.
All data is stored in non-volatile memory, meaning that the information is retained when power to the relay is lost.
For a fixed sampling rate, the data logger can be configured with a few channels over a long period or a larger number of channels for a shorter period. The relay automatically partitions the available memory between the channels in use. Example storage capacities for a system frequency of 60 Hz are shown in the following table.
Table 5–3: DATA LOGGER STORAGE CAPACITY EXAMPLE
SAMPLING RATE
15 ms
1000 ms
60000 ms
3600000 ms
8
9
16
1
8
9
16
1
8
9
16
1
8
9
CHANNELS
1
0.1
45.4
5.6
5
2.8
2727.5
340.9
303
0.1
0.7
0.1
0.1
DAYS
0.1
0.1
0.1
STORAGE CAPACITY
954 s
120 s
107 s
60 s
65457 s
8182 s
7273 s
4091 s
3927420 s
490920 s
436380 s
254460 s
235645200 s
29455200 s
26182800 s
Changing any setting affecting data logger operation will clear any data that is currently in the log.
NOTE
• DATA LOGGER MODE: This setting configures the mode in which the data logger will operate. When set to “Continuous”, the data logger will actively record any configured channels at the rate as defined by the
DATA LOGGER RATE
. The data logger will be idle in this mode if no channels are configured. When set to “Trigger”, the data logger will begin to record any configured channels at the instance of the rising edge of the
DATA LOGGER TRIGGER
source FlexLogic™ operand. The data logger will ignore all subsequent triggers and will continue to record data until the active record is full. Once the data logger is full a
CLEAR DATA LOGGER
command is required to clear the data logger record before a new record can be started. Performing the
CLEAR DATA LOGGER
command will also stop the current record and reset the data logger to be ready for the next trigger.
• DATA LOGGER TRIGGER: This setting selects the signal used to trigger the start of a new data logger record. Any
FlexLogic™ operand can be used as the trigger source. The
DATA LOGGER TRIGGER
setting only applies when the mode is set to “Trigger”.
• DATA LOGGER RATE: This setting selects the time interval at which the actual value data will be recorded.
• DATA LOGGER CHNL 1(16): This setting selects the metering actual value that is to be recorded in Channel 1(16) of the data log. The parameters available in a given relay are dependent on: the type of relay, the type and number of CT/
VT hardware modules installed, and the type and number of Analog Input hardware modules installed. Upon startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is shown in Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is used to expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display. It can be quite time-consuming to scan through the list of parameters via the relay keypad/display – entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding parameter to be displayed.
• DATA LOGGER CONFIG: This display presents the total amount of time the Data Logger can record the channels not selected to “Off” without over-writing old data.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-41
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5
5.2.10 DEMAND
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
DEMAND
DEMAND
CRNT DEMAND METHOD:
Thermal Exponential
MESSAGE
POWER DEMAND METHOD:
Thermal Exponential
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DEMAND INTERVAL:
15 MIN
DEMAND TRIGGER:
Off
Range: Thermal Exponential, Block Interval,
Rolling Demand
Range: Thermal Exponential, Block Interval,
Rolling Demand
Range: 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 minutes
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Note: for calculation using Method 2a
The relay measures current demand on each phase, and three-phase demand for real, reactive, and apparent power. Current and Power methods can be chosen separately for the convenience of the user. Settings are provided to allow the user to emulate some common electrical utility demand measuring techniques, for statistical or control purposes. If the
CRNT
DEMAND METHOD
is set to "Block Interval" and the
DEMAND TRIGGER
is set to “Off”, Method 2 is used (see below). If
DEMAND TRIGGER
is assigned to any other FlexLogic™ operand, Method 2a is used (see below).
The relay can be set to calculate demand by any of three methods as described below:
CALCULATION METHOD 1: THERMAL EXPONENTIAL
This method emulates the action of an analog peak recording thermal demand meter. The relay measures the quantity
(RMS current, real power, reactive power, or apparent power) on each phase every second, and assumes the circuit quantity remains at this value until updated by the next measurement. It calculates the 'thermal demand equivalent' based on the following equation:
d t
=
(
–
e
–
kt
)
(EQ 5.6)
where: d = demand value after applying input quantity for time t (in minutes)
D = input quantity (constant), and k = 2.3 / thermal 90% response time.
The 90% thermal response time characteristic of 15 minutes is illustrated below. A setpoint establishes the time to reach
90% of a steady-state value, just as the response time of an analog instrument. A steady state value applied for twice the response time will indicate 99% of the value.
Time (minutes)
842787A1.CDR
Figure 5–3: THERMAL DEMAND CHARACTERISTIC
CALCULATION METHOD 2: BLOCK INTERVAL
This method calculates a linear average of the quantity (RMS current, real power, reactive power, or apparent power) over the programmed demand time interval, starting daily at 00:00:00 (i.e. 12:00 am). The 1440 minutes per day is divided into the number of blocks as set by the programmed time interval. Each new value of demand becomes available at the end of each time interval.
CALCULATION METHOD 2a: BLOCK INTERVAL (with Start Demand Interval Logic Trigger)
This method calculates a linear average of the quantity (RMS current, real power, reactive power, or apparent power) over the interval between successive Start Demand Interval logic input pulses. Each new value of demand becomes available at the end of each pulse. Assign a FlexLogic™ operand to the
DEMAND TRIGGER
setting to program the input for the new demand interval pulses.
5-42 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
NOTE
If no trigger is assigned in the
DEMAND TRIGGER
setting and the
CRNT DEMAND METHOD
is "Block Interval", use calculating method #2. If a trigger is assigned, the maximum allowed time between 2 trigger signals is 60 minutes. If no trigger signal appears within 60 minutes, demand calculations are performed and available and the algorithm resets and starts the new cycle of calculations. The minimum required time for trigger contact closure is 20
μs.
CALCULATION METHOD 3: ROLLING DEMAND
This method calculates a linear average of the quantity (RMS current, real power, reactive power, or apparent power) over the programmed demand time interval, in the same way as Block Interval. The value is updated every minute and indicates the demand over the time interval just preceding the time of update.
5.2.11 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LEDS
LED TEST
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
TRIP & ALARM LEDS
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LED1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LED2
↓
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LED48
See below
5 b) LED TEST
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
Ö
LED TEST
LED TEST
LED TEST FUNCTION:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled.
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
LED TEST CONTROL:
Off
When enabled, the LED test can be initiated from any digital input or user-programmable condition such as user-programmable pushbutton. The control operand is configured under the
LED TEST CONTROL
setting. The test covers all LEDs, including the LEDs of the optional user-programmable pushbuttons.
The test consists of three stages.
1.
All 62 LEDs on the relay are illuminated. This is a quick test to verify if any of the LEDs is “burned”. This stage lasts as long as the control input is on, up to a maximum of 1 minute. After 1 minute, the test will end.
2.
All the LEDs are turned off, and then one LED at a time turns on for 1 second, then back off. The test routine starts at the top left panel, moving from the top to bottom of each LED column. This test checks for hardware failures that lead to more than one LED being turned on from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
3.
All the LEDs are turned on. One LED at a time turns off for 1 second, then back on. The test routine starts at the top left panel moving from top to bottom of each column of the LEDs. This test checks for hardware failures that lead to more than one LED being turned off from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
When testing is in progress, the LEDs are controlled by the test sequence, rather than the protection, control, and monitoring features. However, the LED control mechanism accepts all the changes to LED states generated by the relay and stores the actual LED states (on or off) in memory. When the test completes, the LEDs reflect the actual state resulting from relay response during testing. The reset pushbutton will not clear any targets when the LED Test is in progress.
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-43
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
A dedicated FlexLogic™ operand,
LED TEST IN PROGRESS
, is set for the duration of the test. When the test sequence is initiated, the
LED TEST INITIATED
event is stored in the event recorder.
The entire test procedure is user-controlled. In particular, stage 1 can last as long as necessary, and stages 2 and 3 can be interrupted. The test responds to the position and rising edges of the control input defined by the
LED TEST CONTROL
setting. The control pulses must last at least 250 ms to take effect. The following diagram explains how the test is executed.
READY TO TEST rising edge of the control input
Start the software image of the LEDs
Reset the
LED TEST IN PROGRESS operand
Restore the LED states from the software image
5
control input is on
Set the
LED TEST IN PROGRESS operand
STAGE 1
(all LEDs on) dropping edge of the control input
Wait 1 second time-out
(1 minute) rising edge of the control input
STAGE 2
(one LED on at a time) rising edge of the control input
Wait 1 second rising edge of the control input
STAGE 3
(one LED off at a time) rising edge of the control input
842011A1.CDR
Figure 5–4: LED TEST SEQUENCE
APPLICATION EXAMPLE 1:
Assume one needs to check if any of the LEDs is “burned” through user-programmable pushbutton 1. The following settings should be applied. Configure user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the
SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
Ö
USER PUSHBUTTON 1
menu:
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION:
“Self-reset”
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME:
“0.10 s”
Configure the LED test to recognize user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the
SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
Ö
LED TEST
menu:
LED TEST FUNCTION:
“Enabled”
LED TEST CONTROL:
“
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
”
The test will be initiated when the user-programmable pushbutton 1 is pressed. The pushbutton should remain pressed for as long as the LEDs are being visually inspected. When finished, the pushbutton should be released. The relay will then automatically start stage 2. At this point forward, test may be aborted by pressing the pushbutton.
APPLICATION EXAMPLE 2:
Assume one needs to check if any LEDs are “burned” as well as exercise one LED at a time to check for other failures. This is to be performed via user-programmable pushbutton 1.
5-44 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
After applying the settings in application example 1, hold down the pushbutton as long as necessary to test all LEDs. Next, release the pushbutton to automatically start stage 2. Once stage 2 has started, the pushbutton can be released. When stage 2 is completed, stage 3 will automatically start. The test may be aborted at any time by pressing the pushbutton.
c) TRIP AND ALARM LEDS
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
ÖØ
TRIP & ALARM LEDS
TRIP & ALARM LEDS
TRIP LED INPUT:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
ALARM LED INPUT:
Off
The trip and alarm LEDs are in the first LED column (enhanced faceplate) and on LED panel 1 (standard faceplate). Each indicator can be programmed to become illuminated when the selected FlexLogic™ operand is in the logic 1 state.
d) USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
ÖØ
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LED 1
LED 1 OPERAND:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: Self-Reset, Latched
MESSAGE
LED 1 TYPE:
Self-Reset
There are 48 amber LEDs across the relay faceplate LED panels. Each of these indicators can be programmed to illuminate when the selected FlexLogic™ operand is in the logic 1 state.
For the standard faceplate, the LEDs are located as follows.
• LED Panel 2: user-programmable LEDs 1 through 24
• LED Panel 3: user programmable LEDs 25 through 48
For the enhanced faceplate, the LEDs are located as follows.
• LED column 2: user-programmable LEDs 1 through 12
• LED column 3: user-programmable LEDs 13 through 24
• LED column 4: user-programmable LEDs 25 through 36
• LED column 5: user-programmable LEDs 37 through 48
Refer to the LED indicators section in chapter 4 for additional information on the location of these indexed LEDs.
The user-programmable LED settings select the FlexLogic™ operands that control the LEDs. If the
LED 1 TYPE
setting is
“Self-Reset” (the default setting), the LED illumination will track the state of the selected LED operand. If the
LED 1 TYPE
setting is “Latched”, the LED, once lit, remains so until reset by the faceplate RESET button, from a remote device via a communications channel, or from any programmed operand, even if the LED operand state de-asserts.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-45
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5
Table 5–4: RECOMMENDED SETTINGS FOR USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
SETTING
LED 1 operand
LED 2 operand
LED 3 operand
LED 4 operand
LED 5 operand
LED 6 operand
LED 7 operand
LED 8 operand
LED 9 operand
LED 10 operand
LED 11 operand
LED 12 operand
PARAMETER
SETTING GROUP ACT 1
SETTING GROUP ACT 2
SETTING GROUP ACT 3
SETTING GROUP ACT 4
SETTING GROUP ACT 5
SETTING GROUP ACT 6
Off
Off
BREAKER 1 OPEN
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
BREAKER 1 TROUBLE
Off
SETTING
LED 13 operand
LED 14 operand
LED 15 operand
LED 16 operand
LED 17 operand
LED 18 operand
LED 19 operand
LED 20 operand
LED 21 operand
LED 22 operand
LED 23 operand
LED 24 operand
PARAMETER
Off
BREAKER 2 OPEN
BREAKER 2 CLOSED
BREAKER 2 TROUBLE
SYNC 1 SYNC OP
SYNC 2 SYNC OP
Off
Off
AR ENABLED
AR DISABLED
AR RIP
AR LO
Refer to the Control of setting groups example in the Control elements section of this chapter for group activation.
5.2.12 USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF-TESTS
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
SELF TESTS
REMOTE DEVICE OFF
FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units that contain a
CPU with Ethernet capability.
MESSAGE
PRI. ETHERNET FAIL
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units that contain a
CPU with a primary fiber port.
MESSAGE
SEC. ETHERNET FAIL
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units that contain a
CPU with a redundant fiber port.
Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE
BATTERY FAIL
FUNCTION: Enabled
MESSAGE
SNTP FAIL
FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units that contain a
CPU with Ethernet capability.
Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE
IRIG-B FAIL
FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE
ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL
FUNCTION: Disabled
All major self-test alarms are reported automatically with their corresponding FlexLogic™ operands, events, and targets.
Most of the minor alarms can be disabled if desired.
When in the “Disabled” mode, minor alarms will not assert a FlexLogic™ operand, write to the event recorder, or display target messages. Moreover, they will not trigger the
ANY MINOR ALARM
or
ANY SELF-TEST
messages. When in the “Enabled” mode, minor alarms continue to function along with other major and minor alarms. Refer to the Relay self-tests section in chapter 7 for additional information on major and minor self-test alarms.
To enable the Ethernet switch failure function, ensure that the
ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL FUNCTION
is “Enabled” in this menu.
NOTE
5-46 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5.2.13 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
Ö
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1(7)
CONTROL
PUSHBUTTON 1
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1
EVENTS: Disabled
There are three standard control pushbuttons, labeled USER 1, USER 2, and USER 3, on the standard and enhanced front panels. These are user-programmable and can be used for various applications such as performing an LED test, switching setting groups, and invoking and scrolling though user-programmable displays.
Firmware revisions 3.2x and older use these three pushbuttons for manual breaker control. This functionality has been retained – if the breaker control feature is configured to use the three pushbuttons, they cannot be used as user-programmable control pushbuttons.
The location of the control pushbuttons are shown in the following figures.
Control pushbuttons
842813A1.CDR
Figure 5–5: CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS (ENHANCED FACEPLATE)
An additional four control pushbuttons are included on the standard faceplate when the L90 is ordered with the twelve userprogrammable pushbutton option.
5
STATUS
IN SERVICE
TROUBLE
TEST MODE
TRIP
ALARM
PICKUP
EVENT CAUSE
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
FREQUENCY
OTHER
PHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
NEUTRAL/GROUND
RESET
USER 1
USER 2
USER 3
THREE
STANDARD
CONTROL
PUSHBUTTONS
USER 4
USER 5
USER 6
USER 7
FOUR EXTRA
OPTIONAL
CONTROL
PUSHBUTTONS
842733A2.CDR
Figure 5–6: CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS (STANDARD FACEPLATE)
Control pushbuttons are not typically used for critical operations and are not protected by the control password. However, by supervising their output operands, the user can dynamically enable or disable control pushbuttons for security reasons.
Each control pushbutton asserts its own FlexLogic™ operand. These operands should be configured appropriately to perform the desired function. The operand remains asserted as long as the pushbutton is pressed and resets when the pushbutton is released. A dropout delay of 100 ms is incorporated to ensure fast pushbutton manipulation will be recognized by various features that may use control pushbuttons as inputs.
An event is logged in the event record (as per user setting) when a control pushbutton is pressed. No event is logged when the pushbutton is released. The faceplate keys (including control keys) cannot be operated simultaneously – a given key must be released before the next one can be pressed.
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-47
5
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
The control pushbuttons become user-programmable only if the breaker control feature is not configured for manual control via the USER 1 through 3 pushbuttons as shown below. If configured for manual control, breaker control typically uses the larger, optional user-programmable pushbuttons, making the control pushbuttons available for other user applications.
{
Enabled=1
SETTING
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON
1 FUNCTION:
Enabled=1
SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP/
BREAKERS/BREAKER 1/
BREAKER 1 PUSHBUTTON
CONTROL :
Enabled=1
SYSTEM SETUP/
BREAKERS/BREAKER 2/
BREAKER 2 PUSHBUTTON
CONTROL :
AND RUN
OFF
ON
TIMER
0
100 msec
Figure 5–7: CONTROL PUSHBUTTON LOGIC
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
CONTROL PUSHBTN 1 ON
842010A2.CDR
5-48 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5.2.14 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
Ö
USER PUSHBUTTON 1(16)
USER PUSHBUTTON 1
PUSHBUTTON 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT:
Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT:
Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT:
Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 HOLD:
0.0 s
PUSHBTN 1 SET:
Off
PUSHBTN 1 RESET:
Off
PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST:
Disabled
PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST
DELAY: 1.0 s
PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE:
Off
PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL:
Off
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT
TIME: 0.00 s
PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL:
Off
PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE:
Disabled
PUSHBUTTON 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: 0.0 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Range: 0.2 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: 0 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.05
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: Disabled, Normal, High Priority
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The optional user-programmable pushbuttons (specified in the order code) provide an easy and error-free method of entering digital state (on, off) information. The number of available pushbuttons is dependent on the faceplate module ordered with the relay.
• Type P faceplate: standard horizontal faceplate with 12 user-programmable pushbuttons.
• Type Q faceplate: enhanced horizontal faceplate with 16 user-programmable pushbuttons.
The digital state can be entered locally (by directly pressing the front panel pushbutton) or remotely (via FlexLogic™ operands) into FlexLogic™ equations, protection elements, and control elements. Typical applications include breaker control, autorecloser blocking, and setting groups changes. The user-programmable pushbuttons are under the control level of password protection.
The user-configurable pushbuttons for the enhanced faceplate are shown below.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-49
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
USER
LABEL 1
USER
LABEL 2
USER
LABEL 3
USER
LABEL 4
USER
LABEL 5
USER
LABEL 6
USER
LABEL 7
USER
LABEL 8
USER
LABEL 9
USER
LABEL 10
USER
LABEL 11
USER
LABEL 12
USER
LABEL 13
USER
LABEL 14
USER
LABEL 15
USER
LABEL 16
842814A1.CDR
Figure 5–8: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (ENHANCED FACEPLATE)
The user-configurable pushbuttons for the standard faceplate are shown below.
1
USER LABEL
3
USER LABEL
5
USER LABEL
7
USER LABEL
9
USER LABEL
11
USER LABEL
5
2
USER LABEL
4
USER LABEL
6
USER LABEL
8
USER LABEL
10
USER LABEL
12
USER LABEL
842779A1.CDR
Figure 5–9: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (STANDARD FACEPLATE)
Both the standard and enhanced faceplate pushbuttons can be custom labeled with a factory-provided template, available online at http://www.GEmultilin.com
. The EnerVista UR Setup software can also be used to create labels for the enhanced faceplate.
Each pushbutton asserts its own “On” and “Off” FlexLogic™ operands (for example,
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
and
PUSHBUTTON
1 OFF
). These operands are available for each pushbutton and are used to program specific actions. If any pushbutton is active, the
ANY PB ON
operand will be asserted.
Each pushbutton has an associated LED indicator. By default, this indicator displays the present status of the corresponding pushbutton (on or off). However, each LED indicator can be assigned to any FlexLogic™ operand through the
PUSHBTN
1 LED CTL
setting.
The pushbuttons can be automatically controlled by activating the operands assigned to the
PUSHBTN 1 SET
(for latched and self-reset mode) and
PUSHBTN 1 RESET
(for latched mode only) settings. The pushbutton reset status is declared when the
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF
operand is asserted. The activation and deactivation of user-programmable pushbuttons is dependent on whether latched or self-reset mode is programmed.
• Latched mode: In latched mode, a pushbutton can be set (activated) by asserting the operand assigned to the
PUSH-
BTN 1 SET
setting or by directly pressing the associated front panel pushbutton. The pushbutton maintains the set state until deactivated by the reset command or after a user-specified time delay. The state of each pushbutton is stored in non-volatile memory and maintained through a loss of control power.
The pushbutton is reset (deactivated) in latched mode by asserting the operand assigned to the
PUSHBTN 1 RESET
setting or by directly pressing the associated active front panel pushbutton.
It can also be programmed to reset automatically through the
PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST
and
PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY
settings. These settings enable the autoreset timer and specify the associated time delay. The autoreset timer can be used in select-before-operate (SBO) breaker control applications, where the command type (close/open) or breaker location (feeder number) must be selected prior to command execution. The selection must reset automatically if control is not executed within a specified time period.
• Self-reset mode: In self-reset mode, a pushbutton will remain active for the time it is pressed (the pulse duration) plus the dropout time specified in the
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME
setting. If the pushbutton is activated via FlexLogic™, the pulse duration is specified by the
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME
only. The time the operand remains assigned to the
PUSH-
BTN 1 SET
setting has no effect on the pulse duration.
NOTE
The pushbutton is reset (deactivated) in self-reset mode when the dropout delay specified in the
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT
TIME
setting expires.
The pulse duration of the remote set, remote reset, or local pushbutton must be at least 50 ms to operate the pushbutton. This allows the user-programmable pushbuttons to properly operate during power cycling events and various system disturbances that may cause transient assertion of the operating signals.
5-50 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The local and remote operation of each user-programmable pushbutton can be inhibited through the
PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL
and
PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE
settings, respectively. If local locking is applied, the pushbutton will ignore set and reset commands executed through the front panel pushbuttons. If remote locking is applied, the pushbutton will ignore set and reset commands executed through FlexLogic™ operands.
The locking functions are not applied to the autorestart feature. In this case, the inhibit function can be used in SBO control operations to prevent the pushbutton function from being activated and ensuring “one-at-a-time” select operation.
The locking functions can also be used to prevent the accidental pressing of the front panel pushbuttons. The separate inhibit of the local and remote operation simplifies the implementation of local/remote control supervision.
Pushbutton states can be logged by the event recorder and displayed as target messages. In latched mode, user-defined messages can also be associated with each pushbutton and displayed when the pushbutton is on or changing to off.
• PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: This setting selects the characteristic of the pushbutton. If set to “Disabled”, the pushbutton is not active and the corresponding FlexLogic™ operands (both “On” and “Off”) are de-asserted. If set to “Self-
Reset”, the control logic is activated by the pulse (longer than 100 ms) issued when the pushbutton is being physically pressed or virtually pressed via a FlexLogic™ operand assigned to the
PUSHBTN 1 SET
setting.
When in “Self-Reset” mode and activated locally, the pushbutton control logic asserts the “On” corresponding Flex-
Logic™ operand as long as the pushbutton is being physically pressed, and after being released the deactivation of the operand is delayed by the drop out timer. The “Off” operand is asserted when the pushbutton element is deactivated. If the pushbutton is activated remotely, the control logic of the pushbutton asserts the corresponding “On” Flex-
Logic™ operand only for the time period specified by the
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME
setting.
If set to “Latched”, the control logic alternates the state of the corresponding FlexLogic™ operand between “On” and
“Off” on each button press or by virtually activating the pushbutton (assigning set and reset operands). When in the
“Latched” mode, the states of the FlexLogic™ operands are stored in a non-volatile memory. Should the power supply be lost, the correct state of the pushbutton is retained upon subsequent power up of the relay.
• PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: This setting specifies the top 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is intended to provide ID information of the pushbutton. Refer to the User-definable displays section for instructions on how to enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad.
• PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is displayed when the pushbutton is in the “on” position. Refer to the User-definable displays section for instructions on entering alphanumeric characters from the keypad.
• PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is displayed when the pushbutton is activated from the on to the off position and the
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION
is
“Latched”. This message is not displayed when the
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION
is “Self-reset” as the pushbutton operand status is implied to be “Off” upon its release. The length of the “Off” message is configured with the
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
DISPLAY PROPERTIES
Ö
FLASH MESSAGE TIME
setting.
• PUSHBTN 1 HOLD: This setting specifies the time required for a pushbutton to be pressed before it is deemed active.
This timer is reset upon release of the pushbutton. Note that any pushbutton operation will require the pushbutton to be pressed a minimum of 50 ms. This minimum time is required prior to activating the pushbutton hold timer.
• PUSHBTN 1 SET: This setting assigns the FlexLogic™ operand serving to operate the pushbutton element and to assert
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
operand. The duration of the incoming set signal must be at least 100 ms.
• PUSHBTN 1 RESET: This setting assigns the FlexLogic™ operand serving to reset pushbutton element and to assert
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF
operand. This setting is applicable only if pushbutton is in latched mode. The duration of the incoming reset signal must be at least 50 ms.
• PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST: This setting enables the user-programmable pushbutton autoreset feature. This setting is applicable only if the pushbutton is in the “Latched” mode.
• PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY: This setting specifies the time delay for automatic reset of the pushbutton when in the latched mode.
• PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE: This setting assigns the FlexLogic™ operand serving to inhibit pushbutton operation from the operand assigned to the
PUSHBTN 1 SET
or
PUSHBTN 1 RESET
settings.
• PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL: This setting assigns the FlexLogic™ operand serving to inhibit pushbutton operation from the front panel pushbuttons. This locking functionality is not applicable to pushbutton autoreset.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-51
5
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
• PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: This setting applies only to “Self-Reset” mode and specifies the duration of the pushbutton active status after the pushbutton has been released. When activated remotely, this setting specifies the entire activation time of the pushbutton status; the length of time the operand remains on has no effect on the pulse duration.
This setting is required to set the duration of the pushbutton operating pulse.
• PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL: This setting assigns the FlexLogic™ operand serving to drive pushbutton LED. If this setting is
“Off”, then LED operation is directly linked to
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
operand.
• PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE: If pushbutton message is set to “High Priority”, the message programmed in the
PUSHBTN 1
ID
and
PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT
settings will be displayed undisturbed as long as
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
operand is asserted.
The high priority option is not applicable to the
PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT
setting.
This message can be temporary removed if any front panel keypad button is pressed. However, ten seconds of keypad inactivity will restore the message if the
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
operand is still active.
If the
PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE
is set to “Normal”, the message programmed in the
PUSHBTN 1 ID
and
PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT
settings will be displayed as long as
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
operand is asserted, but not longer than time period specified by
FLASH MESSAGE TIME
setting. After the flash time is expired, the default message or other active target message is displayed. The instantaneous reset of the flash message will be executed if any relay front panel button is pressed or any new target or message becomes active.
The
PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT
setting is linked to
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF
operand and will be displayed in conjunction with
PUSHBTN 1 ID
only if pushbutton element is in the “Latched” mode. The
PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT
message will be displayed as “Normal” if the
PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE
setting is “High Priority” or “Normal”.
• PUSHBUTTON 1 EVENTS: If this setting is enabled, each pushbutton state change will be logged as an event into event recorder.
5-52 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The user-programmable pushbutton logic is shown below.
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF
TIMER
200 ms
0
SETTING
Function
= Enabled
= Latched
= Self-Reset
OR
LATCHED
LATCHED/SELF-RESET
SETTING
Local Lock
Off = 0
SETTING
Remote Lock
SETTING
Hold
T
PKP
Off = 0
AND
TIMER
50 ms
TIMER
50 ms
0
OR
AND
Non-volatile latch
S
R
Latch
0
0
OR
SETTING
Set AND
Off = 0
SETTING
Reset
SETTING
Autoreset Function
= Enabled
= Disabled
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
Off = 0
OR PUSHBUTTON ON
OR
AND
AND
SETTING
Autoreset Delay
T
PKP
AND
0
AND
SETTING
Drop-Out Timer
0
TIMER
200 ms
OR
T
RST
0
AND
Figure 5–10: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON LOGIC (Sheet 1 of 2)
To user-programmable pushbuttons logic sheet 2, 842024A2
To user-programmable pushbuttons logic sheet 2, 842024A2
842021A3.CDR
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-53
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5
LATCHED
OR
AND
SETTING
Flash Message Time
0
T
RST
Instantaneous reset *
LCD MESSAGE
ENGAGE MESSAGE
SETTINGS
Top Text
= XXXXXXXXXX
On Text
= XXXXXXXXXX
From user-programmable pushbuttons logic sheet 1, 842021A3
LATCHED/SELF-RESET
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
PUSHBUTTON ON
NOTE
SETTING
Message Priority
= Disabled
= High Priority
= Normal
AND
The message is temporarily removed if any keypad button is pressed. Ten (10) seconds of keypad inactivity restores the message.
LCD MESSAGE
ENGAGE MESSAGE
SETTINGS
Top Text
= XXXXXXXXXX
OR
On Text
AND
SETTING
Flash Message Time
0
T
RST
Instantaneous reset *
= XXXXXXXXXX
Instantaneous reset will be executed if any front panel button is pressed or any new target or message becomes active.
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
PUSHBUTTON 2 ON
PUSHBUTTON 3 ON
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
ANY PB ON
PUSHBUTTON 1 LED LOGIC
1. If pushbutton 1 LED control is set to off.
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
Pushbutton 1
LED
2. If pushbutton 1 LED control is not set to off.
SETTING
PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL
= any FlexLogic operand
Pushbutton 1
LED
PUSHBUTTON 16 ON
The enhanced front panel has 16 operands; the standard front panel has 12
842024A2.CDR
Figure 5–11: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON LOGIC (Sheet 2 of 2)
User-programmable pushbuttons require a type HP or HQ faceplate. If an HP or HQ type faceplate was ordered separately, the relay order code must be changed to indicate the correct faceplate option. This can be done via
EnerVista UR Setup with the Maintenance > Enable Pushbutton command.
5.2.15 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
FLEX STATE
PARAMETERS
PARAMETER 1:
Off
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
PARAMETER 2:
Off
↓
PARAMETER 256:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
This feature provides a mechanism where any of 256 selected FlexLogic™ operand states can be used for efficient monitoring. The feature allows user-customized access to the FlexLogic™ operand states in the relay. The state bits are packed so that 16 states may be read out in a single Modbus register. The state bits can be configured so that all of the states which are of interest to the user are available in a minimum number of Modbus registers.
5-54 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The state bits may be read out in the “Flex States” register array beginning at Modbus address 0900h. Sixteen states are packed into each register, with the lowest-numbered state in the lowest-order bit. There are sixteen registers to accommodate the 256 state bits.
5.2.16 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
USER-DEFINABLE
DISPLAYS
INVOKE AND SCROLL:
Off
MESSAGE
USER DISPLAY 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
USER DISPLAY 2
↓
USER DISPLAY 16
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
This menu provides a mechanism for manually creating up to 16 user-defined information displays in a convenient viewing sequence in the
USER DISPLAYS
menu (between the
TARGETS
and
ACTUAL VALUES
top-level menus). The sub-menus facilitate text entry and Modbus register data pointer options for defining the user display content.
Once programmed, the user-definable displays can be viewed in two ways.
• KEYPAD: Use the MENU key to select the
USER DISPLAYS
menu item to access the first user-definable display (note that only the programmed screens are displayed). The screens can be scrolled using the UP and DOWN keys. The display disappears after the default message time-out period specified by the
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
DISPLAY PROPER-
TIES
ÖØ
DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT
setting.
• USER-PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL INPUT: The user-definable displays also respond to the
INVOKE AND SCROLL
setting. Any FlexLogic™ operand (in particular, the user-programmable pushbutton operands), can be used to navigate the programmed displays.
On the rising edge of the configured operand (such as when the pushbutton is pressed), the displays are invoked by showing the last user-definable display shown during the previous activity. From this moment onward, the operand acts exactly as the down key and allows scrolling through the configured displays. The last display wraps up to the first one. The
INVOKE AND SCROLL
input and the DOWN key operate concurrently.
When the default timer expires (set by the
DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT
setting), the relay will start to cycle through the user displays. The next activity of the
INVOKE AND SCROLL
input stops the cycling at the currently displayed user display, not at the first user-defined display. The
INVOKE AND SCROLL
pulses must last for at least 250 ms to take effect.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-55
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5 b) USER DISPLAY 1(16)
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
Ö
USER DISPLAY 1(16)
USER DISPLAY 1
DISP 1 TOP LINE:
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE:
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 1
0
DISP 1 ITEM 2
0
DISP 1 ITEM 3
0
DISP 1 ITEM 4
0
DISP 1 ITEM 5:
0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
Any existing system display can be automatically copied into an available user display by selecting the existing display and pressing the ENTER key. The display will then prompt
ADD TO USER DISPLAY LIST?
. After selecting “Yes”, a message indicates that the selected display has been added to the user display list. When this type of entry occurs, the sub-menus are automatically configured with the proper content – this content may subsequently be edited.
This menu is used to enter user-defined text and user-selected Modbus-registered data fields into the particular user display. Each user display consists of two 20-character lines (top and bottom). The tilde (~) character is used to mark the start of a data field - the length of the data field needs to be accounted for. Up to five separate data fields can be entered in a user display - the nth tilde (~) refers to the nth item.
A User Display may be entered from the faceplate keypad or the EnerVista UR Setup interface (preferred for convenience).
The following procedure shows how to enter text characters in the top and bottom lines from the faceplate keypad:
1.
Select the line to be edited.
2.
Press the decimal key to enter text edit mode.
3.
Use either VALUE key to scroll through the characters. A space is selected like a character.
4.
Press the decimal key to advance the cursor to the next position.
5.
Repeat step 3 and continue entering characters until the desired text is displayed.
6.
The HELP key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help information.
7.
Press the ENTER key to store the new settings.
To enter a numerical value for any of the five items (the decimal form of the selected Modbus address) from the faceplate keypad, use the number keypad. Use the value of ‘0’ for any items not being used. Use the HELP key at any selected system display (setting, actual value, or command) which has a Modbus address, to view the hexadecimal form of the Modbus address, then manually convert it to decimal form before entering it (EnerVista UR Setup usage conveniently facilitates this conversion).
Use the MENU key to go to the user displays menu to view the user-defined content. The current user displays will show in sequence, changing every 4 seconds. While viewing a user display, press the ENTER key and then select the ‘Yes” option to remove the display from the user display list. Use the MENU key again to exit the user displays menu.
5-56 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
An example user display setup and result is shown below:
USER DISPLAY 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DISP 1 TOP LINE:
Current X ~ A
DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE:
Current Y ~ A
DISP 1 ITEM 1:
6016
DISP 1 ITEM 2:
6357
DISP 1 ITEM 3:
0
DISP 1 ITEM 4:
0
DISP 1 ITEM 5:
0
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
Shows user-defined text with first Tilde marker.
Shows user-defined text with second Tilde marker.
Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus Register
Address, corresponding to first Tilde marker.
Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus
Register Address, corresponding to 2nd Tilde marker.
This item is not being used - there is no corresponding
Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines.
This item is not being used - there is no corresponding
Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines.
This item is not being used - there is no corresponding
Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines.
Shows the resultant display content.
→
Current X 0.850 A
Current Y 0.327 A
5.2.17 INSTALLATION
5
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
PRODUCT SETUP
ÖØ
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
MESSAGE
RELAY NAME:
Relay-1
Range: Not Programmed, Programmed
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
To safeguard against the installation of a relay without any entered settings, the unit will not allow signaling of any output relay until
RELAY SETTINGS
is set to "Programmed". This setting is defaulted to "Not Programmed" when at the factory. The
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED
self-test error message is displayed until the relay is put into the "Programmed" state.
The
RELAY NAME
setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay. This name will appear on generated reports. This name is also used to identify specific devices which are engaged in automatically sending/receiving data over the Ethernet communications channel using the IEC 61850 protocol.
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-57
5.3 REMOTE RESOURCES 5 SETTINGS
5.3REMOTE RESOURCES 5.3.1 REMOTE RESOURCES CONFIGURATION
When L90 is ordered with a process card module as a part of HardFiber system, then an additional Remote Resources menu tree is available in EnerVista UR Setup software to allow configuring HardFiber system.
5
Figure 5–12: REMOTE RESOURCES CONFIGURATION MENU
The remote resources settings configure a L90 with a process bus module to work with devices called Bricks. Remote resources configuration is only available through the EnerVista UR Setup software, and is not available through the L90 front panel. A Brick provides eight AC measurements, along with contact inputs, DC analog inputs, and contact outputs, to be the remote interface to field equipment such as circuit breakers and transformers. The L90 with a process bus module has access to all of the capabilities of up to eight Bricks. Remote resources settings configure the point-to-point connection between specific fiber optic ports on the L90 process card and specific Brick. The relay is then configured to measure specific currents, voltages and contact inputs from those Bricks, and to control specific outputs.
The configuration process for remote resources is straightforward and consists of the following steps.
• Configure the field units. This establishes the point-to-point connection between a specific port on the relay process bus module, and a specific digital core on a specific Brick. This is a necessary first step in configuring a process bus relay.
• Configure the AC banks. This sets the primary and secondary quantities and connections for currents and voltages.
AC bank configuration also provides a provision for redundant measurements for currents and voltages, a powerful reliability improvement possible with process bus.
• Configure signal sources. This functionality of the L90 has not changed other than the requirement to use currents and voltages established by AC bank configuration under the remote resources menu.
•
Configure field contact inputs, field contact outputs, RTDs, and transducers as required for the application's functional-
ity. These inputs and outputs are the physical interface to circuit breakers, transformers, and other equipment. They replace the traditional contact inputs and outputs located at the relay to virtually eliminate copper wiring.
• Configure shared inputs and outputs as required for the application's functionality. Shared inputs and outputs are distinct binary channels that provide high-speed protection quality signaling between relays through a Brick.
For additional information on how to configure a relay with a process bus module, please refer to GE publication number
GEK-113500: HardFiber System Instruction Manual.
5-58 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5.4SYSTEM SETUP a) CURRENT BANKS
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
SYSTEM SETUP
Ö
AC INPUTS
Ö
CURRENT BANK F1(L5)
CURRENT BANK F1
PHASE CT F1
Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1
Range: 1 A, 5 A
MESSAGE
PHASE CT F1
SECONDARY: 1 A
GROUND CT F1
Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1
MESSAGE
5.4.1 AC INPUTS
MESSAGE
GROUND CT F1
SECONDARY: 1 A
Range: 1 A, 5 A
Because energy parameters are accumulated, these values should be recorded and then reset immediately prior to changing CT characteristics.
NOTE
Four banks of phase and ground CTs can be set, where the current banks are denoted in the following format (X represents the module slot position letter):
Xa, where X = {F, L} and a = {1, 5}.
See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details.
These settings are critical for all features that have settings dependent on current measurements. When the relay is ordered, the CT module must be specified to include a standard or sensitive ground input. As the phase CTs are connected in wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents (IA + IB + IC = neutral current = 3Io) is used as the input for the neutral overcurrent elements. In addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the circuit primary conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor may also be used. For this configuration, the ground
CT primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the sensitive ground input may be used. In this case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered. Refer to chapter 3 for more details on CT connections.
Enter the rated CT primary current values. For both 1000:5 and 1000:1 CTs, the entry would be 1000. For correct operation, the CT secondary rating must match the setting (which must also correspond to the specific CT connections used).
The following example illustrates how multiple CT inputs (current banks) are summed as one source current. Given If the following current banks:
• F1: CT bank with 500:1 ratio.
• F5: CT bank with 1000: ratio.
• L1: CT bank with 800:1 ratio.
The following rule applies:
SRC 1
=
F1
+
F5
+
L1
(EQ 5.7)
1 pu is the highest primary current. In this case, 1000 is entered and the secondary current from the 500:1 ratio CT will be adjusted to that created by a 1000:1 CT before summation. If a protection element is set up to act on SRC 1 currents, then a pickup level of 1 pu will operate on 1000 A primary.
The same rule applies for current sums from CTs with different secondary taps (5 A and 1 A).
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-59
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5 b) VOLTAGE BANKS
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
SYSTEM SETUP
Ö
AC INPUTS
ÖØ
VOLTAGE BANK F5(L5)
VOLTAGE BANK F5
PHASE VT F5
CONNECTION: Wye
Range: Wye, Delta
Range: 25.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
PHASE VT F5
SECONDARY: 66.4 V
Range: 1.00 to 24000.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PHASE VT F5
RATIO: 1.00 :1
Range: Vn, Vag, Vbg, Vcg, Vab, Vbc, Vca
MESSAGE
AUXILIARY VT F5
CONNECTION: Vag
Range: 25.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
AUXILIARY VT F5
SECONDARY: 66.4 V
Range: 1.00 to 24000.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
AUXILIARY VT F5
RATIO: 1.00 :1
CAUTION
Because energy parameters are accumulated, these values should be recorded and then reset immediately prior to changing VT characteristics.
Two banks of phase/auxiliary VTs can be set, where voltage banks are denoted in the following format (X represents the module slot position letter):
Xa, where X = {F, L} and a = {5}.
See the Introduction to AC sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details.
With VTs installed, the relay can perform voltage measurements as well as power calculations. Enter the
PHASE VT F5 CON-
NECTION
made to the system as “Wye” or “Delta”. An open-delta source VT connection would be entered as “Delta”.
The nominal
PHASE VT F5 SECONDARY
voltage setting is the voltage across the relay input terminals when nominal voltage is applied to the VT primary.
NOTE
For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with a 14400:120 volt VT in a delta connection, the secondary voltage would be 115; that is, (13800 / 14400) × 120. For a wye connection, the voltage value entered must be the phase to neutral voltage which would be 115
/
3 = 66.4.
On a 14.4 kV system with a delta connection and a VT primary to secondary turns ratio of 14400:120, the voltage value entered would be 120; that is, 14400 / 120.
5.4.2 POWER SYSTEM
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
SYSTEM SETUP
ÖØ
POWER SYSTEM
POWER SYSTEM
NOMINAL FREQUENCY:
60 Hz
MESSAGE
PHASE ROTATION:
ABC
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
FREQUENCY AND PHASE
REFERENCE: SRC 1
FREQUENCY TRACKING:
Enabled
Range: 25 to 60 Hz in steps of 1
Range: ABC, ACB
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The power system
NOMINAL FREQUENCY
value is used as a default to set the digital sampling rate if the system frequency cannot be measured from available signals. This may happen if the signals are not present or are heavily distorted. Before reverting to the nominal frequency, the frequency tracking algorithm holds the last valid frequency measurement for a safe period of time while waiting for the signals to reappear or for the distortions to decay.
5-60 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
The phase sequence of the power system is required to properly calculate sequence components and power parameters.
The
PHASE ROTATION
setting matches the power system phase sequence. Note that this setting informs the relay of the actual system phase sequence, either ABC or ACB. CT and VT inputs on the relay, labeled as A, B, and C, must be connected to system phases A, B, and C for correct operation.
The
FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE
setting determines which signal source is used (and hence which AC signal) for phase angle reference. The AC signal used is prioritized based on the AC inputs that are configured for the signal source: phase voltages takes precedence, followed by auxiliary voltage, then phase currents, and finally ground current.
For three phase selection, phase A is used for angle referencing ( phase signals is used for frequency metering and tracking (
V
V
ANGLE REF
FREQUENCY
=
(
2V
A
ing fault, open pole, and VT and CT fail conditions.
=
–
V
A
V
B
), while Clarke transformation of the
–
V
C
⁄
) for better performance dur-
The phase reference and frequency tracking AC signals are selected based upon the Source configuration, regardless of whether or not a particular signal is actually applied to the relay.
Phase angle of the reference signal will always display zero degrees and all other phase angles will be relative to this signal. If the pre-selected reference signal is not measurable at a given time, the phase angles are not referenced.
The phase angle referencing is done via a phase locked loop, which can synchronize independent UR-series relays if they have the same AC signal reference. These results in very precise correlation of time tagging in the event recorder between different UR-series relays provided the relays have an IRIG-B connection.
FREQUENCY TRACKING
should only be set to “Disabled” in very unusual circumstances; consult the factory for special variable-frequency applications.
NOTE
The frequency tracking feature will function only when the L90 is in the “Programmed” mode. If the L90 is “Not Programmed”, then metering values will be available but may exhibit significant errors.
NOTE
5
NOTE
The nominal system frequency should be selected as 50 Hz or 60 Hz only. The
FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE
setting, used as a reference for calculating all angles, must be identical for all terminals. Whenever the 87L function is “Enabled”, the frequency tracking function is disabled, and frequency tracking is driven by the L90 algorithm (see the Theory of operation chapter). Whenever the 87L function is “Disabled”, the frequency tracking mechanism reverts to the UR-series mechanism which uses the
FREQUENCY TRACKING
setting to provide frequency tracking for all other elements and functions.
5.4.3 SIGNAL SOURCES
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
SYSTEM SETUP
ÖØ
SIGNAL SOURCES
Ö
SOURCE 1(4)
SOURCE 1
SOURCE 1 NAME:
SRC 1
Range: up to six alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
SOURCE 1 PHASE CT:
None
Range: None, F1, F5, F1+F5,... up to a combination of any 6 CTs. Only Phase CT inputs are displayed.
MESSAGE
SOURCE 1 GROUND CT:
None
Range: None, F1, F5, F1+F5,... up to a combination of any 6 CTs. Only Ground CT inputs are displayed.
MESSAGE
SOURCE 1 PHASE VT:
None
Range: None, F5, L5
Only phase voltage inputs will be displayed.
MESSAGE
SOURCE 1 AUX VT:
None
Range: None, F5, L5
Only auxiliary voltage inputs will be displayed.
Identical menus are available for each source. The "SRC 1" text can be replaced by with a user-defined name appropriate for the associated source.
The first letter in the source identifier represents the module slot position. The number directly following this letter represents either the first bank of four channels (1, 2, 3, 4) called “1” or the second bank of four channels (5, 6, 7, 8) called “5” in a particular CT/VT module. Refer to the Introduction to AC sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details on this concept.
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-61
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
ACTUAL
SOURCE 1
CURRENT PHASOR
I_1
I_2
I_0
ACTUAL
SOURCE 2
CURRENT PHASOR
I_1
I_2
I_0
5 SETTINGS
5
It is possible to select the sum of all CT combinations. The first channel displayed is the CT to which all others will be referred. For example, the selection “F1+F5” indicates the sum of each phase from channels “F1” and “F5”, scaled to whichever CT has the higher ratio. Selecting “None” hides the associated actual values.
The approach used to configure the AC sources consists of several steps; first step is to specify the information about each
CT and VT input. For CT inputs, this is the nominal primary and secondary current. For VTs, this is the connection type, ratio and nominal secondary voltage. Once the inputs have been specified, the configuration for each source is entered, including specifying which CTs will be summed together.
User selection of AC parameters for comparator elements:
CT/VT modules automatically calculate all current and voltage parameters from the available inputs. Users must select the specific input parameters to be measured by every element in the relevant settings menu. The internal design of the element specifies which type of parameter to use and provides a setting for source selection. In elements where the parameter may be either fundamental or RMS magnitude, such as phase time overcurrent, two settings are provided. One setting specifies the source, the second setting selects between fundamental phasor and RMS.
AC input actual values:
The calculated parameters associated with the configured voltage and current inputs are displayed in the current and voltage sections of actual values. Only the phasor quantities associated with the actual AC physical input channels will be displayed here. All parameters contained within a configured source are displayed in the sources section of the actual values.
DISTURBANCE DETECTORS (INTERNAL):
The disturbance detector (ANSI 50DD) element is a sensitive current disturbance detector that detects any disturbance on the protected system. The 50DD function is intended for use in conjunction with measuring elements, blocking of current based elements (to prevent maloperation as a result of the wrong settings), and starting oscillography data capture. A disturbance detector is provided for each source.
The 50DD function responds to the changes in magnitude of the sequence currents. The disturbance detector scheme logic is as follows:
SETTING
PRODUCT SETUP/DISPLAY
PROPERTIES/CURRENT
CUT-OFF LEVEL
I
_1 -
I
_2 -
I
_0 -
I
I
I
_1’ >2*CUT-OFF
_2’ >2*CUT-OFF
_0’ >2*CUT-OFF
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SRC 1 50DD OP
SETTING
PRODUCT SETUP/DISPLAY
PROPERTIES/CURRENT
CUT-OFF LEVEL
I
_1 -
I
_2 -
I
_0 -
I
I
I
_1’ >2*CUT-OFF
_2’ >2*CUT-OFF
_0’ >2*CUT-OFF
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SRC 2 50DD OP
ACTUAL
SOURCE 6
CURRENT PHASOR
I_1
I_2
I_0
SETTING
PRODUCT SETUP/DISPLAY
PROPERTIES/CURRENT
CUT-OFF LEVEL
I
_1 -
I
_2 -
I
_0 -
I
I
I
_1’ >2*CUT-OFF
_2’ >2*CUT-OFF
_0’ >2*CUT-OFF
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SRC 6 50DD OP
827092A3.CDR
Figure 5–13: DISTURBANCE DETECTOR LOGIC DIAGRAM
The disturbance detector responds to the change in currents of twice the current cut-off level. The default cut-off threshold is 0.02 pu; thus by default the disturbance detector responds to a change of 0.04 pu. The metering sensitivity setting (
PROD-
UCT SETUP
ÖØ
DISPLAY PROPERTIES
ÖØ
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL
) controls the sensitivity of the disturbance detector accordingly.
5-62 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES:
An example of the use of sources is shown in the diagram below. A relay could have the following hardware configuration:
INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER -->
CT/VT MODULE 1 CT/VT MODULE 2
CTs VTs
CT/VT MODULE 3
not applicable
This configuration could be used on a two-winding transformer, with one winding connected into a breaker-and-a-half system. The following figure shows the arrangement of sources used to provide the functions required in this application, and the CT/VT inputs that are used to provide the data.
F 1
DSP Bank
M 1
F 5
U 1
Source 3
Volts Amps
A W
Source 1
Amps
Source 2
Amps
51BF-1
Var
51BF-2
87T
V
V
A W Var
51P
Volts
Amps
M 1
Source 4
UR Relay
M 5
Figure 5–14: EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-63
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5
5.4.4 L90 POWER SYSTEM
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
SYSTEM SETUP
ÖØ
87L POWER SYSTEM
87L POWER SYSTEM
NUMBER OF TERMINALS:
2
MESSAGE
NUMBER OF CHANNELS:
1
MESSAGE
CHARGING CURRENT
COMPENSATN: Disabled
‘
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
POS SEQ CAPACITIVE
REACTANCE: 0.100
Ω
ZERO SEQ CAPACITIVE
REACTANCE: 0.100
Ω
ZERO SEQ CURRENT
REMOVAL: Disabled
LOCAL RELAY ID
NUMBER: 0
TERMINAL 1 RELAY ID
NUMBER: 0
TERMINAL 2 RELAY ID
NUMBER: 0
CHNL ASYM COMP:
Off
BLOCK GPS TIME REF:
Off
MAX CHNL ASYMMETRY:
1.5 ms
ROUND TRIP TIME
CHANGE: 1.5 ms
Range: 2, 3
Range: 1, 2
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Range: 0.100 to 65.535 k
Ω in steps of 0.001
Range: 0.100 to 65.535 k
Ω in steps of 0.001
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: 0.0 to 10.0 ms in steps of 0.1
Range: 0.0 to 10.0 ms in steps of 0.1
NOTE
Any changes to the L90 power system settings will change the protection system configuration. As such, the 87L protection at all L90 protection system terminals must be temporarily disabled to allow the relays to acknowledge the new settings.
• NUMBER OF TERMINALS: This setting is the number of the terminals of the associated protected line.
• NUMBER OF CHANNELS: This setting should correspond to the type of communications module installed. If the relay is applied on two terminal lines with a single communications channel, this setting should be selected as "1". For a two terminal line with a second redundant channel for increased dependability, or for three terminal line applications, this setting should be selected as "2".
• CHARGING CURRENT COMPENSATION: This setting enables and disables the charging current calculations and corrections of current phasors. The voltage signals used for charging current compensation are taken from the source assigned with the
CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL SOURCE 1
setting. As such, it's critical to ensure that three-phase line voltage is assigned to this source. The following diagram shows possible configurations.
5-64 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
A B C
Possible 3-Reactor arrangement Line Capacitive Reactance
Possible 4-Reactor arrangement
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
A B C
Xreact Xreact
Xreact_n
X1line_capac
X0line_capac
831731A3.CDR
Figure 5–15: CHARGING CURRENT COMPENSATION CONFIGURATIONS
• POSITIVE and ZERO SEQUENCE CAPACITIVE REACTANCE: The values of positive and zero-sequence capacitive reactance of the protected line are required for charging current compensation calculations. The line capacitive reactance values should be entered in primary kohms for the total line length. Details of the charging current compensation algorithm can be found in Chapter 8: Theory of operation.
If shunt reactors are also installed on the line, the resulting value entered in the
POS SEQ CAPACITIVE REACTANCE
and
ZERO SEQ CAPACITIVE REACTANCE
settings should be calculated as follows:
1.
Three-reactor arrangement: three identical line reactors (X react
) solidly connected phase to ground:
X
C1
=
X
------------------------------------------------
X
react
–
X
⋅
X
1line_capac
, X
C0
=
X
⋅
X
------------------------------------------------
X
react
–
X
0line_capac
(EQ 5.8)
2.
Four-reactor arrangement: three identical line reactors (X react
) wye-connected with the fourth reactor (X connected between reactor-bank neutral and the ground.
react_n
)
X
C1
=
X
X
react
⋅
X
------------------------------------------------
–
X
1line_capac
, X
C0
=
X
X
react
⋅ (
X
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------react_n
–
X
0line_capac
)
(EQ 5.9)
NOTE
X
1line_capac
= the total line positive-sequence capacitive reactance
X
0line_capac
= the total line zero-sequence capacitive reactance
X
react
= the total reactor inductive reactance per phase. If identical reactors are installed at both line ends, the value of the inductive reactance is divided by 2 (or 3 for a three-terminal line) before using in the above equations. If the reactors installed at both ends of the line are different, the following equations apply:
1.
For 2 terminal line:
X
react
= 1
⁄
⎛
⎝
X
react_terminal1
+ -----------------------------------
X
react_terminal2
⎞
⎠
2.
For 3 terminal line:
X
react
=
1
⁄
⎛
⎝
1
-----------------------------------
X
react_terminal1
+
1
-----------------------------------
X
react_terminal2
+
X
1
----------------------------------react_terminal3
⎠
⎞
X
react_n
= the total neutral reactor inductive reactance. If identical reactors are installed at both line ends, the value of the inductive reactance is divided by 2 (or 3 for a three-terminal line) before using in the above
1.
equations. If the reactors installed at both ends of the line are different, the following equations apply:
For 2 terminal line:
X
react_n
= 1
⁄
⎛
⎝
X
react_n_terminal1
+ ----------------------------------------
X
react_n_terminal2
⎠
⎞
2.
For 3 terminal line:
X
react_n
=
1
⁄
⎛
⎝
X
1
---------------------------------------react_n_terminal1
+
X
1
-----------------------------------------react__n_terminal2
+
X
1
---------------------------------------react_n_terminal3
⎠
⎞
Charging current compensation calculations should be performed for an arrangement where the VTs are connected to the line side of the circuit; otherwise, opening the breaker at one end of the line will cause a calculation error.
NOTE
Differential current is significantly decreased when
CHARGING CURRENT COMPENSATION
is “Enabled” and the proper reactance values are entered. The effect of charging current compensation is viewed in the
METERING
ÖØ
87L DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT
actual values menu. This effect is very dependent on CT and VT accuracy.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-65
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5
• ZERO-SEQUENCE CURRENT REMOVAL: This setting facilitates application of the L90 to transmission lines with one or more tapped transformers without current measurement at the taps. If the tapped transformer is connected in a grounded wye on the line side, it becomes a source of the zero-sequence current for external ground faults. As the transformer current is not measured by the L90 protection system, the zero-sequence current would create a spurious differential signal and may cause a false trip.
If enabled, this setting forces the L90 to remove zero-sequence current from the phase currents prior to forming their differential signals, ensuring protection stability on external ground faults. However, zero-sequence current removal may cause all three phases to trip for internal ground faults. Consequently, a phase selective operation of the L90 is not retained if the setting is enabled. This does not impose any limitation, as single-pole tripping is not recommended for lines with tapped transformers. Refer to chapter 9 for guidelines.
• LOCAL (TERMINAL 1 and TERMINAL 2) ID NUMBER: In installations using multiplexers or modems for communication, it is desirable to ensure the data used by the relays protecting a given line comes from the correct relays. The L90 performs this check by reading the ID number contained in the messages sent by transmitting relays and comparing this ID to the programmed correct ID numbers by the receiving relays. This check is used to block the differential element of a relay, if the channel is inadvertently set to loopback mode, by recognizing its own ID on a received channel.
If an incorrect ID is found on a either channel during normal operation, the FlexLogic™ operand
87 CH1(2) ID FAIL
is set, driving the event with the same name. The result of channel identification is also available in
ACTUAL VALUES
Ö
STATUS
ÖØ
CHANNEL TESTS
ÖØ
VALIDITY OF CHANNEL CONFIGURATION
for commissioning purposes. The default value
“0” at local relay ID setting indicates that the channel ID number is not to be checked. Refer to the Current differential section in this chapter for additional information.
For two-terminal applications, only the
LOCAL ID NUMBER
and
TERMINAL 1 ID NUMBER
should be used. The
TERMINAL 2
ID NUMBER
is used for three-terminal applications.
• CHNL ASYM COMP: This setting enables/disables channel asymmetry compensation. The compensation is based on absolute time referencing provided by GPS-based clocks via the L90 IRIG-B inputs. This feature should be used on multiplexed channels where channel asymmetry can be expected and would otherwise cause errors in current differential calculations. The feature takes effect if all terminals are provided with reliable IRIG-B signals. If the IRIG-B signal is lost at any terminal of the L90 protection system, or the real time clock not configured, then the compensation is not calculated. If the compensation is in place prior to losing the GPS time reference, the last (memorized) correction is applied as long as the value of
CHNL ASYM COMP
is “On”. See chapter 9 for additional information.
The GPS-based compensation for channel asymmetry can take three different effects:
• If
CHNL ASYM COMP
(GPS) is “Off”, compensation is not applied and the L90 uses only the ping-pong technique.
• If
CHNL ASYM COMP
(GPS) is “On” and all L90 terminals have a valid time reference (
BLOCK GPS TIME REF
not set), then compensation is applied and the L90 effectively uses GPS time referencing tracking channel asymmetry if the latter fluctuates.
• If
CHNL ASYM COMP
(GPS) is “On” and not all L90 terminals have a valid time reference (
BLOCK GPS TIME REF
not set or
IRIG-B FAILURE
operand is not asserted), then compensation is not applied (if the system was not compensated prior to the problem), or the memorized (last valid) compensation is used if compensation was in effect prior to the problem.
The
CHNL ASYM COMP
setting dynamically turns the GPS compensation on and off. A FlexLogic™ operand that combines several factors is typically used. The L90 protection system does not incorporate any pre-defined way of treating certain conditions, such as failure of the GPS receiver, loss of satellite signal, channel asymmetry prior to the loss of reference time, or change of the round trip time prior to loss of the time reference. Virtually any philosophy can be programmed by selecting the
CHNL ASYM COMP
setting. Factors to consider are:
• Fail-safe output of the GPS receiver. Some receivers may be equipped with the fail-safe output relay. The L90 system requires a maximum error of 250
μs. The fail-safe output of the GPS receiver may be connected to the local
L90 via an input contact. In the case of GPS receiver fail, the channel compensation function can be effectively disabled by using the input contact in conjunction with the
BLOCK GPS TIME REF
(GPS) setting.
• Channel asymmetry prior to losing the GPS time reference. This value is measured by the L90 and a user-programmable threshold is applied to it. The corresponding FlexLogic™ operands are produced if the asymmetry is above the threshold (
87L DIFF MAX 1 ASYM
and
87L DIFF 2 MAX ASYM
). These operands can be latched in Flex-
Logic™ and combined with other factors to decide, upon GPS loss, if the relays continue to compensate using the memorized correction. Typically, one may decide to keep compensating if the pre-existing asymmetry was low.
5-66 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
• Change in the round trip travel time. This value is measured by the L90 and a user-programmable threshold applied to it. The corresponding FlexLogic™ operands are produced if the delta change is above the threshold
(
87L DIFF 1 TIME CHNG
and
87L DIFF 2 TIME CHNG
). These operands can be latched in FlexLogic™ and combined with other factors to decide, upon GPS loss, if the relays continue to compensate using the memorized correction.
Typically, one may decide to disable compensation if the round trip time changes.
• BLOCK GPS TIME REF: This setting signals to the L90 that the time reference is not valid. The time reference may be not accurate due to problems with the GPS receiver. The user must to be aware of the case when a GPS satellite receiver loses its satellite signal and reverts to its own calibrated crystal oscillator. In this case, accuracy degrades in time and may eventually cause relay misoperation. Verification from the manufacturer of receiver accuracy not worse than 250
μs and the presence of an alarm contact indicating loss of the satellite signal is strongly recommended. If the time reference accuracy cannot be guaranteed, it should be relayed to the L90 via contact inputs and GPS compensation effectively blocked using the contact position in conjunction with the
BLOCK GPS TIME REF
setting. This setting is typically a signal from the GPS receiver signaling problems or time inaccuracy.
Some GPS receivers can supply erroneous IRIG-B signals during power-up and before locking to satellites. If the receiver’s failsafe contact opens during power-up (allowing for an erroneous IRIG-B signal), then set a dropout delay up to 15 minutes (depending on GPS receiver specifications) to the failsafe contact via FlexLogic™ to prevent incorrect relay response.
• MAX CHNL ASYMMETRY: This setting detects excessive channel asymmetry. The same threshold is applied to both the channels, while the following per-channel FlexLogic™ operands are generated:
87L DIFF 1 MAX ASYM
and
87L DIFF
2 MAX ASYM
. These operands can be used to alarm on problems with communication equipment and/or to decide whether channel asymmetry compensation remains in operation should the GPS-based time reference be lost. Channel asymmetry is measured if both terminals of a given channel have valid time reference.
If the memorized asymmetry value is much greater than expected (indicating a significant problem with IRIG-B timing), then this operand can be also used to block GPS compensation, forcing the relay to use the memorized asymmetry value.
• ROUND TRIP TIME CHANGE: This setting detects changes in round trip time. This threshold is applied to both channels, while the
87L DIFF 1 TIME CHNG
and
87L DIFF 2 TIME CHNG ASYM
per-channel FlexLogic™ operands are generated. These operands can be used to alarm on problems with communication equipment and/or to decide whether channel asymmetry compensation remains in operation should the GPS-based time reference be lost.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-67
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5
IRIG-B FAILURE
DETECTED
SETTINGS
BLOCK GPS TIME REF:
Off = 0
IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE:
None = 0
CHNL ASYM COMP:
Off = 0
DATA FROM REMOTE
TERMINAL 1
87L Ch 1 Status (OK=1)
87L GPS 1 Status (OK=1)
DATA FROM REMOTE
TERMINAL 2
87L Ch 2 Status (OK=1)
87L GPS 2 Status (OK=1)
OR
To Remote Relays
Channel 1 and 2
87L GPS Status Fail
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
87L DIFF GPS FAIL
GPS COMPENSATION
RUN
AND
AND
OR
OR
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
87L DIFF PFLL FAIL
5 sec
0
AND
S
R
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
87L DIFF GPS 1 FAIL
ACTUAL VALUE
Ch1 Asymmetry
ACTUAL VALUE
Ch1 Round Trip Time
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
87L DIFF GPS 2 FAIL
ACTUAL VALUE
Ch2 Asymmetry
ACTUAL VALUE
Ch2 Round Trip Time
AND
SETTINGS
MAX CHNL ASYMMETRY:
ROUND TRIP TIME
CHANGE:
RUN
Ch1 Asymmetry > MAX
RUN
Ch1 T-Time New -
Ch1 T-Time Old >
CHANGE
AND
RUN
Ch2 Asymmetry > MAX
RUN
Ch2 T-Time New -
Ch2 T-Time Old >
CHANGE
Figure 5–16: CHANNEL ASYMMETRY COMPENSATION LOGIC
AND
AND
AND
Use Calculated GPS
Correction
Update GPS Correction
Memory
Use Memorized GPS
Correction
Use GPS Correction of Zero
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
87L DIFF 1 MAX ASYM
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
87L DIFF 1 TIME CHNG
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
87L DIFF 2 MAX ASYM
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
87L DIFF 2 TIME CHNG
831025A4.CDR
5-68 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5.4.5 BREAKERS
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
SYSTEM SETUP
ÖØ
BREAKERS
Ö
BREAKER 1(4)
BREAKER 1
BREAKER 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
BREAKER1 PUSH BUTTON
CONTROL: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 NAME:
Bkr 1
BREAKER 1 MODE:
3-Pole
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 OPEN:
Off
BREAKER 1 BLK OPEN:
Off
BREAKER 1 CLOSE:
Off
BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE:
Off
BREAKER 1
ΦA/3P CLSD:
Off
BREAKER 1
ΦA/3P OPND:
Off
BREAKER 1
ΦB CLOSED:
Off
BREAKER 1
ΦB OPENED:
Off
BREAKER 1
ΦC CLOSED:
Off
BREAKER 1
ΦC OPENED:
Off
BREAKER 1 Toperate:
0.070 s
BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM:
Off
BREAKER 1 ALARM
MESSAGE
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Range: up to 6 alphanumeric characters
Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: 0.000 to 2.000 s in steps of 0.001
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: 0.000 to 1 000 000.000 s in steps of 0.001
MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1
Range: 0.000 to 1 000 000.000 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV:
Off
BREAKER 1 EVENTS:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-69
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5
A description of the operation of the breaker control and status monitoring features is provided in chapter 4. Only information concerning programming of the associated settings is covered here. These features are provided for two or more breakers; a user may use only those portions of the design relevant to a single breaker, which must be breaker 1.
The number of breaker control elements is dependent on the number of CT/VT modules specified with the L90. The following settings are available for each breaker control element.
• BREAKER 1 FUNCTION: This setting enables and disables the operation of the breaker control feature.
• BREAKER1 PUSH BUTTON CONTROL: Set to “Enable” to allow faceplate push button operations.
• BREAKER 1 NAME: Assign a user-defined name (up to six characters) to the breaker. This name will be used in flash messages related to breaker 1.
• BREAKER 1 MODE: This setting selects “3-pole” mode, where all breaker poles are operated simultaneously, or “1pole” mode where all breaker poles are operated either independently or simultaneously.
• BREAKER 1 OPEN: This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to open breaker 1.
• BREAKER 1 BLK OPEN: This setting selects an operand that prevents opening of the breaker. This setting can be used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA.
• BREAKER 1 CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to close breaker 1.
• BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that prevents closing of the breaker. This setting can be used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA.
•
BREAKER 1
ΦA/3P CLOSED: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input connected to a breaker auxiliary position tracking mechanism. This input should be a normally-open 52/a status input to create a logic 1 when the breaker is closed. If the
BREAKER 1 MODE
setting is selected as “3-Pole”, this setting selects a single input as the operand used to track the breaker open or closed position. If the mode is selected as “1-Pole”, the input mentioned above is used to track phase A and the
BREAKER 1
Φ
B
and
BREAKER 1
Φ
C
settings select operands to track phases B and C, respectively.
•
BREAKER 1
ΦA/3P OPND: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input, that should be a normally-closed
52/b status input to create a logic 1 when the breaker is open. If a separate 52/b contact input is not available, then the inverted
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
status signal can be used.
•
BREAKER 1
ΦB CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase B closed position as above for phase A.
•
BREAKER 1
ΦB OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase B opened position as above for phase A.
•
BREAKER 1
ΦC CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase C closed position as above for phase A.
•
BREAKER 1
ΦC OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase C opened position as above for phase A.
• BREAKER 1 Toperate: This setting specifies the required interval to overcome transient disagreement between the
52/a and 52/b auxiliary contacts during breaker operation. If transient disagreement still exists after this time has expired, the
BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS
FlexLogic™ operand is asserted from alarm or blocking purposes.
• BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM: This setting selects an operand, usually an external contact input, connected to a breaker alarm reporting contact.
• BREAKER 1 ALARM DELAY: This setting specifies the delay interval during which a disagreement of status among the three-pole position tracking operands will not declare a pole disagreement. This allows for non-simultaneous operation of the poles.
If single-pole tripping and reclosing is used, the breaker may trip unsymmetrically for faults. In this case, the minimum alarm delay setting must exceed the maximum time required for fault clearing and reclosing by a suitable margin.
• MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME: This setting specifies the interval required to maintain setting changes in effect after an operator has initiated a manual close command to operate a circuit breaker.
• BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV: Selects an operand indicating that breaker 1 is out-of-service.
5-70 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
NOTE
SETTING
BREAKER 1 FUNCTION
= Enabled
= Disabled
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
BREAKER 1 OFF CMD
BREAKER 1 TRIP A
BREAKER 1 TRIP B
BREAKER 1 TRIP C
SETTING
BREAKER 1 BLOCK OPEN
Off = 0
D60, L60, and L90 devices only from trip output
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
TRIP PHASE A
TRIP PHASE B
TRIP PHASE C
TRIP 3-POLE
AND
AND
AND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 OPEN
Off = 0
OR
61850 Select & Open
USER 3 OFF/ON
To open BRK1-(Name)
BKR ENABLED
To breaker control logic sheet 2,
842025A1
AND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 PUSHBUTTON
CONTROL
= Enabled
AND
USER 2 OFF/ON
To open BRK1-(Name)
OR
SETTING
BREAKER 1 CLOSE
Off = 0
AND
OR
61850 Select & Close
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 MNL CLS
SETTING
MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME
AND
C60, D60, L60, and L90 relays from recloser
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR CLOSE BKR 1
0
SETTING
BREAKER 1 BLOCK CLOSE
Off = 0
OR AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 ON CMD
827061AS.CDR
Figure 5–17: DUAL BREAKER CONTROL SCHEME LOGIC (Sheet 1 of 2)
IEC 61850 functionality is permitted when the L90 is in “Programmed” mode and not in the local control mode.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-71
5
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS
from breaker control logic sheet 1,
827061AR
BKR ENABLED
SETTING
BREAKER 1 MODE
= 3-Pole
= 1-Pole
AND
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
BREAKER 1
CLOSED
(DEFAULT)
AND
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 OPEN
BREAKER 1
OPEN
(DEFAULT)
SETTING
= Off
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 DISCREP
AND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ΦB CLSD
= Off
AND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ALARM DELAY
0
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ΦC CLSD
= Off
AND
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 TROUBLE
Note: the BREAKER 1 TROUBLE LED can be latched using FlexLogic™
BREAKER 1
TROUBLE
(DEFAULT)
SETTING
BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM
= Off
SETTING
= Off
XOR
AND
AND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 Toperate
0
AND
AND
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
BREAKER 1 ΦA BAD ST
BREAKER 1 ΦA CLSD
BREAKER 1 ΦA OPEN
BREAKER 1 ΦA INTERM
AND
AND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 Toperate
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ΦB OPENED
= Off
XOR
AND
AND
0
AND
AND
AND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 Toperate
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ΦC OPENED
= Off
XOR
AND
AND
0
AND
AND
AND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV
= Off
AND
AND
AND
AND
XOR
AND
Figure 5–18: DUAL BREAKER CONTROL SCHEME LOGIC (Sheet 2 of 2)
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN
BREAKER 1 1P OPEN
BREAKER 1 OOS
842025A1.CDR
5-72 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5.4.6 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
SYSTEM SETUP
ÖØ
SWITCHES
Ö
SWITCH 1(16)
SWITCH 1
SWITCH 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 NAME:
SW 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 MODE:
3-Pole
SWITCH 1 OPEN:
Off
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN:
Off
SWITCH 1 CLOSE:
Off
SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE:
Off
SWTCH 1
ΦA/3P CLSD:
Off
SWTCH 1
ΦA/3P OPND:
Off
SWITCH 1
ΦB CLOSED:
Off
SWITCH 1
ΦB OPENED:
Off
SWITCH 1
ΦC CLOSED:
Off
SWITCH 1
ΦC OPENED:
Off
SWITCH 1 Toperate:
0.070 s
SWITCH 1 ALARM
MESSAGE
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Range: up to 6 alphanumeric characters
Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: 0.000 to 2.000 s in steps of 0.001
Range: 0.000 to 1 000 000.000 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 EVENTS:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The disconnect switch element contains the auxiliary logic for status and serves as the interface for opening and closing of disconnect switches from SCADA or through the front panel interface. The disconnect switch element can be used to create an interlocking functionality. For greater security in determination of the switch pole position, both the 52/a and 52/b auxiliary contacts are used with reporting of the discrepancy between them. The number of available disconnect switches depends on the number of the CT/VT modules ordered with the L90.
• SWITCH 1 FUNCTION: This setting enables and disables the operation of the disconnect switch element.
• SWITCH 1 NAME: Assign a user-defined name (up to six characters) to the disconnect switch. This name will be used in flash messages related to disconnect switch 1.
• SWITCH 1 MODE: This setting selects “3-pole” mode, where all disconnect switch poles are operated simultaneously, or “1-pole” mode where all disconnect switch poles are operated either independently or simultaneously.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-73
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5
• SWITCH 1 OPEN: This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to open disconnect switch 1.
• SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN: This setting selects an operand that prevents opening of the disconnect switch. This setting can be used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA.
• SWITCH 1 CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to close disconnect switch 1.
• SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that prevents closing of the disconnect switch. This setting can be used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA.
•
SWTCH 1
ΦA/3P CLSD: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input connected to a disconnect switch auxiliary position tracking mechanism. This input should be a normally-open 52/a status input to create a logic 1 when the disconnect switch is closed. If the
SWITCH 1 MODE
setting is selected as “3-Pole”, this setting selects a single input as the operand used to track the disconnect switch open or closed position. If the mode is selected as “1-Pole”, the input mentioned above is used to track phase A and the
SWITCH 1
Φ
B
and
SWITCH 1
Φ
C
settings select operands to track phases B and C, respectively.
•
SWITCH 1
ΦA/3P OPND: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input, that should be a normally-closed
52/b status input to create a logic 1 when the disconnect switch is open. If a separate 52/b contact input is not available, then the inverted
SWITCH 1 CLOSED
status signal can be used.
•
SWITCH 1
ΦB CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase B closed position as above for phase A.
•
SWITCH 1
ΦB OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase B opened position as above for phase A.
•
SWITCH 1
ΦC CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase C closed position as above for phase A.
•
SWITCH 1
ΦC OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase C opened position as above for phase A.
• SWITCH 1 Toperate: This setting specifies the required interval to overcome transient disagreement between the 52/a and 52/b auxiliary contacts during disconnect switch operation. If transient disagreement still exists after this time has expired, the
SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS
FlexLogic™ operand is asserted from alarm or blocking purposes.
• SWITCH 1 ALARM DELAY: This setting specifies the delay interval during which a disagreement of status among the three-pole position tracking operands will not declare a pole disagreement. This allows for non-simultaneous operation of the poles.
IEC 61850 functionality is permitted when the L90 is in “Programmed” mode and not in the local control mode.
NOTE
5-74 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
SETTING
SWITCH 1 FUNCTION
= Disabled
= Enabled
SETTING
SWITCH 1 OPEN
= Off
SETTING
SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN
= Off
SETTING
SWITCH 1 CLOSE
= Off
SETTING
SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE
= Off
SETTING
SWITCH 1 MODE
= 3-Pole
= 1-Pole
SETTING
SETTING
= Off
= Off
SETTING
= Off
SETTING
= Off
SETTING
= Off
SETTING
= Off
61850 Select & Open
61850 Select & Close
OR
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
AND
AND
OR
AND
AND
SETTING
SWITCH 1 ALARM DELAY
0
OR
AND
AND
SETTING
SWITCH 1 Toperate
OR
XOR
AND
AND
0
AND
AND
AND
AND
SETTING
SWITCH 1 Toperate
XOR
AND
AND
0
AND
AND
AND
AND
SETTING
SWITCH 1 Toperate
XOR
AND
AND
0
AND
AND
AND
AND
Figure 5–19: DISCONNECT SWITCH SCHEME LOGIC
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SWITCH 1 OFF CMD
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SWITCH 1 ON CMD
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
842026A3.CDR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SWITCH 1 CLOSED
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SWITCH 1 OPEN
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SWITCH 1 DISCREP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SWITCH 1 TROUBLE
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SWITCH 1 ΦA BAD ST
SWITCH 1 ΦA CLSD
SWITCH 1 ΦA OPEN
SWITCH 1 ΦA INTERM
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-75
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5
5.4.7 FLEXCURVES™ a) SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
SYSTEM SETUP
ÖØ
FLEXCURVES
Ö
FLEXCURVE A(D)
FLEXCURVE A
FLEXCURVE A TIME AT
0.00 xPKP: 0 ms
Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
FlexCurves™ A through D have settings for entering times to reset and operate at the following pickup levels: 0.00 to 0.98
and 1.03 to 20.00. This data is converted into two continuous curves by linear interpolation between data points. To enter a custom FlexCurve™, enter the reset and operate times (using the VALUE keys) for each selected pickup point (using the
MESSAGE UP/DOWN keys) for the desired protection curve (A, B, C, or D).
Table 5–5: FLEXCURVE™ TABLE
RESET TIME
MS
RESET TIME
MS
0.00
0.68
0.54
0.56
0.58
0.60
0.45
0.48
0.50
0.52
0.25
0.30
0.35
0.40
0.05
0.10
0.15
0.20
0.62
0.64
0.66
0.92
0.93
0.94
0.95
0.86
0.88
0.90
0.91
0.78
0.80
0.82
0.84
0.70
0.72
0.74
0.76
0.96
0.97
0.98
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
1.8
1.9
2.0
2.1
2.6
2.7
2.8
OPERATE TIME
MS
1.03
OPERATE TIME
MS
2.9
OPERATE TIME
MS
4.9
OPERATE TIME
MS
10.5
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.05
1.1
1.2
1.3
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
11.0
11.5
12.0
12.5
13.0
13.5
14.0
14.5
3.8
3.9
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
5.8
5.9
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
9.5
10.0
17.0
17.5
18.0
18.5
15.0
15.5
16.0
16.5
19.0
19.5
20.0
NOTE
The relay using a given FlexCurve™ applies linear approximation for times between the user-entered points. Special care must be applied when setting the two points that are close to the multiple of pickup of
1; that is, 0.98 pu and 1.03 pu. It is recommended to set the two times to a similar value; otherwise, the linear approximation may result in undesired behavior for the operating quantity that is close to 1.00 pu.
5-76 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP b) FLEXCURVE™ CONFIGURATION WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP
The EnerVista UR Setup software allows for easy configuration and management of FlexCurves™ and their associated data points. Prospective FlexCurves™ can be configured from a selection of standard curves to provide the best approximate fit, then specific data points can be edited afterwards. Alternately, curve data can be imported from a specified file
(.csv format) by selecting the Import Data From EnerVista UR Setup setting.
Curves and data can be exported, viewed, and cleared by clicking the appropriate buttons. FlexCurves™ are customized by editing the operating time (ms) values at pre-defined per-unit current multiples. Note that the pickup multiples start at zero (implying the "reset time"), operating time below pickup, and operating time above pickup.
c) RECLOSER CURVE EDITING
Recloser curve selection is special in that recloser curves can be shaped into a composite curve with a minimum response time and a fixed time above a specified pickup multiples. There are 41 recloser curve types supported. These definite operating times are useful to coordinate operating times, typically at higher currents and where upstream and downstream protective devices have different operating characteristics. The recloser curve configuration window shown below appears when the Initialize From EnerVista UR Setup setting is set to “Recloser Curve” and the Initialize FlexCurve button is clicked.
Multiplier: Scales (multiplies) the curve operating times
Addr: Adds the time specified in this field (in ms) to each
curve
operating time value.
Minimum Response Time (MRT): If enabled, the MRT setting defines the shortest operating time even if the curve suggests a shorter time at higher current multiples. A composite operating characteristic is effectively defined. For current multiples lower than the intersection point, the curve dictates the operating time; otherwise, the MRT does. An information message appears when attempting to apply an MRT shorter than the minimum curve time.
NOTE
High Current Time:
Allows the user to set a pickup multiple from which point onwards the operating time is fixed. This is normally only required at higher current levels. The defines the high current pickup multiple; the
HCT
HCT Ratio
defines the operating time.
842721A1.CDR
Figure 5–20: RECLOSER CURVE INITIALIZATION
The multiplier and adder settings only affect the curve portion of the characteristic and not the MRT and HCT settings. The HCT settings override the MRT settings for multiples of pickup greater than the HCT ratio.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-77
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS d) EXAMPLE
A composite curve can be created from the GE_111 standard with MRT = 200 ms and HCT initially disabled and then enabled at eight (8) times pickup with an operating time of 30 ms. At approximately four (4) times pickup, the curve operating time is equal to the MRT and from then onwards the operating time remains at 200 ms (see below).
5
842719A1.CDR
Figure 5–21: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT DISABLED
With the HCT feature enabled, the operating time reduces to 30 ms for pickup multiples exceeding 8 times pickup.
NOTE
842720A1.CDR
Figure 5–22: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT ENABLED
Configuring a composite curve with an increase in operating time at increased pickup multiples is not allowed. If this is attempted, the EnerVista UR Setup software generates an error message and discards the proposed changes.
e) STANDARD RECLOSER CURVES
The standard recloser curves available for the L90 are displayed in the following graphs.
5-78 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
2
1
GE106
0.5
0.2
GE103
0.1
0.05
GE101
0.02
GE104
GE102
GE105
0.01
1 1.2
1.5
2 2.5
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15
CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
842723A1.CDR
20
Figure 5–23: RECLOSER CURVES GE101 TO GE106
50
20
10
5
GE142
GE138
2
1
0.5
GE113
GE120
0.2
0.1
0.05
1 1.2
1.5
2 2.5
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15
CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
842725A1.CDR
20
Figure 5–24: RECLOSER CURVES GE113, GE120, GE138 AND GE142
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-79
5
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
50
20
10
GE201
5
GE151
2
1
GE134
GE137
GE140
0.5
1 1.2
1.5
2 2.5
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15
CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
842730A1.CDR
20
Figure 5–25: RECLOSER CURVES GE134, GE137, GE140, GE151 AND GE201
50
GE152
20
GE141
10
GE131
5
GE200
2
1 1.2
1.5
2 2.5
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15
CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
842728A1.CDR
20
Figure 5–26: RECLOSER CURVES GE131, GE141, GE152, AND GE200
5 SETTINGS
5-80 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
50
20
10
5
GE164
2
1
0.5
GE162
GE133
0.2
0.1
GE165
0.05
GE161
0.02
GE163
0.01
1 1.2
1.5
2 2.5
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15
CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
842729A1.CDR
20
Figure 5–27: RECLOSER CURVES GE133, GE161, GE162, GE163, GE164 AND GE165
20
GE132
10
5
2
1
0.5
GE139
0.2
GE136
0.1
0.05
GE116
GE118
GE117
0.02
0.01
1 1.2
1.5
2 2.5
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15
CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
842726A1.CDR
20
Figure 5–28: RECLOSER CURVES GE116, GE117, GE118, GE132, GE136, AND GE139
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-81
5
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS
20
10
5
GE122
2
1
0.5
GE114
0.2
GE111
GE121
0.1
0.05
GE107
GE115
GE112
0.02
0.01
1 1.2
1.5
2 2.5
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15
CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
842724A1.CDR
20
Figure 5–29: RECLOSER CURVES GE107, GE111, GE112, GE114, GE115, GE121, AND GE122
50
20
10
5
2
1
0.5
GE119
GE202
GE135
0.2
1 1.2
1.5
2 2.5
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15
CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
842727A1.CDR
20
Figure 5–30: RECLOSER CURVES GE119, GE135, AND GE202
5-82 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5.4.8 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
SYSTEM SETUP
ÖØ
PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT
PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT
PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT 1
MESSAGE
REPORTING OVER
NETWORK
See below.
The L90 Line Current Differential System is provided with an optional phasor measurement unit feature.
This feature is specified as a software option at the time of ordering. The number of phasor measurement units available is also dependent on this option. Refer to the Ordering section of chapter 2 for additional details.
The
PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT
menu allows specifying basic parameters of the measurements process such as signal source, ID and station name, calibration data, triggering, recording, and content for transmission on each of the supported ports. The reporting ports menus allow specifying the content and rate of reporting on each of the supported ports.
Precise IRIG-B input is vital for correct synchrophasor measurement and reporting. A DC level shift IRIG-B receiver
must be used for the phasor measurement unit to output proper synchrophasor values.
NOTE
The PMU settings are organized in five logical groups as follows.
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
SYSTEM SETUP
ÖØ
PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT
ÖØ
PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1
PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT 1
PMU 1 BASIC
CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
PMU 1
CALIBRATION
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
PMU 1
COMMUNICATION
PMU 1
TRIGGERING
PMU 1
RECORDING
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-83
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5 b) BASIC CONFIGURATION
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
SYSTEM SETUP
ÖØ
PHASOR...
ÖØ
PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1
Ö
PMU 1 BASIC CONFIGURATION
PMU 1 BASIC
CONFIGURATION
PMU 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
PMU 1 IDCODE: 1
Range: 1 to 65534 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
PMU 1 STN:
GE-UR-PMU
PMU 1 SIGNAL SOURCE:
SRC 1
PMU 1 POST-FILTER:
Symm-3-point
Range: 16 alphanumeric characters
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
Range: available post-filters as per table below
This section contains basic phasor measurement unit (PMU) data, such as functions, source settings, and names.
• PMU 1 FUNCTION: This setting enables the PMU 1 functionality. Any associated functions (such as the recorder or triggering comparators) will not function if this setting is “Disabled”. Use the command frame to force the communication portion of the feature to start/stop transmission of data. When the transmission is turned off, the PMU is fully operational in terms of calculating and recording the phasors.
• PMU 1 IDCODE: This setting assigns a numerical ID to the PMU. It corresponds to the IDCODE field of the data, configuration, header, and command frames of the C37.118 protocol. The PMU uses this value when sending data, configuration, and header frames and responds to this value when receiving the command frame.
• PMU 1 STN: This setting assigns an alphanumeric ID to the PMU station. It corresponds to the STN field of the configuration frame of the C37.118 protocol. This value is a 16-character ASCII string as per the C37.118 standard.
• PMU 1 SIGNAL SOURCE: This setting specifies one of the available L90 signal sources for processing in the PMU.
Note that any combination of voltages and currents can be configured as a source. The current channels could be configured as sums of physically connected currents. This facilitates PMU applications in breaker-and-a-half, ring-bus, and similar arrangements. The PMU feature calculates voltage phasors for actual voltage (A, B, C, and auxiliary) and current (A, B, C, and ground) channels of the source, as well as symmetrical components (0, 1, and 2) of both voltages and currents. When configuring communication and recording features of the PMU, the user could select – from the above superset – the content to be sent out or recorded.
• PMU 1 POST-FILTER: This setting specifies amount of post-filtering applied to raw synchrophasor measurements.
The raw measurements are produced at the rate of nominal system frequency using one-cycle data windows. This setting is provided to deal with interfering frequencies and to balance speed and accuracy of synchrophasor measurements for different applications. The following filtering choices are available:
Table 5–6: POST-FILTER CHOICES
SELECTION
None
Symm-3-point
Symm-5-point
Symm-7-point
CHARACTERISTIC OF THE FILTER
No post-filtering
Symmetrical 3-point filter (1 historical point, 1 present point, 1 future point)
Symmetrical 5-point filter (2 historical points, 1 present point, 2 future points)
Symmetrical 7-point filter (3 historical points, 1 present point, 3 future points)
This setting applies to all channels of the PMU. It is effectively for recording and transmission on all ports configured to use data of this PMU.
5-84 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP c) CALIBRATION
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
SYSTEM SETUP
ÖØ
PHASOR...
ÖØ
PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1(4)
ÖØ
PMU 1 CALIBRATION
PMU 1
CALIBRATION
PMU 1 VA CALIBRATION
ANGLE: 0.00°
Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05
Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VB CALIBRATION
ANGLE: 0.00°
Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VC CALIBRATION
ANGLE: 0.00°
Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VX CALIBRATION
ANGLE: 0.00°
Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05
MESSAGE
PMU 1 IA CALIBRATION
ANGLE: 0.00°
Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05
MESSAGE
PMU 1 IB CALIBRATION
ANGLE: 0.00°
Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05
MESSAGE
PMU 1 IC CALIBRATION
ANGLE: 0.00°
Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05
MESSAGE
PMU 1 IG CALIBRATION
ANGLE: 0.00°
Range: –180 to 180° in steps of 30
MESSAGE
PMU 1 SEQ VOLT SHIFT
ANGLE: 0°
Range: –180 to 180° in steps of 30
MESSAGE
PMU 1 SEQ CURR SHIFT
ANGLE: 0°
This menu contains user angle calibration data for the phasor measurement unit (PMU). This data is combined with the factory adjustments to shift the phasors for better accuracy.
• PMU 1 VA... IG CALIBRATION ANGLE: These settings recognize applications with protection class voltage and current sources, and allow the user to calibrate each channel (four voltages and four currents) individually to offset errors introduced by VTs, CTs, and cabling. The setting values are effectively added to the measured angles. Therefore, enter a positive correction of the secondary signal lags the true signal; and negative value if the secondary signal leads the true signal.
• PMU 1 SEQ VOLT SHIFT ANGLE: This setting allows correcting positive- and negative-sequence voltages for vector groups of power transformers located between the PMU voltage point, and the reference node. This angle is effectively added to the positive-sequence voltage angle, and subtracted from the negative-sequence voltage angle. Note that:
1.
When this setting is not “0°”, the phase and sequence voltages will not agree. Unlike sequence voltages, the phase voltages cannot be corrected in a general case, and therefore are reported as measured.
2.
When receiving synchrophasor date at multiple locations, with possibly different reference nodes, it may be more beneficial to allow the central locations to perform the compensation of sequence voltages.
3.
This setting applies to PMU data only. The L90 calculates symmetrical voltages independently for protection and control purposes without applying this correction.
4.
When connected to line-to-line voltages, the PMU calculates symmetrical voltages with the reference to the AG voltage, and not to the physically connected AB voltage (see the Metering Conventions section in Chapter 6).
• PMU 1 SEQ CURR SHIFT ANGLE: This setting allows correcting positive and negative-sequence currents for vector groups of power transformers located between the PMU current point and the reference node. The setting has the same meaning for currents as the
PMU 1 SEQ VOLT SHIFT ANGLE
setting has for voltages. Normally, the two correcting angles are set identically, except rare applications when the voltage and current measuring points are located at different windings of a power transformer.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-85
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5 d) PMU COMMUNICATION
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
SYSTEM SETUP
ÖØ
PHASOR MEASUREMENT...
ÖØ
PMU 1 COMMUNICATION
ÖØ
PMU 1 COMM PORT
PMU 1
COMM PORT 1
PMU1 COMM PORT:
None
Range: None, Network, GOOSE
Range: available synchrophasor values
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT PHS-1
PMU 1 V1
Range: 16-character ASCII string
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT PHS-1
NM: GE-UR-PMU1-V1
↓
Range: available synchrophasor values
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT PHS-14
PMU 1 V1
Range: 16 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT PHS-14
NM: GE-UR-PMU1-V1
Range: available FlexAnalog values
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT A-CH-1:
Off
Range: 16 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT A-CH-1
NM: AnalogChannel1
↓
Range: available FlexAnalog values
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT A-CH-8:
Off
Range: 16 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT A-CH-8
NM: AnalogChannel8
Range: FlexLogic™ operands
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT D-CH-1:
Off
Range: 16 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT D-CH-1
NM: DigitalChannel1
Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT D-CH-1
NORMAL STATE: Off
↓
Range: FlexLogic™ operands
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT D-CH-16:
Off
Range: 16 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT D-CH-16
NM: DigitalChannel16
Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT D-CH-16
NORMAL STATE: Off
This section configures the phasor measurement unit (PMU) communication functions.
• PMU1 COMM PORT: This setting specifies the communication port for transmission of the PMU data.
5-86 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
• PMU1 PORT PHS-1 to PMU1 PORT PHS-14: These settings specify synchrophasors to be transmitted from the superset of all synchronized measurements. The available synchrophasor values are tabulated below.
V0
I1
I2
I0
Ic
Ig
V1
V2
Vc
Vx
Ia
Ib
SELECTION MEANING
Va
Vb
First voltage channel, either Va or Vab
Second voltage channel, either Vb or Vbc
Third voltage channel, either Vc or Vca
Fourth voltage channel
Phase A current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings
Phase B current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings
Phase C current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings
Fourth current channel, physical or summation as per the source settings
Positive-sequence voltage, referenced to Va
Negative-sequence voltage, referenced to Va
Zero-sequence voltage
Positive-sequence current, referenced to Ia
Negative-sequence current, referenced to Ia
Zero-sequence current
These settings allow for optimizing the frame size and maximizing transmission channel usage, depending on a given application. Select “Off” to suppress transmission of a given value.
• PMU1 PORT PHS-1 NM to PMU1 PORT PHS-14 NM: These settings allow for custom naming of the synchrophasor channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame. These names are typically based on station, bus, or breaker names.
• PMU1 PORT A-CH-1 to PMU1 PORT A-CH-8: These settings specify any analog data measured by the relay to be included as a user-selectable analog channel of the data frame. Up to eight analog channels can be configured to send any FlexAnalog value from the relay. Examples include active and reactive power, per phase or three-phase power, power factor, temperature via RTD inputs, and THD. The configured analog values are sampled concurrently with the synchrophasor instant and sent as 32-bit floating point values.
• PMU1 PORT A-CH-1 NM to PMU1 PORT A-CH-8 NM: These settings allow for custom naming of the analog channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame.
• PMU1 PORT D-CH-1 to PMU1 PORT D-CH-16: These settings specify any digital flag measured by the relay to be included as a user-selectable digital channel of the data frame. Up to sixteen digital channels can be configured to send any FlexLogic™ operand from the relay. The configured digital flags are sampled concurrently with the synchrophasor instant. The values are mapped into a two-byte integer number, with byte 1 LSB corresponding to the digital channel 1 and byte 2 MSB corresponding to digital channel 16.
• PMU1 PORT D-CH-1 NM to PMU1 PORT D-CH-16 NM: These settings allow for custom naming of the digital channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame.
• PMU1 PORT D-CH-1 NORMAL STATE to PMU1 PORT D-CH-16 NORMAL STATE: These settings allow for specifying a normal state for each digital channel. These states are transmitted in configuration frames to the data concentrator.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-87
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5 e) PMU TRIGGERING OVERVIEW
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
SYSTEM SETUP
ÖØ
PHASOR...
ÖØ
PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1
ÖØ
PMU 1 TRIGGERING
PMU 1
TRIGGERING
PMU 1 USER
TRIGGER
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
PMU 1 FREQUENCY
TRIGGER
PMU 1 VOLTAGE
TRIGGER
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
PMU 1 CURRENT
TRIGGER
PMU 1 POWER
TRIGGER
PMU 1 df/dt
TRIGGER
Each logical phasor measurement unit (PMU) contains five triggering mechanisms to facilitate triggering of the associated
PMU recorder, or cross-triggering of other PMUs of the system. They are:
• Overfrequency and underfrequency.
• Overvoltage and undervoltage.
• Overcurrent.
• Overpower.
• High rate of change of frequency.
The pre-configured triggers could be augmented with a user-specified condition built freely using programmable logic of the relay. The entire triggering logic is refreshed once every two power system cycles.
All five triggering functions and the user-definable condition are consolidated (ORed) and connected to the PMU recorder.
Each trigger can be programmed to log its operation into the event recorder, and to signal its operation via targets. The five triggers drive the STAT bits of the data frame to inform the destination of the synchrophasor data regarding the cause of trigger. The following convention is adopted to drive bits 11, 3, 2, 1, and 0 of the STAT word.
SETTING
PMU 1 USER TRIGGER:
Off = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER bit 0 bit 1 bit 3, bit 11 bit 2
Figure 5–31: STAT BITS LOGIC
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PMU 1 TRIGGERED
PMU 1 recorder
847004A1.CDR
f) USER TRIGGERING
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
SYSTEM SETUP
ÖØ
PHASOR MEASUREMENT...
ÖØ
PMU 1 TRIGGERING
ÖØ
PMU 1 USER TRIGGER
PMU 1 USER
TRIGGER
PMU1 USER TRIGGER:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operands
The user trigger allows customized triggering logic to be constructed from FlexLogic™. The entire triggering logic is refreshed once every two power system cycles.
5-88 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP g) FREQUENCY TRIGGERING
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
SYSTEM SETUP
ÖØ
PHASOR MEASUREMENT...
ÖØ
PMU 1 TRIGGERING
ÖØ
PMU 1 FREQUENCY TRIGGER
PMU 1 FREQUENCY
TRIGGER
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Range: 20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
LOW-FREQ: 49.00 Hz
Range: 20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
HIGH-FREQ: 61.00 Hz
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
PKP TIME: 0.10 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
DPO TIME: 1.00 s
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
PMU 1 FREQ TRIG BLK:
Off
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
TARGET: Self-Reset
Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
EVENTS: Disabled
The trigger responds to the frequency signal of the phasor measurement unit (PMU) source. The frequency is calculated from either phase voltages, auxiliary voltage, phase currents and ground current, in this hierarchy, depending on the source configuration as per L90 standards. This element requires the frequency is above the minimum measurable value. If the frequency is below this value, such as when the circuit is de-energized, the trigger will drop out.
• PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER LOW-FREQ: This setting specifies the low threshold for the abnormal frequency trigger. The comparator applies a 0.03 Hz hysteresis.
• PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER HIGH-FREQ: This setting specifies the high threshold for the abnormal frequency trigger. The comparator applies a 0.03 Hz hysteresis.
• PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER PKP TIME: This setting could be used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder.
• PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER DPO TIME: This setting could be used to extend the trigger after the situation returned to normal. This setting is of particular importance when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).
5
SETTINGS
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
FUNCTION:
Enabled = 1
PMU 1 FREQ TRIG BLK:
Off = 0
SETTING
PMU 1 SIGNAL
SOURCE:
FREQUENCY, f
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER
SETTING
PMU 1 USER TRIGGER:
Off = 0
SETTINGS
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER LOW-FREQ:
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER HIGH-FREQ:
RUN
0< f < LOW-FREQ
OR f > HIGH-FREQ
SETTINGS
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER PKP TIME:
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER DPO TIME: t
PKP t
DPO
Figure 5–32: FREQUENCY TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PMU 1 TRIGGERED to STAT bits of the data frame
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
847002A2.CDR
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-89
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5 h) VOLTAGE TRIGGERING
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
SYSTEM SETUP
ÖØ
PHASOR MEASUREMENT...
ÖØ
PMU 1 TRIGGERING
ÖØ
PMU 1 VOLTAGE TRIGGER
PMU 1 VOLTAGE
TRIGGER
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Range: 0.250 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
LOW-VOLT: 0.800 pu
Range: 0.750 to 1.750 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
HIGH-VOLT: 1.200 pu
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
PKP TIME: 0.10 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
DPO TIME: 1.00 s
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VOLT TRIG BLK:
Off
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
TARGET: Self-Reset
Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
EVENTS: Disabled
This element responds to abnormal voltage. Separate thresholds are provided for low and high voltage. In terms of signaling its operation, the element does not differentiate between the undervoltage and overvoltage events. The trigger responds to the phase voltage signal of the phasor measurement unit (PMU) source. All voltage channels (A, B, and C or
AB, BC, and CA) are processed independently and could trigger the recorder. A minimum voltage supervision of 0.1 pu is implemented to prevent pickup on a de-energized circuit, similarly to the undervoltage protection element.
• PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER LOW-VOLT: This setting specifies the low threshold for the abnormal voltage trigger, in perunit of the PMU source. 1 pu is a nominal voltage value defined as the nominal secondary voltage times VT ratio. The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis.
• PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER HIGH-VOLT: This setting specifies the high threshold for the abnormal voltage trigger, in perunit of the PMU source. 1 pu is a nominal voltage value defined as the nominal secondary voltage times VT ratio. The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis.
• PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PKP TIME: This setting could be used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder.
• PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER DPO TIME: This setting could be used to extend the trigger after the situation returned to normal. This setting is of particular importance when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).
5-90 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
SETTINGS
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
FUNCTION:
Enabled = 1
PMU 1 VOLT TRIG BLK:
Off = 0
SETTINGS
PMU 1 SIGNAL
SOURCE:
VT CONNECTION:
WYE
VA
DELTA
VAB
VB
VC
VBC
VCA
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER
SETTING
PMU 1 USER TRIGGER:
Off = 0
SETTINGS
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER LOW-VOLT:
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER HIGH-VOLT:
RUN
(0.1pu < V < LOW-VOLT) OR
(V > HIGH-VOLT)
(0.1pu < V < LOW-VOLT) OR
(V > HIGH-VOLT)
(0.1pu < V < LOW-VOLT) OR
(V > HIGH-VOLT)
SETTINGS
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PKP TIME:
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER DPO TIME: t
PKP t
DPO
Figure 5–33: VOLTAGE TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PMU 1 TRIGGERED to STAT bits of the data frame
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
847005A1.CDR
i) CURRENT TRIGGERING
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
SYSTEM SETUP
ÖØ
PHASOR MEASUREMENT...
ÖØ
PMU 1 TRIGGERING
ÖØ
PMU 1 CURRENT TRIGGER
PMU 1 CURRENT
TRIGGER
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Range: 0.100 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
PICKUP: 1.800 pu
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
PKP TIME: 0.10 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
DPO TIME: 1.00 s
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
PMU 1 CURR TRIG BLK:
Off
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
TARGET: Self-Reset
Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
EVENTS: Disabled
This element responds to elevated current. The trigger responds to the phase current signal of the phasor measurement unit (PMU) source. All current channel (A, B, and C) are processed independently and could trigger the recorder.
• PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PICKUP: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the overcurrent trigger, in per unit of the PMU source. A value of 1 pu is a nominal primary current. The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis.
• PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PKP TIME: This setting could be used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder.
• PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER DPO TIME: This setting could be used to extend the trigger after the situation returned to normal. This setting is of particular importance when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-91
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5
SETTINGS
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
FUNCTION:
Enabled = 1
PMU 1 CURR TRIG BLK:
Off = 0
SETTINGS
PMU 1 SIGNAL
SOURCE:
IA
IB
IC
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER
SETTING
PMU 1 USER TRIGGER:
Off = 0
SETTINGS
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PICKUP:
RUN
I > PICKUP
I > PICKUP
I > PICKUP
SETTINGS
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PKP TIME:
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER DPO TIME: t
PKP t
DPO
Figure 5–34: CURRENT TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PMU 1 TRIGGERED to STAT bits of the data frame
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
847000A1.CDR
j) POWER TRIGGERING
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
SYSTEM SETUP
ÖØ
PHASOR MEASUREMENT...
ÖØ
PMU 1 TRIGGERING
ÖØ
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
PMU 1 POWER
TRIGGER
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Range: 0.250 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
ACTIVE: 1.250 pu
Range: 0.250 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
REACTIVE: 1.250 pu
Range: 0.250 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
APPARENT: 1.250 pu
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
PKP TIME: 0.10 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
DPO TIME: 1.00 s
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
PMU 1 PWR TRIG BLK:
Off
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
TARGET: Self-Reset
Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
EVENTS: Disabled
This element responds to abnormal power. Separate thresholds are provided for active, reactive, and apparent powers. In terms of signaling its operation the element does not differentiate between the three types of power. The trigger responds to the single-phase and three-phase power signals of the phasor measurement unit (PMU) source.
• PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER ACTIVE: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the active power of the source. For single-phase power, 1 pu is a product of 1 pu voltage and 1 pu current, or the product of nominal secondary voltage, the VT ratio and the nominal primary current. For the three-phase power, 1 pu is three times that for a single-phase power. The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis.
• PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER REACTIVE: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the reactive power of the source. For single-phase power, 1 pu is a product of 1 pu voltage and 1 pu current, or the product of nominal secondary voltage, the VT ratio and the nominal primary current. For the three-phase power, 1 pu is three times that for a single-phase power. The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis.
5-92 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
• PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER APPARENT: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the apparent power of the source. For single-phase power, 1 pu is a product of 1 pu voltage and 1 pu current, or the product of nominal secondary voltage, the VT ratio and the nominal primary current. For the three-phase power, 1 pu is three times that for a single-phase power. The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis.
• PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PKP TIME: This setting could be used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder.
• PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER DPO TIME: This setting could be used to extend the trigger after the situation returned to normal. This setting is of particular importance when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).
SETTINGS
PMU 1 POWER
TRIGGER FUNCTION:
Enabled = 1
PMU 1 PWR TRIG BLK:
Off = 0
SETTINGS
PMU 1 SIGNAL SOURCE:
ACTIVE POWER, PA
ACTIVE POWER, PB
ACTIVE POWER, PC
3P ACTIVE POWER, P
REACTIVE POWER, QA
REACTIVE POWER, QB
REACTIVE POWER, QC
3P REACTIVE POWER, Q
APPARENT POWER, SA
APPARENT POWER, SB
APPARENT POWER, SC
3P APPARENT POWER, S
SETTINGS
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER ACTIVE:
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER REACTIVE:
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER APPARENT:
RUN
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER
SETTING
PMU 1 USER TRIGGER:
Off = 0 abs(P) > ACTIVE PICKUP abs(P) > ACTIVE PICKUP abs(P) > ACTIVE PICKUP abs(P) > 3*(ACTIVE PICKUP) abs(Q) > REACTIVE PICKUP abs(Q) > REACTIVE PICKUP abs(Q) > REACTIVE PICKUP abs(Q) > 3*(REACTIVE PICKUP)
S > APPARENT PICKUP
S > APPARENT PICKUP
S > APPARENT PICKUP
S > 3*(APPARENT PICKUP)
SETTINGS
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PKP TIME:
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER DPO TIME: t
PKP t
DPO
Figure 5–35: POWER TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PMU 1 TRIGGERED to STAT bits of the data frame
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
847003A1.CDR
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-93
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5 k) DF/DT TRIGGERING
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
SYSTEM SETUP
ÖØ
PHASOR MEASUREMENT...
ÖØ
PMU 1 TRIGGERING
ÖØ
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
PMU 1 df/dt
TRIGGER
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Range: 0.10 to 15.00 Hz/s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
RAISE: 0.25 Hz/s
Range: 0.10 to 15.00 Hz/s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
FALL: 0.25 Hz/s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
PKP TIME: 0.10 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
DPO TIME: 1.00 s
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
PMU 1 df/dt TRG BLK:
Off
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
TARGET: Self-Reset
Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
EVENTS: Disabled
This element responds to frequency rate of change. Separate thresholds are provided for rising and dropping frequency.
The trigger responds to the rate of change of frequency (df/dt) of the phasor measurement unit (PMU) source.
• PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER RAISE: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the rate of change of frequency in the raising direction (positive df/dt). The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis.
• PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER FALL: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the rate of change of frequency in the falling direction (negative df/dt). The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis.
• PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER PKP TIME: This setting could be used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder.
• PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER DPO TIME: This setting could be used to extend the trigger after the situation returned to normal. This setting is of particular importance when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).
SETTING
PMU 1 SIGNAL
SOURCE:
ROCOF, df/dt
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
SETTINGS
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
FUNCTION:
Enabled = 1
PMU 1 df/dt TRG BLK:
Off = 0
SETTING
PMU 1 USER TRIGGER:
Off = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PMU 1 TRIGGERED
SETTINGS
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER RAISE:
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER FALL:
RUN df/dt > RAISE
OR
–df/dt > FALL
SETTINGS
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER PKP TIME:
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER DPO TIME: t
PKP t
DPO to STAT bits of the data frame
Figure 5–36: RATE OF CHANGE OF FREQUENCY TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER
847000A1.CDR
5-94 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP l) PMU RECORDING
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
SYSTEM SETUP
ÖØ
PHASOR...
ÖØ
PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1
ÖØ
PMU 1 RECORDING
PMU 1
RECORDING
PMU 1 RECORDING
RATE: 10/sec
Range: 1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 50, or 60 times per second
Range: 2 to 128 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PMU 1 NO OF TIMED
RECORDS: 10
Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected
MESSAGE
PMU 1 TRIGGER MODE:
Automatic Overwrite
Range: 1 to 50% in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PMU 1 TIMED TRIGGER
POSITION: 10%
Range: available synchrophasor values
MESSAGE
PMU 1 REC PHS-1:
PMU 1 V1
Range: 16 character ASCII string
MESSAGE
PMU 1 REC PHS-1
NM: GE-UR-PMU-V1
↓
Range: available synchrophasor values
MESSAGE
PMU 1 REC PHS-14:
Off
Range: 16 character ASCII string
MESSAGE
PMU 1 REC PHS-14
NM: GE-UR-PMU-PHS-14
Range: available FlexAnalog values
MESSAGE
PMU 1 REC A-CH-1:
Off
Range: 16 character ASCII string
MESSAGE
PMU 1 REC A-CH-1
NM: AnalogChannel1
↓
Range: available FlexAnalog values
MESSAGE
PMU 1 REC A-CH-8:
Off
Range: 16 character ASCII string
MESSAGE
PMU 1 REC A-CH-8
NM: AnalogChannel8
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
PMU 1 REC D-CH-1:
Off
Range: 16 character ASCII string
MESSAGE
PMU 1 REC D-CH-1
NM: DigitalChannel1
↓
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
PMU 1 REC D-CH-16:
Off
Range: 16 character ASCII string
MESSAGE
PMU 1 REC D-CH-16
NM: DigitalChannel16
Each logical phasor measurement unit (PMU) is associated with a recorder. The triggering condition is programmed via the
PMU 1 TRIGGERING
menu. The recorder works with polar values using resolution as in the PMU actual values.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-95
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS
TRIGGER
REC
5
847709A2.CDR
Figure 5–37: PMU RECORDING
• PMU 1 RECORDING RATE: This setting specifies the recording rate for the record content. Not all recording rates are applicable to either 50 or 60 Hz systems (for example, recording at 25 phasors a second in a 60 Hz system). The relay supports decimation by integer number of phasors from the nominal system frequency. If the rate of 25 is selected for the 60 Hz system, the relay would decimate the rate of 60 phasors a second by round (60 / 25) = 2; that is, it would record at 60 / 2 = 30 phasors a second.
• PMU 1 NO OF TIMED RECORDS: This setting specifies how many timed records are available for a given logical
PMU. The length of each record equals available memory divided by the content size and number of records. The higher the number of records, the shorter each record. The relay supports a maximum of 128 records.
• PMU 1 TRIGGER MODE: This setting specifies what happens when the recorder uses its entire available memory storage. If set to “Automatic Overwrite”, the last record is erased to facilitate new recording, when triggered.
If set to “Protected”, the recorder stops creating new records when the entire memory is used up by the old un-cleared records. Refer to chapter 7 for more information on clearing PMU records.
The following set of figures illustrate the concept of memory management via the
PMU 1 TRIGGER MODE
setting.
Total memory for all logical PMUs
Memory available for the logical PMU
Record
1
Record
2
Record
3
Free memory
Free memory
Other logical PMUs
Record
1
Record
2
Record
3
Record
4
Free memory
Record
1
Record
2
Record
3
Record
4
Record
5
Other logical PMUs
Other logical PMUs
Record
6
Record
2
Record
3
Record
4
Record
5
Other logical PMUs
847705A1.CDR
Figure 5–38: “AUTOMATIC OVERWRITE” MODE
Total memory for all logical PMUs
Memory available for the logical PMU
Record
1
Record
2
Record
3
Free memory
Free memory
Other logical PMUs
Record
1
Record
2
Record
3
Record
4
Free memory
Other logical PMUs
Record
1
Record
2
Record
3
Record
4
Record
5
Other logical PMUs
No further recording after all allocated memory is used
Figure 5–39: “PROTECTED” MODE
847706A1.CDR
5-96 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
• PMU 1 TIMED TRIGGER POSITION: This setting specifies the amount of pre-trigger data in percent of the entire record.
• PMU1 PORT 1 PHS-1 to PMU1 PORT 1 PHS-14: These settings specify synchrophasors to be recorded from the superset of all synchronized measurements as indicated in the following table. These settings allow for optimizing the record size and content depending on a given application. Select “Off” to suppress recording of a given value.
V0
I1
I2
I0
Ic
Ig
V1
V2
Vc
Vx
Ia
Ib
VALUE DESCRIPTION
Va
Vb
First voltage channel, either Va or Vab
Second voltage channel, either Vb or Vbc
Third voltage channel, either Vc or Vca
Fourth voltage channel
Phase A current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings
Phase B current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings
Phase C current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings
Fourth current channel, physical or summation as per the source settings
Positive-sequence voltage, referenced to Va
Negative-sequence voltage, referenced to Va
Zero-sequence voltage
Positive-sequence current, referenced to Ia
Negative-sequence current, referenced to Ia
Zero-sequence current
• PMU 1 REC PHS-1 NM to PMU 1 REC PHS-14 NM: These settings allow for custom naming of the synchrophasor channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame. Typically these names would be based on station, bus, or breaker names.
• PMU 1 REC A-CH-1 to PMU 1 REC A-CH-8: These settings specify analog data measured by the relay to be included as a user-selectable analog channel of the record. Up to eight analog channels can be configured to record any Flex-
Analog value from the relay. Examples include active and reactive power, per phase or three-phase power, power factor, temperature via RTD inputs, and THD. The configured analogs are sampled concurrently with the synchrophasor instant.
• PMU 1 REC A-CH-1 NM to PMU 1 REC A-CH-8 NM: These settings allow for custom naming of the analog channels.
Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame.
• PMU 1 REC D-CH-1 to PMU 1 REC D-CH-16: These settings specify any digital flag measured by the relay to be included as a user-selectable digital channel in the record. Up to digital analog channels can be configured to record any FlexLogic™ operand from the relay. The configured digital flags are sampled concurrently with the synchrophasor instant.
• PMU 1 REC D-CH-1 NM to PMU 1 REC D-CH-16 NM: This setting allows custom naming of the digital channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-97
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5 m) NETWORK CONNECTION
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
SYSTEM SETUP
ÖØ
PHASOR...
ÖØ
PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1(4)
ÖØ
REPORTING OVER NETWORK
REPORTING OVER
NETWORK
NETWORK REPORTING
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Range: 1 to 65534 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NETWORK REPORTING
IDCODE: 1
MESSAGE
NETWORK REPORTING
RATE: 10 per sec
Range: 1, 2, 5, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 50, or 60 times per second
Range: Polar, Rectangular
MESSAGE
NETWORK REPORTING
STYLE: Polar
Range: Integer, Floating
MESSAGE
NETWORK REPORTING
FORMAT: Integer
Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
NETWORK PDC CONTROL:
Disabled
Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NETWORK TCP PORT:
4712
Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NETWORK UDP PORT 1:
4713
Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NETWORK UDP PORT 2:
4714
The Ethernet connection works simultaneously with other communication means working over the Ethernet and is configured as follows. Up to three clients can be simultaneously supported.
• NETWORK REPORTING IDCODE: This setting specifies an IDCODE for the entire port. Individual PMU streams transmitted over this port are identified via their own IDCODES as per the device settings. This IDCODE is to be used by the command frame to start or stop transmission, and request configuration or header frames.
• NETWORK REPORTING RATE: This setting specifies the reporting rate for the network (Ethernet) port. This value applies to all PMU streams of the device that are assigned to transmit over this port.
• NETWORK REPORTING STYLE: This setting selects between reporting synchrophasors in rectangular (real and imaginary) or in polar (magnitude and angle) coordinates. This setting complies with bit-0 of the format field of the
C37.118 configuration frame.
• NETWORK REPORTING FORMAT: This setting selects between reporting synchrophasors as 16-bit integer or 32-bit
IEEE floating point numbers. This setting complies with bit 1 of the format field of the C37.118 configuration frame.
Note that this setting applies to synchrophasors only – the user-selectable FlexAnalog channels are always transmitted as 32-bit floating point numbers.
• NETWORK PDC CONTROL: The synchrophasor standard allows for user-defined controls originating at the PDC, to be executed on the PMU. The control is accomplished via an extended command frame. The relay decodes the first word of the extended field, EXTFRAME, to drive 16 dedicated FlexLogic operands:
PDC NETWORK CNTRL 1
(from the least significant bit) to
PDC NETWORK CNTRL 16
(from the most significant bit). Other words, if any, in the EXTFRAME are ignored. The operands are asserted for 5 seconds following reception of the command frame. If the new command frame arrives within the 5 second period, the FlexLogic™ operands are updated, and the 5 second timer is re-started.
This setting enables or disables the control. When enabled, all 16 operands are active; when disabled all 16 operands remain reset.
• NETWORK TCP PORT: This setting selects the TCP port number that will be used for network reporting.
• NETWORK UDP PORT 1: This setting selects the first UDP port that will be used for network reporting.
• NETWORK UDP PORT 2: This setting selects the second UDP port that will be used for network reporting.
5-98 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.5 FLEXLOGIC™
5.5FLEXLOGIC™ 5.5.1 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC™
To provide maximum flexibility to the user, the arrangement of internal digital logic combines fixed and user-programmed parameters. Logic upon which individual features are designed is fixed, and all other logic, from digital input signals through elements or combinations of elements to digital outputs, is variable. The user has complete control of all variable logic through FlexLogic™. In general, the system receives analog and digital inputs which it uses to produce analog and digital outputs. The major sub-systems of a generic UR-series relay involved in this process are shown below.
Figure 5–40: UR ARCHITECTURE OVERVIEW
The states of all digital signals used in the L90 are represented by flags (or FlexLogic™ operands, which are described later in this section). A digital “1” is represented by a 'set' flag. Any external contact change-of-state can be used to block an element from operating, as an input to a control feature in a FlexLogic™ equation, or to operate a contact output. The state of the contact input can be displayed locally or viewed remotely via the communications facilities provided. If a simple scheme where a contact input is used to block an element is desired, this selection is made when programming the element. This capability also applies to the other features that set flags: elements, virtual inputs, remote inputs, schemes, and human operators.
If more complex logic than presented above is required, it is implemented via FlexLogic™. For example, if it is desired to have the closed state of contact input H7a and the operated state of the phase undervoltage element block the operation of the phase time overcurrent element, the two control input states are programmed in a FlexLogic™ equation. This equation
ANDs the two control inputs to produce a virtual output which is then selected when programming the phase time overcurrent to be used as a blocking input. Virtual outputs can only be created by FlexLogic™ equations.
Traditionally, protective relay logic has been relatively limited. Any unusual applications involving interlocks, blocking, or supervisory functions had to be hard-wired using contact inputs and outputs. FlexLogic™ minimizes the requirement for auxiliary components and wiring while making more complex schemes possible.
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-99
5
5.5 FLEXLOGIC™ 5 SETTINGS
The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs is field programmable through the use of logic equations that are sequentially processed. The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to hardware is available internally and on the communication ports for other relays to use (distributed FlexLogic™).
FlexLogic™ allows users to customize the relay through a series of equations that consist of operators and operands. The operands are the states of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs. The operators are logic gates, timers and latches (with set and reset inputs). A system of sequential operations allows any combination of specified operands to be assigned as inputs to specified operators to create an output. The final output of an equation is a numbered register called a virtual out-
put. Virtual outputs can be used as an input operand in any equation, including the equation that generates the output, as a seal-in or other type of feedback.
A FlexLogic™ equation consists of parameters that are either operands or operators. Operands have a logic state of 1 or 0.
Operators provide a defined function, such as an AND gate or a Timer. Each equation defines the combinations of parameters to be used to set a Virtual Output flag. Evaluation of an equation results in either a 1 (=ON, i.e. flag set) or 0 (=OFF, i.e.
flag not set). Each equation is evaluated at least 4 times every power system cycle.
Some types of operands are present in the relay in multiple instances; e.g. contact and remote inputs. These types of operands are grouped together (for presentation purposes only) on the faceplate display. The characteristics of the different types of operands are listed in the table below.
5
Table 5–7: L90 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERAND TYPES
OPERAND TYPE STATE EXAMPLE FORMAT
Contact Input On Cont Ip On
Contact Output
(type Form-A contact only)
Direct Input
Element
(Analog)
Off
Current On
Voltage On
Voltage Off
On
Pickup
Cont Ip Off
Cont Op 1 Ion
Cont Op 1 VOn
Cont Op 1 VOff
DIRECT INPUT 1 On
PHASE TOC1 PKP
Element
(Digital)
Element
(Digital Counter)
Fixed
Remote Input
Virtual Input
Virtual Output
Dropout
Operate
Block
Pickup
Dropout
Operate
Higher than
Equal to
Lower than
On
Off
On
On
On
PHASE TOC1 DPO
PHASE TOC1 OP
PHASE TOC1 BLK
Dig Element 1 PKP
Dig Element 1 DPO
Dig Element 1 OP
Counter 1 HI
Counter 1 EQL
Counter 1 LO
On
Off
REMOTE INPUT 1 On
Virt Ip 1 On
Virt Op 1 On
CHARACTERISTICS
[INPUT IS ‘1’ (= ON) IF...]
Voltage is presently applied to the input (external contact closed).
Voltage is presently not applied to the input (external contact open).
Current is flowing through the contact.
Voltage exists across the contact.
Voltage does not exists across the contact.
The direct input is presently in the ON state.
The tested parameter is presently above the pickup setting of an element which responds to rising values or below the pickup setting of an element which responds to falling values.
This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP operand.
The tested parameter has been above/below the pickup setting of the element for the programmed delay time, or has been at logic 1 and is now at logic 0 but the reset timer has not finished timing.
The output of the comparator is set to the block function.
The input operand is at logic 1.
This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP operand.
The input operand has been at logic 1 for the programmed pickup delay time, or has been at logic 1 for this period and is now at logic 0 but the reset timer has not finished timing.
The number of pulses counted is above the set number.
The number of pulses counted is equal to the set number.
The number of pulses counted is below the set number.
Logic 1
Logic 0
The remote input is presently in the ON state.
The virtual input is presently in the ON state.
The virtual output is presently in the set state (i.e. evaluation of the equation which produces this virtual output results in a "1").
5-100 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.5 FLEXLOGIC™
The operands available for this relay are listed alphabetically by types in the following table.
Table 5–8: L90 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS (Sheet 1 of 9)
OPERAND TYPE
CONTROL
PUSHBUTTONS
OPERAND SYNTAX
CONTROL PUSHBTN 1 ON
CONTROL PUSHBTN 2 ON
CONTROL PUSHBTN 3 ON
CONTROL PUSHBTN 4 ON
CONTROL PUSHBTN 5 ON
CONTROL PUSHBTN 6 ON
CONTROL PUSHBTN 7 ON
50DD SV
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
Control pushbutton 1 is being pressed
Control pushbutton 2 is being pressed
Control pushbutton 3 is being pressed
Control pushbutton 4 is being pressed
Control pushbutton 5 is being pressed
Control pushbutton 6 is being pressed
Control pushbutton 7 is being pressed
Disturbance detector has operated ELEMENT:
50DD supervision
ELEMENT:
87L current differential
ELEMENT:
87L differential trip
ELEMENT:
Autoreclose
(1P/3P)
ELEMENT:
Auxiliary overvoltage
87L DIFF OP
87L DIFF OP A
87L DIFF OP B
87L DIFF OP C
87L DIFF RECVD DTT A
87L DIFF RECVD DTT B
87L DIFF RECVD DTT C
87L DIFF KEY DTT
87L DIFF PFLL FAIL
87L DIFF CH ASYM DET
87L DIFF CH1 FAIL
87L DIFF CH2 FAIL
87L DIFF CH1 LOSTPKT
87L DIFF CH2 LOSTPKT
87L DIFF CH1 CRCFAIL
87L DIFF CH2 CRCFAIL
87L DIFF CH1 ID FAIL
87L DIFF CH2 ID FAIL
87L DIFF GPS FAIL
87L DIFF 1 MAX ASYM
87L DIFF 2 MAX ASYM
87L DIFF 1 TIME CHNG
87L DIFF 2 TIME CHNG
87L DIFF GPS 1 FAIL
87L DIFF GPS 2 FAIL
87L DIFF BLOCKED
87L TRIP OP
87L TRIP OP A
87L TRIP OP B
87L TRIP OP C
87L TRIP 1P OP
87L TRIP 3P OP
AR ENABLED
AR DISABLED
AR RIP
AR 1-P RIP
AR 3-P/1 RIP
AR 3-P/2 RIP
AR 3-P/3 RIP
AR 3-P/4 RIP
AR LO
AR BKR1 BLK
AR BKR2 BLK
AR CLOSE BKR1
AR CLOSE BKR2
AR FORCE 3-P TRIP
AR SHOT CNT > 0
AR SHOT CNT = 1
AR SHOT CNT = 2
AR SHOT CNT = 3
AR SHOT CNT = 4
AR ZONE 1 EXTENT
AR INCOMPLETE SEQ
AR RESET
AUX OV1 PKP
AUX OV1 DPO
AUX OV1 OP
AUX OV2 to AUX OV3
At least one phase of current differential is operated
Phase A of current differential has operated
Phase B of current differential has operated
Phase C of current differential has operated
Direct transfer trip phase A has been received
Direct transfer trip phase B has been received
Direct transfer trip phase C has been received
Direct transfer trip is keyed
Phase and frequency lock loop (PFLL) has failed
Channel asymmetry greater than 1.5 ms detected
Channel 1 has failed
Channel 2 has failed
Exceeded maximum lost packet threshold on channel 1
Exceeded maximum lost packet threshold on channel 2
Exceeded maximum CRC error threshold on channel 1
Exceeded maximum CRC error threshold on channel 2
The ID check for a peer L90 on channel 1 has failed
The ID check for a peer L90 on channel 2 has failed
The GPS signal failed or is not configured properly at any terminal
Asymmetry on channel 1 exceeded preset value
Asymmetry on channel 2 exceeded preset value
Change in round trip delay on channel 1 exceeded preset value
Change in round trip delay on channel 2 exceeded preset value
GPS failed at remote terminal 1 (channel 1)
GPS failed at remote terminal 1 (channel 2)
The 87L function is blocked due to communication problems
At least one phase of the trip output element has operated
Phase A of the trip output element has operated
Phase B of the trip output element has operated
Phase C of the trip output element has operated
Single-pole trip is initiated
Three-pole trip is initiated
Autoreclosure is enabled and ready to perform
Autoreclosure is disabled
Autoreclosure is in “reclose-in-progress” state
A single-pole reclosure is in progress
A three-pole reclosure is in progress, via dead time 1
A three-pole reclosure is in progress, via dead time 2
A three-pole reclosure is in progress, via dead time 3
A three-pole reclosure is in progress, via dead time 4
Autoreclosure is in lockout state
Reclosure of breaker 1 is blocked
Reclosure of breaker 2 is blocked
Reclose breaker 1 signal
Reclose breaker 2 signal
Force any trip to a three-phase trip
The first ‘CLOSE BKR X’ signal has been issued
Shot count is equal to 1
Shot count is equal to 2
Shot count is equal to 3
Shot count is equal to 4
The zone 1 distance function must be set to the extended overreach value
The incomplete sequence timer timed out
Autoreclose has been reset either manually or by the reset timer
Auxiliary overvoltage element has picked up
Auxiliary overvoltage element has dropped out
Auxiliary overvoltage element has operated
Same set of operands as shown for AUX OV1
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-101
5.5 FLEXLOGIC™ 5 SETTINGS
5
OPERAND SYNTAX
AUX UV1 PKP
AUX UV1 DPO
AUX UV1 OP
AUX UV2 to AUX UV3
BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP A
BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP B
BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP C
BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP
BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP A
BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP B
BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP C
BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP
BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO A
BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO B
BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO C
BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO
BKR 2 FLSHOVR...
BKR ARC 1 OP
BKR ARC 2 OP
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPA
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPB
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPC
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIP
BKR FAIL 1 T1 OP
BKR FAIL 1 T2 OP
BKR FAIL 1 T3 OP
BKR FAIL 1 TRIP OP
BKR FAIL 2...
BREAKER 1 OFF CMD
BREAKER 1 ON CMD
BREAKER 1
ΦA BAD ST
BREAKER 1
ΦA INTERM
BREAKER 1
ΦA CLSD
BREAKER 1
ΦA OPEN
BREAKER 1
ΦB BAD ST
BREAKER 1
ΦA INTERM
BREAKER 1
ΦB CLSD
BREAKER 1
ΦB OPEN
BREAKER 1
ΦC BAD ST
BREAKER 1
ΦA INTERM
BREAKER 1
ΦC CLSD
BREAKER 1
ΦC OPEN
BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
BREAKER 1 OPEN
BREAKER 1 DISCREP
BREAKER 1 TROUBLE
BREAKER 1 MNL CLS
BREAKER 1 TRIP A
BREAKER 1 TRIP B
BREAKER 1 TRIP C
BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN
BREAKER 1 ONE P OPEN
BREAKER 1 OOS
BREAKER 2...
CONT MONITOR PKP
CONT MONITOR OP
CT FAIL PKP
CT FAIL OP
Counter 1 HI
Counter 1 EQL
Counter 1 LO
Counter 2 to Counter 8
Table 5–8: L90 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS (Sheet 2 of 9)
OPERAND TYPE
ELEMENT:
Auxiliary undervoltage
ELEMENT
Breaker flashover
ELEMENT:
Breaker arcing
ELEMENT
Breaker failure
ELEMENT:
Breaker control
ELEMENT:
Continuous monitor
ELEMENT:
CT fail
ELEMENT:
Digital counters
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
Auxiliary undervoltage element has picked up
Auxiliary undervoltage element has dropped out
Auxiliary undervoltage element has operated
Same set of operands as shown for AUX UV1
Breaker 1 flashover element phase A has picked up
Breaker 1 flashover element phase B has picked up
Breaker 1 flashover element phase C has picked up
Breaker 1 flashover element has picked up
Breaker 1 flashover element phase A has operated
Breaker 1 flashover element phase B has operated
Breaker 1 flashover element phase C has operated
Breaker 1 flashover element has operated
Breaker 1 flashover element phase A has dropped out
Breaker 1 flashover element phase B has dropped out
Breaker 1 flashover element phase C has dropped out
Breaker 1 flashover element has dropped out
Same set of operands as shown for BKR 1 FLSHOVR
Breaker arcing current 1 has operated
Breaker arcing current 2 has operated
Breaker failure 1 re-trip phase A (only for 1-pole schemes)
Breaker failure 1 re-trip phase B (only for 1-pole schemes)
Breaker failure 1 re-trip phase C (only for 1-pole schemes)
Breaker failure 1 re-trip 3-phase
Breaker failure 1 timer 1 is operated
Breaker failure 1 timer 2 is operated
Breaker failure 1 timer 3 is operated
Breaker failure 1 trip is operated
Same set of operands as shown for BKR FAIL 1
Breaker 1 open command initiated
Breaker 1 close command initiated
Breaker 1 phase A bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and
52/b contacts)
Breaker 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from one position to another)
Breaker 1 phase A is closed
Breaker 1 phase A is open
Breaker 1 phase B bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and
52/b contacts)
Breaker 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from one position to another)
Breaker 1 phase B is closed
Breaker 1 phase B is open
Breaker 1 phase C bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and
52/b contacts)
Breaker 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from one position to another)
Breaker 1 phase C is closed
Breaker 1 phase C is open
Breaker 1 bad status is detected on any pole
Breaker 1 is closed
Breaker 1 is open
Breaker 1 has discrepancy
Breaker 1 trouble alarm
Breaker 1 manual close
Breaker 1 trip phase A command
Breaker 1 trip phase B command
Breaker 1 trip phase C command
At least one pole of breaker 1 is open
Only one pole of breaker 1 is open
Breaker 1 is out of service
Same set of operands as shown for BREAKER 1
Continuous monitor has picked up
Continuous monitor has operated
CT fail has picked up
CT fail has dropped out
Digital counter 1 output is ‘more than’ comparison value
Digital counter 1 output is ‘equal to’ comparison value
Digital counter 1 output is ‘less than’ comparison value
Same set of operands as shown for Counter 1
5-102 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.5 FLEXLOGIC™
Table 5–8: L90 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS (Sheet 3 of 9)
OPERAND TYPE
ELEMENT:
Digital elements
ELEMENT:
FlexElements™
ELEMENT:
Ground distance
ELEMENT:
Ground instantaneous overcurrent
ELEMENT:
Ground time overcurrent
ELEMENT
Non-volatile latches
ELEMENT:
Line pickup
ELEMENT:
Load encroachment
ELEMENT:
Negative-sequence directional overcurrent
ELEMENT:
Negative-sequence instantaneous overcurrent
ELEMENT:
Negative-sequence time overcurrent
ELEMENT:
Neutral instantaneous overcurrent
OPERAND SYNTAX OPERAND DESCRIPTION
Dig Element 1 PKP
Dig Element 1 OP
Dig Element 1 DPO
Digital Element 1 is picked up
Digital Element 1 is operated
Digital Element 1 is dropped out
Dig Element 2 to Dig Element 48 Same set of operands as shown for Dig Element 1
FxE 1 PKP
FxE 1 OP
FxE 1 DPO
FxE 2 to FxE 8
GND DIST Z1 PKP
GND DIST Z1 OP
GND DIST Z1 OP A
GND DIST Z1 OP B
GND DIST Z1 OP C
GND DIST Z1 PKP A
GND DIST Z1 PKP B
GND DIST Z1 PKP C
GND DIST Z1 SUPN IN
GND DIST Z1 DPO A
GND DIST Z1 DPO B
GND DIST Z1 DPO C
GND DIST Z2 DIR SUPN
GND DIST Z2 to Z3
FlexElement™ 1 has picked up
FlexElement™ 1 has operated
FlexElement™ 1 has dropped out
Same set of operands as shown for FxE 1
Ground distance zone 1 has picked up
Ground distance zone 1 has operated
Ground distance zone 1 phase A has operated
Ground distance zone 1 phase B has operated
Ground distance zone 1 phase C has operated
Ground distance zone 1 phase A has picked up
Ground distance zone 1 phase B has picked up
Ground distance zone 1 phase C has picked up
Ground distance zone 1 neutral is supervising
Ground distance zone 1 phase A has dropped out
Ground distance zone 1 phase B has dropped out
Ground distance zone 1 phase C has dropped out
Ground distance zone 2 directional is supervising
Same set of operands as shown for GND DIST Z1
GROUND IOC1 PKP
GROUND IOC1 OP
GROUND IOC1 DPO
GROUND IOC2
GROUND TOC1 PKP
GROUND TOC1 OP
GROUND TOC1 DPO
GROUND TOC2
LATCH 1 ON
LATCH 1 OFF
LATCH 2 to LATCH 16
LINE PICKUP OP
LINE PICKUP PKP
LINE PICKUP DPO
LINE PICKUP I<A
LINE PICKUP I<B
LINE PICKUP I<C
LINE PICKUP UV PKP
LINE PICKUP LEO PKP
LINE PICKUP RCL TRIP
LOAD ENCHR PKP
LOAD ENCHR OP
LOAD ENCHR DPO
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV
NEG SEQ DIR OC2 FWD
NEG SEQ DIR OC2 REV
NEG SEQ IOC1 PKP
NEG SEQ IOC1 OP
NEG SEQ IOC1 DPO
NEG SEQ IOC2
NEG SEQ TOC1 PKP
NEG SEQ TOC1 OP
NEG SEQ TOC1 DPO
NEG SEQ TOC2
NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP
NEUTRAL IOC1 OP
NEUTRAL IOC1 DPO
NEUTRAL IOC2
Ground instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
Ground instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
Ground instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
Same set of operands as shown for GROUND IOC 1
Ground time overcurrent 1 has picked up
Ground time overcurrent 1 has operated
Ground time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
Same set of operands as shown for GROUND TOC1
Non-volatile latch 1 is ON (Logic = 1)
Non-volatile latch 1 is OFF (Logic = 0)
Same set of operands as shown for LATCH 1
Line pickup has operated
Line pickup has picked up
Line pickup has dropped out
Line pickup detected phase A current below 5% of nominal
Line pickup detected phase B current below 5% of nominal
Line pickup detected phase C current below 5% of nominal
Line pickup undervoltage has picked up
Line pickup line end open has picked up
Line pickup operated from overreaching zone 2 when reclosing the line
(zone 1 extension functionality)
Load encroachment has picked up
Load encroachment has operated
Load encroachment has dropped out
Negative-sequence directional overcurrent 1 forward has operated
Negative-sequence directional overcurrent 1 reverse has operated
Negative-sequence directional overcurrent 2 forward has operated
Negative-sequence directional overcurrent 2 reverse has operated
Negative-sequence instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
Negative-sequence instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
Negative-sequence instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
Same set of operands as shown for NEG SEQ IOC1
Negative-sequence time overcurrent 1 has picked up
Negative-sequence time overcurrent 1 has operated
Negative-sequence time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
Same set of operands as shown for NEG SEQ TOC1
Neutral instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
Neutral instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
Neutral instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL IOC1
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-103
5.5 FLEXLOGIC™ 5 SETTINGS
5
Table 5–8: L90 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS (Sheet 4 of 9)
OPERAND TYPE
ELEMENT:
Neutral overvoltage
ELEMENT:
Neutral time overcurrent
ELEMENT:
Neutral directional overcurrent
ELEMENT:
Open pole detector
ELEMENT:
Synchrophasor phasor data concentrator
ELEMENT:
Phase directional overcurrent
ELEMENT:
Phase distance
ELEMENT:
Phase instantaneous overcurrent
OPERAND SYNTAX
NEUTRAL OV1 PKP
NEUTRAL OV1 DPO
NEUTRAL OV1 OP
NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP
NEUTRAL TOC1 OP
NEUTRAL TOC1 DPO
NEUTRAL TOC2
NTRL DIR OC1 FWD
NTRL DIR OC1 REV
NTRL DIR OC2
OPEN POLE OP
ФA
OPEN POLE OP
ФB
OPEN POLE OP
ФC
OPEN POLE BKR
ФA OP
OPEN POLE BKR
ФB OP
OPEN POLE BKR
ФC OP
OPEN POLE BLK N
OPEN POLE BLK AB
OPEN POLE BLK BC
OPEN POLE BLK CA
OPEN POLE REM OP
ФA
OPEN POLE REM OP
ФB
OPEN POLE REM OP
ФC
OPEN POLE OP
OPEN POLE I<
ФA
OPEN POLE I<
ФB
OPEN POLE I<
ФC
PDC NETWORK CNTRL 1
PDC NETWORK CNTRL 2
↓
PDC NETWORK CNTRL 16
PH DIR1 BLK A
PH DIR1 BLK B
PH DIR1 BLK C
PH DIR1 BLK
PH DIR2
PH DIST Z1 PKP
PH DIST Z1 OP
PH DIST Z1 OP AB
PH DIST Z1 OP BC
PH DIST Z1 OP CA
PH DIST Z1 PKP AB
PH DIST Z1 PKP BC
PH DIST Z1 PKP CA
PH DIST Z1 SUPN IAB
PH DIST Z1 SUPN IBC
PH DIST Z1 SUPN ICA
PH DIST Z1 DPO AB
PH DIST Z1 DPO BC
PH DIST Z1 DPO CA
PH DIST Z2 to Z3
PHASE IOC1 PKP
PHASE IOC1 OP
PHASE IOC1 DPO
PHASE IOC1 PKP A
PHASE IOC1 PKP B
PHASE IOC1 PKP C
PHASE IOC1 OP A
PHASE IOC1 OP B
PHASE IOC1 OP C
PHASE IOC1 DPO A
PHASE IOC1 DPO B
PHASE IOC1 DPO C
PHASE IOC2
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
Neutral overvoltage element 1 has picked up
Neutral overvoltage element 1 has dropped out
Neutral overvoltage element 1 has operated
Neutral time overcurrent 1 has picked up
Neutral time overcurrent 1 has operated
Neutral time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL TOC1
Neutral directional overcurrent 1 forward has operated
Neutral directional overcurrent 1 reverse has operated
Same set of operands as shown for NTRL DIR OC1
Open pole condition is detected in phase A
Open pole condition is detected in phase B
Open pole condition is detected in phase C
Based on the breaker(s) auxiliary contacts, an open pole condition is detected on phase A
Based on the breaker(s) auxiliary contacts, an open pole condition is detected on phase B
Based on the breaker(s) auxiliary contacts, an open pole condition is detected on phase C
Blocking signal for neutral, ground, and negative-sequence overcurrent element is established
Blocking signal for the AB phase distance elements is established
Blocking signal for the BC phase distance elements is established
Blocking signal for the CA phase distance elements is established
Remote open pole condition detected in phase A
Remote open pole condition detected in phase B
Remote open pole condition detected in phase C
Open pole detector is operated
Open pole undercurrent condition is detected in phase A
Open pole undercurrent condition is detected in phase B
Open pole undercurrent condition is detected in phase C
Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 1 as received via the network
Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 2 as received via the network
↓
Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 16 as received via the network
Phase A directional 1 block
Phase B directional 1 block
Phase C directional 1 block
Phase directional 1 block
Same set of operands as shown for PH DIR1
Phase distance zone 1 has picked up
Phase distance zone 1 has operated
Phase distance zone 1 phase AB has operated
Phase distance zone 1 phase BC has operated
Phase distance zone 1 phase CA has operated
Phase distance zone 1 phase AB has picked up
Phase distance zone 1 phase BC has picked up
Phase distance zone 1 phase CA has picked up
Phase distance zone 1 phase AB IOC is supervising
Phase distance zone 1 phase BC IOC is supervising
Phase distance zone 1 phase CA IOC is supervising
Phase distance zone 1 phase AB has dropped out
Phase distance zone 1 phase BC has dropped out
Phase distance zone 1 phase CA has dropped out
Same set of operands as shown for PH DIST Z1
At least one phase of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
At least one phase of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
All phases of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 have dropped out
Phase A of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
Phase B of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
Phase C of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
Phase A of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
Phase B of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
Phase C of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
Phase A of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
Phase B of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
Phase C of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
Same set of operands as shown for PHASE IOC1
5-104 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.5 FLEXLOGIC™
Table 5–8: L90 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS (Sheet 5 of 9)
OPERAND TYPE
ELEMENT:
Phase overvoltage
ELEMENT
Phase select
ELEMENT:
Phase time overcurrent
ELEMENT:
Phase undervoltage
ELEMENT:
Synchrophasor phasor measurement unit
(PMU)
OPERAND SYNTAX
PHASE OV1 PKP
PHASE OV1 OP
PHASE OV1 DPO
PHASE OV1 PKP A
PHASE OV1 PKP B
PHASE OV1 PKP C
PHASE OV1 OP A
PHASE OV1 OP B
PHASE OV1 OP C
PHASE OV1 DPO A
PHASE OV1 DPO B
PHASE OV1 DPO C
PHASE SELECT AG
PHASE SELECT BG
PHASE SELECT CG
PHASE SELECT SLG
PHASE SELECT AB
PHASE SELECT BC
PHASE SELECT CA
PHASE SELECT ABG
PHASE SELECT BCG
PHASE SELECT CAG
PHASE SELECT 3P
PHASE SELECT MULTI-P
PHASE SELECT VOID
PHASE TOC1 PKP
PHASE TOC1 OP
PHASE TOC1 DPO
PHASE TOC1 PKP A
PHASE TOC1 PKP B
PHASE TOC1 PKP C
PHASE TOC1 OP A
PHASE TOC1 OP B
PHASE TOC1 OP C
PHASE TOC1 DPO A
PHASE TOC1 DPO B
PHASE TOC1 DPO C
PHASE TOC2
PHASE UV1 PKP
PHASE UV1 OP
PHASE UV1 DPO
PHASE UV1 PKP A
PHASE UV1 PKP B
PHASE UV1 PKP C
PHASE UV1 OP A
PHASE UV1 OP B
PHASE UV1 OP C
PHASE UV1 DPO A
PHASE UV1 DPO B
PHASE UV1 DPO C
PHASE UV2
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER
ELEMENT:
Synchrophasor oneshot
ELEMENT:
POTT
(Permissive overreach transfer trip)
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
PMU 1 TRIGGERED
PMU ONE-SHOT EXPIRED
PMU ONE-SHOT OP
PMU ONE-SHOT PENDING
POTT OP
POTT TX
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
At least one phase of overvoltage 1 has picked up
At least one phase of overvoltage 1 has operated
All phases of overvoltage 1 have dropped out
Phase A of overvoltage 1 has picked up
Phase B of overvoltage 1 has picked up
Phase C of overvoltage 1 has picked up
Phase A of overvoltage 1 has operated
Phase B of overvoltage 1 has operated
Phase C of overvoltage 1 has operated
Phase A of overvoltage 1 has dropped out
Phase B of overvoltage 1 has dropped out
Phase C of overvoltage 1 has dropped out
Phase A to ground fault is detected.
Phase B to ground fault is detected.
Phase C to ground fault is detected.
Single line to ground fault is detected.
Phase A to B fault is detected.
Phase B to C fault is detected.
Phase C to A fault is detected.
Phase A to B to ground fault is detected.
Phase B to C to ground fault is detected.
Phase C to A to ground fault is detected.
Three-phase symmetrical fault is detected.
Multi-phase fault is detected
Fault type cannot be detected
At least one phase of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up
At least one phase of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated
All phases of phase time overcurrent 1 have dropped out
Phase A of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up
Phase B of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up
Phase C of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up
Phase A of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated
Phase B of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated
Phase C of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated
Phase A of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
Phase B of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
Phase C of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
Same set of operands as shown for PHASE TOC1
At least one phase of phase undervoltage 1 has picked up
At least one phase of phase undervoltage 1 has operated
All phases of phase undervoltage 1 have dropped out
Phase A of phase undervoltage 1 has picked up
Phase B of phase undervoltage 1 has picked up
Phase C of phase undervoltage 1 has picked up
Phase A of phase undervoltage 1 has operated
Phase B of phase undervoltage 1 has operated
Phase C of phase undervoltage 1 has operated
Phase A of phase undervoltage 1 has dropped out
Phase B of phase undervoltage 1 has dropped out
Phase C of phase undervoltage 1 has dropped out
Same set of operands as shown for PHASE UV1
Overcurrent trigger of phasor measurement unit 1 has operated
Abnormal frequency trigger of phasor measurement unit 1 has operated
Overpower trigger of phasor measurement unit 1 has operated
Rate of change of frequency trigger of phasor measurement unit 1 has operated
Abnormal voltage trigger of phasor measurement unit 1 has operated
Phasor measurement unit 1 triggered; no events or targets are generated by this operand
Indicates the one-shot operation has been executed, and the present time is at least 30 seconds past the scheduled one-shot time
Indicates the one-shot operation and remains asserted for 30 seconds afterwards
Indicates the one-shot operation is pending; that is, the present time is before the scheduled one-shot time
Permissive over-reaching transfer trip has operated
Permissive signal sent
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-105
5.5 FLEXLOGIC™ 5 SETTINGS
5
Table 5–8: L90 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS (Sheet 6 of 9)
OPERAND TYPE
ELEMENT:
Power swing detect
OPERAND SYNTAX
POWER SWING OUTER
POWER SWING MIDDLE
POWER SWING INNER
POWER SWING BLOCK
POWER SWING TMR1 PKP
POWER SWING TMR2 PKP
POWER SWING TMR3 PKP
POWER SWING TMR4 PKP
POWER SWING TRIP
POWER SWING 50DD
POWER SWING INCOMING
POWER SWING OUTGOING
POWER SWING UN/BLOCK
ELEMENT:
Selector switch
ELEMENT:
Setting group
ELEMENT:
Disturbance detector
SELECTOR 1 POS Y
SELECTOR 1 BIT 0
SELECTOR 1 BIT 1
SELECTOR 1 BIT 2
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM
SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM
SELECTOR 1 ALARM
SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM
SELECTOR 2
SETTING GROUP ACT 1
SETTING GROUP ACT 2
SETTING GROUP ACT 3
SETTING GROUP ACT 4
SETTING GROUP ACT 5
SETTING GROUP ACT 6
SRC1 50DD OP
SRC2 50DD OP
SRC3 50DD OP
SRC4 50DD OP
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
Positive-sequence impedance in outer characteristic
Positive-sequence impedance in middle characteristic
Positive-sequence impedance in inner characteristic
Power swing blocking element operated
Power swing timer 1 picked up
Power swing timer 2 picked up
Power swing timer 3 picked up
Power swing timer 4 picked up
Out-of-step tripping operated
The power swing element detected a disturbance other than power swing
An unstable power swing has been detected (incoming locus)
An unstable power swing has been detected (outgoing locus)
Asserted when a fault occurs after the power swing blocking condition has been established
Selector switch 1 is in Position Y (mutually exclusive operands)
First bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1
Second bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1
Third bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1
Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected with the stepping up control input but not acknowledged
Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected with the 3-bit control input but not acknowledged
Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected but not acknowledged
Position of selector switch 1 is undetermined or restored from memory when the relay powers up and synchronizes to the three-bit input
Same set of operands as shown above for SELECTOR 1
Setting group 1 is active
Setting group 2 is active
Setting group 3 is active
Setting group 4 is active
Setting group 5 is active
Setting group 6 is active
Source 1 disturbance detector has operated
Source 2 disturbance detector has operated
Source 3 disturbance detector has operated
Source 4 disturbance detector has operated
ELEMENT:
VTFF (Voltage transformer fuse failure)
ELEMENT:
Stub bus
ELEMENT:
Disconnect switch
SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL OP
SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL DPO
SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL VOL LOSS
Source 1 VT fuse failure detector has operated
Source 1 VT fuse failure detector has dropped out
Source 1 has lost voltage signals (V2 below 15% AND V1 below 5% of nominal)
Same set of operands as shown for SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL SRC2 VT FUSE FAIL to
SRC4 VT FUSE FAIL
STUB BUS OP Stub bus is operated
SWITCH 1 OFF CMD
SWITCH 1 ON CMD
SWITCH 1
ΦA BAD ST
SWITCH 1
ΦA INTERM
SWITCH 1
ΦA CLSD
SWITCH 1
ΦA OPEN
SWITCH 1
ΦB BAD ST
SWITCH 1 ΦA INTERM
SWITCH 1
ΦB CLSD
SWITCH 1
ΦB OPEN
SWITCH 1
ΦC BAD ST
SWITCH 1
ΦA INTERM
SWITCH 1
ΦC CLSD
SWITCH 1
ΦC OPEN
SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS
SWITCH 1 CLOSED
SWITCH 1 OPEN
SWITCH 1 DISCREP
SWITCH 1 TROUBLE
SWITCH 2...
Disconnect switch 1 open command initiated
Disconnect switch 1 close command initiated
Disconnect switch 1 phase A bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and 52/b contacts)
Disconnect switch 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from one position to another)
Disconnect switch 1 phase A is closed
Disconnect switch 1 phase A is open
Disconnect switch 1 phase B bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and 52/b contacts)
Disconnect switch 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from one position to another)
Disconnect switch 1 phase B is closed
Disconnect switch 1 phase B is open
Disconnect switch 1 phase C bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and 52/b contacts)
Disconnect switch 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from one position to another)
Disconnect switch 1 phase C is closed
Disconnect switch 1 phase C is open
Disconnect switch 1 bad status is detected on any pole
Disconnect switch 1 is closed
Disconnect switch 1 is open
Disconnect switch 1 has discrepancy
Disconnect switch 1 trouble alarm
Same set of operands as shown for SWITCH 1
5-106 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.5 FLEXLOGIC™
Table 5–8: L90 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS (Sheet 7 of 9)
OPERAND TYPE
ELEMENT:
Synchrocheck
OPERAND SYNTAX
SYNC 1 DEAD S OP
SYNC 1 DEAD S DPO
SYNC 1 SYNC OP
SYNC 1 SYNC DPO
SYNC 1 CLS OP
SYNC 1 CLS DPO
SYNC 1 V1 ABOVE MIN
SYNC 1 V1 BELOW MAX
SYNC 1 V2 ABOVE MIN
SYNC 1 V2 BELOW MAX
SYNC 2
ELEMENT
Trip output
ELEMENT
Trip bus
TRIP 3-POLE
TRIP 1-POLE
TRIP PHASE A
TRIP PHASE B
TRIP PHASE C
TRIP AR INIT 3-POLE
TRIP FORCE 3-POLE
TRIP OUTPUT OP
TRIP Z2PH TMR INIT
TRIP Z2GR TMR INIT
TRIP BUS 1 PKP
TRIP BUS 1 OP
ELEMENT:
Wattmetric zerosequence directional
TRIP BUS 2...
WATTMETRIC 1 PKP
WATTMETRIC 1 OP
WATTMETRIC 2...
FIXED OPERANDS Off
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Contact inputs
On
Cont Ip 1 On
Cont Ip 2 On
↓
Cont Ip 1 Off
Cont Ip 2 Off
↓
Cont Op 1 IOn
Cont Op 2 IOn
↓
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
Synchrocheck 1 dead source has operated
Synchrocheck 1 dead source has dropped out
Synchrocheck 1 in synchronization has operated
Synchrocheck 1 in synchronization has dropped out
Synchrocheck 1 close has operated
Synchrocheck 1 close has dropped out
Synchrocheck 1 V1 is above the minimum live voltage
Synchrocheck 1 V1 is below the maximum dead voltage
Synchrocheck 1 V2 is above the minimum live voltage
Synchrocheck 1 V2 is below the maximum dead voltage
Same set of operands as shown for SYNC 1
Trip all three breaker poles
A single-pole trip-and-reclose operation is initiated
Trip breaker pole A, initiate phase A breaker fail and reclose
Trip breaker pole B, initiate phase B breaker fail and reclose
Trip breaker pole C, initiate phase C breaker fail and reclose
Initiate a three-pole reclose
Three-pole trip must be initiated
Any trip is initiated by the trip output
Phase distance zone 2 timer is initiated by the trip output
Ground distance zone 2 timer is initiated by the trip output
Asserted when the trip bus 1 element picks up.
Asserted when the trip bus 1 element operates.
Same set of operands as shown for TRIP BUS 1
Wattmetric directional element 1 has picked up
Wattmetric directional element 1 has operated
Same set of operands as per WATTMETRIC 1 above
Logic = 0. Does nothing and may be used as a delimiter in an equation list; used as ‘Disable’ by other features.
Logic = 1. Can be used as a test setting.
(will not appear unless ordered)
(will not appear unless ordered)
↓
(will not appear unless ordered)
(will not appear unless ordered)
↓
(will not appear unless ordered)
(will not appear unless ordered)
↓
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Contact outputs, current
(from detector on form-A output only)
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Contact outputs, voltage
(from detector on form-A output only)
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Direct input
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Remote doublepoint status inputs
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Remote inputs
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Virtual inputs
Cont Op 1 VOn
Cont Op 2 VOn
↓
Cont Op 1 VOff
Cont Op 2 VOff
↓
Direct I/P 1-1 On
↓
Direct I/P 1-8 On
Direct I/P 2-1 On
↓
Direct I/P 2-8 On
RemDPS Ip 1 BAD
RemDPS Ip 1 INTERM
RemDPS Ip 1 OFF
RemDPS Ip 1 ON
REMDPS Ip 2...
REMOTE INPUT 1 On
↓
REMOTE INPUT 32 On
Virt Ip 1 On
↓
Virt Ip 64 On
(will not appear unless ordered)
(will not appear unless ordered)
↓
(will not appear unless ordered)
(will not appear unless ordered)
↓
(appears only when an inter-relay communications card is used)
↓
(appears only when inter-relay communications card is used)
(appears only when inter-relay communications card is used)
↓
(appears only when inter-relay communications card is used)
Asserted while the remote double-point status input is in the bad state.
Asserted while the remote double-point status input is in the intermediate state.
Asserted while the remote double-point status input is off.
Asserted while the remote double-point status input is on.
Same set of operands as per REMDPS 1 above
Flag is set, logic=1
↓
Flag is set, logic=1
Flag is set, logic=1
↓
Flag is set, logic=1
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-107
5.5 FLEXLOGIC™ 5 SETTINGS
5
Table 5–8: L90 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS (Sheet 8 of 9)
OPERAND TYPE
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Virtual outputs
LED INDICATORS:
Fixed front panel
LEDs
LED INDICATORS:
LED test
LED INDICATORS:
User-programmable
LEDs
PASSWORD
SECURITY
OPERAND SYNTAX
Virt Op 1 On
↓
Virt Op 96 On
LED IN SERVICE
LED TROUBLE
LED TEST MODE
LED TRIP
LED ALARM
LED PICKUP
LED VOLTAGE
LED CURRENT
LED FREQUENCY
LED OTHER
LED PHASE A
LED PHASE B
LED PHASE C
LED NEUTRAL/GROUND
LED TEST IN PROGRESS
LED USER 1
LED USER 2 to 48
ACCESS LOC SETG OFF
ACCESS LOC SETG ON
ACCESS LOC CMND OFF
ACCESS LOC CMND ON
ACCESS REM SETG OFF
ACCESS REM SETG ON
ACCESS REM CMND OFF
ACCESS REM CMND ON
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
Flag is set, logic=1
↓
Flag is set, logic=1
Asserted when the front panel IN SERVICE LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel TROUBLE LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel TEST MODE LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel TRIP LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel ALARM LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel PICKUP LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel VOLTAGE LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel CURRENT LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel FREQUENCY LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel OTHER LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel PHASE A LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel PHASE B LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel PHASE C LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel NEUTRAL/GROUND LED is on.
An LED test has been initiated and has not finished.
Asserted when user-programmable LED 1 is on.
The operand above is available for user-programmable LEDs 2 through 48.
REMOTE DEVICES REMOTE DEVICE 1 On
↓
REMOTE DEVICE 16 On
REMOTE DEVICE 1 Off
↓
REMOTE DEVICE 16 Off
RESETTING RESET OP
RESET OP (COMMS)
RESET OP (OPERAND)
SELF-
DIAGNOSTICS
RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON)
ANY MAJOR ERROR
ANY MINOR ERROR
ANY SELF-TESTS
BATTERY FAIL
DIRECT DEVICE OFF
DIRECT RING BREAK
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH
ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL
FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN
IRIG-B FAILURE
LATCHING OUT ERROR
MAINTENANCE ALERT
PORT 1 OFFLINE
PORT 2 OFFLINE
PORT 3 OFFLINE
PORT 4 OFFLINE
PORT 5 OFFLINE
PORT 6 OFFLINE
PRI ETHERNET FAIL
PROCESS BUS FAILURE
REMOTE DEVICE OFF
RRTD COMM FAIL
SEC ETHERNET FAIL
SNTP FAILURE
SYSTEM EXCEPTION
TEMP MONITOR
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED
Asserted when local setting access is disabled.
Asserted when local setting access is enabled.
Asserted when local command access is disabled.
Asserted when local command access is enabled.
Asserted when remote setting access is disabled.
Asserted when remote setting access is enabled.
Asserted when remote command access is disabled.
Asserted when remote command access is enabled.
Asserted when a password entry fails while accessing a password protected level of the L90.
Flag is set, logic=1
↓
Flag is set, logic=1
Flag is set, logic=1
↓
Flag is set, logic=1
Reset command is operated (set by all three operands below).
Communications source of the reset command.
Operand (assigned in the
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
ÖØ RESETTING
menu) source of the reset command.
Reset key (pushbutton) source of the reset command.
Any of the major self-test errors generated (major error)
Any of the minor self-test errors generated (minor error)
Any self-test errors generated (generic, any error)
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
5-108 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.5 FLEXLOGIC™
Table 5–8: L90 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS (Sheet 9 of 9)
OPERAND TYPE
TEMPERATURE
MONITOR
USER-
PROGRAMMABLE
PUSHBUTTONS
OPERAND SYNTAX
TEMP MONITOR
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF
ANY PB ON
PUSHBUTTON 2 to 12
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
Asserted while the ambient temperature is greater than the maximum operating temperature (80°C)
Pushbutton number 1 is in the “On” position
Pushbutton number 1 is in the “Off” position
Any of twelve pushbuttons is in the “On” position
Same set of operands as PUSHBUTTON 1
Some operands can be re-named by the user. These are the names of the breakers in the breaker control feature, the ID
(identification) of contact inputs, the ID of virtual inputs, and the ID of virtual outputs. If the user changes the default name or ID of any of these operands, the assigned name will appear in the relay list of operands. The default names are shown in the FlexLogic™ operands table above.
The characteristics of the logic gates are tabulated below, and the operators available in FlexLogic™ are listed in the Flex-
Logic™ operators table.
Table 5–9: FLEXLOGIC™ GATE CHARACTERISTICS
GATES
NOT
OR
AND
NOR
NAND
XOR
NUMBER OF INPUTS
1
2 to 16
2 to 16
2 to 16
2 to 16
2
OUTPUT IS ‘1’ (= ON) IF...
input is ‘0’ any input is ‘1’ all inputs are ‘1’ all inputs are ‘0’ any input is ‘0’ only one input is ‘1’
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-109
5.5 FLEXLOGIC™ 5 SETTINGS
5
Table 5–10: FLEXLOGIC™ OPERATORS
TYPE
Editor
End
One-shot
Logic gate
Timer
Assign virtual output
SYNTAX
INSERT
DELETE
END
DESCRIPTION
Insert a parameter in an equation list.
Delete a parameter from an equation list.
The first END encountered signifies the last entry in the list of processed FlexLogic™ parameters.
POSITIVE ONE SHOT One shot that responds to a positive going edge.
NEGATIVE ONE
SHOT
One shot that responds to a negative going edge.
DUAL ONE SHOT
NOT
One shot that responds to both the positive and negative going edges.
Logical NOT
OR(2)
↓
OR(16)
AND(2)
↓
AND(16)
NOR(2)
↓
NOR(16)
NAND(2)
↓
NAND(16)
XOR(2)
LATCH (S,R)
2 input OR gate
↓
16 input OR gate
2 input AND gate
↓
16 input AND gate
2 input NOR gate
↓
16 input NOR gate
2 input NAND gate
↓
16 input NAND gate
2 input Exclusive OR gate
Latch (set, reset): reset-dominant
NOTES
TIMER 1
↓
TIMER 32
= Virt Op 1
↓
= Virt Op 96
Timer set with FlexLogic™ timer 1 settings.
↓
Timer set with FlexLogic™ timer 32 settings.
Assigns previous FlexLogic™ operand to virtual output 1.
↓
Assigns previous FlexLogic™ operand to virtual output 96.
A ‘one shot’ refers to a single input gate that generates a pulse in response to an edge on the input. The output from a ‘one shot’ is True (positive) for only one pass through the FlexLogic™ equation. There is a maximum of 64 ‘one shots’.
Operates on the previous parameter.
Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
↓
Operates on the 16 previous parameters.
Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
↓
Operates on the 16 previous parameters.
Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
↓
Operates on the 16 previous parameters.
Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
↓
Operates on the 16 previous parameters.
Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
The parameter preceding LATCH(S,R) is the reset input. The parameter preceding the reset input is the set input.
The timer is started by the preceding parameter. The output of the timer is
TIMER #.
The virtual output is set by the preceding parameter
5.5.2 FLEXLOGIC™ RULES
When forming a FlexLogic™ equation, the sequence in the linear array of parameters must follow these general rules:
1.
Operands must precede the operator which uses the operands as inputs.
2.
Operators have only one output. The output of an operator must be used to create a virtual output if it is to be used as an input to two or more operators.
3.
Assigning the output of an operator to a virtual output terminates the equation.
4.
A timer operator (for example, "TIMER 1") or virtual output assignment (for example, " = Virt Op 1") may only be used once. If this rule is broken, a syntax error will be declared.
5.5.3 FLEXLOGIC™ EVALUATION
Each equation is evaluated in the order in which the parameters have been entered.
NOTE
FlexLogic™ provides latches which by definition have a memory action, remaining in the set state after the set input has been asserted. However, they are volatile; that is, they reset on the re-application of control power.
When making changes to settings, all FlexLogic™ equations are re-compiled whenever any new setting value is entered, so all latches are automatically reset. If it is necessary to re-initialize FlexLogic™ during testing, for example, it is suggested to power the unit down and then back up.
5-110 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.5 FLEXLOGIC™
5.5.4 FLEXLOGIC™ EXAMPLE
This section provides an example of implementing logic for a typical application. The sequence of the steps is quite important as it should minimize the work necessary to develop the relay settings. Note that the example presented in the figure below is intended to demonstrate the procedure, not to solve a specific application situation.
In the example below, it is assumed that logic has already been programmed to produce virtual outputs 1 and 2, and is only a part of the full set of equations used. When using FlexLogic™, it is important to make a note of each virtual output used – a virtual output designation (1 to 96) can only be properly assigned once.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
State=ON
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2
State=ON
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
State=ON
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
State=Pickup
XOR
OR #1
Set
LATCH
Reset
OR #2
Timer 2
Time Delay on Dropout
(200 ms)
Operate Output
Relay H1
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2
State=Operated
AND
Timer 1
Time Delay on Pickup
(800 ms)
CONTACT INPUT H1c
State=Closed
827025A2.vsd
Figure 5–41: EXAMPLE LOGIC SCHEME
1.
Inspect the example logic diagram to determine if the required logic can be implemented with the FlexLogic™ operators. If this is not possible, the logic must be altered until this condition is satisfied. Once this is done, count the inputs to each gate to verify that the number of inputs does not exceed the FlexLogic™ limits, which is unlikely but possible. If the number of inputs is too high, subdivide the inputs into multiple gates to produce an equivalent. For example, if 25 inputs to an AND gate are required, connect Inputs 1 through 16 to AND(16), 17 through 25 to AND(9), and the outputs from these two gates to AND(2).
Inspect each operator between the initial operands and final virtual outputs to determine if the output from the operator is used as an input to more than one following operator. If so, the operator output must be assigned as a virtual output.
For the example shown above, the output of the AND gate is used as an input to both OR#1 and Timer 1, and must therefore be made a virtual output and assigned the next available number (i.e. Virtual Output 3). The final output must also be assigned to a virtual output as virtual output 4, which will be programmed in the contact output section to operate relay H1 (that is, contact output H1).
Therefore, the required logic can be implemented with two FlexLogic™ equations with outputs of virtual output 3 and virtual output 4 as shown below.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
State=ON
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2
State=ON
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
State=ON
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
State=Pickup
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2
State=Operated
CONTACT INPUT H1c
State=Closed
XOR
AND
OR #1
Set
LATCH
Reset
Timer 1
Time Delay on Pickup
(800 ms)
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
OR #2
Timer 2
Time Delay on Dropout
(200 ms)
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4
827026A2.VSD
Figure 5–42: LOGIC EXAMPLE WITH VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-111
5.5 FLEXLOGIC™ 5 SETTINGS
2.
Prepare a logic diagram for the equation to produce virtual output 3, as this output will be used as an operand in the virtual output 4 equation (create the equation for every output that will be used as an operand first, so that when these operands are required they will already have been evaluated and assigned to a specific virtual output). The logic for virtual output 3 is shown below with the final output assigned.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2
State=Operated
AND(2)
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
CONTACT INPUT H1c
State=Closed
827027A2.VSD
Figure 5–43: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
3.
Prepare a logic diagram for virtual output 4, replacing the logic ahead of virtual output 3 with a symbol identified as virtual output 3, as shown below.
5
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
State=ON
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2
State=ON
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
State=ON
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
State=Pickup
XOR
OR #1
Set
LATCH
Reset
OR #2
Timer 2
Time Delay on Dropout
(200 ms)
VIRTUAL
OUTPUT 4
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
State=ON
Timer 1
Time Delay on Pickup
(800 ms)
CONTACT INPUT H1c
State=Closed
827028A2.VSD
Figure 5–44: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4
4.
Program the FlexLogic™ equation for virtual output 3 by translating the logic into available FlexLogic™ parameters.
The equation is formed one parameter at a time until the required logic is complete. It is generally easier to start at the output end of the equation and work back towards the input, as shown in the following steps. It is also recommended to list operator inputs from bottom to top. For demonstration, the final output will be arbitrarily identified as parameter 99, and each preceding parameter decremented by one in turn. Until accustomed to using FlexLogic™, it is suggested that a worksheet with a series of cells marked with the arbitrary parameter numbers be prepared, as shown below.
01
02
03
04
05
97
98
99
827029A1.VSD
Figure 5–45: FLEXLOGIC™ WORKSHEET
5.
Following the procedure outlined, start with parameter 99, as follows:
99: The final output of the equation is virtual output 3, which is created by the operator "= Virt Op n". This parameter is therefore "= Virt Op 3."
5-112 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.5 FLEXLOGIC™
98: The gate preceding the output is an AND, which in this case requires two inputs. The operator for this gate is a 2input AND so the parameter is “AND(2)”. Note that FlexLogic™ rules require that the number of inputs to most types of operators must be specified to identify the operands for the gate. As the 2-input AND will operate on the two operands preceding it, these inputs must be specified, starting with the lower.
97: This lower input to the AND gate must be passed through an inverter (the NOT operator) so the next parameter is
“NOT”. The NOT operator acts upon the operand immediately preceding it, so specify the inverter input next.
96: The input to the NOT gate is to be contact input H1c. The ON state of a contact input can be programmed to be set when the contact is either open or closed. Assume for this example the state is to be ON for a closed contact.
The operand is therefore “Cont Ip H1c On”.
95: The last step in the procedure is to specify the upper input to the AND gate, the operated state of digital element 2.
This operand is "DIG ELEM 2 OP".
Writing the parameters in numerical order can now form the equation for virtual output 3:
[95] DIG ELEM 2 OP
[96] Cont Ip H1c On
[97] NOT
[98] AND(2)
[99] = Virt Op 3
It is now possible to check that this selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parameters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to the logic for virtual output 3 diagram as a check.
95
96
97
98
99
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
DIG ELEM 2 OP
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Cont Ip H1c On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
NOT
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
AND (2)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
=Virt Op 3
AND
VIRTUAL
OUTPUT 3
827030A2.VSD
Figure 5–46: FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
6.
Repeating the process described for virtual output 3, select the FlexLogic™ parameters for Virtual Output 4.
99: The final output of the equation is virtual output 4 which is parameter “= Virt Op 4".
98: The operator preceding the output is timer 2, which is operand “TIMER 2". Note that the settings required for the timer are established in the timer programming section.
97: The operator preceding timer 2 is OR #2, a 3-input OR, which is parameter “OR(3)”.
96: The lowest input to OR #2 is operand “Cont Ip H1c On”.
95: The center input to OR #2 is operand “TIMER 1".
94: The input to timer 1 is operand “Virt Op 3 On".
93: The upper input to OR #2 is operand “LATCH (S,R)”.
92: There are two inputs to a latch, and the input immediately preceding the latch reset is OR #1, a 4-input OR, which is parameter “OR(4)”.
91: The lowest input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 3 On".
90: The input just above the lowest input to OR #1 is operand “XOR(2)”.
89: The lower input to the XOR is operand “DIG ELEM 1 PKP”.
88: The upper input to the XOR is operand “Virt Ip 1 On".
87: The input just below the upper input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 2 On".
86: The upper input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 1 On".
85: The last parameter is used to set the latch, and is operand “Virt Op 4 On".
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-113
5.5 FLEXLOGIC™ 5 SETTINGS
The equation for virtual output 4 is:
[85] Virt Op 4 On
[86] Virt Op 1 On
[87] Virt Op 2 On
[88] Virt Ip 1 On
[89] DIG ELEM 1 PKP
[90] XOR(2)
[91] Virt Op 3 On
[92] OR(4)
[93] LATCH (S,R)
[94] Virt Op 3 On
[95] TIMER 1
[96] Cont Ip H1c On
[97] OR(3)
[98] TIMER 2
[99] = Virt Op 4
It is now possible to check that the selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parameters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to the logic for virtual output 4 diagram as a check.
5
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
85
86
87
95
96
97
98
99
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Virt Op 4 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Virt Op 1 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Virt Op 2 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Virt Ip 1 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
DIG ELEM 1 PKP
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
XOR
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Virt Op 3 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
OR (4)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
LATCH (S,R)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Virt Op 3 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
TIMER 1
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Cont Ip H1c On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
OR (3)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
TIMER 2
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
=Virt Op 4
XOR OR
T1
Set
LATCH
Reset
OR
T2
VIRTUAL
OUTPUT 4
827031A2.VSD
Figure 5–47: FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4
7.
Now write the complete FlexLogic™ expression required to implement the logic, making an effort to assemble the equation in an order where Virtual Outputs that will be used as inputs to operators are created before needed. In cases where a lot of processing is required to perform logic, this may be difficult to achieve, but in most cases will not cause problems as all logic is calculated at least four times per power frequency cycle. The possibility of a problem caused by sequential processing emphasizes the necessity to test the performance of FlexLogic™ before it is placed in service.
In the following equation, virtual output 3 is used as an input to both latch 1 and timer 1 as arranged in the order shown below:
DIG ELEM 2 OP
Cont Ip H1c On
NOT
AND(2)
5-114 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.5 FLEXLOGIC™
= Virt Op 3
Virt Op 4 On
Virt Op 1 On
Virt Op 2 On
Virt Ip 1 On
DIG ELEM 1 PKP
XOR(2)
Virt Op 3 On
OR(4)
LATCH (S,R)
Virt Op 3 On
TIMER 1
Cont Ip H1c On
OR(3)
TIMER 2
= Virt Op 4
END
In the expression above, the virtual output 4 input to the four-input OR is listed before it is created. This is typical of a form of feedback, in this case, used to create a seal-in effect with the latch, and is correct.
8.
The logic should always be tested after it is loaded into the relay, in the same fashion as has been used in the past.
Testing can be simplified by placing an "END" operator within the overall set of FlexLogic™ equations. The equations will then only be evaluated up to the first "END" operator.
The "On" and "Off" operands can be placed in an equation to establish a known set of conditions for test purposes, and the "INSERT" and "DELETE" commands can be used to modify equations.
5.5.5 FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION EDITOR
5
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
FLEXLOGIC
Ö
FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR
FLEXLOGIC
EQUATION EDITOR
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY
END
1:
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 2:
END
↓
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 512:
END
Range: FlexLogic™ operands
Range: FlexLogic™ operands
Range: FlexLogic™ operands
There are 512 FlexLogic™ entries available, numbered from 1 to 512, with default END entry settings. If a "Disabled" Element is selected as a FlexLogic™ entry, the associated state flag will never be set to ‘1’. The ‘+/–‘ key may be used when editing FlexLogic™ equations from the keypad to quickly scan through the major parameter types.
5.5.6 FLEXLOGIC™ TIMERS
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
FLEXLOGIC
ÖØ
FLEXLOGIC TIMERS
Ö
FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1(32)
FLEXLOGIC
TIMER 1
TIMER 1
TYPE: millisecond
Range: millisecond, second, minute
Range: 0 to 60000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0
Range: 0 to 60000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0
There are 32 identical FlexLogic™ timers available. These timers can be used as operators for FlexLogic™ equations.
• TIMER 1 TYPE: This setting is used to select the time measuring unit.
• TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set this function to "0".
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-115
5.5 FLEXLOGIC™ 5 SETTINGS
5
• TIMER 1 DROPOUT DELAY: Sets the time delay to dropout. If a dropout delay is not required, set this function to "0".
5.5.7 FLEXELEMENTS™
PATH: SETTING
ÖØ
FLEXLOGIC
ÖØ
FLEXELEMENTS
Ö
FLEXELEMENT 1(8)
FLEXELEMENT 1
FLEXELEMENT 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 NAME:
FxE1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN:
Off
FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN:
Off
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT
MODE: Signed
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP
MODE: Level
FLEXELEMENT 1
DIRECTION: Over
FLEXELEMENT 1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
FLEXELEMENT 1
HYSTERESIS: 3.0%
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt
UNIT: milliseconds
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt:
20
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
DELAY: 0.000 s
FLEXELEMENT 1 RST
DELAY: 0.000 s
FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK:
Off
FLEXELEMENT 1
TARGET: Self-reset
FLEXELEMENT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Range: up to 6 alphanumeric characters
Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
Range: Signed, Absolute
Range: Level, Delta
Range: Over, Under
Range: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Range: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1
Range: milliseconds, seconds, minutes
Range: 20 to 86400 in steps of 1
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
A FlexElement™ is a universal comparator that can be used to monitor any analog actual value calculated by the relay or a net difference of any two analog actual values of the same type. The effective operating signal could be treated as a signed number or its absolute value could be used as per user's choice.
The element can be programmed to respond either to a signal level or to a rate-of-change (delta) over a pre-defined period of time. The output operand is asserted when the operating signal is higher than a threshold or lower than a threshold as per user's choice.
5-116 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.5 FLEXLOGIC™
SETTING
FLEXELEMENT 1
FUNCTION:
Enabled = 1
Disabled = 0
SETTING
FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK:
Off = 0
SETTINGS
FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN:
Actual Value
FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN:
Actual Value
AND
SETTINGS
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT
MODE:
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP
MODE:
FLEXELEMENT 1
DIRECTION:
FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP:
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT
HYSTERESIS:
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT:
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt:
RUN
+
-
SETTINGS
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
DELAY:
FLEXELEMENT 1 RST
DELAY: t
PKP t
RST
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
FxE 1 OP
FxE 1 DPO
FxE 1 PKP
ACTUAL VALUE
FlexElement 1 OpSig
842004A3.CDR
Figure 5–48: FLEXELEMENT™ SCHEME LOGIC
The
FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN
setting specifies the first (non-inverted) input to the FlexElement™. Zero is assumed as the input if this setting is set to “Off”. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element will not assert its output operands.
This
FLEXELEMENT 1 –IN
setting specifies the second (inverted) input to the FlexElement™. Zero is assumed as the input if this setting is set to “Off”. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element will not assert its output operands. This input should be used to invert the signal if needed for convenience, or to make the element respond to a differential signal such as for a top-bottom oil temperature differential alarm. The element will not operate if the two input signals are of different types, for example if one tries to use active power and phase angle to build the effective operating signal.
The element responds directly to the differential signal if the
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE
setting is set to “Signed”. The element responds to the absolute value of the differential signal if this setting is set to “Absolute”. Sample applications for the
“Absolute” setting include monitoring the angular difference between two phasors with a symmetrical limit angle in both directions; monitoring power regardless of its direction, or monitoring a trend regardless of whether the signal increases of decreases.
The element responds directly to its operating signal – as defined by the
FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN
,
FLEXELEMENT 1 –IN
and
FLEX-
ELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE
settings – if the
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE
setting is set to “Level”. The element responds to the rate of change of its operating signal if the
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE
setting is set to “Delta”. In this case the
FLEXELE-
MENT 1 dt UNIT
and
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt
settings specify how the rate of change is derived.
The
FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION
setting enables the relay to respond to either high or low values of the operating signal. The following figure explains the application of the
FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION
,
FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP
and
FLEXELEMENT 1 HYS-
TERESIS
settings.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-117
5.5 FLEXLOGIC™ 5 SETTINGS
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over
HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP
FlexElement 1 OpSig
5
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under
HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP
FlexElement 1 OpSig
842705A1.CDR
Figure 5–49: FLEXELEMENT™ DIRECTION, PICKUP, AND HYSTERESIS
In conjunction with the
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE
setting the element could be programmed to provide two extra characteristics as shown in the figure below.
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Signed;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
5-118
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Absolute;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Signed;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Absolute;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
842706A2.CDR
Figure 5–50: FLEXELEMENT™ INPUT MODE SETTING
L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.5 FLEXLOGIC™
The
FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP
setting specifies the operating threshold for the effective operating signal of the element. If set to “Over”, the element picks up when the operating signal exceeds the
FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP
value. If set to “Under”, the element picks up when the operating signal falls below the
FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP
value.
The
FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS
setting controls the element dropout. It should be noticed that both the operating signal and the pickup threshold can be negative facilitating applications such as reverse power alarm protection. The FlexElement™ can be programmed to work with all analog actual values measured by the relay. The
FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP
setting is entered in per-unit values using the following definitions of the base units:
Table 5–11: FLEXELEMENT™ BASE UNITS
87L SIGNALS
(Local IA Mag, IB, and IC)
(Diff Curr IA Mag, IB, and IC)
(Terminal 1 IA Mag, IB, and IC)
(Terminal 2 IA Mag, IB and IC)
87L SIGNALS
(Op Square Curr IA, IB, and IC)
(Rest Square Curr IA, IB, and IC)
BREAKER ARCING AMPS
(Brk X Arc Amp A, B, and C) dcmA
I
BASE
= maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
(CT primary for source currents, and 87L source primary current for line differential currents)
BASE = Squared CT secondary of the 87L source
BASE = 2000 kA
2
× cycle
FREQUENCY
PHASE ANGLE
POWER FACTOR
RTDs
SOURCE CURRENT
SOURCE ENERGY
(Positive and Negative Watthours,
Positive and Negative Varhours)
SOURCE POWER
SOURCE VOLTAGE
SYNCHROCHECK
(Max Delta Volts)
BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured under the +IN and –IN inputs.
f
BASE
= 1 Hz ϕ
BASE
= 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention)
PF
BASE
= 1.00
BASE = 100°C
I
BASE
= maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
E
BASE
= 10000 MWh or MVAh, respectively
P
BASE
= maximum value of V
BASE
× I
BASE for the +IN and –IN inputs
V
BASE
= maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
V
BASE
= maximum primary RMS value of all the sources related to the +IN and –IN inputs
The
FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS
setting defines the pickup–dropout relation of the element by specifying the width of the hysteresis loop as a percentage of the pickup value as shown in the FlexElement™ direction, pickup, and hysteresis diagram.
The
FLEXELEMENT 1 DT UNIT
setting specifies the time unit for the setting
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt
. This setting is applicable only if
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE
is set to “Delta”. The
FLEXELEMENT 1 DT
setting specifies duration of the time interval for the rate of change mode of operation. This setting is applicable only if
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE
is set to “Delta”.
This
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP DELAY
setting specifies the pickup delay of the element. The
FLEXELEMENT 1 RST DELAY
setting specifies the reset delay of the element.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-119
5.5 FLEXLOGIC™ 5 SETTINGS
5
5.5.8 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
FLEXLOGIC
ÖØ
NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
Ö
LATCH 1(16)
LATCH 1
LATCH 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Range: Reset Dominant, Set Dominant
MESSAGE
LATCH 1 TYPE:
Reset Dominant
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
LATCH 1 SET:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
LATCH 1 RESET:
Off
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
LATCH 1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
LATCH 1
EVENTS: Disabled
The non-volatile latches provide a permanent logical flag that is stored safely and will not reset upon reboot after the relay is powered down. Typical applications include sustaining operator commands or permanently block relay functions, such as
Autorecloser, until a deliberate interface action resets the latch. The settings element operation is described below:
• LATCH 1 TYPE: This setting characterizes Latch 1 to be Set- or Reset-dominant.
• LATCH 1 SET: If asserted, the specified FlexLogic™ operands 'sets' Latch 1.
• LATCH 1 RESET: If asserted, the specified FlexLogic™ operand 'resets' Latch 1.
LATCH N
TYPE
Reset
Dominant
Set
Dominant
LATCH N
SET
ON
OFF
LATCH N
RESET
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
LATCH N
ON
ON
Previous
State
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Previous
State
OFF
LATCH N
OFF
OFF
Previous
State
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Previous
State
ON
SETTING
LATCH 1 FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Enabled=1
SETTING
LATCH 1 SET:
Off=0
SETTING
LATCH 1 SET:
Off=0
SETTING
LATCH 1 TYPE:
RUN
SET
RESET
Figure 5–51: NON-VOLATILE LATCH OPERATION TABLE (N = 1 to 16) AND LOGIC
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
LATCH 1 ON
LATCH 1 OFF
842005A1.CDR
5-120 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5.6GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.6.1 OVERVIEW
Each protection element can be assigned up to six different sets of settings according to setting group designations 1 to 6.
The performance of these elements is defined by the active setting group at a given time. Multiple setting groups allow the user to conveniently change protection settings for different operating situations (for example, altered power system configuration, season of the year, etc.). The active setting group can be preset or selected via the
SETTING GROUPS
menu (see the
Control elements section later in this chapter). See also the Introduction to elements section at the beginning of this chapter.
5.6.2 SETTING GROUP
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
GROUPED ELEMENTS
Ö
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
SETTING GROUP 1
LINE DIFFERENTIAL
ELEMENTS
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
LINE PICKUP
DISTANCE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
POWER SWING
DETECT
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
PHASE CURRENT
NEUTRAL CURRENT
WATTMETRIC
GROUND FAULT
GROUND CURRENT
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE
CURRENT
BREAKER FAILURE
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
SUPERVISING
ELEMENTS
Each of the six setting group menus is identical. Setting group 1 (the default active group) automatically becomes active if no other group is active (see the Control elements section for additional details).
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-121
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS
5.6.3 LINE DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENTS a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS
Ø
GROUPED ELEMENTS
Ö
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
Ö
LINE DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENTS
LINE DIFFERENTIAL
ELEMENTS
CURRENT
DIFFERENTIAL
MESSAGE
STUB BUS
5 b) CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
GROUPED ELEMENTS
Ö
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
Ö
LINE DIFFERENTIAL...
Ö
CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL
CURRENT
DIFFERENTIAL
CURRENT DIFF
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL
SOURCE 1: SRC 1
Range: None, SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL
SOURCE 2: None
Range: None, SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL
SOURCE 3: None
Range: None, SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL
SOURCE 4: None
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF BLOCK:
Off
Range: 0.10 to 4.00 pu in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF
PICKUP: 0.20 pu
Range: 0.20 to 5.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF
CT TAP 1: 1.00
Range: 0.20 to 5.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF
CT TAP 2: 1.00
Range: 1 to 50% in steps of 1
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF
RESTRAINT 1: 30%
Range: 1 to 70% in steps of 1
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF
RESTRAINT 2: 50%
Range: 0.0 to 20.0 pu in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF
BREAK PT: 1.0 pu
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF GND
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: 0.05 to 1.00 pu in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF GND
PICKUP: 0.10 pu
Range: 1 to 50% in steps of 1
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF GND
RESTRAINT: 25%
Range: 0.00 to 5.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF GND
DELAY: 0.10 s
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF DTT:
Enabled
5-122 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF KEY DTT:
Off
CURRENT DIFF
TARGET: Self-reset
CURRENT DIFF
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The following settings are available for current differential protection.
• CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL SOURCE 1: This setting selects the first source for the current differential element local operating current. If more than one source is configured, the other source currents are scaled to the CT with the maximum primary current assigned by the
CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL SOURCE 1
to
CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL SOURCE 4
settings. This source is mandatory and is assigned with the
SYSTEM SETUP
ÖØ
SIGNAL SOURCES
Ö
SOURCE 1
menu.
• CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL SOURCE 2, CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL SOURCE 3, and CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL
SOURCE 4: These settings select the second, third, and fourth sources for the current differential function for applications where more than one set of CT circuitry is connected directly to L90.
• CURRENT DIFF BLOCK: This setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand to block the operation of the current differential element.
• CURRENT DIFF PICKUP: This setting is used to select current differential pickup value.
• CURRENT DIFF CT TAP 1 and CURRENT DIFF CT TAP 2: These settings adapt the remote terminal 1 or 2 (communication channel) CT ratio to the local ratio if the CT ratios for the local and remote terminals are different. The setting value is determined by CT prim_rem
/ CT prim_loc
for local and remote terminal CTs (where CT prim_rem
/ CT prim_loc
is referred to as the CT primary rated current). Ratio matching must always be performed against the remote CT with the maximum CT primary defined by the
CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL SOURCE 1
through
CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL SOURCE 4
settings.
See the Current differential settings application example in chapter 9 for additional details.
• CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 1 and CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 2: These settings select the bias characteristic for the first and second slope, respectively.
• CURRENT DIFF BREAK PT: This setting is used to select an intersection point between the two slopes.
• CURRENT DIFF GND FUNCTION: This setting enables and disabled the 87LG neutral differential element, which may be used to detect high-resistive faults. This element uses restrained characteristics to cope with spurious zerosequence current during system unbalance and signal distortions. The differential neutral current is calculated as the vector sum of all in-zone CT input neutral currents. The restraint current is derived as the maximum of phase currents from all terminals flowing through any individual CT, including breaker-and-a-half configurations. The 87LG neutral differential element is blocked when the phase current at any terminal is greater than 3 pu, since the phase differential element should operate for internal faults. To correctly derive the restraint quantity from the maximum through current at any terminal, it is important that the 87L phase-segregated differential pickup and slope settings are equal at all terminals. Refer to the Applications of settings chapter for additional details.
• CURRENT DIFF GND PICKUP: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for neutral current differential element.
• CURRENT DIFF GND RESTRAINT: This setting specifies the bias characteristic for the neutral current differential element.
• CURRENT DIFF GND DELAY: This setting specifies the operation delay for the neutral current differential element.
Since this element is used to detect high-resistive faults where fault currents are relatively low, high-speed operation is usually not critical. This delay will provide security against spurious neutral current during switch-off transients and external fault clearing.
• CURRENT DIFF DTT: This setting enables and disables the sending of a DTT by the current differential element on per single-phase basis to remote relays. To allow the L90 to restart from master-master to master-slave mode (very important on three-terminal applications),
CURR DIFF DTT
must be set to “Enabled”.
• CURRENT DIFF KEY DTT: This setting selects an additional protection element (besides the current differential element; for example, distance element or breaker failure) which keys the DTT on a per three-phase basis.
NOTE
For the current differential element to function properly, it is imperative that all L90 relays on the protected line have exactly identical firmware revisions. For example, revision 5.62 in only compatible with 5.62, not
5.61 or 5.63.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-123
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS
5
Compute phasors and variance (local)
Compute phasors and v
Compute phasors and v
Compute sum of curr Compute local restraint
5-124
Figure 5–52: CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL SCHEME LOGIC
L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS c) STUB BUS
PATH: SETTINGS
Ö
GROUPED ELEMENTS
Ö
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
Ö
LINE DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENTS
ÖØ
STUB BUS
STUB BUS
STUB BUS FUNCTION:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
STUB BUS DISCONNECT:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
STUB BUS TRIGGER:
Off
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
STUB BUS TARGET:
Self-reset
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
STUB BUS EVENTS:
Disabled
The stub bus element protects for faults between two breakers in a breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configuration when the line disconnect switch is open. At the same time, if the line is still energized through the remote terminal(s), differential protection is still required (the line may still need to be energized because there is a tapped load on a two terminal line or because the line is a three terminal line with two of the terminals still connected). Correct operation for this condition is achieved by the local relay sending zero current values to the remote end(s) so that a local bus fault does not result in tripping the line. At the local end, the differential element is disabled and stub bus protection is provided by a user-selected overcurrent element. If there is a line fault, the remote end(s) will trip on differential but local differential function and DTT signal (if enabled) to the local end, will be blocked by the stub bus logic allowing the local breakers to remain closed.
• STUB BUS FUNCTION: There are three requirements for stub bus operation: the element must be enabled, an indication that the line disconnect is open, and the
STUB BUS TRIGGER
setting is set as indicated below. There are two methods of setting the stub bus trigger and thus setting up stub bus operation:
1.
If
STUB BUS TRIGGER
is “On”, the
STUB BUS OPERATE
operand picks up as soon as the disconnect switch opens, causing zero currents to be transmitted to remote end(s) and DTT receipt from remote end(s) to be permanently blocked. An overcurrent element, blocked by disconnect switch closed, provides protection for the local bus.
2.
An alternate method is to set
STUB BUS TRIGGER
to be the pickup of an assigned instantaneous overcurrent element. The instantaneous overcurrent element must operate quickly enough to pick up the
STUB BUS OPERATE operand, disable the local differential, and send zero currents to the other terminal(s). If the bus minimum fault current is above five times the instantaneous overcurrent pickup, tests have confirmed that the
STUB BUS OPERATE operand always pick up correctly for a stub bus fault and prevents tripping of the remote terminal. If minimum stub bus fault current is below this value, then method 1 should be used. Note also that correct testing of stub bus operation, when this method is used, requires sudden injection of a fault currents above five times instantaneous overcurrent pickup. The assigned current element should be mapped to appropriate output contact(s) to trip the stub bus breakers. It should be blocked unless disconnect is open. To prevent 87L tripping from remote L90 relays still protecting the line, the auxiliary contact of line disconnect switch (logic “1” when line switch is open) should be assigned to block the local 87L function by using the
CURRENT DIFF BLOCK
setting.
• STUB BUS DISCONNECT: Selects a FlexLogic™ operand to represent the open state of auxiliary contact of line disconnect switch (logic “1” when line disconnect switch is open). If necessary, simple logic representing not only line disconnect switch but also the closed state of the breakers can be created with FlexLogic™ and assigned to this setting.
• STUB BUS TRIGGER: Selects a FlexLogic™ operand that causes the
STUB BUS OPERATE
operand to pick up if the line disconnect is open. It can be set either to “On” or to an instantaneous overcurrent element (see above). If the instantaneous overcurrent used for the stub bus protection is set with a time delay, then
STUB BUS TRIGGER
should use the associated instantaneous overcurrent
pickup
operand. The source assigned for the current of this element must cover the stub between CTs of the associated breakers and disconnect switch.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-125
5
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS
SETTING
STUB BUS
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Enabled=1
SETTING
STUB BUS
DISCONNECT:
Off=0
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
STUB BUS OP
SETTING
STUB BUS
TRIGGER:
Off=0
831012A3.CDR
Figure 5–53: STUB BUS SCHEME LOGIC
5 SETTINGS
5-126 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5.6.4 LINE PICKUP
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
GROUPED ELEMENTS
Ö
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
ÖØ
LINE PICKUP
LINE PICKUP
LINE PICKUP
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
LINE PICKUP SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC LINE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
LINE PICKUP UV PKP:
0.700 pu
LINE END OPEN PICKUP
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
LINE END OPEN RESET
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
LINE PICKUP OV PKP
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
AR CO-ORD BYPASS:
Enabled
AR CO-ORD PICKUP
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
AR CO-ORD RESET
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
TERMINAL OPEN:
Off
AR ACCELERATE:
Off
LINE PICKUP DISTANCE
TRIP: Enabled
LINE PICKUP BLOCK:
Off
LINE PICKUP
TARGET: Self-reset
LINE PICKUP
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The line pickup feature uses a combination of undercurrent and undervoltage to identify a line that has been de-energized
(line end open). Alternately, the user may assign a FlexLogic™ operand to the
TERMINAL OPEN
setting that specifies the terminal status. Three instantaneous overcurrent elements are used to identify a previously de-energized line that has been closed onto a fault. Faults other than close-in faults can be identified satisfactorily with the distance elements.
Co-ordination features are included to ensure satisfactory operation when high speed automatic reclosure (AR) is employed. The
AR CO-ORD DELAY
setting allows the overcurrent setting to be below the expected load current seen after reclose. Co-ordination is achieved by all of the
LINE PICKP UV
elements resetting and blocking the trip path before the
AR
CO-ORD DELAY
times out. The
AR CO-ORD BYPASS
setting is normally enabled. It is disabled if high speed autoreclosure is implemented.
The line pickup protection incorporates zone 1 extension capability. When the line is being re-energized from the local terminal, pickup of an overreaching zone 2 or excessive phase current within eight power cycles after the autorecloser issues a close command results in the
LINE PICKUP RCL TRIP
FlexLogic™ operand. For security, the overcurrent trip is supervised
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-127
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS
5
by an undervoltage condition, which in turn is controlled by the
VT FUSE FAIL OP
operand with a 10 ms coordination timer. If a trip from distance in not required, then it can be disabled with the
LINE PICKUP DISTANCE TRIP
setting. Configure the
LINE
PICKUP RCL TRIP
operand to perform a trip action if the intent is apply zone 1 extension.
The zone 1 extension philosophy used here normally operates from an under-reaching zone, and uses an overreaching distance zone when reclosing the line with the other line end open. The
AR ACCELERATE
setting is provided to achieve zone 1 extension functionality if external autoreclosure is employed. Another zone 1 extension approach is to permanently apply an overreaching zone, and reduce the reach when reclosing. This philosophy can be programmed via the autoreclose scheme.
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
LINE PICKUP UV PKP
SETTING
Terminal Open
Off = 0
SETTING
Function
Enabled = 1
Disabled = 0
SETTING
Block
Off = 0
AND
SETTING
Signal Source
VAG
VBG
VCG
IA
IB
IC
VAB
VBC
VCA
SETTING
Autoreclose Coordination
Bypass
Enabled = 1
Disabled = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
GND DIST Z2 PKP
PH DIST Z2 PKP
OR
SETTING
Undervoltage Pickup
RUN
VAG or VAB < setting
VBG or VBC < setting
VCG or VCA < setting
RUN
IA < 0.05 pu
IB < 0.05 pu
IC < 0.05 pu
SETTING
Phase IOC Line Pickup
RUN
IA > setting
IB > setting
IC > setting
OR
SETTING
Overvoltage Pickup Delay
T
PKP
T
RST
= 0
AND
AND
OR
SETTINGS
Line End Open Pickup Delay
Line End Open Reset Delay
T
PKP
T
RST
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
10 ms
0
AND
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
LINE PICKUP LEO PKP
(LEO = line end open)
SETTINGS
Autoreclose Coordination
Pickup Delay
Autoreclose Coordination
Reset Delay
T
PKP
T
RST
AND
AND
AND
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
LINE PICKUP OP
LINE PICKUP PKP
LINE PICKUP DPO
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
LINE PICKUP RCL TRIP
SETTING
Distance Trip
Enabled = 1
Disabled = 0
SETTING
Autoreclose Accelerate
Off = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AR CLOSE BKR1
AR CLOSE BKR2
D60, L60, and L90 only
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SRCX VT FUSE FAIL OP
Source selected in the line pickup element
TIMER
0
8 cycles
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
LINE PICKUP I<A
LINE PICKUP I<B
LINE PICKUP I<C
837000AH.CDR
Figure 5–54: LINE PICKUP SCHEME LOGIC
5-128 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5.6.5 DISTANCE a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
GROUPED ELEMENTS
Ö
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
ÖØ
DISTANCE
DISTANCE
DISTANCE
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
Range: 5 to 25 cycles in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MEMORY
DURATION: 10 cycles
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
FORCE SELF-POLAR:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
FORCE MEM-POLAR:
Off
PHASE DISTANCE Z1
PHASE DISTANCE Z2
PHASE DISTANCE Z3
GROUND DISTANCE Z1
GROUND DISTANCE Z2
GROUND DISTANCE Z3
Four common settings are available for distance protection. The
DISTANCE SOURCE
identifies the signal source for all distance functions. The mho distance functions use a dynamic characteristic: the positive-sequence voltage – either memorized or actual – is used as a polarizing signal. The memory voltage is also used by the built-in directional supervising functions applied for both the mho and quad characteristics.
The
MEMORY DURATION
setting specifies the length of time a memorized positive-sequence voltage should be used in the distance calculations. After this interval expires, the relay checks the magnitude of the actual positive-sequence voltage. If it is higher than 10% of the nominal, the actual voltage is used, if lower – the memory voltage continues to be used.
The memory is established when the positive-sequence voltage stays above 80% of its nominal value for five power system cycles. For this reason it is important to ensure that the nominal secondary voltage of the VT is entered correctly under the
SETTINGS
ÖØ
SYSTEM SETUP
Ö
AC INPUTS
ÖØ
VOLTAGE BANK
menu.
Set
MEMORY DURATION
long enough to ensure stability on close-in reverse three-phase faults. For this purpose, the maximum fault clearing time (breaker fail time) in the substation should be considered. On the other hand, the
MEMORY DURA-
TION
cannot be too long as the power system may experience power swing conditions rotating the voltage and current phasors slowly while the memory voltage is static, as frozen at the beginning of the fault. Keeping the memory in effect for too long may eventually lead to incorrect operation of the distance functions.
The distance zones can be forced to become self-polarized through the
FORCE SELF-POLAR
setting. Any user-selected condition (FlexLogic™ operand) can be configured to force self-polarization. When the selected operand is asserted (logic 1), the distance functions become self-polarized regardless of other memory voltage logic conditions. When the selected operand is de-asserted (logic 0), the distance functions follow other conditions of the memory voltage logic as shown below.
The distance zones can be forced to become memory-polarized through the
FORCE MEM-POLAR
setting. Any user-selected condition (any FlexLogic™ operand) can be configured to force memory polarization. When the selected operand is asserted (logic 1), the distance functions become memory-polarized regardless of the positive-sequence voltage magnitude at this time. When the selected operand is de-asserted (logic 0), the distance functions follow other conditions of the memory voltage logic.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-129
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS
The
FORCE SELF-POLAR
and
FORCE MEM-POLAR
settings should never be asserted simultaneously. If this happens, the logic will give higher priority to forcing self-polarization as indicated in the logic below. This is consistent with the overall philosophy of distance memory polarization.
The memory polarization cannot be applied permanently but for a limited time only; the self-polarization may be applied permanently and therefore should take higher priority.
NOTE
NOTE
The distance zones of the L90 are identical to that of the UR-series D60 Line Distance Relay. For additional information on the L90 distance functions, please refer to Chapter 8 of the D60 manual, available on the GE EnerVista
CD or free of charge on the GE Multilin web page.
5
SETTING
Force Memory Polarization
Off = 0
AND
Update memory
RUN
SETTING
Distance Source
= VA, Vrms_A
= VB, Vrms_B
= VC, Vrms_C
= V_1
= IA
= IB
= IC
| V_1 | < 1.15 pu
| Vrms – | V | | < Vrms / 8
| Vrms – | V | | < Vrms / 8
| Vrms – | V | | < Vrms / 8
| V_1 | > 0.80 pu
| IA | < 0.05 pu
| IB | < 0.05 pu
| IC | < 0.05 pu
| V_1 | < 0.10 pu
AND
AND
TIMER
5 cycles
TIMER
6 cycles
0
0
S Q
OR
R
AND
SETTING
Memory duration
0
T reset
AND
AND
OR
Use V_1 memory
Use V_1
SETTING
Force Self Polarization
Off = 0
827842A7.CDR
Figure 5–55: MEMORY VOLTAGE LOGIC
b) PHASE DISTANCE (ANSI 21P)
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
GROUPED ELEMENTS
Ö
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
ÖØ
DISTANCE
ÖØ
PHASE DISTANCE Z1(Z3)
PHASE DISTANCE Z1
PHS DIST Z1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Range: Forward, Reverse, Non-directional
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1 DIR:
Forward
Range: Mho, Quad
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1
SHAPE: Mho
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1 XFMR VOL
CONNECTION: None
Range: None, Dy1, Dy3, Dy5, Dy7, Dy9, Dy11, Yd1, Yd3,
Yd5, Yd7, Yd9, Yd11
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1 XFMR CUR
CONNECTION: None
Range: None, Dy1, Dy3, Dy5, Dy7, Dy9, Dy11, Yd1, Yd3,
Yd5, Yd7, Yd9, Yd11
PHS DIST Z1
Range: 0.02 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
Range: 30 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1
RCA: 85°
PHS DIST Z1 REV
REACH: 2.00 ohms
PHS DIST Z1 REV
REACH RCA: 85°
PHS DIST Z1
COMP LIMIT: 90°
PHS DIST Z1
DIR RCA: 85°
Range: 0.02 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
Range: 30 to 90° in steps of 1
Range: 30 to 90° in steps of 1
Range: 30 to 90° in steps of 1
5-130 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1
DIR COMP LIMIT: 90°
PHS DIST Z1 QUAD
RGT BLD: 10.00 ohms
PHS DIST Z1 QUAD
RGT BLD RCA: 85°
PHS DIST Z1 QUAD
LFT BLD: 10.00 ohms
PHS DIST Z1 QUAD
LFT BLD RCA: 85°
PHS DIST Z1
SUPV: 0.200 pu
PHS DIST Z1 VOLT
LEVEL: 0.000 pu
PHS DIST Z1
DELAY: 0.000 s
PHS DIST Z1 BLK:
Off
PHS DIST Z1
TARGET: Self-reset
PHS DIST Z1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: 30 to 90° in steps of 1
Range: 0.02 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
Range: 60 to 90° in steps of 1
Range: 0.02 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
Range: 60 to 90° in steps of 1
Range: 0.050 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Range: 0.000 to 5.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The phase mho distance function uses a dynamic 100% memory-polarized mho characteristic with additional reactance, directional, and overcurrent supervising characteristics. When set to “Non-directional”, the mho function becomes an offset mho with the reverse reach controlled independently from the forward reach, and all the directional characteristics removed.
The phase quadrilateral distance function is comprised of a reactance characteristic, right and left blinders, and 100% memory-polarized directional and current supervising characteristics. When set to “Non-directional”, the quadrilateral function applies a reactance line in the reverse direction instead of the directional comparators. Refer to Chapter 8 for additional information.
Each phase distance zone is configured individually through its own setting menu. All of the settings can be independently modified for each of the zones except:
1.
The
SIGNAL SOURCE
setting (common for the distance elements of all zones as entered under
SETTINGS
ÖØ
GROUPED
ELEMENTS
Ö
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
ÖØ
DISTANCE
).
2.
The
MEMORY DURATION
setting (common for the distance elements of all zones as entered under
SETTINGS
ÖØ
GROUPED ELEMENTS
Ö
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
ÖØ
DISTANCE
).
The common distance settings described earlier must be properly chosen for correct operation of the phase distance elements. Additional details may be found in chapter 8: Theory of operation.
Although all zones can be used as either instantaneous elements (pickup [
PKP
] and dropout [
DPO
] FlexLogic™ operands) or time-delayed elements (operate [
OP
] FlexLogic™ operands), only zone 1 is intended for the instantaneous under-reaching tripping mode.
Ensure that the
PHASE VT SECONDARY VOLTAGE
setting (see the
SETTINGS
ÖØ
SYSTEM SETUP
Ö
AC INPUTS
ÖØ
VOLTAGE BANK
menu) is set correctly to prevent improper operation of associated memory action.
WARNING
• PHS DIST Z1 DIR: All phase distance zones are reversible. The forward direction is defined by the
PHS DIST Z1 RCA
setting, whereas the reverse direction is shifted 180° from that angle. The non-directional zone spans between the forward reach impedance defined by the
PHS DIST Z1 REACH
and
PHS DIST Z1 RCA
settings, and the reverse reach impedance defined by
PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH
and
PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA
as illustrated below.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-131
5
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS
• PHS DIST Z1 SHAPE: This setting selects the shape of the phase distance function between the mho and quadrilateral characteristics. The selection is available on a per-zone basis. The two characteristics and their possible variations are shown in the following figures.
X
COMP LIMIT
DIR COMP LIMIT
R
EAC
H
RCA
DIR RCA
DIR COMP LIMIT
R
837720A1.CDR
Figure 5–56: DIRECTIONAL MHO DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC
X
COMP LIMIT
RE
C
A
H
RCA
R
REV REACH
RCA
RE
V
C
A
E
R
H
837802A1.CDR
Figure 5–57: NON-DIRECTIONAL MHO DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC
5-132 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS
X
COMP LIMIT
COMP LIMIT
DIR COMP LIMIT
EAC
RCA
DIR RCA
DIR COMP LIMIT
LFT BLD RCA
RGT BLD RCA
R
RGT BLD -LFT BLD
837721A1.CDR
Figure 5–58: DIRECTIONAL QUADRILATERAL PHASE DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC
X
COMP LIMIT
COMP LIMIT
5
RE
LFT BLD RCA RCA
-LFT BLD
REV REACH
RCA
COMP LIMIT
RE
COMP LIMIT
RGT BLD RCA
RGT BLD
R
837803A1.CDR
Figure 5–59: NON-DIRECTIONAL QUADRILATERAL PHASE DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-133
5
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS
X
RCA
COMP LIMIT
= 80 o
= 90 o
DIR RCA = 80 o
DIR COMP LIMIT = 90 o
X
RCA
COMP LIMIT
= 80 o
= 90 o
DIR RCA = 80 o
DIR COMP LIMIT = 60 o
R
EAC
H
R
EAC
H
R R
X
RCA
COMP LIMIT
= 90 o
= 90 o
DIR RCA = 45 o
DIR COMP LIMIT = 90 o
X
RCA
COMP LIMIT
= 80 o
= 60 o
DIR RCA = 80 o
DIR COMP LIMIT = 60 o
R
EAC
H
R R
837722A1.CDR
Figure 5–60: MHO DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC SAMPLE SHAPES
X
RCA
COMP LIMIT
= 80 o
= 90 o
DIR RCA = 80 o
DIR COMP LIMIT = 90 o
RGT BLD RCA = 80 o
LFT BLD RCA = 80 o
X
RCA
COMP LIMIT
= 80 o
= 90 o
DIR RCA = 80 o
DIR COMP LIMIT = 60 o
RGT BLD RCA = 80 o
LFT BLD RCA = 80 o
R
EAC
H
R
EAC
H
X
R
RCA
COMP LIMIT
= 90 o
= 90 o
DIR RCA = 45 o
DIR COMP LIMIT = 90 o
RGT BLD RCA = 90 o
LFT BLD RCA = 90 o
X
R
RCA
COMP LIMIT
= 80 o
= 80 o
DIR RCA = 45 o
DIR COMP LIMIT = 60 o
RGT BLD RCA = 80 o
LFT BLD RCA = 80 o
R
EAC
H
R R
837723A1.CDR
Figure 5–61: QUADRILATERAL DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC SAMPLE SHAPES
5 SETTINGS
5-134 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS
• PHS DIST Z1 XFMR VOL CONNECTION: The phase distance elements can be applied to look through a three-phase delta-wye or wye-delta power transformer. In addition, VTs and CTs could be located independently from one another at different windings of the transformer. If the potential source is located at the correct side of the transformer, this setting shall be set to “None”.
This setting specifies the location of the voltage source with respect to the involved power transformer in the direction of the zone. The following figure illustrates the usage of this setting. In section (a), zone 1 is looking through a transformer from the delta into the wye winding. Therefore, the Z1 setting shall be set to “Dy11”. In section (b), Zone 3 is looking through a transformer from the wye into the delta winding. Therefore, the Z3 setting shall be set to “Yd1”. The zone is restricted by the potential point (location of the VTs) as illustrated in Figure (e).
• PHS DIST Z1 XFMR CUR CONNECTION: This setting specifies the location of the current source with respect to the involved power transformer in the direction of the zone. In section (a) of the following figure, zone 1 is looking through a transformer from the delta into the wye winding. Therefore, the Z1 setting shall be set to “Dy11”. In section (b), the
CTs are located at the same side as the read point. Therefore, the Z3 setting shall be set to “None”.
See the Theory of operation chapter for more details, and the Application of settings chapter for information on calculating distance reach settings in applications involving power transformers.
(a) (b) delta wye, 330 o lag delta wye, 330 o lag
Z3
Z3 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = None
Z3 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = None
Z1
Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Dy11
Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Dy11
Z3
Z3 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Yd1
Z3 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = None
Z1
Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = None
Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Dy11
(c) delta wye, 330 o lag
(e)
L
1
L
2
Z3
Z3 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = None
Z3 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Yd1
Zone 3
Zone 1
Z
L1
Z
T
Z
L2
Z1
Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Dy11
Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = None
830717A1.CDR
Figure 5–62: APPLICATIONS OF THE
PH DIST XFMR VOL/CUR CONNECTION
SETTINGS
• PHS DIST Z1 REACH: This setting defines the zone reach for the forward and reverse applications. In the non-directional applications, this setting defines the forward reach of the zone. The reverse reach impedance in non-directional applications is set independently. The reach impedance is entered in secondary ohms. The reach impedance angle is entered as the
PHS DIST Z1 RCA
setting.
• PHS DIST Z1 RCA: This setting specifies the characteristic angle (similar to the ‘maximum torque angle’ in previous technologies) of the phase distance characteristic for the forward and reverse applications. In the non-directional applications, this setting defines the angle of the forward reach impedance. The reverse reach impedance in the non-directional applications is set independently. The setting is an angle of reach impedance as shown in the distance characteristic figures shown earlier. This setting is independent from
PHS DIST Z1 DIR RCA
, the characteristic angle of an extra directional supervising function.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-135
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS
5
• PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH: This setting defines the reverse reach of the zone set to non-directional (
PHS DIST Z1 DIR
setting). The value must be entered in secondary ohms. This setting does not apply when the zone direction is set to
“Forward” or “Reverse”.
• PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA: This setting defines the angle of the reverse reach impedance if the zone is set to non-directional (
PHS DIST Z1 DIR
setting). This setting does not apply when the zone direction is set to “Forward” or
“Reverse”.
• PHS DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT: This setting shapes the operating characteristic. In particular, it produces the lens-type characteristic of the mho function and a tent-shaped characteristic of the reactance boundary of the quadrilateral function. If the mho shape is selected, the same limit angle applies to both the mho and supervising reactance comparators. In conjunction with the mho shape selection, the setting improves loadability of the protected line. In conjunction with the quadrilateral characteristic, this setting improves security for faults close to the reach point by adjusting the reactance boundary into a tent-shape.
• PHS DIST Z1 DIR RCA: This setting selects the characteristic angle (or maximum torque angle) of the directional supervising function. If the mho shape is applied, the directional function is an extra supervising function as the dynamic mho characteristic is itself directional. In conjunction with the quadrilateral shape, this setting defines the only directional function built into the phase distance element. The directional function uses the memory voltage for polarization. This setting typically equals the distance characteristic angle
PHS DIST Z1 RCA
.
• PHS DIST Z1 DIR COMP LIMIT: Selects the comparator limit angle for the directional supervising function.
• PHS DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD: This setting defines the right blinder position of the quadrilateral characteristic along the resistive axis of the impedance plane (see the Quadrilateral distance characteristic figures). The angular position of the blinder is adjustable with the use of the
PHS DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA
setting. This setting applies only to the quadrilateral characteristic and should be set giving consideration to the maximum load current and required resistive coverage.
• PHS DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA: This setting defines the angular position of the right blinder of the quadrilateral characteristic (see the Quadrilateral distance characteristic figures).
• PHS DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD: This setting defines the left blinder position of the quadrilateral characteristic along the resistive axis of the impedance plane (see the Quadrilateral distance characteristic figures). The angular position of the blinder is adjustable with the use of the
PHS DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA
setting. This setting applies only to the quadrilateral characteristic and should be set with consideration to the maximum load current.
• PHS DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA: This setting defines the angular position of the left blinder of the quadrilateral characteristic (see the Quadrilateral distance characteristic figures).
• PHS DIST Z1 SUPV: The phase distance elements are supervised by the magnitude of the line-to-line current (fault loop current used for the distance calculations). For convenience, 3 is accommodated by the pickup (that is, before being used, the entered value of the threshold setting is multiplied by 3 ).
If the minimum fault current level is sufficient, the current supervision pickup should be set above maximum full load current preventing maloperation under VT fuse fail conditions. This requirement may be difficult to meet for remote faults at the end of zones 2 and above. If this is the case, the current supervision pickup would be set below the full load current, but this may result in maloperation during fuse fail conditions.
• PHS DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL: This setting is relevant for applications on series-compensated lines, or in general, if series capacitors are located between the relaying point and a point where the zone shall not overreach. For plain
(non-compensated) lines, set to zero. Otherwise, the setting is entered in per unit of the phase VT bank configured under the
DISTANCE SOURCE
. Effectively, this setting facilitates dynamic current-based reach reduction. In non-directional applications (
PHS DIST Z1 DIR
set to “Non-directional”), this setting applies only to the forward reach of the nondirectional zone. See chapters 8 and 9 for information on calculating this setting for series compensated lines.
• PHS DIST Z1 DELAY: This setting allows the user to delay operation of the distance elements and implement stepped distance protection. The distance element timers for zones 2 and higher apply a short dropout delay to cope with faults located close to the zone boundary when small oscillations in the voltages or currents could inadvertently reset the timer. Zone 1 does not need any drop out delay since it is sealed-in by the presence of current.
• PHS DIST Z1 BLK: This setting enables the user to select a FlexLogic™ operand to block a given distance element.
VT fuse fail detection is one of the applications for this setting.
5-136 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS
AND
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z1 PKP AB
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z1 PKP BC
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z1 PKP CA
SETTING
PH DIST Z1 DELAY
T
PKP
T
PKP
T
PKP
0
0
AND
AND
OR
OR
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PH DIST Z1 OP
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PH DIST Z1 SUPN IAB
PH DIST Z1 SUPN IBC
PH DIST Z1 SUPN ICA
OPEN POLE OP **
AND
AND
AND
** D60, L60, and L90 only. Other UR-series models apply regular current seal-in for zone 1.
Figure 5–63: PHASE DISTANCE ZONE 1 OP SCHEME
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PH DIST Z1 OP AB
PH DIST Z1 OP BC
PH DIST Z1 OP CA
837017A8.CDR
from the open pole element (D60, L60, and L90 only)
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN POLE OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z2 PKP AB
OR
TIMER
0 ms
AND
SETTING
PH DIST Z2 DELAY
T
PKP
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z2 OP AB
20 ms
OR
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z2 PKP BC
OR
TIMER
0 ms
AND
SETTING
PH DIST Z2 DELAY
T
PKP
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z2 OP BC
20 ms OR
0
NOTE
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z2 PKP CA from the trip output element
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TRIP Z2 PH TMR INIT
OR
TIMER
0 ms
20 ms
AND
OR
SETTING
PH DIST Z2 DELAY
T
PKP
0
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z2 OP CA
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z2 OP
837036A1.CDR
Figure 5–64: PHASE DISTANCE ZONE 2 OP SCHEME
For phase distance zone 2, there is a provision to start the zone timer with other distance zones or loop the pickup flag to avoid prolonging phase distance zone 2 operation when the fault evolves from one type to another or migrates from the initial zone to zone 2. Desired zones in the trip output function should be assigned to accomplish this functionality.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-137
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS
5
D60, L60, and L90 only
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
OPEN POLE BLK AB
OPEN POLE BLK BC
OPEN POLE BLK CA
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN POLE OP **
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z3 PKP AB
TIMER
0 ms
20 ms
AND
OR
SETTING
PH DIST Z3 DELAY
T
PKP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z3 OP AB
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z3 PKP BC
TIMER
0 ms
20 ms
AND
OR
SETTING
PH DIST Z3 DELAY
T
PKP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z3 OP BC
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z3 PKP CA
TIMER
0 ms
20 ms
AND
OR
SETTING
PH DIST Z3 DELAY
T
PKP
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z3 OP CA
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z3 OP
OR
** D60, L60, and L90 only.
Figure 5–65: PHASE DISTANCE ZONES 3 AND HIGHER OP SCHEME
837020AA.CDR
SETTING
PH DIST Z1 FUNCTION
Enabled = 1
Disabled = 0
SETTING
PH DIST Z1 BLK
Off = 0
SETTING
DISTANCE SOURCE
IA-IB
IB-IC
IC-IA
VAG-VBG
VBG-VCG
VCG-VAG
VAB
VBC
VCA
V_1
I_1
AND
SETTINGS
PH DIST Z1 DIR
PH DIST Z1 SHAPE
PH DIST Z1 XFMR
VOL CONNECTION
PH DIST Z1 XFMR
CUR CONNECTION
PH DIST Z1 REACH
PH DIST Z1 RCA
PH DIST Z1 REV REACH
PH DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA
PH DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT
PH DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD
PH DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA
PH DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD
PH DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA
PH DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL
RUN
A-B ELEMENT
RUN
B-C ELEMENT
RUN
C-A ELEMENT
Quadrilateral characteristic only
MEMORY
V_1 > 0.80 pu
I_1 > 0.025 pu
OR
TIMER
1 cycle
1 cycle
SETTING
PHS DIST Z1 SUPV
RUN
| IA – IB | > 3 × Pickup
RUN
| IB – IC | > 3 × Pickup
RUN
| IC – IA | > 3 × Pickup
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z1 SUPN IAB
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z1 SUPN IBC
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z1 SUPN ICA
Figure 5–66: PHASE DISTANCE SCHEME LOGIC
AND
AND
AND
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PH DIST Z1 PKP AB
PH DIST Z1 DPO AB
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PH DIST Z1 PKP BC
PH DIST Z1 DPO BC
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PH DIST Z1 PKP CA
PH DIST Z1 DPO CA
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z1 PKP
837002AL.CDR
5-138 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS
c) GROUND DISTANCE (ANSI 21G)
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
GROUPED ELEMENTS
Ö
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
ÖØ
DISTANCE
ÖØ
GROUND DISTANCE Z1(Z3)
GROUND DISTANCE Z1
GND DIST Z1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Range: Forward, Reverse, Non-directional
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1 DIR:
Forward
Range: Mho, Quad
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1
SHAPE: Mho
Range: 0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1
Z0/Z1 MAG: 2.70
Range: –90 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1
Z0/Z1 ANG: 0°
Range: 0.00 to 7.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1
ZOM/Z1 MAG: 0.00
Range: –90 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1
ZOM/Z1 ANG: 0°
Range: 0.02 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1
REACH: 2.00
Ω
Range: 30 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1
RCA: 85°
Range: 0.02 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1 REV
REACH: 2.00
Ω
Range: 30 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1 REV
REACH RCA: 85°
Range: Zero-seq, Neg-seq
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1 POL
CURRENT: Zero-seq
Range: –40.0 to 40.0° in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1 NON-
HOMOGEN ANG: 0.0°
Range: 30 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1
COMP LIMIT: 90°
Range: 30 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1
DIR RCA: 85°
Range: 30 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1
DIR COMP LIMIT: 90°
Range: 0.02 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1 QUAD
RGT BLD: 10.00
Ω
Range: 60 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1 QUAD
RGT BLD RCA: 85°
Range: 0.02 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1 QUAD
LFT BLD: 10.00
Ω
Range: 60 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1 QUAD
LFT BLD RCA: 85°
Range: 0.050 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1
SUPV: 0.200 pu
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-139
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS
5
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1 VOLT
LEVEL: 0.000 pu
GND DIST Z1
DELAY: 0.000 s
GND DIST Z1 BLK:
Off
GND DIST Z1
TARGET: Self-Reset
GND DIST Z1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: 0.000 to 5.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: Self-Rest, Latched, Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The ground mho distance function uses a dynamic 100% memory-polarized mho characteristic with additional reactance, directional, current, and phase selection supervising characteristics. The ground quadrilateral distance function is composed of a reactance characteristic, right and left blinders, and 100% memory-polarized directional, overcurrent, and phase selection supervising characteristics.
When set to non-directional, the mho function becomes an offset mho with the reverse reach controlled independently from the forward reach, and all the directional characteristics removed. When set to non-directional, the quadrilateral function applies a reactance line in the reverse direction instead of the directional comparators.
The reactance supervision for the mho function uses the zero-sequence current for polarization. The reactance line of the quadrilateral function uses either zero-sequence or negative-sequence current as a polarizing quantity. The selection is controlled by a user setting and depends on the degree of non-homogeneity of the zero-sequence and negative-sequence equivalent networks.
The directional supervision uses memory voltage as polarizing quantity and both zero- and negative-sequence currents as operating quantities.
The phase selection supervision restrains the ground elements during double-line-to-ground faults as they – by principles of distance relaying – may be inaccurate in such conditions. Ground distance zones 1 and higher apply additional zerosequence directional supervision. See chapter 8 for additional details.
Each ground distance zone is configured individually through its own setting menu. All of the settings can be independently modified for each of the zones except:
1.
The
SIGNAL SOURCE
setting (common for both phase and ground elements for all zones as entered under the
SETTINGS
ÖØ
GROUPED ELEMENTS
Ö
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
ÖØ
DISTANCE
menu).
2.
The
MEMORY DURATION
setting (common for both phase and ground elements for all zones as entered under the
SET-
TINGS
ÖØ
GROUPED ELEMENTS
Ö
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
ÖØ
DISTANCE
menu).
The common distance settings noted at the start of this section must be properly chosen for correct operation of the ground distance elements.
Although all ground distance zones can be used as either instantaneous elements (pickup [
PKP
] and dropout [
DPO
] Flex-
Logic™ signals) or time-delayed elements (operate [
OP
] FlexLogic™ signals), only zone 1 is intended for the instantaneous under-reaching tripping mode.
Ensure that the
PHASE VT SECONDARY VOLTAGE
(see the
SETTINGS
ÖØ
SYSTEM SETUP
Ö
AC INPUTS
ÖØ
VOLTAGE
BANK
menu) is set correctly to prevent improper operation of associated memory action.
WARNING
• GND DIST Z1 DIR: All ground distance zones are reversible. The forward direction is defined by the
GND DIST Z1 RCA
setting and the reverse direction is shifted by 180° from that angle. The non-directional zone spans between the forward reach impedance defined by the
GND DIST Z1 REACH
and
GND DIST Z1 RCA
settings, and the reverse reach impedance defined by the
GND DIST Z1 REV REACH
and
GND DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA
settings.
• GND DIST Z1 SHAPE: This setting selects the shape of the ground distance characteristic between the mho and quadrilateral characteristics. The selection is available on a per-zone basis.
The directional and non-directional quadrilateral ground distance characteristics are shown below. The directional and non-directional mho ground distance characteristics are the same as those shown for the phase distance element in the previous sub-section.
5-140 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS
X
"+" NON-HOMOGEN. ANG
"-" NON-HOMOGEN. ANG
COMP LIMIT COMP LIMIT
DIR COMP LIMIT
RE
CH
DIR RCA
DIR COMP LIMIT
LFT BLD RCA RCA
RGT BLD RCA
R
-LFT BLD RGT BLD
837769A1.CDR
Figure 5–67: DIRECTIONAL QUADRILATERAL GROUND DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC
X
"+" NON-HOMOGEN. ANG
"-" NON-HOMOGEN. ANG
COMP LIMIT
COMP LIMIT
EAC
LFT BLD RCA RCA
RGT BLD RCA
R
-LFT BLD RGT BLD
REV REACH
RCA
COMP LIMIT
ACH
RE
RE
COMP LIMIT
"-" NON-HOMOGEN. ANG
"+" NON-HOMOGEN. ANG
837770A1.CDR
Figure 5–68: NON-DIRECTIONAL QUADRILATERAL GROUND DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC
• GND DIST Z1 Z0/Z1 MAG: This setting specifies the ratio between the zero-sequence and positive-sequence impedance required for zero-sequence compensation of the ground distance elements. This setting is available on a perzone basis, enabling precise settings for tapped, non-homogeneous, and series compensated lines.
• GND DIST Z1 Z0/Z1 ANG: This setting specifies the angle difference between the zero-sequence and positivesequence impedance required for zero-sequence compensation of the ground distance elements. The entered value is the zero-sequence impedance angle minus the positive-sequence impedance angle. This setting is available on a perzone basis, enabling precise values for tapped, non-homologous, and series-compensated lines.
• GND DIST Z1 ZOM/Z1 MAG: The ground distance elements can be programmed to apply compensation for the zerosequence mutual coupling between parallel lines. If this compensation is required, the ground current from the parallel line (3I_0) measured in the direction of the zone being compensated must be connected to the ground input CT of the
CT bank configured under the
DISTANCE SOURCE
. This setting specifies the ratio between the magnitudes of the mutual zero-sequence impedance between the lines and the positive-sequence impedance of the protected line. It is imperative to set this setting to zero if the compensation is not to be performed.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-141
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS
5
• GND DIST Z1 ZOM/Z1 ANG: This setting specifies the angle difference between the mutual zero-sequence impedance between the lines and the positive-sequence impedance of the protected line.
• GND DIST Z1 REACH: This setting defines the reach of the zone for the forward and reverse applications. In nondirectional applications, this setting defines the forward reach of the zone. The reverse reach impedance in non-directional applications is set independently. The angle of the reach impedance is entered as the
GND DIST Z1 RCA
setting.
The reach impedance is entered in secondary ohms.
• GND DIST Z1 RCA: This setting specifies the characteristic angle (similar to the maximum torque angle in previous technologies) of the ground distance characteristic for the forward and reverse applications. In the non-directional applications this setting defines the forward reach of the zone. The reverse reach impedance in the non-directional applications is set independently. This setting is independent from the
GND DIST Z1 DIR RCA
setting (the characteristic angle of an extra directional supervising function).
NOTE
The relay internally performs zero-sequence compensation for the protected circuit based on the values entered for
GND DIST Z1 Z0/Z1 MAG
and
GND DIST Z1 Z0/Z1 ANG
, and if configured to do so, zero-sequence compensation for mutual coupling based on the values entered for
GND DIST Z1 Z0M/Z1 MAG
and
GND DIST Z1 Z0M/Z1
ANG
. The
GND DIST Z1 REACH
and
GND DIST Z1 RCA
should, therefore, be entered in terms of positive sequence quantities. Refer to chapters 8 for additional information
• GND DIST Z1 REV REACH: This setting defines the reverse reach of the zone set to non-directional (
GND DIST Z1 DIR
setting). The value must be entered in secondary ohms. This setting does not apply when the zone direction is set to
“Forward” or “Reverse”.
• GND DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA: This setting defines the angle of the reverse reach impedance if the zone is set to non-directional (
GND DIST Z1 DIR
setting). This setting does not apply when the zone direction is set to “Forward” or
“Reverse”.
• GND DIST Z1 POL CURRENT: This setting applies only if the
GND DIST Z1 SHAPE
is set to “Quad” and controls the polarizing current used by the reactance comparator of the quadrilateral characteristic. Either the zero-sequence or negative-sequence current could be used. In general, a variety of system conditions must be examined to select an optimum polarizing current. This setting becomes less relevant when the resistive coverage and zone reach are set conservatively. Also, this setting is more relevant in lower voltage applications such as on distribution lines or cables, as compared with high-voltage transmission lines. This setting applies to both the zone 1 and reverse reactance lines if the zone is set to non-directional. Refer to chapters 8 and 9 for additional information.
• GND DIST Z1 NON-HOMOGEN ANG: This setting applies only if the
GND DIST Z1 SHAPE
is set to “Quad” and provides a method to correct the angle of the polarizing current of the reactance comparator for non-homogeneity of the zerosequence or negative-sequence networks. In general, a variety of system conditions must be examined to select this setting. In many applications this angle is used to reduce the reach at high resistances in order to avoid overreaching under far-out reach settings and/or when the sequence networks are greatly non-homogeneous. This setting applies to both the forward and reverse reactance lines if the zone is set to non-directional. Refer to chapters 8 and 9 for additional information.
• GND DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT: This setting shapes the operating characteristic. In particular, it enables a lens-shaped characteristic of the mho function and a tent-shaped characteristic of the quadrilateral function reactance boundary. If the mho shape is selected, the same limit angle applies to mho and supervising reactance comparators. In conjunction with the mho shape selection, this setting improves loadability of the protected line. In conjunction with the quadrilateral characteristic, this setting improves security for faults close to the reach point by adjusting the reactance boundary into a tent-shape.
• GND DIST Z1 DIR RCA: Selects the characteristic angle (or ‘maximum torque angle’) of the directional supervising function. If the mho shape is applied, the directional function is an extra supervising function, as the dynamic mho characteristic itself is a directional one. In conjunction with the quadrilateral shape selection, this setting defines the only directional function built into the ground distance element. The directional function uses memory voltage for polarization.
• GND DIST Z1 DIR COMP LIMIT: This setting selects the comparator limit angle for the directional supervising function.
• GND DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD: This setting defines the right blinder position of the quadrilateral characteristic along the resistive axis of the impedance plane (see the Quadrilateral distance characteristic figure). The angular position of the blinder is adjustable with the use of the
GND DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA
setting. This setting applies only to the quadrilateral characteristic and should be set with consideration to the maximum load current and required resistive coverage.
5-142 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS
• GND DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA: This setting defines the angular position of the right blinder of the quadrilateral characteristic (see the Quadrilateral distance characteristic figure).
• GND DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD: This setting defines the left blinder position of the quadrilateral characteristic along the resistive axis of the impedance plane (see the Quadrilateral distance characteristic figure). The angular position of the blinder is adjustable with the use of the
GND DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA
setting. This setting applies only to the quadrilateral characteristic and should be set with consideration to the maximum load current.
• GND DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA: This setting defines the angular position of the left blinder of the quadrilateral characteristic (see the Quadrilateral distance characteristic figure).
• GND DIST Z1 SUPV: The ground distance elements are supervised by the magnitude of the neutral (3I_0) current.
The current supervision pickup should be set less than the minimum 3I_0 current for the end of the zone fault, taking into account the desired fault resistance coverage to prevent maloperation due to VT fuse failure. Settings less than
0.2 pu are not recommended and should be applied with caution. To enhance ground distance security against spurious neutral current during switch-off transients, three-phase faults, and phase-to-phase faults, a positive-sequence current restraint of 5% is applied to the neutral current supervision magnitude.
• GND DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL: This setting is relevant for applications on series-compensated lines, or in general, if series capacitors are located between the relaying point and a point for which the zone shall not overreach. For plain
(non-compensated) lines, this setting shall be set to zero. Otherwise, the setting is entered in per unit of the VT bank configured under the
DISTANCE SOURCE
. Effectively, this setting facilitates dynamic current-based reach reduction. In non-directional applications (
GND DIST Z1 DIR
set to “Non-directional”), this setting applies only to the forward reach of the non-directional zone. See chapters 8 and 9 for additional details and information on calculating this setting value for applications on series compensated lines.
• GND DIST Z1 DELAY: This setting enables the user to delay operation of the distance elements and implement a stepped distance backup protection. The distance element timer applies a short drop out delay to cope with faults located close to the boundary of the zone when small oscillations in the voltages or currents could inadvertently reset the timer.
• GND DIST Z1 BLK: This setting enables the user to select a FlexLogic™ operand to block the given distance element.
VT fuse fail detection is one of the applications for this setting.
5
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z1 PKP A
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z1 PKP B
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z1 PKP C
SETTING
GND DIST Z1 DELAY
T
PKP
T
PKP
T
PKP
0
0
AND
AND
OR
OR OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
GND DIST Z1 OP A
GND DIST Z1 OP B
GND DIST Z1 OP C
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z1 OP
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
GND DIST Z1 SUPN IN
OPEN POLE OP **
AND
AND
OR
** D60, L60, and L90 only. Other UR-series models apply regular current seal-in for zone 1.
Figure 5–69: GROUND DISTANCE ZONE 1 OP SCHEME
837018A7.CDR
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-143
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS
5
from the open pole detector element D60, L60, and L90 only)
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN POLE OP **
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z2 PKP A
TIMER
0 ms
OR
20 ms
AND
OR
SETTING
GND DIST Z2 DELAY
T
PKP
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z2 OP A
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z2 PKP B
TIMER
0 ms
AND
SETTING
GND DIST Z2 DELAY
T
PKP
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z2 OP B
OR
20 ms
OR
0
NOTE
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z2 PKP C from the trip output element
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TRIP Z2 GR TMR INIT
OR
TIMER
0 ms
20 ms
AND
OR
SETTING
GND DIST Z2 DELAY
T
PKP
0
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z2 OP C
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z2 OP
837037A1.CDR
Figure 5–70: GROUND DISTANCE ZONE 2 OP SCHEME
For ground distance zone 2, there is a provision to start the zone timer with the other distance zones or loop pickup flags to avoid prolonging ground distance zone 2 operation if the fault evolves from one type to another or migrates from zone 3 or 4 to zone 2. The desired zones should be assigned in the trip output element to accomplish this functionality.
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN POLE OP **
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z3 PKP A
TIMER
0 ms
20 ms
AND
OR
SETTING
GND DIST Z3 DELAY
T
PKP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z3 OP A
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z3 PKP B
TIMER
0 ms
20 ms
AND
OR
SETTING
GND DIST Z3 DELAY
T
PKP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z3 OP B
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z3 PKP C
TIMER
0 ms
20 ms
AND
OR
SETTING
GND DIST Z3 DELAY
T
PKP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z3 OP C
0
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z3 OP
** D60, L60, and L90 only.
Figure 5–71: GROUND DISTANCE ZONES 3 AND HIGHER OP SCHEME
837019AA.CDR
5-144 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
D60, L60, and L90 only
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS
SETTING
GND DIST Z1 FUNCTION
Enabled = 1
Disabled = 0
SETTING
GND DIST Z1 BLK
Off = 0
SETTING
DISTANCE SOURCE
Wye VT
Delta VT
IA-IB
IB-IC
IC-IA
VAG-VBG
VBG-VCG
VCG-VAG
VAB
VBC
VCA
I_2
I_0
V_1
I_1
IN
AND
SETTINGS
GND DIST Z1 DIR
GND DIST Z1 SHAPE
GND DIST Z1 Z0/Z1 MAG
GND DIST Z1 Z0/Z1 ANG
GND DIST Z1 ZOM/Z1 MAG
GND DIST Z1 ZOM/Z1 ANG
GND DIST Z1 REACH
GND DIST Z1 RCA
GND DIST Z1 REV REACH
GND DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA
GND DIST Z1 POL CURRENT
GND DIST Z1 NON-HOMGEN ANG
GND DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT
GND DIST Z1 DIR RCA
Z1
GND DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL
GND DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD
GND DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA
GND DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD
GND DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA
RUN
A ELEMENT
RUN
B ELEMENT
RUN
C ELEMENT
Quadrilateral characteristic only
AND
AND
MEMORY
V_1 > 0.80 pu
I_1 > 0.025 pu
OR
TIMER
1 cycle
1 cycle
SETTING
GND DIST Z1 SUPV
RUN
| IN – 0.05 × I_1 | > Pickup
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z1 SUPN IN
Figure 5–72: GROUND DISTANCE ZONE 1 SCHEME LOGIC
AND
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
GND DIST Z1 PKP AB
GND DIST Z1 DPO A
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
GND Z1 B
GND DIST Z1 DPO B
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
GND Z1 C
GND DIST Z1 DPO C
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
837007AF.CDR
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-145
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS
D60, L60, and L90 only
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
5 SETTINGS
5
SETTING
GND DIST Z2 FUNCTION
Enabled = 1
Disabled = 0
SETTING
GND DIST Z2 BLK
Off = 0
SETTING
DISTANCE SOURCE
Wye VT
Delta VT
IA-IB
IB-IC
IC-IA
VAG-VBG
VBG-VCG
VCG-VAG
VAB
VBC
VCA
I_2
I_0
V_1
I_1
IN
AND
MEMORY
SETTINGS
GND DIST Z2 DIR
GND DIST Z2 SHAPE
GND DIST Z2 Z0/Z2 MAG
GND DIST Z2 Z0/Z2 ANG
GND DIST Z2 ZOM/Z1 MAG
GND DIST Z2 ZOM/Z1 ANG
GND DIST Z2 REACH
GND DIST Z2 RCA
GND DIST Z2 REV REACH
GND DIST Z2 REV REACH RCA
GND DIST Z2 POL CURRENT
GND DIST Z2 NON-HOMGEN ANG
GND DIST Z2 COMP LIMIT
GND DIST Z2 DIR RCA
GND DIST Z2 VOLT LEVEL
GND DIST Z2 QUAD RGT BLD
GND DIST Z2 QUAD RGT BLD RCA
GND DIST Z2 QUAD LFT BLD
GND DIST Z2 QUAD LFT BLD RCA
RUN
A ELEMENT
RUN
B ELEMENT
RUN
C ELEMENT
Quadrilateral characteristic only
AND
AND
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
GND DIST Z2 PKP AB
GND DIST Z2 DPO A
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
GND Z2 B
GND DIST Z2 DPO B
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
GND Z2 C
GND DIST Z2 DPO C
V_1 > 0.80 pu
I_1 > 0.025 pu
OR
TIMER
1 cycle
1 cycle
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING
GND DIST Z2 SUPV
RUN
| IN – 0.05 × I_1 | > Pickup
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z2 SUPN IN
GND DIST Z2 DIR SUPN
OPEN POLE OP **
** D60, L60, and L90 only
OR
Figure 5–73: GROUND DISTANCE ZONES 2 AND HIGHER SCHEME LOGIC
837011AH.CDR
GROUND DIRECTIONAL SUPERVISION:
A dual (zero-sequence and negative-sequence) memory-polarized directional supervision applied to the ground distance protection elements has been shown to give good directional integrity. However, a reverse double-line-to-ground fault can lead to a maloperation of the ground element in a sound phase if the zone reach setting is increased to cover high resistance faults.
Ground distance zones 2 and higher use an additional ground directional supervision to enhance directional integrity. The element’s directional characteristic angle is used as a maximum torque angle together with a 90° limit angle.
The supervision is biased toward operation in order to avoid compromising the sensitivity of ground distance elements at low signal levels. Otherwise, the reverse fault condition that generates concern will have high polarizing levels so that a correct reverse fault decision can be reliably made.
5-146 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS
V_0 > 5 volts
SETTING
Distance Source
= V_0
= I_0
RUN
Zero-sequence directional characteristic
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN POLE OP
TIMER
t pickup
AND t reset
Co-ordinating time: pickup = 1.0 cycle, reset = 1.0 cycle
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z2 DIR SUPN
Figure 5–74: GROUND DIRECTIONAL SUPERVISION SCHEME LOGIC
837009A7.CDR
5.6.6 POWER SWING DETECT
PATH: SETTINGS
ÖØ
GROUPED ELEMENTS
Ö
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
ÖØ
POWER SWING DETECT
POWER SWING
DETECT
POWER SWING
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
POWER SWING
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: Mho Shape, Quad Shape
MESSAGE
POWER SWING
SHAPE: Mho Shape
Range: Two Step, Three Step
MESSAGE
POWER SWING
MODE: Two Step
Range: 0.050 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
POWER SWING
SUPV: 0.600 pu
Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
POWER SWING FWD
REACH: 50.00
Ω
Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
POWER SWING QUAD FWD
REACH MID: 60.00
Ω
Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
POWER SWING QUAD FWD
REACH OUT: 70.00
Ω
Range: 40 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
POWER SWING FWD
RCA: 75°
Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
POWER SWING REV
REACH: 50.00
Ω
Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
POWER SWING QUAD REV
REACH MID: 60.00
Ω
Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
POWER SWING QUAD REV
REACH OUT: 70.00
Ω
Range: 40 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
POWER SWING REV
RCA: 75°
Range: 40 to 140° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
POWER SWING OUTER
LIMIT ANGLE: 120°
Range: 40 to 140° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
POWER SWING MIDDLE
LIMIT ANGLE: 90°
Range: 40 to 140° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
POWER SWING INNER
LIMIT ANGLE: 60°
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-147
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS
5
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
POWER SWING OUTER
RGT BLD: 100.00
Ω
POWER SWING OUTER
LFT BLD: 100.00
Ω
POWER SWING MIDDLE
RGT BLD: 100.00
Ω
POWER SWING MIDDLE
LFT BLD: 100.00
Ω
POWER SWING INNER
RGT BLD: 100.00
Ω
POWER SWING INNER
LFT BLD: 100.00
Ω
POWER SWING PICKUP
DELAY 1: 0.030 s
POWER SWING RESET
DELAY 1: 0.050 s
POWER SWING PICKUP
DELAY 2: 0.017 s
POWER SWING PICKUP
DELAY 3: 0.009 s
POWER SWING PICKUP
DELAY 4: 0.017 s
POWER SWING SEAL-IN
DELAY: 0.400 s
POWER SWING TRIP
MODE: Delayed
POWER SWING BLK:
Off
POWER SWING
TARGET: Self-Reset
POWER SWING
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Range: Early, Delayed
Range: Flexlogic™ operand
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The power swing detect element provides both power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping functions. The element measures the positive-sequence apparent impedance and traces its locus with respect to either two or three user-selectable operating characteristic boundaries. Upon detecting appropriate timing relations, the blocking and tripping indications are given through FlexLogic™ operands. The element incorporates an adaptive disturbance detector. This function does not trigger on power swings, but is capable of detecting faster disturbances – faults in particular – that may occur during power swings. Operation of this dedicated disturbance detector is signaled via the
POWER SWING 50DD
operand.
The power swing detect element asserts two outputs intended for blocking selected protection elements on power swings:
POWER SWING BLOCK
is a traditional signal that is safely asserted for the entire duration of the power swing, and
POWER
SWING UN/BLOCK
is established in the same way, but resets when an extra disturbance is detected during the power swing.
The
POWER SWING UN/BLOCK
operand may be used for blocking selected protection elements if the intent is to respond to faults during power swing conditions.
Different protection elements respond differently to power swings. If tripping is required for faults during power swing conditions, some elements may be blocked permanently (using the
POWER SWING BLOCK
operand), and others may be blocked and dynamically unblocked upon fault detection (using the
POWER SWING UN/BLOCK
operand).
5-148 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS
The operating characteristic and logic figures should be viewed along with the following discussion to develop an understanding of the operation of the element.
The power swing detect element operates in three-step or two-step mode:
• Three-step operation: The power swing blocking sequence essentially times the passage of the locus of the positivesequence impedance between the outer and the middle characteristic boundaries. If the locus enters the outer characteristic (indicated by the
POWER SWING OUTER
FlexLogic™ operand) but stays outside the middle characteristic (indicated by the
POWER SWING MIDDLE
FlexLogic™ operand) for an interval longer than
POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 1
, the power swing blocking signal (
POWER SWING BLOCK
FlexLogic™ operand) is established and sealed-in. The blocking signal resets when the locus leaves the outer characteristic, but not sooner than the
POWER SWING RESET DELAY 1
time.
• Two-step operation: If the two-step mode is selected, the sequence is identical, but it is the outer and inner characteristics that are used to time the power swing locus.
The out-of-step tripping feature operates as follows for three-step and two-step power swing detection modes:
• Three-step operation: The out-of-step trip sequence identifies unstable power swings by determining if the impedance locus spends a finite time between the outer and middle characteristics and then a finite time between the middle and inner characteristics. The first step is similar to the power swing blocking sequence. After timer
POWER SWING
PICKUP DELAY 1
times out, latch 1 is set as long as the impedance stays within the outer characteristic.
If afterwards, at any time (given the impedance stays within the outer characteristic), the locus enters the middle characteristic but stays outside the inner characteristic for a period of time defined as
POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2
, latch
2 is set as long as the impedance stays inside the outer characteristic. If afterwards, at any time (given the impedance stays within the outer characteristic), the locus enters the inner characteristic and stays there for a period of time defined as
POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 3
, latch 2 is set as long as the impedance stays inside the outer characteristic; the element is now ready to trip.
If the "Early" trip mode is selected, the
POWER SWING TRIP
operand is set immediately and sealed-in for the interval set by the
POWER SWING SEAL-IN DELAY
. If the "Delayed" trip mode is selected, the element waits until the impedance locus leaves the inner characteristic, then times out the
POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2
and sets Latch 4; the element is now ready to trip. The trip operand is set later, when the impedance locus leaves the outer characteristic.
• Two-step operation: The two-step mode of operation is similar to the three-step mode with two exceptions. First, the initial stage monitors the time spent by the impedance locus between the outer and inner characteristics. Second, the stage involving the
POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2
timer is bypassed. It is up to the user to integrate the blocking
(
POWER SWING BLOCK
) and tripping (
POWER SWING TRIP
) FlexLogic™ operands with other protection functions and output contacts in order to make this element fully operational.
The element can be set to use either lens (mho) or rectangular (quadrilateral) characteristics as illustrated below. When set to “Mho”, the element applies the right and left blinders as well. If the blinders are not required, their settings should be set high enough to effectively disable the blinders.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-149
5
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS
X
OUTER
MIDDLE
INNER
FWD REACH
FWD RCA
REV RCA
R
INNER LIMIT ANGLE
MIDDLE LIMIT ANGLE
REV REACH
OUTER LIMIT ANGLE
827843A2.CDR
Figure 5–75: POWER SWING DETECT MHO OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
5 SETTINGS
842734A1.CDR
Figure 5–76: EFFECTS OF BLINDERS ON THE MHO CHARACTERISTICS
5-150 L90 Line Current Differential System
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS
X
INNER LFT BLD
MIDDLE LFT BLD
OUTER LFT BLD
INNER RGT BLD
MIDDLE RGT BLD
OUTER RGT BLD
FWD RCA
FWD REACH
QUAD FWD REACH MID QUAD FWD REACH OUT
R
REV REACH
QUAD REV REACH MID
QUAD REV REACH OUT
842735A1.CDR
Figure 5–77: POWER SWING DETECT QUADRILATERAL OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
The FlexLogic™ output operands for the power swing detect element are described below:
• The
POWER SWING OUTER
,
POWER SWING MIDDLE
,
POWER SWING INNER
,
POWER SWING TMR2 PKP
,
POWER SWING
TMR3 PKP
, and
POWER SWING TMR4 PKP
FlexLogic™ operands are auxiliary operands that could be used to facilitate testing and special applications.
• The
POWER SWING BLOCK
FlexLogic™ operand shall be used to block selected protection elements such as distance functions.
• The
POWER SWING UN/BLOCK
FlexLogic™ operand shall be used to block those protection elements that are intended to be blocked under power swings, but subsequently unblocked should a fault occur after the power swing blocking condition has been established.
• The
POWER SWING 50DD
FlexLogic™ operand indicates that an adaptive disturbance detector integrated with the element has picked up. This operand will trigger on faults occurring during power swing conditions. This includes both three-phase and single-pole-open conditions.
• The
POWER SWING INCOMING
FlexLogic™ operand indicates an unstable power swing with an incoming locus (the locus enters the inner characteristic).
• The
POWER SWING OUTGOING
FlexLogic™ operand indicates an unstable power swing with an outgoing locus (the locus leaving the outer characteristic). This operand can be used to count unstable swings and take certain action only after pre-defined number of unstable power swings.
• The
POWER SWING TRIP
FlexLogic™ operand is a trip command.
The settings for the power swing detect element are described below:
• POWER SWING FUNCTION: This setting enables and disables the entire power swing detection element. The setting applies to both power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping functions.
• POWER SWING SOURCE: The source setting identifies the signal source for both blocking and tripping functions.
• POWER SWING SHAPE: This setting selects the shapes (either “Mho” or “Quad”) of the outer, middle and, inner characteristics of the power swing detect element. The operating principle is not affected. The “Mho” characteristics use the left and right blinders.
5
GE Multilin
L90 Line Current Differential System 5-151
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS
5
• POWER SWING MODE: This setting selects between the two-step and three-step operating modes and applies to both power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping functions. The three-step mode applies if there is enough space between the maximum load impedances and distance characteristics of the relay that all three (outer, middle, and inner) characteristics can be placed between the load and the distance characteristics. Whether the spans between the outer and middle as well as the middle and inner characteristics are sufficient should be determined by analysis of the fastest power swings expected in correlation with settings of the power swing timers.
The two-step mode uses only the outer and inner characteristics for both blocking and tripping functions. This leaves more space in heavily loaded systems to place two power swing characteristics between the distance characteristics and the maximum load, but allows for only one determination of the impedance trajectory.
• POWER SWING SUPV: A common overcurrent pickup level supervises all three power swing characteristics. The supervision responds to the positive sequence current.
• POWER SWING FWD REACH: This setting specifies the forward reach of all three mho characteristics and the inner quadrilateral characteristic. For a simple system consisting of a line and two equivalent sources, this reach should be higher than the sum of the line and remote source positive-sequence impedances. Detailed transient stability studies may be needed for complex systems in order to determine this setting. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the
POWER SWING FWD RCA
setting.
• POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH MID: This setting specifies the forward reach of the middle quadrilateral characteristic. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the
POWER SWING FWD RCA
setting. The setting is not used if the shape setting is “Mho”.
• POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH OUT: This setting specifies the forward reach of the outer quadrilateral characteristic. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the
POWER SWING FWD RCA
setting. The setting is not used if the shape setting is “Mho”.
• POWER SWING FWD RCA: This setting specifies the angle of the forward reach impedance for the mho characteristics, angles of all the blinders, and both forward and reverse reach impedances of the quadrilateral characteristics.
• POWER SWING REV REACH: This setting specifies the reverse reach of all three mho characteristics and the inner quadrilateral characteristic. For a simple system of a line and two equivalent sources, this reach should be higher than the positive-sequence impedance of the local source. Detailed transient stability studies may be needed for complex systems to determine this setting. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the
POWER SWING REV RCA
setting for “Mho”, and the
POWER SWING FWD RCA
setting for “Quad”.
• POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH MID: This setting specifies the reverse reach of the middle quadrilateral characteristic. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the
POWER SWING FWD RCA
setting. The setting is not used if the shape setting is “Mho”.
• POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH OUT: This setting specifies the reverse reach of the outer quadrilateral characteristic. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the
POWER SWING FWD RCA
setting. The setting is not used if the shape setting is “Mho”.
• POWER SWING REV RCA: This setting specifies the angle of the reverse reach impedance for the mho characteristics. This setting applies to mho shapes only.
• POWER SWING OUTER LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines the outer power swing characteristic. The convention depicted in the Power swing detect characteristic diagram should be observed: values greater than 90° result in an apple-shaped characteristic; values less than 90° result in a lens shaped characteristic. This angle must be selected in consideration of the maximum expected load. If the maximum load angle is known, the outer limit angle should be coordinated with a 20° security margin. Detailed studies may be needed for complex systems to determine this setting.
This setting applies to mho shapes only.
• POWER SWING MIDDLE LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines the middle power swing detect characteristic. It is relevant only for the 3-step mode. A typical value would be close to the average of the outer and inner limit angles. This setting applies to mho shapes only.
• POWER SWING INNER LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines the inner power swing detect characteristic. The inner characteristic is used by the out-of-ste